WO2020145305A1 - Ue and smf - Google Patents

Ue and smf Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020145305A1
WO2020145305A1 PCT/JP2020/000312 JP2020000312W WO2020145305A1 WO 2020145305 A1 WO2020145305 A1 WO 2020145305A1 JP 2020000312 W JP2020000312 W JP 2020000312W WO 2020145305 A1 WO2020145305 A1 WO 2020145305A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
identification information
pdu session
session establishment
network
message
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2020/000312
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
強 高倉
Original Assignee
シャープ株式会社
鴻穎創新有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by シャープ株式会社, 鴻穎創新有限公司 filed Critical シャープ株式会社
Publication of WO2020145305A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020145305A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W12/00Security arrangements; Authentication; Protecting privacy or anonymity
    • H04W12/06Authentication
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/10Connection setup
    • H04W76/18Management of setup rejection or failure

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a UE (User Equipment; terminal device) and an SMF (Session Management Function).
  • UE User Equipment
  • SMF Session Management Function
  • 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project), which conducts standardization activities for mobile communication systems in recent years, is examining SAE (System Architecture Evolution), which is the system architecture of LTE (Long Term Evolution).
  • SAE System Architecture Evolution
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • 3GPP specifies EPS (Evolved Packet System) as a communication system that realizes all-IP (Internet Protocol).
  • EPC Evolved Packet Core
  • 5G Next-generation mobile communication system
  • 5G System 5th Generation mobile communication system
  • Non-Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 2 5th Generation mobile communication system
  • 5GS extracts the technical issues for connecting a wide variety of terminals to the cellular network and specifies solutions.
  • optimization and diversification of communication procedures for supporting continuous mobile communication services according to terminals supporting a wide variety of access networks are also listed as requirements.
  • NAS Non-Access-Stratum
  • Non-Patent Documents 1 and 2 and Non-Patent Documents 3).
  • the operation process related to session management of the terminal that the network has received the reason to notify the terminal to apply the control signal management based on the reason other than the congestion management is not clear.
  • the control signal management process is not clarified when the PDU session establishment request for invoking the DN authentication procedure is rejected for reasons other than the authentication procedure.
  • One aspect of the present invention is made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a mechanism and a communication control method for realizing a control signal management process based on a reason other than congestion management. is there.
  • the UE (User Equipment; terminal device) of the present invention includes a transmission unit, the first PDU (Protocol Data Unit or Packet Data Unit) session establishment request message, the first user identifier and the first DNN (Data Network) Name) is a PDU session establishment request message, the transmission unit, for the first PDU session establishment request message, EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol)-failure including a rejection reason value indicating userauthentication or authorization failed
  • EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol
  • the terminal power is turned on/off, or the USIM (Universal Subscriber Identity Module) is removed/inserted until the user ID is changed to a user ID different from the first user ID.
  • the transmission of the second PDU session establishment request message using the user identifier for the first DNN is regulated.
  • the UE of the present invention comprises a transmission unit, the first PDU session establishment request is a PDU session establishment request using the first user identifier and the first DNN and the first S-NSSAI, the transmission unit In response to the first PDU session establishment request, when a causevalue indicating the reason value of rejection indicating user authentication or authorization failed is received, until changing to a user identifier different from the first user identifier, or the terminal Until the power is turned on/off or the USIM (Universal Subscriber Identity Module) is removed/inserted, the second DPDU session establishment request using the user identifier is not made to the first DNN and the first S-NSSAI. Characterize.
  • the first PDU session establishment request is a PDU session establishment request using the first user identifier and the first DNN and the first S-NSSAI
  • the transmission unit In response to the first PDU session establishment request, when a causevalue indicating the reason value of rejection indicating user authentication or authorization failed is received, until changing to a user identifier different from the first
  • the terminal device constituting the 5GS, and the device in the core network, each network slice and / or DNN or APN by the terminal device initiative or network initiative, especially except congestion management related to the DN authentication procedure.
  • the control management process of can be implemented.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of an access network in a mobile communication system.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a core network in a mobile communication system. It is a figure which shows the apparatus structure of UE. It is a figure which shows the apparatus structure of eNB/NR node/WAG. It is a figure which shows the apparatus structure of AMF. It is a figure which shows the apparatus structure of SMF/UPF. It is a figure which shows an initial procedure. It is a figure which shows a registration procedure. It is a figure which shows the PDU session establishment procedure. It is a figure which shows the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure. It is a figure which shows the RQoS activation procedure.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram showing details of an access network in the mobile communication system of FIG.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram mainly showing details of a core network in the mobile communication system of FIG.
  • the mobile communication system 1 (also referred to as 5GS) in the present embodiment is a terminal device (also referred to as a user device or a mobile terminal device) UE (User Equipment)_A10, an access network (AN; Access Network)_B. , A core network (CN; Core Network)_B190, and a data network (DN; Data Network)_A5, DN_B105.
  • UE User Equipment
  • AN Access Network
  • CN Core Network
  • DN Data Network
  • UE_A10 can connect to the network service via 3GPP access (also called 3GPP access or 3GPP access network) and/or non-3GPP access (also called non-3GPP access or non-3GPP access network). Any device. Also, the UE_A10 may include a UICC (Universal Integrated Circuit Card) and an eUICC (Embedded UICC). Further, UE_A10 may be a wirelessly connectable terminal device, ME (Mobile Equipment), MS (Mobile Station), CIoT (Cellular Internet of Things) terminal (CIoT UE), or the like.
  • 3GPP access also called 3GPP access or 3GPP access network
  • non-3GPP access also called non-3GPP access or non-3GPP access network
  • Any device may include a UICC (Universal Integrated Circuit Card) and an eUICC (Embedded UICC).
  • UE_A10 may be a wirelessly connectable terminal device, ME (Mobile Equipment), MS (Mobile Station), CIoT (Cellular Internet of Things)
  • UE_A10 can also connect to the access network and/or the core network.
  • UE_A10 can also connect to DN_A5 via the access network and/or the core network.
  • UE_A10 transmits/receives (communicates) user data with DN_A5 using a PDU (Protocol Data Unit or Packet Data Unit) session.
  • PDU Protocol Data Unit or Packet Data Unit
  • communication of user data is not limited to IP (Internet Protocol) communication, and may be non-IP communication.
  • IP communication is data communication using IP, and is data communication realized by transmitting and receiving IP packets to which an IP header is added.
  • the payload portion forming the IP packet may include user data transmitted/received by the UE_A 10.
  • non-IP communication is data communication that does not use IP, and is data communication that is realized by transmitting and receiving data that does not have an IP header.
  • the non-IP communication may be data communication realized by transmitting and receiving application data to which an IP packet is not added, or UE_A10 by adding another header such as a MAC header or an Ethernet (registered trademark) frame header.
  • User data to be transmitted/received may be transmitted/received.
  • a PDU session is the connectivity established between UE_A10 and DN_A5 and/or DN_B105 to provide a PDU connection service. More specifically, the PDU session may be the connectivity established between UE_A10 and the external gateway.
  • the external gateway may be UPF, PGW (Packet Data Network Gateway), or the like.
  • the PDU session may be a communication path established for transmitting/receiving user data between the UE_A10 and the core network and/or DN (DN_A5 and/or DN_B105), or a communication path for transmitting/receiving PDU. Good.
  • the PDU session may be a session established between UE_A10 and the core network and/or DN (DN_A5 and/or DN_B105), and transfer of one or more bearers or the like between each device in the mobile communication system 1. It may be a logical communication path configured by a path. More specifically, the PDU session may be a connection that UE_A10 establishes between the core network_B190 and/or an external gateway, and a connection established between UE_A10 and UPF (UPF_A235 and/or UPF_B237). But it's okay.
  • the PDU session may be connectivity and/or connection between the UE_A10 and the UPF (UPF_A235 and/or UPF_B237) via the NR node_A122. Further, the PDU session may be identified by the PDU session ID and/or the EPS bearer ID.
  • UE_A10 can execute transmission/reception of user data using a PDU session with a device such as an application server arranged in DN_A5 and/or DN_B105.
  • the PDU session can transfer user data transmitted and received between the UE_A10 and a device such as an application server arranged in the DN_A5 and/or DN_B105.
  • each device UE_A10, a device in the access network, and / or a device in the core network, and / or a device in the data network
  • identification information include APN (Access Point Name), TFT (Traffic Flow Template), session type, application identification information, DN_A5 and/or DN_B105 identification information, NSI (Network Slice Instance) identification information, and DCN. At least one of (Dedicated Core Network) identification information and access network identification information may be included, and other information may be further included. Further, when a plurality of PDU sessions are established, each piece of identification information associated with the PDU session may have the same content or different content. Furthermore, the NSI identification information is information that identifies the NSI, and may be the NSI ID or Slice Instance ID below.
  • the access network_B may be any of E-UTRAN (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network)_A80, 5G-RAN_A120, and WLAN ANc125, as shown in FIG.
  • the E-UTRAN_A80 and/or 5G-RAN_A120 may be called a 3GPP access network, and the WLAN ANc125 may be called a non-3GPP access network.
  • Each radio access network includes a device to which the UE_A 10 is actually connected (for example, a base station device or an access point) and the like.
  • E-UTRAN_A80 is an LTE access network and is configured to include one or more eNB_A45.
  • the eNB_A45 is a wireless base station to which the UE_A10 connects by E-UTRA (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access).
  • E-UTRA Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access
  • each eNB may be connected to each other.
  • 5G-RAN_A120 is a 5G access network, and is configured to include one or more NR node (New Radio Access Technology node)_A122.
  • NR node_A122 is a wireless base station to which UE_A10 connects in 5G wireless access (5G Radio Access). Also, when there are multiple NR node_A 122 in 5G-RAN_A 120, each NR node_A 122 may be connected to each other.
  • 5G-RAN_A120 may be an access network composed of E-UTRA and/or 5G RadioAccess.
  • 5G-RAN_A120 may include eNB_A45, NR node_A122, or both.
  • the eNB_A45 and the NR node_A122 may be the same device. Therefore, NR node_A122 can be replaced with eNB_A45.
  • WLAN ANc125 is a wireless LAN access network and is configured to include one or more WAG (WLAN Access Gateway)_A126.
  • WAG_A126 is a wireless base station to which UE_A10 connects by wireless LAN access. Further, WAG_A126 may be a gateway for core network_B190 and WLAN ANc125. Further, in WAG_A126, the functional unit of the wireless base station and the functional unit of the gateway may be configured as separate devices.
  • UE_A10 being connected to each radio access network means being connected to a base station device, an access point, etc. included in each radio access network, and data and signals to be transmitted and received. Also means that it goes through a base station device and an access point.
  • the control message transmitted/received between UE_A10 and core network_B190 may be the same control message regardless of the type of access network. Therefore, UE_A10 and core network _B190 to send and receive messages via NR node_A122 is the same as UE_A10 and core network _B190 eNB_A45, and / or the same as sending a message via WAG_A126. Good.
  • the access network is a wireless network connected to UE_A10 and/or the core network.
  • the access network may be a 3GPP access network or a non-3GPP access network.
  • the 3GPP access network may be E-UTRAN_A80, 5G-RAN (Radio Access Network)_A120, and the non-3GPP access network may be WLAN ANc125.
  • the UE_A10 may be connected to the access network in order to connect to the core network, or may be connected to the core network via the access network.
  • DN_A5 and DN_B105 are data networks that provide communication services to UE_A10, and may be configured as a packet data service network or may be configured for each service. Further, DN_A5 and DN_B105 may include connected communication terminals. Therefore, connecting with DN_A5 and/or DN_B105 may be connecting with a communication terminal or server device arranged in DN_A5 and/or DN_B105. Furthermore, transmitting/receiving user data to/from DN_A5 and/or DN_B105 may be transmitting/receiving user data to/from a communication terminal or server device arranged in DN_A5 and/or DN_B105. Further, DN_A5 and/or DN_B105 are outside the core network in FIG. 1, but may be inside the core network.
  • the core network_B 190 may be configured as a device in one or more core networks.
  • the device in the core network may be a device that executes some or all of the processes or functions of each device included in the core network_B 190.
  • the device in the core network may be referred to as a core network device.
  • the core network is an IP mobile communication network operated by a mobile communication operator (MNO; Mobile Network Operator) connected to the access network and/or DN_A5.
  • the core network may be a core network for a mobile communication operator that operates and manages the mobile communication system 1, or a virtual mobile communication operator or a virtual mobile communication operator such as MVNO (Mobile Virtual Network Operator) and MVNE (Mobile Virtual Network Enabler). It may be a core network for mobile communication service providers.
  • the core network_B 190 may be an EPC (Evolved Packet Core) that constitutes an EPS (Evolved Packet System) or a 5GC (5G Core Network) that constitutes a 5GS.
  • the core network_B 190 may be a core network of a system that provides 5G communication services.
  • the core network_B 190 is not limited to this, and may be a network for providing mobile communication services.
  • Core network_B190 includes AUSF (Authentication Server Function), AMF (Access and Mobility Management Function)_A240, SDSF (Structured Data Storage network function), UDSF (Unstructured Data Storage network function), NEF (Network Exposure Function), NRF (NF Repository Function), PCF (Policy Control Function), SMF (Session Management Function)_A230, SMF (Session Management Function)_B232, UDM (Unified Data Management), UPF (User Plane Function)_A235, UPF (User Plane Function) _B237, AF (Application Function), N3IWF (Non-3GPP InterWorking Function), at least one may be included. Then, these may be configured as an NF (Network Function).
  • the NF may refer to a processing function configured in the network.
  • FIG. 3 shows only AMF (AMF_A240), SMF (SMF_A230 and SMF_B232), and UPF (UPF_A235 and UPF_B237) among them, but the others (device and// Or NF) is not included.
  • UE_A10 is also referred to as UE
  • AMF_A240 is referred to as AMF
  • SMF_A230 and SMF_B232 are referred to as SMF
  • UPF_A235 and UPF_B237 are referred to as UPF
  • DN_A5 and DN_B105 are also referred to as DN.
  • an N1 interface (hereinafter also referred to as a reference point), an N2 interface, an N3 interface, an N4 interface, an N6 interface, an N9 interface, and an N11 interface are described.
  • the N1 interface is an interface between the UE and AMF
  • the N2 interface is an interface between (R)AN (access network) and AMF
  • the N3 interface is (R)AN (access network).
  • N11 interface is the interface between AMF and SMF. Using these interfaces, communication can be performed between each device.
  • FIG. 3 is a system configuration diagram when the UE simultaneously accesses two DNs using a plurality of PDU sessions. Two SMFs have been selected for two different PDU sessions. Also, in FIG. 3, there are two SMF_A230s and two UPF_A235s.
  • AMF_A240 is connected to other AMF, SMF (SMF_A230 and/or SMF_B232), access network (that is, E-UTRAN_A80 and 5G-RAN_A120 and WLANANc125), UDM, AUSF, and PCF.
  • AMF_A240 is the registration management (Registration management), connection management (Connection management), reachability management (Reachability management), mobility management (Mobility management) such as UE_A10, SM (Session Management) message transfer between UE and SMF.
  • AMF_A240 may be arranged in the core network_B190.
  • AMF_A240 may be an NF that manages one or more NSI (Network Slice Instance).
  • the AMF_A240 may be a shared CP function (CCNF; Control Plane Network Function) that is shared between multiple NSIs.
  • CCNF Control Plane Network Function
  • RM also has a non-registration state (RM-DEREGISTERED state) and a registration state (RM-REGISTERED state).
  • RM-DEREGISTERED state since the UE is not registered in the network, the UE context in AMF does not have valid location information or routing information for that UE, so AMF cannot reach the UE. is there. Further, in the RM-REGISTERED state, since the UE is registered in the network, the UE can receive a service that requires registration with the network.
  • CM-IDLE state there are a non-connection state (CM-IDLE state) and a connection state (CM-CONNECTED state).
  • CM-IDLE state the UE is in the RM-REGISTERED state but does not have a NAS signaling connection (NAS signaling connection) established with the AMF via the N1 interface.
  • NAS signaling connection NAS signaling connection
  • the UE does not have the N2 interface connection (N2 connection) and the N3 interface connection (N3 connection).
  • N2 connection N2 connection
  • N3 interface connection N3 connection
  • the CM-CONNECTED state it has a NAS signaling connection established with the AMF via the N1 interface.
  • the CM-CONNECTED state the UE may have an N2 interface connection (N2 connection) and/or an N3 interface connection (N3 connection).
  • SMF_A230 is connected to AMF_A240, UPF_A235, UDM, and PCF.
  • SMF_B232 is connected to AMF_A240, UPF_B237, UDM, and PCF.
  • SMF_A230 and SMF_B232 are session management such as PDU session (Session Management), IP address allocation (IP address allocation) for UE, UPF selection and control, UPF setting for routing traffic to an appropriate destination, downlink Function to notify the arrival of data (Downlink Data Notification), AN specific SM information identifier (for each AN) sent via AN2 to AN via AMF, SSC mode for session It may play a role of determining (Session and Service Continuity mode) and roaming function.
  • SMF_A230 and SMF_B232 are described as separate devices or NFs, they may be the same device or function.
  • UPF_A235 is also connected to DN_A5, SMF_A230, other UPFs, and access networks (that is, E-UTRAN_A80 and 5G-RAN_A120 and WLANANc125).
  • UPF_B237 is connected to DN_B105, SMF_B232, another UPF, and an access network (that is, E-UTRAN_A80, 5G-RAN_A120, and WLANANc125).
  • UPF_A235 and UPF_B237 are UL-CL (Uplink Classifier) that supports anchor for intra-RAT mobility or inter-RAT mobility, packet routing & forwarding, and routing of multiple traffic flows for one DN.
  • UL-CL Uplink Classifier
  • UPF_A235 and UPF_B237 may be relay devices that transfer user data as a gateway between DN_A5 and core network_B190 and a gateway between DN_B105 and core network_B190, respectively.
  • UPF_A235 and UPF_B237 may be gateways for IP communication and/or non-IP communication.
  • UPF_A235 and UPF_B237 may have a function of transferring IP communication, or may have a function of converting non-IP communication and IP communication.
  • a plurality of gateways may be gateways connecting the core network_B 190 and a single DN.
  • the UPF_A235 and UPF_B237 may have connectivity with another NF, or may be connected to each device via the other NF.
  • UPF_A235 and UPF_B237 are described as separate devices or NFs, but between UPF_A235 and the access network, and between UPF_B237 and the access network, UPF_A235 and UPF_B237 are different UPF, and common UPF_C239. (also called branching point or uplink classifier) may exist. If UPF_C239 is present, a PDU session between UE_A10 and DN_A5 is established via the access network, UPF_C239, UPF_A235, and a PDU session between UE_A10 and DN_B105 is established via the access network, UPF_C239, UPF_B237. Will be done.
  • the U-Plane may be a communication path for transmitting and receiving user data, and may be composed of multiple bearers.
  • the C-Plane Control Plane
  • the C-Plane may be a communication path for transmitting and receiving control messages, and may be composed of a plurality of bearers.
  • AUSF is connected to UDM and AMF_A240. AUSF functions as an authentication server.
  • SDSF provides functions for NEF to save and acquire information as structured data.
  • UDSF provides a function for all NFs to store and retrieve information as unstructured data.
  • NEF provides a means to securely provide the services and capabilities provided by the 3GPP network. Save information received from other NFs as structured data.
  • the NRF Upon receiving an NF Discovery Request from an NF instance, the NRF provides the NF with information about the discovered NF instance, information on available NF instances, and information about the services supported by that instance. To hold.
  • PCF is connected to SMF (SMF_A230, SMF_B232), AF, AMF_A240. Provide policy rules etc.
  • UDM is connected to AMF_A240, SMF (SMF_A230, SMF_B232), AUSF, and PCF.
  • UDM includes UDM (FE front) and UDR (User Data Repository).
  • UDMFE performs processing such as authentication information (credentials), location management (location management), and subscriber management (subscription management).
  • UDR saves the data necessary for UDMFE to provide and the policy profiles required by PCF.
  • ⁇ AF is connected to PCF.
  • the AF influences traffic routing and participates in policy control.
  • N3IWF establishes an IPsec tunnel with UE, relays NAS (N1) signaling between UE and AMF, processes N2 signaling transmitted from SMF and relayed by AMF, and establishes IPsec Security Association (IPsec SA). It provides functions such as relaying user plane packets between UE and UPF, and AMF selection.
  • NAS N1
  • N2 N2 signaling transmitted from SMF and relayed by AMF
  • IPsec SA IPsec Security Association
  • each device The configuration of each device will be described below. It should be noted that some or all of the functions of each device and each unit of each device described below may operate on physical hardware, or may be a logical hardware virtually configured on general-purpose hardware. It may be one that operates on wear.
  • UE_A10 includes a control unit_A400, a transmission/reception unit_A420, and a storage unit_A440.
  • the transmission/reception unit_A420 and the storage unit_A440 are connected to the control unit_A400 via a bus.
  • An external antenna 410 is connected to the transmitter/receiver_A 420.
  • the storage unit_A 440 stores the UE context 442.
  • the control unit_A400 is a functional unit for controlling the entire UE_A10, and realizes various processes of the entire UE_A10 by reading and executing various information and programs stored in the storage unit_A440.
  • the transceiver_A420 is a functional unit for the UE_A10 to connect to the base stations (E-UTRAN_A80 and 5G-RAN_A120) and/or the access point (WLANANc125) in the access network and to connect to the access network.
  • the UE_A10 can connect to the base station and/or the access point in the access network via the external antenna 410 connected to the transceiver_A420.
  • UE_A10 via the external antenna 410 connected to the transceiver unit_A420, between the base station and / or access point in the access network, to transmit and receive user data and / or control information. You can
  • the storage unit_A440 is a functional unit that stores programs and data necessary for each operation of the UE_A10, and is configured by, for example, semiconductor memory, HDD (Hard Disk Drive), SSD (Solid State Drive), and the like.
  • the storage unit_A440 stores identification information, control information, flags, parameters and the like included in control messages transmitted and received in a communication procedure described later.
  • As the UE context 442 stored in the storage unit_A440 there may be a UE context used when connecting to the access network_B80/120/125 and a UE context used when connecting to the core network_B190. ..
  • the UE context 442 may include a UE context stored for each UE, a UE context stored for each PDU session, and a UE context stored for each bearer.
  • the UE context stored for each UE may include IMSI, EMMState, GUTI, and MEIdentity.
  • the UE context stored for each PDU session may include APN in Use, Assigned Session Type, IP Address(es), and Default Bearer.
  • the UE context stored for each bearer may include EPS Bearer ID, TI, and TFT.
  • FIG. 5 shows a device configuration example of the eNB_A45, NR node_A122, and WAG_A126.
  • the eNB_A45, NR node_A122, and WAG_A126 are composed of a control unit_B500, a network connection unit_B520, a transmission/reception unit_B530, and a storage unit_B540.
  • the network connection unit_B520, the transmission/reception unit_B530, and the storage unit_B540 are connected to the control unit_B500 via a bus.
  • An external antenna 510 is connected to the transceiver_B530.
  • the control unit_B500 is a functional unit for controlling the entire eNB_A45, NR node_A122 and WAG_A126, and by reading out and executing various information and programs stored in the storage unit_B540, the eNB_A45, NR node_A122 , And various processes of the entire WAG_A126 are realized.
  • the network connection part_B520 is a function part for the eNB_A45, NR node_A122 and WAG_A126 to connect with the AMF_A240 and UPF_A235 in the core network.
  • the eNB_A45, NR node_A122 and WAG_A126 can be connected to the AMF_A240 and UPF_A235 in the core network via the network connection unit_B520.
  • the eNB_A45, NR node_A122, and WAG_A126 can transmit/receive user data and/or control information to/from the AMF_A240 and/or UPF_A235 via the network connection unit_B520.
  • ⁇ Transceiver_B530 is a functional unit for connecting eNB_A45, NR node_A122 and WAG_A126 with UE_A10.
  • the eNB_A45, NR node_A122, and WAG_A126 can transmit/receive user data and/or control information to/from the UE_A10 via the transmitting/receiving unit_B530.
  • the storage unit_B540 is a functional unit that stores programs and data necessary for each operation of the eNB_A45, NR node_A122, and WAG_A126.
  • the storage unit_B 540 includes, for example, a semiconductor memory, an HDD, an SSD, or the like.
  • the storage unit_B 540 stores identification information, control information, flags, parameters and the like included in control messages transmitted and received in a communication procedure described later.
  • the storage unit_B540 may store these pieces of information as contexts for each UE_A10.
  • FIG. 6 shows a device configuration example of the AMF_A240.
  • the AMF_A240 includes a control unit_C600, a network connection unit_C620, and a storage unit_C640.
  • the network connection unit_C620 and the storage unit_C640 are connected to the control unit_C600 via a bus.
  • the storage unit_C 640 stores the context 642.
  • the control unit_C600 is a functional unit for controlling the entire AMF_A240, and realizes various processes of the entire AMF_A240 by reading and executing various information and programs stored in the storage unit_C640.
  • Network connection unit_C620 is for AMF_A240 to connect with other AMF_240, SMF_A230, base stations (E-UTRAN_A80 and 5G-RAN_A120) and/or access point (WLANANc125), UDM, AUSF, PCF in the access network. Is a functional part of.
  • the AMF_A240 can send and receive user data and/or control information to/from the base station and/or access point in the access network, UDM, AUSF, PCF via the network connection unit_C620. ..
  • the storage unit_C640 is a functional unit that stores programs and data necessary for each operation of the AMF_A240.
  • the storage unit_C 640 includes, for example, a semiconductor memory, HDD, SSD, or the like.
  • the storage unit_C 640 stores identification information, control information, flags, parameters and the like included in control messages transmitted and received in a communication procedure described later.
  • the context 642 stored in the storage unit_C 640 may be a context stored for each UE, a context stored for each PDU session, or a context stored for each bearer.
  • Contexts stored for each UE include IMSI, MSISDN, MM State, GUTI, MEIdentity, UERadioAccessCapability, UENetworkCapability, MSNetworkCapability, Access Restriction, MMEF-TEID, SGW F-TEID, eNB Address. , MMEUES1APID, eNBUES1APID, NRnodeAddress, NRnodeID, WAGAddress, WAGID.
  • the context stored for each PDU session may include APNinUse, AssignedSessionType, IPAddress(es), PGWF-TEID, SCEFID, and Defaultbearer.
  • the contexts stored for each bearer are EPS Bearer ID, TI, TFT, SGW F-TEID, PGW F-TEID, MME F-TEID, eNB Address, NR node Address, WAG Address, eNB ID, NR node. It may include ID and WAG ID.
  • FIG. 7 shows a device configuration example of the SMF_A230 and SMF_B232.
  • the SMF_A230 includes a control unit_D700, a network connection unit_D720, and a storage unit_D740, respectively.
  • the network connection unit_D720 and the storage unit_D740 are connected to the control unit_D700 via a bus.
  • the storage unit_D 740 stores the context 742.
  • the control unit_D700 of the SMF_A230 is a functional unit for controlling the entire SMF_A230, and realizes various processes of the entire SMF_A230 by reading and executing various information and programs stored in the storage unit_D740. To do.
  • the network connection part_D720 of SMF_A230 is a function part for SMF_A230 to connect with AMF_A240, UPF_A235, UDM, and PCF.
  • the SMF_A230 can transmit/receive user data and/or control information to/from the AMF_A240, UPF_A235, UDM, and PCF via the network connection unit_D720.
  • the storage unit_D740 of the SMF_A230 is a functional unit that stores programs and data necessary for each operation of the SMF_A230.
  • the storage unit_D740 of the SMF_A230 is configured by, for example, a semiconductor memory, HDD, SSD or the like.
  • the storage unit_D740 of the SMF_A230 stores identification information, control information, flags, parameters and the like included in control messages transmitted and received in a communication procedure described later.
  • the context 742 stored in the storage unit _D740 of the SMF_A230 the context stored for each UE, the context stored for each APN, the context stored for each PDU session, and the bearer stored for each bearer. There may be context.
  • the context stored for each UE may include IMSI, MEIdentity, MSISDN, and RATtype.
  • the context stored for each APN may include APN in use.
  • the context stored for each APN may be stored for each Data Network Identifier.
  • the context stored for each PDU session may include Assigned Session Type, IP Address(es), SGW F-TEID, PGW F-TEID, and Default Bearer.
  • the context stored for each bearer may include EPS Bearer ID, TFT, SGW F-TEID, and PGW F-TEID.
  • SMF_B232 has the same configuration as SMA_A230.
  • FIG. 7 shows a device configuration example of UPF_A235 and UPF_B237.
  • the UPF_A235 includes a control unit_D700, a network connection unit_D720, and a storage unit_D740, respectively.
  • the network connection unit_D720 and the storage unit_D740 are connected to the control unit_D700 via a bus.
  • the storage unit_D 740 stores the context 742.
  • the control unit_D700 of the UPF_A235 is a functional unit for controlling the entire UPF_A235, and realizes various processes of the entire UPF_A235 by reading and executing various information and programs stored in the storage unit_D740. To do.
  • the UPF_A235 network connection unit_D720 is configured such that the UPF_A235 is a DN (that is, DN_A5 and/or DN_B105), an SMF_A230, another UPF_A235, and an access network (that is, E-UTRAN_A80, 5G-RAN_A120, and WLANANc125). It is a functional part for connecting.
  • the UPF_A235 via the network connection_D720, the DN (i.e., DN_A5 and/or DN_B105), the SMF_A230, other UPF_A235, and the access network (i.e., E-UTRAN_A80 and 5G-RAN_A120 and WLANANc125).
  • User data and/or control information can be sent to and received from.
  • the storage unit_D740 of the UPF_A235 is a functional unit that stores programs and data necessary for each operation of the UPF_A235.
  • the storage unit_D740 of the UPF_A235 is configured by, for example, a semiconductor memory, HDD, SSD, or the like.
  • the storage unit_D 740 of the UPF_A 235 stores identification information, control information, flags, parameters, etc. included in control messages transmitted/received in a communication procedure described later.
  • the context 742 stored in the storage unit _D740 of the UPF_A235 the context stored for each UE, the context stored for each APN, the context stored for each PDU session, and the bearer stored for each bearer. There may be context.
  • the context stored for each UE may include IMSI, MEIdentity, MSISDN, and RATtype.
  • the context stored for each APN may include APN in use.
  • the context stored for each APN may be stored for each Data Network Identifier.
  • the context stored for each PDU session may include Assigned Session Type, IP Address(es), SGW F-TEID, PGW F-TEID, and Default Bearer.
  • the context stored for each bearer may include EPS Bearer ID, TFT, SGW F-TEID, and PGW F-TEID.
  • UPF_B237 has the same configuration as UPF_A235.
  • IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity
  • MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A2400 and SGW_A35 may be equal to the IMSI stored by HSS_A50.
  • EMM State/MM State indicates the mobility management state of UE_A10 or MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240.
  • the EMM State/MM State may be an EMM-REGISTERED state in which UE_A10 is registered in the network (registration state) and/or an EMM-DEREGISTERD state in which UE_A10 is not registered in the network (non-registration state).
  • the EMM State/MM State may be an ECM-CONNECTED state in which the connection between the UE_A 10 and the core network is maintained and/or an ECM-IDLE state in which the connection is released.
  • the EMM State/MM State may be information that can distinguish the state in which the UE_A10 is registered in the EPC and the state in which the UE_A10 is registered in the NGC or 5GC.
  • GUTI Globally Unique Temporary Identity
  • MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240 identification information GUMMEI (Globally Unique MME Identifier)
  • M-TMSI M-Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity
  • MEIdentity is the ID of UE_A10 or ME, and may be, for example, IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity) or IMEISV (IMEI Software Version).
  • MSISDN represents the basic telephone number of UE_A10.
  • the MSISDN stored by MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240 may be the information indicated by the storage unit of HSS_A50.
  • the GUTI may include information that identifies the CPF_140.
  • MME F-TEID is information that identifies MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240.
  • the MMEF-TEID may include the IP address of MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240, may include the TEID (Tunnel Endpoint Identifier) of MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240, or both of them. Good. Further, the IP address of MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240 and the TEID of MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240 may be stored independently. Further, the MME F-TEID may be identification information for user data or identification information for control information.
  • SGW F-TEID is information that identifies SGW_A35.
  • the SGW F-TEID may include the IP address of SGW_A35, the TEID of SGW_A35, or both of them. Also, the IP address of SGW_A35 and the TEID of SGW_A35 may be stored independently. Moreover, the SGW F-TEID may be identification information for user data or identification information for control information.
  • PGW F-TEID is information that identifies PGW_A30/UPGW_A130/SMF_A230/UPF_A235.
  • the PGW F-TEID may include the IP address of PGW_A30/UPGW_A130/SMF_A230/UPF_A235, may include the TEID of PGW_A30/UPGW_A130/SMF_A230/UPF_A235, or may include both of them. Good.
  • the IP address of PGW_A30/UPGW_A130/SMF_A230/UPF_A235 and the TEID of PGW_A30/UPGW_A130/SMF_A230/UPF_A235 may be stored independently.
  • the PGW F-TEID may be identification information for user data or identification information for control information.
  • ENB F-TEID is information that identifies eNB_A45.
  • the eNB-F-TEID may include the IP address of the eNB_A45, the TEID of the eNB_A45, or both of them. Also, the IP address of eNB_A45 and the TEID of SGW_A35 may be stored independently. Further, the eNB F-TEID may be identification information for user data or identification information for control information.
  • the APN may be identification information that identifies the core network and an external network such as a DN. Furthermore, the APN can also be used as information for selecting a gateway such as PGW_A30/UPGW_A130/UPF_A235 that connects the core network A_90.
  • the APN may be a DNN (Data Network Name). Therefore, the APN may be expressed as a DNN or the DNN may be expressed as an APN.
  • the APN may be identification information that identifies such a gateway, or identification information that identifies an external network such as a DN.
  • the APN may be identification information that identifies such a gateway, or identification information that identifies an external network such as a DN.
  • UE Radio Access Capability is identification information indicating the wireless access capability of UE_A10.
  • UENetworkCapability includes the security algorithms and key derivation functions supported by UE_A10.
  • MS Network Capability is information including one or more pieces of information required for SGSN_A42 for UE_A10 having GERAN_A25 and/or UTRAN_A20 function.
  • Access Restriction is registration information of access restriction.
  • eNB Address is the IP address of eNB_A45.
  • MMEUES1APID is information that identifies UE_A10 in MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240.
  • the eNBUES1APID is information that identifies the UE_A10 in the eNB_A45.
  • APN in use is the recently used APN.
  • APN in Use may be Data Network Identifier. This APN may be composed of network identification information and default operator identification information.
  • APNinUse may be information that identifies the DN of the establishment destination of the PDU session.
  • Assigned Session Type is information indicating the type of PDU session. AssignedSessionType may be AssignedPDNType. The type of PDU session may be IP or non-IP. Further, when the PDU session type is IP, it may further include information indicating the type of PDN assigned from the network. The Assigned Session Type may be IPv4, IPv6, or IPv4v6.
  • the IP Address is the IP address assigned to the UE.
  • the IP address may be an IPv4 address, an IPv6 address, an IPv6 prefix, or an interface ID. If the Assigned Session Type indicates non-IP, the IP Address element may not be included.
  • DN ID is identification information that identifies the core network_B190 and an external network such as a DN. Further, the DN ID can also be used as information for selecting a gateway such as UPGW_A130 or PF_A235 that connects the core network_B190.
  • the DN ID may be identification information that identifies such a gateway, or identification information that identifies an external network such as a DN. If a plurality of gateways connecting the core network_B 190 and the DN are arranged, there may be a plurality of gateways selectable by the DN ID. Further, one gateway may be selected from the plurality of gateways by another method using identification information other than the DN ID.
  • the DN ID may be information equal to the APN or information different from the APN. If the DN ID and the APN are different information, each device may manage the information indicating the correspondence between the DN ID and the APN, or perform the procedure for inquiring the APN using the DN ID. You can also use the APN to carry out the procedure for inquiring the DN ID.
  • -SCEF ID is the IP address of SCEF_A46 used in the PDU session.
  • the Default Bearer is information acquired and/or generated when a PDU session is established, and is EPS bearer identification information for identifying a default bearer associated with the PDU session.
  • EPS EPS Bearer ID is the identification information of the EPS bearer. Further, the EPS Bearer ID may be identification information for identifying an SRB (Signalling Radio Bearer) and/or a CRB (Control-plane Radio bearer) or may be identification information for identifying a DRB (Data Radio Bearer).
  • TI Transaction Identifier
  • the EPS Bearer ID may be EPS bearer identification information for identifying a dedicated bearer. Therefore, the identification information for identifying the EPS bearer different from the default bearer may be used.
  • TFT indicates all packet filters associated with the EPS bearer.
  • the TFT is information for identifying a part of the user data to be transmitted/received, and the UE_A10 transmits/receives the user data identified by the TFT using the EPS bearer associated with the TFT. In other words, UE_A10 transmits/receives the user data identified by TFT using RB (Radio Bearer) associated with TFT. Further, the TFT may associate user data such as transmitted/received application data with an appropriate transfer path, or may be identification information for identifying the application data. Also, the UE_A10 may send and receive user data that cannot be identified by TFT using the default bearer. Further, the UE_A 10 may store the TFT associated with the default bearer in advance.
  • RB Radio Bearer
  • the -Default Bearer is EPS bearer identification information that identifies the default bearer associated with the PDU session.
  • the EPS bearer may be a logical communication path established between the UE_A10 and PGW_A30/UPGW_A130/UPF_A235, or a communication path forming a PDN connection/PDU session. Further, the EPS bearer may be a default bearer or a dedicated bearer. Further, the EPS bearer may be configured to include an RB established between the UE_A 10 and a base station and/or an access point in the access network. Furthermore, RBs and EPS bearers may be associated with each other on a one-to-one basis.
  • the RB identification information may be associated with the EPS bearer identification information in a one-to-one correspondence, or may be the same identification information.
  • RB may be SRB and/or CRB or DRB.
  • the Default Bearer may be information acquired by the UE_A10 and/or SGW_A35 and/or PGW_A30/UPGW_A130/SMF_A230/UPF_A235 from the core network when the PDU session is established.
  • the default bearer is an EPS bearer that is first established in a PDN connection/PDU session, and only one EPS bearer can be established in one PDN connection/PDU session.
  • the default bearer may be an EPS bearer that can be used for communication of user data that is not associated with TFT.
  • the dedicated bearer is an EPS bearer that is established after the default bearer is established in the PDN connection/PDU session, and is an EPS bearer that can be established multiple times in one PDN connection/PDU session. is there.
  • the dedicated bearer is an EPS bearer that can be used for communication of user data associated with TFT.
  • User Identity is information that identifies a subscriber. UserIdentity may be IMSI or MSISDN. Further, User Identity may be identification information other than IMSI and MSISDN. Serving Node Information is information that identifies MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240 used in the PDU session, and may be the IP address of MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240.
  • ENB Address is the IP address of eNB_A45.
  • the eNB ID is information that identifies the UE within the eNB_A45.
  • MME Address is the IP address of MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240.
  • MME ID is information that identifies MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240.
  • NRnodeAddress is the IP address of NRnode_A122.
  • the NR node ID is information that identifies the NR node_A122.
  • WAG Address is the IP address of WAG_A126.
  • WAG_ID is information that identifies WAG_A126.
  • the network in this embodiment refers to at least a part of access network_B80/120/125, core network_B190, DN_A5, and DN_B105.
  • one or more devices included in at least a part of the access network_B80/120/125, the core network_B190, the DN_A5, and the DN_B105 may be referred to as a network or a network device. That is, the fact that the network transmits/receives messages and/or executes procedures means that the devices (network devices) in the network execute transmission/reception of messages and/or procedures.
  • the session management (SM; Session Management) message may be a NAS message used in the procedure for SM, UE_A10 via AMF_A240. And SMF_A230 or SMF_B232.
  • the SM message includes a PDU session establishment request message, a PDU session establishment acceptance message, a PDU session completion message, a PDU session rejection message, a PDU session change request message, a PDU session change acceptance message, a PDU session change rejection message, etc. May be.
  • the procedure for SM may include a PDU session establishment procedure, a PDU session change procedure, and the like.
  • the tracking area (TA; also referred to as Tracking Area) in the present embodiment is a range that can be represented by the location information of UE_A10 managed by the core network, and may be composed of, for example, one or more cells. Further, the TA may be in a range in which a control message such as a paging message is broadcast, or in a range in which the UE_A 10 can move without performing a handover procedure.
  • the TA list in this embodiment is a list that includes one or more TAs assigned by the network to UE_A10. Note that UE_A10 may be able to move without executing the registration procedure while moving in one or more TAs included in the TA list. In other words, the TA list may be a group of information indicating areas where the UE_A 10 can move without executing the registration procedure.
  • RQoS Reflective QoS (Quality of Service) in this embodiment is QoS supported by 5GC (5G Core).
  • RQoS is QoS realized by UE_A10 creating a QoS rule (Derived QoS rule) based on the received downlink packet and/or downlink traffic.
  • each device may be capable of simultaneously applying RQoS and QoS that is not RQoS in the same PDU session. Further, in order to realize the adaptation of RQoS to traffic, the same QoS as that of the downlink packet to be paired may be applied to the QoS of the uplink packet.
  • the QoS rule in this embodiment is a rule for realizing user data communication using RQoS.
  • the QoS rule may include a packet filter (Packet Filter), and/or a QFI (QoS Flow Identity), and/or a preceding value (Precedence value).
  • QFI may be an identifier for identifying a QoS flow.
  • the preceding value indicates the priority, and the smaller the value, the higher the priority.
  • the packet filter for the uplink packet may be generated based on the downlink packet.
  • the preceding value of the QoS rule may be set to a standardized value.
  • the preceding value of the QoS rule may be set to a value even transmitted/received by a control message via Control Plane.
  • the UE_A 10 may enable RQoS by creating a QoS rule, or may disable RQoS by deleting the QoS rule.
  • the RQoS timer (Reflective QoS Timer) in this embodiment is a timer for managing the activation of RQoS.
  • Each device may enable RQoS only while the RQoS timer is running. In other words, each device may enable RQoS based on the start of the RQoS timer, and may disable RQoS based on the expiration of the RQoS timer.
  • the value of the RQoS timer may be a value transmitted from the network to UE_A10 in a PDU session establishment procedure or the like, or may be a preset value. It may be an RQ timer. Further, the RQoS timer may be a timer for managing activation of RQoS, but is not limited to this.
  • the authentication approval request information is information that UE_A10 requests to start the DN authentication approval procedure, and may be a variable indicating whether the DN authentication approval procedure is desired to be started or a service is specified. Name space, a user identifier, or an identifier for specifying the profile of the user.
  • the DN authentication approval procedure may be a PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure.
  • the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure may be realized using an authentication protocol EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) adopted or defined by the IETF.
  • the authentication/authorization information is information indicating the authorization approval result when responding to the DN authorization approval procedure from 3GPP NW, and may be a variable indicating whether the authorization is approved or not. It may be a namespace that specifies.
  • the DN authentication approval response information for the information that UE_A10 responds to the authentication/authorization information issued by the DN, put when UE_A10 responds, even a namespace that identifies the service It may be a message response to the authentication/authorization information from the DN.
  • the user ID in this embodiment is an identifier that identifies a user in DN authentication approval.
  • the user ID may be information that UE_A10 requests to activate the DN authentication approval procedure.
  • the user profile ID in this embodiment is an identifier that identifies a user profile in DN authentication approval.
  • the UE_A10 may be information requesting activation of the DN authentication approval procedure.
  • the DN authentication approval in this embodiment is the next-generation security system of the 5G mobile communication system, which is the next-generation mobile communication system.
  • This is a mechanism that enables authorization and authentication by DN during the PDU session establishment procedure, and may be a system that does not exist in the conventional 4G system.
  • the authentication and the authorization may be separated in relation to the DN authentication and authorization.
  • the owners of the authentication resource and the authorization resource may be able to perform the authorization and approval at their respective responsibilities, and flexible service deployment using the mobile communication system may be possible.
  • the first timer in the present embodiment is a timer for managing the start of a procedure for session management such as a PDU session establishment procedure and/or the transmission of an SM (Session Management) message such as a PDU session establishment request message. While the first timer is running, each device may be prohibited from starting a procedure for session management and/or transmitting/receiving an SM message. Note that the first timer may be set at least in either APN/DNN or slice unit.
  • the SM message may be a NAS message used in the procedure for session management, and may be a control message transmitted/received between UE_A10 and SMF_A230 via AMF_A240.
  • the SM message includes a PDU session establishment request message, a PDU session establishment acceptance message, a PDU session completion message, a PDU session rejection message, a PDU session change request message, a PDU session change acceptance message, a PDU session change rejection message, etc. May be.
  • the procedure for session management may include a PDU session establishment procedure, a PDU session change procedure, and the like.
  • a network slice in this embodiment is a logical network that provides specific network capabilities and network characteristics.
  • the network slice may be referred to as an NW slice.
  • a network slice instance in this embodiment forms a network slice that is composed of an instance (entity) of a network function (NF) and a set of necessary resources and is arranged.
  • the NF is a processing function in the network and is adopted or defined by 3GPP.
  • NSI is an entity of a network slice, which is composed of one or more in the core network_B 190.
  • the NSI may be configured by a virtual NF (Network Function) generated using NST (Network Slice Template).
  • NST Network Slice Template
  • NST Network Slice Template
  • the NSI may be an aggregate in the core network_B 190 configured by a plurality of NFs. Further, the NSI may be a logical network configured to divide user data delivered by services or the like. One or more NFs may be configured in the network slice. The NF configured in the network slice may or may not be a device shared with other network slices.
  • UE_A10 can be assigned to one or more network slices based on registration information and/or APN such as UE usage type and/or one or more network slice type IDs and/or one or more NS IDs.
  • the NSI (Network Slice Instance) in the present embodiment is an entity of a network slice (Network Slice) configured to have one or more in the core network_B 190. Further, the NSI in the present embodiment may be configured by a virtual NF (Network Function) generated using NST (Network Slice Template).
  • NST is a logical representation of one or more NFs (Network Functions) associated with resource requests for providing required communication services and capabilities. That is, the NSI may be an aggregate in the core network_B 190 configured by a plurality of NFs. Further, the NSI may be a logical network configured to divide user data delivered by services or the like. At least one NF may be configured in the network slice.
  • the NF configured in the network slice may or may not be a device shared with other network slices.
  • UE_A10 and/or devices in the network are NSSAI and/or S-NSSAI and/or UE usage type and/or one or more network slice type IDs and/or one or more NS IDs etc. It can be assigned to one or more network slices based on registration information and/or APN.
  • the S-NSSAI in this embodiment is an abbreviation for Single Network Slice Selection Assistance information and is information for identifying a network slice.
  • S-NSSAI may consist of SST (Slice/Service type) and SD (Slice Differentiator).
  • S-NSSAI may be configured with only SST, or may be configured with both SST and SD.
  • SST is information indicating the operation of the network slice expected in terms of functions and services.
  • SD may be information that complements SST when selecting one NSI from a plurality of NSI indicated by SST.
  • the S-NSSAI may be unique information for each PLMN or may be standard information shared by the PLMNs.
  • the network may also store one or more S-NSSAIs in the registration information of UE_A10 as the default S-NSSAI.
  • NSSAI Single Network Slice Selection Assistance information
  • UE_A10 may store NSSAI permitted from the network for each PLMN. Also, NSSAI may be information used to select AMF_A240.
  • the first NW slice in this embodiment is the NW slice to which the established PDU session belongs when UE_A10 connects to a specific DN.
  • the first NW slice may be an NW slice managed in the operator A network or may be a NW slice commonly managed in the operator B network.
  • the second NW slice in this embodiment is an NW slice to which another PDU session that can be connected to the DN to which the PDU session belonging to the first NW slice is connected.
  • the first NW slice and the second NW slice may be operated by the same operator or different operators.
  • the operator A network in this embodiment is a network operated by operator A.
  • the NW slice common to the operator B may be expanded.
  • the operator B network in this embodiment is a network operated by operator B.
  • the NW slice common to the operator A may be expanded.
  • the re-attempt information in the present embodiment is information for the NW to instruct the UE_A10 whether to allow reconnection using the same identification information for the rejected PDU session.
  • the re-attempt information may be set for each UTRAN access, E-UTRAN access, and NR access.
  • the first behavior in this embodiment is a behavior in which the UE_A10 stores the slice information transmitted in the PDU session establishment request message in association with the transmitted PDU session identifier.
  • the UE_A10 may store the slice information transmitted in the PDU session establishment request message, or may store the slice information received when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected. ..
  • UE_A10 slice information different from the slice information previously specified in the PDU session establishment request message, using the APN / specified in the previously transmitted PDU session establishment request message.
  • This is a behavior of transmitting a PDU session establishment request message for connecting to the same APN/DNN as the DNN.
  • the second behavior is that when the backoff timer value received from the network is zero or invalid, using slice information different from the slice information specified in the PDU session establishment request message transmitted previously, It may be the behavior of transmitting the PDU session establishment request message for connecting to the same APN/DNN as the PDU session establishment request message before.
  • the second behavior is that if the previously transmitted PDU session establishment request message is rejected because it is not supported by the radio of the specific PLMN to which the specified APN/DNN is connected, or it is temporarily For this reason, if the previously sent PDU session establishment request message is rejected, the slice information different from the slice information previously specified in the PDU session establishment request message is used, and the previously sent PDU session establishment request message is sent.
  • the behavior may be such that a PDU session establishment request message for connecting to the same APN/DNN as the specified APN/DNN is transmitted.
  • the third behavior in the present embodiment, UE_A10 when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected, until the first timer expires, using the same identification information, a new PDU session establishment request message.
  • the third behavior is that if the backoff timer value received from the network is neither zero nor invalid, a new PDU session establishment request with the same identification information is used until the first timer expires.
  • the behavior may be that the message is not transmitted.
  • the third behavior is that the PDU session establishment request message is rejected when another PLMN is selected or when another NW slice is selected and the rejection reason for the network operation setting failure is received.
  • the behavior may be such that a new PDU session establishment request message using the same identification information is not transmitted until the first timer expires.
  • UE_A10 is, when the PDU session establishment request message sent in the Registration procedure is rejected, until the first timer expires, slice information, and / or DNN /.
  • This is the behavior of not transmitting a new PDU session establishment request message that does not carry APN information.
  • the fourth behavior is that if the backoff timer received from the network is neither zero nor invalid, the slice information and/or the DNN/APN information is not added until the first timer expires.
  • the behavior may be that the PDU session establishment request message is not transmitted.
  • the fifth behavior in this embodiment is the behavior in which the UE_A10 does not send a new PDU session establishment request message using the same identification information when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected.
  • the fifth behavior is a new PDU session establishment request message using the same identification information when UE_A10 and the PDU types supported by the network are different and the UEs are in the uniform PLMN. May not be transmitted.
  • the sixth behavior in the present embodiment, UE_A10, when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected, using the same identification information, as an initial procedure, is a behavior to send a new PDU session establishment request message. .. Specifically, the sixth behavior is that when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected because the target PDN session context does not exist in the handover from non-3GPP, the same identification information is used as an initial procedure, It may be a behavior of transmitting a new PDU session establishment request message.
  • the seventh behavior in this embodiment is the behavior of continuing the backoff timer received when the previous PDU session establishment request message was rejected when another NW slice was selected in the PLMN selection procedure.
  • the seventh behavior is that when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected, PLMN selection is performed, and in the selected PLMN, the NW slice specified in the PDU session establishment request message is common.
  • the behavior may be such that the backoff timer received when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected is continued.
  • the eighth behavior in this embodiment is a behavior in which the UE_A10 may set the value notified from the network as the first timer value, or sets the value set in the UE_A10 in advance.
  • UE_A10 may be a behavior to set the backoff timer value received in the rejection notification of the PDU session establishment request message as the first timer value, or to UE_A10 in advance.
  • the behavior may be setting or a value to be held may be set as the first timer value.
  • the eighth behavior in the case where the timer to be set in UE_A10 in advance or the timer to be held is set as the first timer value may be limited to HPLMN or uniform PLMN presence.
  • the ninth behavior in the present embodiment is a behavior that does not send a new PDU session establishment request message. .. Specifically, the ninth behavior is when the backoff timer received from the network is invalid or when the reason included in the PDU session rejection message is different between UE_A10 and NW in PDU type. The behavior may be such that a new PDU session establishment request message is not transmitted until it is turned on/off or the USIM is removed/inserted.
  • the ninth behavior is when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected because the specified APN/DNN is not supported by the connected PLMN radio, and the backoff timer information element from the network is If there is no Re-attempt information, or if reconnection of the PDU session to the uniform PLMN is allowed, the connected PLMN does not turn on/off the terminal power or insert/remove the USIM until a new PDU session.
  • the behavior may be that the establishment request message is not transmitted.
  • the ninth behavior is when the first PDU session establishment request message is rejected because the specified APN/DNN is not supported by the connected PLMN radio, and the backoff timer from the network If there is no information element and there is no Re-attempt information, or if reconnection of the PDU session to the uniform PLMN is not allowed, the connected PLMN does not turn on/off the terminal power or insert/remove the USIM. PDU session establishment request message may not be transmitted.
  • the ninth behavior is when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected because the specified APN/DNN is not supported by the connected PLMN radio, and even if the backoff timer from the network is zero, it is invalid.
  • the behavior may be such that a new PDU session establishment request message is not transmitted until the terminal power is turned on/off or the USIM is removed/inserted.
  • the ninth behavior is when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected because the specified APN/DNN is not supported by the connected PLMN radio, and the backoff timer from the network is invalid. , A new PDU session establishment request message may not be transmitted until the terminal power is turned on/off or the USIM is removed/inserted.
  • the tenth behavior in this embodiment is the behavior in which the UE_A10 transmits a new PDU session establishment request message when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected.
  • the tenth behavior is the backoff timer information notified from the network when the backoff timer received from the NW is zero or when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected for a temporary reason. If there is no element itself, the behavior may be to send a new PDU session establishment request message.
  • the tenth behavior is the case where another PLMN is selected, or another NW slice is selected, and the PDU session establishment request message is rejected for a temporary reason, and the target is the selected PLMN.
  • the behavior may be that a new PDU session establishment request message is transmitted.
  • the tenth behavior is when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected because the PDU type of the UE_A10 and the network are different, and when different PLMNs are selected, Re-attempt information is not received, or the equal PLMNs are received. If a PLMN not listed is selected, the PDP type is changed, the terminal power is turned on/off, or the USIM is removed/inserted, a new PDU session establishment request message is sent. Good.
  • the 10th behavior is that the backoff timer notified by the network is zero when the first PDU session is rejected because the specified APN/DNN is not supported by the connected PLMN radio.
  • the behavior may be to send a new PDU session establishment request message.
  • the eleventh behavior in this embodiment is behavior in which UE_A10 ignores the first timer and Re-attempt information.
  • the 11th behavior is when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected because the target PDN session context does not exist in the handover from non-3GPP, or the PDN connection
  • UE_A10 is the behavior of ignoring the first timer and Re-attempt information. Good.
  • the equivalent PLMN in this embodiment is a PLMN treated as being the same HPLMN and the same PLMN in the network.
  • the first identification information in the present embodiment is information indicating whether or not the UE_A 10 supports Reflective Quality of Service (RQoS). Further, the first identification information may indicate whether the UE_A10 supports UE-controlled RQoS and/or whether the UE_A10 supports network-led RQoS.
  • the UE-controlled RQoS may be RQoS activated by the UE-initiated RQoS activation procedure, or may be RQoS invalidated by the first RQoS deactivation procedure. ..
  • the network-initiated controlled RQoS may be the RQoS activated by the network-initiated RQoS activation procedure or the RQoS invalidated by the second RQoS deactivation procedure.
  • the first identification information may correspond to the fourth identification information or the fifth identification information. That is, the first identification information, for user data communication with the DN identified by the fourth identification information, or for the PDU session identified by the fifth identification information, UE_A10 RQoS May mean information indicating whether or not to support. Further, the first identification information may be information having the meaning of the second identification information and/or the third identification information.
  • the first identification information may mean information indicating whether or not the UE_A 10 supports RQoS controlled via the Control Plane and/or the User Plane.
  • the RQoS controlled via the Control Plane may be the RQoS enabled and/or disabled via the Control Plane
  • the RQoS controlled via the User Plane means the User Plane.
  • RQoS may be enabled and/or disabled via the.
  • the first identification information may be information having the meaning of the sixth identification information. That is, the first identification information may be information indicating whether or not UE_A10 supports RQoS and also indicating that UE_A10 requests RQoS.
  • the second identification information in this embodiment is information indicating whether or not UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane. Also, the second identification information, whether UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane led by UE, and/or, UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane initiated by network. It may indicate whether or not to do. Further, the second identification information may correspond to the fourth identification information or the fifth identification information. That is, the second identification information, for user data communication with the DN identified by the fourth identification information, or for the PDU session identified by the fifth identification information, UE_A10 Control. It may mean information indicating whether to support RQoS controlled through Plane. Further, the second identification information may be information having the same meaning as the seventh identification information. That is, the second identification information indicates whether UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane, and, and, UE_A10 is information indicating that RQoS controlled via Control Plane is requested. It may be.
  • the third identification information in this embodiment is information indicating whether or not the UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled via User Plane. Also, the third identification information, whether UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled via User Plane led by UE, and/or, UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled via User Plane led by network. It may indicate whether or not to do. Further, the third identification information may correspond to the fourth identification information or the fifth identification information. That is, the third identification information, for user data communication with the DN identified by the fourth identification information, or for the PDU session identified by the fifth identification information, UE_A10 User It may mean information indicating whether to support RQoS controlled through Plane. Further, the third identification information may be information having the same meaning as the eighth identification information. That is, the third identification information indicates whether UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled via User Plane, and UE_A10 is information indicating that RQoS controlled via User Plane is requested. It may be.
  • the fourth identification information in this embodiment is a DNN (Data Network Name).
  • the DNN may be information used to identify the DN (Data Network).
  • the fifth identification information in this embodiment is a PDU session ID (PDU Session ID).
  • PDU Session ID may be information used to identify a PDU session.
  • the sixth identification information in this embodiment is information indicating that UE_A10 requests that RQoS be changed to enabled (usable state). Further, the sixth identification information, UE_A10 requests that the RQoS controlled by the UE is changed to enabled, and / or, UE_A10 is changed to the RQoS controlled by the network to enabled. It may indicate that the request is received. Requesting that RQoS should be changed to enabled may mean requesting permission to use RQoS.
  • the sixth identification information may correspond to the fourth identification information and/or the fifth identification information.
  • the sixth identification information for user data communication with the DN identified by the fourth identification information, or for the PDU session identified by the fifth identification information, UE_A10 RQoS May also mean information indicating that it is requested to have changed to enabled. Further, the sixth identification information may be information having the meanings of the seventh identification information and/or the eighth identification information. That is, the sixth identification information may mean information indicating that the UE_A10 requests that the RQoS controlled via the Control Plane and/or the User Plane be changed to enabled.
  • the seventh identification information in this embodiment is information indicating that the UE_A10 requests that the RQoS controlled via the Control Plane be changed to enabled. Further, the seventh identification information, UE_A10 is requested by the UE is requested to change the RQoS controlled via Control Plane to enabled, and / or, UE_A10 is the network initiative via Control Plane. It may indicate that the controlled RQoS should be requested to be changed to enabled. Further, the seventh identification information may correspond to the fourth identification information or the fifth identification information. That is, the seventh identification information, for user data communication with the DN identified by the fourth identification information, or for the PDU session identified by the fifth identification information, UE_A10 Control. It may mean information indicating that the RQoS controlled through the Plane is requested to be changed to enabled.
  • the eighth identification information in this embodiment is information indicating that the UE_A10 requests to change the RQoS controlled via the User Plane to enabled. Further, the eighth identification information, UE_A10 is requested by the UE to request to change the RQoS controlled via the User Plane to enabled, and / or, UE_A10 is the network initiative via the User Plane. It may indicate that the controlled RQoS should be requested to be changed to enabled. Also, the eighth identification information may correspond to the fourth identification information or the fifth identification information.
  • the eighth identification information for user data communication with the DN identified by the eighth identification information, or for the PDU session identified by the fifth identification information, UE_A10 User It may mean information indicating that the RQoS controlled through the Plane is requested to be changed to enabled.
  • the 61st identification information in the present embodiment is information for requesting service authentication/authorization by the DN via the 3GPP interface in the DN connection. Furthermore, the 61st identification information may be information requesting execution of a PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure in the registration procedure and/or the PDU session establishment procedure. In other words, the 61st identification information may be information requesting service authentication/authorization by DN via the 3GPP interface in the registration procedure and/or the PDU session establishment procedure. As a specific example, the 61st identification information may be a flag requesting DN service authentication/authorization, a service name capable of identifying a specific DN service, or a user identifier (DN-specific It may be an identity) or a user profile identifier. Furthermore, the 61st identification information may be authentication approval request information.
  • the 71st identification information in this embodiment is information identifying that it belongs to the first NW slice.
  • the 71st identification information may be information indicating that UE_A10 wants to establish a PDU session belonging to the first NW slice.
  • the 71st identification information may be NSSAI that identifies the first NW slice.
  • the 71st identification information may be information for identifying a specific NW slice in the operator A network, or may be the same NW slice commonly in operator B (other operators than operator A). It may be information to be provided.
  • the 71st identification information may be information indicating the first NW slice set from the HPLMN, or may be information indicating the first NW slice acquired from AMF_A240 in the registration procedure. However, the information may be information indicating the first NW slice permitted from the network. Further, the 71st identification information may be information indicating the first NW slice stored for each PLMN.
  • the eleventh identification information in this embodiment is information indicating whether or not the network supports RQoS. Further, the eleventh identification information may indicate whether the network supports UE-controlled RQoS, and/or whether the network supports network-controlled RQoS.
  • the eleventh identification information may correspond to the fourteenth identification information or the fifteenth identification information. That is, the eleventh identification information is used by the network for RQoS for user data communication with the DN identified by the fourteenth identification information, or for the PDU session identified by the fifteenth identification information. May mean information indicating whether or not to support. Further, the eleventh identification information may be information having the meaning of the twelfth identification information and/or the thirteenth identification information.
  • the eleventh identification information may mean information indicating whether the network supports RQoS controlled via the Control Plane and/or the User Plane. Further, the eleventh identification information may be information having the meaning of the seventeenth identification information. That is, the eleventh identification information may be information indicating whether or not the network supports RQoS and also indicating that the network accepts RQoS.
  • the twelfth identification information in this embodiment is information indicating whether or not the network supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane. Further, the twelfth identification information supports whether or not the network supports RQoS controlled by the UE through the Control Plane, and/or supports the network controlled RQoS by the network initiated through the Control Plane. It may indicate whether or not to do.
  • the twelfth identification information may correspond to the fourteenth identification information or the fifteenth identification information. That is, the twelfth identification information is used by the network for controlling user data communication with the DN identified by the fourteenth identification information, or for a PDU session identified by the fifteenth identification information. It may mean information indicating whether to support RQoS controlled through Plane.
  • the twelfth identification information may be information having the meaning of the eighteenth identification information. That is, the twelfth identification information is information indicating whether or not the network supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane, and that the network accepts RQoS controlled via Control Plane. It may be.
  • the thirteenth identification information in this embodiment is information indicating whether or not the network supports RQoS controlled via User Plane.
  • the 13th identification information whether the network supports RQoS controlled via User Plane initiated by the UE, and/or the network supports RQoS controlled via User Plane initiated by the network. It may indicate whether or not to do.
  • the thirteenth identification information may correspond to the fourteenth identification information or the fifteenth identification information. That is, the thirteenth identification information is used by the network for User data communication with the DN identified by the fourteenth identification information, or for the PDU session identified by the fifteenth identification information. It may mean information indicating whether to support RQoS controlled through Plane.
  • the thirteenth identification information may also be information having the meaning of the nineteenth identification information. That is, the 13th identification information is information indicating whether or not the network supports RQoS controlled via User Plane, and that the network accepts RQoS controlled via User Plane. It may be.
  • the 14th identification information in this embodiment is DNN.
  • the fourteenth identification information may be a DNN permitted by the network or a DNN selected by the network. Furthermore, the 14th identification information may be the same DNN as the 4th identification information or a different DNN.
  • the fifteenth identification information in this embodiment is a PDU session ID.
  • the fifteenth identification information may be a PDU session ID permitted by the network or a PDU session ID selected by the network. Furthermore, the fifteenth identification information may be the same PDU session ID as the fifth identification information, or may be a different PDU session ID.
  • the 16th identification information in this embodiment is the timer value of the RQoS timer.
  • the value indicated by the 16th identification information may be a value determined by the device in the core network, a value determined by the operator, or a value determined by a service provider other than the operator. May be.
  • the 16th identification information may be transmitted and received in association with at least one of the 11th to 13th identification information and the 17th to 19th identification information.
  • the 17th identification information in this embodiment is information indicating that the network accepts to change RQoS to enabled. Further, the 17th identification information is that the network accepts that the RQoS controlled by the UE is changed to enabled, and/or, the RQoS that the network is controlled by the network is changed to enabled. May be indicated to be accepted. Accepting that RQoS is changed to enabled may mean that the use of RQoS is permitted. Further, the 17th identification information may correspond to the 14th identification information or the 15th identification information. That is, the 17th identification information is used by the network for RQoS for user data communication with the DN identified by the 14th identification information, or for the PDU session identified by the 15th identification information. It may mean information indicating that acceptance to change to enabled.
  • the 17th identification information may be information having the meaning of the 18th identification information and/or the 19th identification information. That is, the 17th identification information may be information indicating that the network accepts to change the RQoS controlled via the Control Plane and/or the User Plane to enabled.
  • the 18th identification information in this embodiment is information indicating that the network accepts to change the RQoS controlled via the Control Plane to enabled. Further, the 18th identification information is that the network accepts that the RUE controlled by the UE via Control Plane is changed to enabled, and/or the network is controlled by the network via the Control Plane. It may indicate that it accepts to change RQoS to enabled. Further, the 18th identification information may correspond to the 14th identification information or the 15th identification information. That is, the 18th identification information is used by the network for controlling user data communication with the DN identified by the 14th identification information, or for a PDU session identified by the 15th identification information. It may mean information indicating acceptance to change the RQoS controlled via the Plane to enabled.
  • the 19th identification information in this embodiment is information indicating that the network accepts to change the RQoS controlled via the User Plane to enabled. Also, the 19th identification information is that the network accepts that the UE takes the initiative to change the RQoS controlled via the User Plane to enabled, and/or the network takes the initiative to control the network via the User Plane. Accepting that the RQoS is changed to enabled. Further, the 19th identification information may correspond to the 14th identification information or the 15th identification information. That is, the 19th identification information is used by the network for User data communication with the DN identified by the 14th identification information, or for the PDU session identified by the 15th identification information. It may mean information indicating acceptance to change the RQoS controlled via the Plane to enabled.
  • the 21st identification information in this embodiment is a Cause value.
  • the Cause value indicates the reason for refusal.
  • the service requested in the PDU session establishment request message is rejected by the external DN due to user authentication failure, or canceled by the external DN, or Canceled by the external packet data network (referred to as User authentication authentication or authorization failed), not allowing (rejecting) changing RQoS to enabled, enabling RQoS controlled via Control Plane and User Plane
  • Do not allow to change (reject) do not allow to change (reject) only RQoS controlled via Control Plane, and enable only RQoS controlled via User Plane. At least one of not permitting (rejecting) to change may be indicated.
  • the 21st identification information may be information indicating that some requests have been rejected.
  • the 21st information may be information including the meaning indicated by one or more of the 22nd to 29th identification information.
  • the 21st identification information may correspond to the 25th identification information or the 26th identification information. That is, the 21st identification information may mean the Cause value for the DN identified by the 25th identification information or the Cause value for the PDU session identified by the 26th identification information.
  • the 21st identification information may correspond to a registration area (RA; Registration Area), a tracking area (TA; Tracking Area), or an access network (AN; Access Network).
  • the 21st identification information may mean the Cause area for the registration area, the tracking area, or the access network.
  • the 21st identification information may be a Cause value indicating that RQoS is not permitted in the DN identified by the 25th identification information, or the PDU session identified by the 26th identification information. It may be a Cause value indicating that RQoS is not allowed in.
  • the 21st identification information may be a Cause value indicating that RQoS is not allowed in the registration area to which UE_A10 currently belongs, and/or the tracking area, or in the access network to which UE_A10 is connected. It may be a Cause value indicating that RQoS is not permitted.
  • the Cause value indicated by the 21st identification information is not limited to these.
  • the 121st identification information in the present embodiment may be information indicating a detailed rejection reason supplementing the rejection reason indicated by the 21st identification information when the 21st identification information indicates User authentication or authorization authorization failed.
  • the detailed rejection reason may be information indicating that the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure has failed and/or information indicating that the authentication procedure using EAP in the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure has failed.
  • the EAP-failure used in the following description may be information indicating the reason for refusal of such details. Specifically, when the 61st identification information included in the PDU session establishment request message conforms to the local policy and/or the user subscriber information and the third condition determination by SMF_A230 is determined to be true, the PDU The session establishment authentication approval procedure (S1005) is executed.
  • the PDU session establishment rejection message sent by SMF_A230 (S1022), the 21st identification information indicating User authentication authentication or authorization authorization failed and the 121st indicating EAP-failure. Identification information may be included.
  • the 61st identification information included in the PDU session establishment request message does not comply with the local policy and/or user subscriber information, if the third condition determination is determined to be false, PDU session establishment authentication approval The procedure (S1005) is not executed.
  • the PDU session establishment rejection message (S1022) transmitted by SMF_A230 includes the 21st identification information indicating User authentication authentication or authorization authorization failed, but does not include the 121st identification information indicating EAP-failure. good.
  • the 121st identification information indicating EAP-failure is included in the PDU session establishment rejection message (S1022), it means that the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure using EAP is executed, and that procedure has failed. May be the case.
  • the 121st identification information indicating EAP-failure is not included in the PDU session establishment rejection message (S1022), the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure using EAP is not executed, and the PDU session establishment using EAP is established.
  • the reason for refusal other than the failure of the certification approval procedure is indicated.
  • the reason for rejection other than the failure of the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure using EAP as described above, the 61st identification information included in the PDU session establishment request message conforms to the local policy and/or the user subscriber information. May not be the case.
  • the 22nd identification information in this embodiment is information indicating that the network does not support RQoS.
  • the 22nd identification information may indicate that the network does not support UE-controlled RQoS and/or that the network does not support network-controlled RQoS.
  • the 22nd identification information may correspond to the 25th identification information or the 26th identification information.
  • the 22nd identification information is used by the network for user data communication with the DN identified by the 25th identification information, or for the PDU session identified by the 26th identification information. It may mean information indicating that RQoS is not supported.
  • the 22nd identification information may correspond to the registration area, the tracking area, or the access network.
  • the 22nd identification information may mean, for the registration area, the tracking area, or the access network, information indicating that the network does not support RQoS.
  • the 22nd identification information may be information having the meanings of the 23rd identification information and/or the 24th identification information. That is, the 22nd identification information may be information indicating that the network does not support RQoS controlled via the Control Plane and/or the User Plane.
  • the 22nd identification information may be information having the meaning of the 27th identification information. That is, the 22nd identification information may be information indicating that the network does not support RQoS and that the network does not permit (reject) RQoS.
  • the 23rd identification information in this embodiment is information indicating that the network does not support RQoS controlled via Control Plane.
  • the 23rd identification information the network does not support RQoS controlled via the Control Plane initiated by the UE, and/or the network does not support RQoS controlled by the Control Plane initiated by the network. May be indicated.
  • the 23rd identification information may correspond to the 25th identification information or the 26th identification information. That is, the 23rd identification information is used by the network for controlling user data communication with the DN identified by the 25th identification information, or for a PDU session identified by the 26th identification information. It may mean information indicating that RQoS controlled through Plane is not supported.
  • the 23rd identification information may correspond to the registration area, the tracking area, or the access network. That is, the 23rd identification information may mean, for the registration area, the tracking area, or the access network, information indicating that the network does not support RQoS controlled via the Control Plane. Further, the 23rd identification information may be information having the meaning of the 28th identification information. That is, the 23rd identification information indicates that the network does not support RQoS controlled via Control Plane, and indicates that the network does not permit (reject) RQoS controlled via Control Plane. It may be information.
  • the 24th identification information in this embodiment is information indicating that the network does not support RQoS controlled via User Plane. Further, the 24th identification information, the network does not support RQoS controlled via the User Plane initiated by the UE, and / or the network does not support RQoS controlled by the User initiated Plane initiated by the network. May be indicated. Further, the 24th identification information may correspond to the 25th identification information or the 26th identification information. That is, the 24th identification information is used by the network for User data communication with the DN identified by the 25th identification information, or for the PDU session identified by the 26th identification information. It may mean information indicating that RQoS controlled through Plane is not supported.
  • the 24th identification information may correspond to the registration area, the tracking area, or the access network. That is, the 24th identification information may mean, for the registration area, the tracking area, or the access network, information indicating that the network does not support RQoS controlled through the User Plane. Further, the 24th identification information may be information having the meaning of the 29th identification information. That is, the 24th identification information indicates that the network does not support RQoS controlled via the User Plane, and indicates that the network does not permit (reject) RQoS controlled via the User Plane. It may be information.
  • the 25th identification information in this embodiment is a DNN.
  • the 25th identification information may be a DNN not permitted by the network, or may be information indicating that the DNN identified by the fourth identification information is not permitted. Furthermore, the 25th identification information may be the same DNN as the 4th identification information.
  • the 26th identification information in this embodiment is a PDU Session ID.
  • the 26th identification information may be a PDU session ID not permitted by the network, or may be information indicating that the PDU session ID identified by the fifth identification information is not permitted. Furthermore, the 26th identification information may be the same PDU session ID as the 5th identification information.
  • the 27th identification information in this embodiment is information indicating that the network does not allow (reject) changing RQoS to enabled.
  • the 27th identification information does not allow (reject) changing the network-controlled RQoS to enabled to enabled, and/or changes the network-controlled RQoS to enabled to enabled RQoS. You may indicate that you do not permit (reject).
  • the 27th identification information may correspond to the 25th identification information or the 26th identification information. That is, the 27th identification information is used by the network for RQoS for user data communication with the DN identified by the 25th identification information or for the PDU session identified by the 26th identification information. It may mean the information indicating that the change to enabled is not permitted (rejected).
  • the 27th identification information may correspond to a registration area, a tracking area, or an access network. That is, the 27th identification information may mean information indicating that the registration area, the tracking area, or the access network does not allow (reject) the network to change RQoS to enabled. ..
  • the 27th identification information may be information having the meaning of the 28th identification information and/or the 29th identification information. That is, the 27th identification information may be information indicating that the network does not allow (reject) changing the RQoS controlled through the Control Plane and/or the User Plane to enabled.
  • the 28th identification information in this embodiment is information indicating that the network does not allow (reject) changing the RQoS controlled via the Control Plane to enabled. Further, the 28th identification information does not allow (reject) changing the RQoS controlled by the network via Control Plane to enabled by the UE, and/or the network takes Control Plane by the network. It may indicate not to allow (reject) changing the RQoS controlled via the. Further, the 28th identification information may correspond to the 25th identification information or the 26th identification information. That is, the 28th identification information is used by the network for controlling user data communication with the DN identified by the 25th identification information or for a PDU session identified by the 26th identification information.
  • the 28th identification information may correspond to a registration area, a tracking area, or an access network. That is, the 28th identification information does not allow (reject) the registration area, the tracking area, or the access network from changing the RQoS controlled by the network via the Control Plane to enabled. It may mean the information shown.
  • the 29th identification information in this embodiment is information indicating that the network does not allow (reject) changing the RQoS controlled via the User Plane to enabled. Further, the 29th identification information does not allow (reject) changing the RQoS controlled via the User Plane to enabled by the UE, and/or the network takes the User Plane on the initiative of the network. It may indicate not to allow (reject) changing the RQoS controlled via the. Further, the 29th identification information may correspond to the 25th identification information or the 26th identification information. That is, the 29th identification information is used by the network for user data communication with the DN identified by the 25th identification information or for the PDU session identified by the 26th identification information.
  • the 29th identification information may correspond to the registration area, the tracking area, or the access network. That is, the 29th identification information does not allow (reject) the registration area, the tracking area, or the access network from changing the RQoS controlled by the network via the User Plane to enabled. It may mean the information shown.
  • the 72nd identification information in this embodiment is information indicating a reason value (cause) indicating that this procedure is rejected.
  • the 72nd identification information may be information indicating that the request for establishing the PDU session connecting to the DN is rejected.
  • the 72nd identification information may be information indicating that the request for establishing the PDU session belonging to the first slice has been rejected, or establishment of the PDU session belonging to the first slice is permitted.
  • the information may be information indicating that there is not.
  • the first slice may be the slice indicated by the 71st identification information, or may be a different slice.
  • the 72nd identification information may be information indicating that establishment of a PDU session belonging to the first slice in the DN identified by the 25th identification information is not permitted, or by the 26th identification information.
  • the 72nd identification information may be information indicating that the registration area to which UE_A10 currently belongs, and/or that the establishment of the PDU session belonging to the first slice in the tracking area is not permitted, UE_A10 It may be information indicating that the establishment of the PDU session belonging to the first slice is not permitted in the access network to which is connected. The reason value indicating that this procedure indicated by the 72nd identification information is rejected is not limited to these. Further, the 72nd identification information may be information indicating the value of the first timer.
  • the UE_A10 may set the value indicated by the 72nd identification information in the first timer based on the reception of the 72nd identification information, or set the timer value set by another method. Alternatively, a random value may be set. Furthermore, the 72nd identification information may be an identifier that identifies the NW slice information to which the rejected PDU session request belongs. The NW slice indicated by the 72nd identification information may be the same NW slice as the NW slice indicated by the 71st identification information, or may be a different NW slice. Furthermore, the 72nd identification information may be an identifier that the NW instructs to reconnect after the PDU session is rejected. Further, the UE_A 10 may start execution of the set timer based on the rejection reason value, the NW slice information, and the identifier for instructing reconnection from the NW.
  • the 31st identification information in this embodiment is RQI (Reflective QoS Indication).
  • the RQI may be information indicating that RQoS is activated or information indicating that RQoS is activated. More specifically, the 31st identification information may be information indicating that RQoS is enabled for user data communication of downlink packets, or RQoS for user data communication of uplink packets. It may be information indicating activation. Furthermore, the 31st identification information may be information requesting creation of a QoS rule for user data communication of an uplink packet.
  • the 32nd identification information in this embodiment is QFI.
  • the 32nd identification information may be information identifying a QoS flow. Further, the 32nd identification information may be information indicating a flow in which a downlink packet with RQoS enabled is transferred, or information indicating a flow in which an uplink packet is transferred after enabling RQoS. It may be. Furthermore, the 32nd identification information may be information requesting that the user data communication of the uplink packet uses the QoS flow indicated by the 32nd identification information. Furthermore, the 32nd identification information may be information requesting the creation of a QoS rule for user data communication of an uplink packet using the QoS flow indicated by the 32nd identification information.
  • the forty-first identification information in this embodiment is information indicating that RQoS is requested by the initiative of the UE, or that activation of RQoS is requested by the initiative of the UE. More specifically, the 41st identification information may be information requesting activation of RQoS for user data communication of an uplink packet and/or a downlink packet. Furthermore, the 41st identification information may be information requesting creation of a QoS rule for user data communication of an uplink packet and/or a downlink packet. Furthermore, the 41st identification information may be information requesting the start of the network-initiated RQoS activation procedure.
  • the 42nd identification information in this embodiment is QFI (QoS Flow ID).
  • QFI is information used to identify a flow to which RQoS is applied.
  • the 42nd identification information may be information identifying a QoS flow.
  • the 42nd identification information may be information indicating a flow in which the uplink packet and/or the downlink packet is transferred after RQoS is enabled.
  • the 42nd identification information may be information requesting use of the QoS flow indicated by the 42nd identification information for user data communication of the uplink packet and/or the downlink packet.
  • the 42nd identification information may be information requesting the creation of a QoS rule for user data communication of an uplink packet and/or a downlink packet using the QoS flow indicated by the 42nd identification information. Good.
  • the 42nd identification information may be information requesting the start of the network-initiated RQoS activation procedure, or the RQoS indicating the QoS flow used in the network-initiated RQoS activation procedure indicated by the 42nd identification information. It may be information requesting a flow.
  • the 51st identification information in the present embodiment is information indicating that RQoS is not permitted (rejected), or information indicating that a request for enabling RQoS is not permitted (rejected). Furthermore, the 51st identification information may be information indicating the reason why the request of UE_A10 is rejected. Incidentally, the reason that the request of UE_A10 is rejected indicates that the access network to which UE_A10 is currently connected, and/or the registration area, and/or the tracking area is not permitted to enable RQoS. The information may be information, or may be information indicating that activation of RQoS is not permitted in the uplink packet for which UE_A10 has requested activation of RQoS.
  • the reason that the request of UE_A10 is rejected may be information indicating that the activation of RQoS is temporarily prohibited, or indicates that the UE-initiated RQoS activation procedure is prohibited. It may be information.
  • the reason why the request from UE_A10 is rejected may be information indicating that the network cannot accept the RQoS activation procedure initiated by the UE, and is not limited to this.
  • the 62nd identification information in this embodiment is the authentication/approval information issued by the DN acquired by the SMF_A230 in the authentication/approval procedure with the DN.
  • the 62nd identification information may be a service name that the DN authenticates/approves, or an approval flag.
  • the 62nd identification information may be information indicating that the DN_A5 indicates that the PDU session and/or the UE_A10 and/or the application is authenticated and/or authorized.
  • the 62nd identification information may be information requesting confirmation of the authentication/authorization information issued by the DN indicated by the 62nd identification information of the UE_A10 and/or the application and/or the user.
  • the 62nd identification information is information requesting service use selection from the service names of the UE_A10 and/or the application and/or the user that the DN indicated by the 62nd identification information authenticates/approves. May be.
  • the 63rd identification information in this embodiment is information indicating a response to the authentication/authorization information issued by the DN acquired by the SMF_A230 in the authentication/authorization procedure with the DN.
  • the 63rd identification information may be information indicating a message response to the 62nd identification information, information indicating the same content as the information indicated by the 62nd identification information, or the 62nd Information indicating the service name selected by the UE_A 10 from among the service names included in the identification information may be used.
  • the 63rd identification information, UE_A10, and/or the application, and/or the user is information indicating that the authentication/authorization information issued by the DN indicated by the 62nd identification information has been confirmed. Good.
  • the 63rd identification information is UE_A10, and/or the application, and/or the user, and the DN indicated by the 62nd identification information indicates that the service use selection is performed from the service names authenticated/approved. It may be information indicating. Furthermore, the 63rd identification information may be DN authentication approval response information.
  • the initial procedure in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the initial procedure includes the registration procedure (Registration procedure), PDU session establishment procedure (PDU session establishment procedure), and RQoS (Reflective QoS (Quality of Service)) activation procedure. Is included. Details of the registration procedure, PDU session establishment procedure, and RQoS activation procedure will be described later.
  • UE_A10 transitions to the state registered in the network (RM-REGISTERED state) when each device executes the registration procedure (S800).
  • each device executes the PDU session establishment procedure (S802), and UE_A10 establishes a PDU session with DN_A5 that provides the PDU connection service via the core network_B190, and the inter-device communication is performed. Transitions to the state where the PDU session is established.
  • this PDU session is assumed to be established via the access network, UPF_A235, but is not limited to this. That is, a UPF (UPF_C239) different from the UPF_A235 may exist between the UPF_A235 and the access network. At this time, this PDU session will be established via the access network, UPF_C239, and UPF_A235.
  • each device creates a specific QoS rule for specific user data by executing the RQoS activation procedure (S804). Furthermore, each device, based on the creation of a specific QoS rule, enters a state in which user data communication using a specific QoS flow associated with a specific QoS rule can be executed for specific user data. Transition.
  • each device executes the RQoS deactivation procedure and deletes the specific QoS rule for the specific user data. Furthermore, each device, based on the deletion of the specific QoS rule, moves to a state in which the user data communication using the specific QoS flow associated with the specific QoS rule cannot be executed for the specific user data. And transition. This procedure is complete.
  • each device may exchange various capability information and/or various request information of each device in the registration procedure and/or the PDU session establishment procedure. Further, when each device exchanges various information and/or negotiates various requests in the registration procedure, each device does not need to exchange various information and/or negotiate various requests in the PDU session establishment procedure. In addition, each device may perform the exchange of various information and/or the negotiation of various requests in the PDU session establishment procedure if the exchange of various information and/or the negotiation of various requests is not performed in the registration procedure. In addition, each device may exchange various information and/or negotiate various requests in the PDU session establishment procedure even when performing various information exchanges and/or various request negotiations in the registration procedure.
  • each device may execute the PDU session establishment procedure during the registration procedure or after the completion of the registration procedure.
  • the PDU session establishment request message may be included in the registration request message and may be transmitted/received
  • the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be included in the registration acceptance message.
  • the PDU session establishment completion message may be included in the registration completion message and transmitted/received
  • the PDU session establishment rejection message may be included in the registration rejection message and transmitted/received.
  • each device may establish the PDU session based on the completion of the registration procedure, or the PDU session may be established between the devices. You may make a transition.
  • each device involved in this procedure transmits and receives each control message described in this procedure, thereby transmitting and receiving one or more identification information included in each control message, and storing each transmitted and received identification information as a context. Good.
  • the registration procedure is a procedure for UE_A10 to register on the network (access network and/or core network_B190 and/or DN (DN_A5)) led by UE_A10.
  • UE_A10 must be registered in the network.
  • this procedure can be executed at any timing when the power is turned on, etc.
  • UE_A10 may start this procedure at any timing if it is in the non-registered state (RM-DEREGISTERED state). Further, each device may transit to the registration state (RM-REGISTERED state) based on the completion of the registration procedure.
  • this procedure updates the location registration information of the UE_A10 in the network, and / or, from the UE_A10 to the network to periodically notify the state of UE_A10, and / or to update specific parameters for the UE_A10 in the network. May be the procedure.
  • the UE_A10 may start this procedure when it moves across TAs. In other words, the UE_A 10 may start this procedure when moving to a TA different from the TA shown in the held TA list. Further, the UE_A10 may start this procedure when the running timer expires. Furthermore, the UE_A 10 may start this procedure when the context of each device needs to be updated due to disconnection or invalidation (also referred to as deactivation) of the PDU session. Further, the UE_A10 may start this procedure when the capability information and/or the preference regarding the PDU session establishment of the UE_A10 change. Furthermore, UE_A10 may start this procedure periodically. Note that the UE_A 10 is not limited to these, and if the PDU session is established, the UE_A 10 can execute this procedure at any timing.
  • UE_A10 starts the registration procedure by transmitting a Registration Request message to AMF_A240 via NRnode (also called gNB)_A122 (S900) (S902) (S904). Further, UE_A10, by including the SM (Session Management) message (e.g., PDU session establishment request message) in the registration request message, or by sending the SM message (e.g., PDU session establishment request message) together with the registration request message. By doing so, procedures for SM such as PDU session establishment procedure may be started during the registration procedure.
  • SM Session Management
  • UE_A10 transmits an RRC (Radio Resource Control) message including a registration request message to NR node_A122 (S900).
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the NR node_A 122 extracts the registration request message from the RRC message and selects AMF_A240 as the NF or the shared CP function of the routing destination of the registration request message (S902).
  • the NR node_A122 may select the AMF_A240 based on the information included in the RRC message.
  • the NR node_A122 transmits or transfers the registration request message to the selected AMF_A240 (S904).
  • the registration request message is a NAS (Non-Access-Stratum) message sent and received on the N1 interface.
  • the RRC message is a control message transmitted and received between the UE_A10 and the NR node_A122.
  • the NAS message is processed in the NAS layer, the RRC message is processed in the RRC layer, and the NAS layer is a layer higher than the RRC layer.
  • UE_A10 when there are a plurality of NSI requesting registration, may send a registration request message for each NSI, or send a plurality of registration request message, included in one or more RRC message. Good. Further, the plurality of registration request messages may be included in one or more RRC messages and transmitted as one registration request message.
  • the UE_A 10 may include one or more pieces of identification information among the first to eighth pieces of identification information, the 61st piece of identification information, and the 71st piece of identification information in the registration request message and/or the RRC message. Two or more pieces of identification information of these pieces of identification information may be configured as one or more pieces of identification information.
  • UE_A10 by transmitting one or more pieces of identification information among the first to eighth pieces of identification information in the registration request message and/or the RRC message, may indicate that UE_A10 supports RQoS, It may be required to transit to a state in which RQoS can be used.
  • UE_A10 by transmitting one or more pieces of identification information among the first to eighth pieces of identification information in the registration request message and/or the RRC message, may indicate that UE_A10 does not support RQoS. It may indicate that RQoS does not require transition to a usable state.
  • UE_A10 the first identification information, and / or second identification information, and / or sixth identification information, and / or 7 identification information in the registration request message and / or RRC message.
  • UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane, or request that the RQoS controlled via Control Plane transits to a usable state. May be.
  • UE_A10, the third identification information, and / or by transmitting without identifying the eighth identification information in the registration request message and / or RRC message, RQoS controlled via User Plane UE_A10. May not be supported, or may indicate that RQoS controlled via User Plane does not require transition to a usable state.
  • UE_A10 transmits the first identification information, and/or the second identification information, and/or the sixth identification information, and/or the seventh identification information included in the registration request message and/or the RRC message. By doing so, it may indicate that the UE_A10 does not support RQoS controlled via the Control Plane, or indicates that the RQoS controlled via the Control Plane does not require transition to a usable state. May be.
  • UE_A10 transmits the first identification information, and/or the third identification information, and/or the sixth identification information, and/or the eighth identification information included in the registration request message and/or the RRC message. By doing so, it may indicate that UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled via User Plane, or may request that RQoS controlled via User Plane transits to a usable state. .. In this case, UE_A10, the second identification information, and / or by transmitting without identifying the seventh identification information in the registration request message and / or RRC message, RQoS controlled via Control Plane UE_A10. May not be supported, or may indicate that RQoS controlled via the Control Plane does not require transition to a usable state.
  • UE_A10 transmits the first identification information, and/or the third identification information, and/or the sixth identification information, and/or the eighth identification information included in the registration request message and/or the RRC message. By doing so, it is possible to indicate that UE_A10 does not support RQoS controlled via User Plane, or to indicate that RQoS controlled via User Plane does not require transition to a usable state. May be.
  • UE_A10 the first to the third identification information, by transmitting one or more identification information and fourth identification information among the sixth to eighth identification information in association with each other, identified by the fourth identification information.
  • UE_A10 For the PDU session established for the DN to be established, it may be indicated whether UE_A10 supports RQoS, or whether it is required to make a transition to an available state for RQoS. Good.
  • UE_A10 the first to third identification information, by transmitting one or more identification information and fifth identification information among the sixth to eighth identification information in association with each other, identified by the fifth identification information.
  • the PDU session to be performed it may be indicated whether the UE_A 10 supports RQoS, or whether it is required to make a transition to an available state for RQoS.
  • UE_A10 by including one or more pieces of identification information among the first to eighth pieces of identification information in the registration request message and/or the RRC message, whether UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled by UE. This may be indicated, or it may be indicated whether or not the UE-controlled RQoS requires a transition to a usable state.
  • UE_A10 by including one or more pieces of identification information among the first to eighth pieces of identification information in the registration request message and/or the RRC message, whether or not UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled by the network. This may be indicated, or it may be indicated whether or not RQoS controlled by the network is required to transit to a usable state.
  • UE_A10 by transmitting the first identification information, or by transmitting the second identification information and the third identification information, or by transmitting the sixth identification information, or, By transmitting the seventh identification information and the eighth identification information, or, if two or more identification information of these identification information is configured as one or more identification information, one or more of them
  • UE_A10 may support RQoS controlled via Control Plane
  • UE_A10 may support RQoS controlled via User Plane, or User It may be required to make a transition to a state in which RQoS controlled via Plane can be used and a state to be able to use RQoS controlled via User Plane.
  • UE_A10 by including the 61st identification information, and/or the fourth identification information, and/or the fifth identification information in the registration request message and/or the RRC message, and transmitting the 3GPP interface (N6 interface). Service authentication/authorization by DN via the above), or the PDU session establishment authentication and authorization procedure may be requested in this procedure.
  • UE_A10 by transmitting the 61st identification information and the fourth identification information in association with each other, in the PDU session established for the DN identified by the fourth identification information, 3GPP Service authentication/authorization by DN_A5 via the interface may be requested, or execution of the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure may be requested in this procedure.
  • UE_A10 by transmitting the 61st identification information and the 5th identification information in association with each other, in the PDU session identified by the 5th identification information, service authentication/authorization by DN_A5 via the 3GPP interface. May be requested, or the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure may be requested to be executed in this procedure.
  • UE_A10 belongs to the network slice by transmitting by including the 71st identification information, and/or the fourth identification information, and/or the fifth identification information in the registration request message and/or the RRC message.
  • the establishment of a PDU session may be requested, the network slice to which the PDU session belongs requested by the UE_A 10 may be indicated, or the network slice to which the PDU session is due to belong may be indicated.
  • UE_A10 by transmitting the 71st identification information and the fourth identification information in association with each other, in the PDU session established for the DN identified by the fourth identification information, the network The establishment of a PDU session belonging to a slice may be requested, the network slice requested by UE_A10 to which the PDU session belongs may be indicated, or the network slice to which the PDU session is due to belong may be indicated.
  • UE_A10 by transmitting the 71st identification information and the fifth identification information in association with each other, in the PDU session identified by the fifth identification information, request establishment of a PDU session belonging to the network slice.
  • the UE_A10 may indicate the network slice to which the PDU session belongs, or the network slice to which the PDU session will belong.
  • UE_A10, the first to eighth identification information, the 61st identification information by transmitting a combination of two or more identification information of the 71st identification information, even when making a request combining the above matters. Good. Note that the matter indicated by the UE_A10 transmitting each piece of identification information is not limited to these.
  • UE_A10 the identification information of the first to eight, the 61st identification information, of the 71st identification information, which identification information to put in the registration request message, capability information of UE_A10, and / or UE policy etc. Policy and/or UE_A10 preference and/or application (upper layer). Note that the determination of which identification information is included in the registration request message by the UE_A 10 is not limited to this.
  • UE_A10 may include these pieces of identification information in a control message (for example, a NAS message or an RRC message) different from the registration request message, and transmit the control message.
  • a control message for example, a NAS message or an RRC message
  • AMF_A240 executes the first condition determination.
  • the first condition judgment is for judging whether AMF_A240 accepts the request of UE_A10.
  • the AMF_A240 determines whether the first condition determination is true or false.
  • AMF_A240 if the first condition determination is true (i.e., if the network accepts the request of UE_A10), starts the procedure (A) in this procedure, if the first condition determination is false (i.e. , If the network does not accept the request from UE_A10), start the procedure (B) in this procedure.
  • the AMF_A240 executes the fourth condition determination and starts the procedure (A) in this procedure.
  • the fourth condition determination is to determine whether the AMF_A240 performs SM message transmission/reception with the SMF_A230. In other words, the fourth condition determination may be performed by the AMF_A240 during this procedure to determine whether or not to execute the PDU session establishment procedure.
  • the AMF_A240 selects the SMF_A230 and transmits/receives the SM message to/from the selected SMF_A230 when the fourth condition determination is true (that is, when the AMF_A240 transmits/receives the SM message to/from the SMF_A230).
  • the AMF_A240 may stop the procedure (A) in this procedure and start the procedure (B) in this procedure.
  • AMF_A240 based on the reception of the registration request message from UE_A10, and/or the completion of the transmission and reception of the SM message with SMF_A230, through NR node_A122, transmits a registration acceptance (Registration Accept) message to UE_A10. (S908). For example, when the fourth condition determination is true, AMF_A240 may transmit the registration acceptance message based on the reception of the registration request message from UE_A10. Further, when the fourth condition determination is false, the AMF_A240 may send the registration acceptance message based on the completion of the transmission/reception of the SM message with the SMF_A230. Here, the registration acceptance message may be transmitted as a response message to the registration request message.
  • the registration acceptance message is a NAS message transmitted/received on the N1 interface, for example, AMF_A240 transmits to the NR node_A122 as a control message of the N2 interface, and the NR node_A122 that receives the RRC message is transmitted to the UE_A10. May be included and transmitted.
  • the AMF_A240 sends the registration acceptance message including the SM message (e.g., PDU session establishment acceptance message) or the SM message (e.g., PDU) together with the registration acceptance message. Session establishment acceptance message).
  • This transmission method may be executed when the SM message (for example, the PDU session establishment request message) is included in the registration request message and the fourth condition determination is true. Further, this transmission method may be executed when the SM message (for example, the PDU session establishment request message) is included together with the registration request message, and the fourth condition determination is true.
  • AMF_A240 may indicate that the procedure for the SM has been accepted by performing such a transmission method.
  • the registration acceptance message may include one or more pieces of identification information among the eleventh to nineteenth pieces of identification information, and by including these pieces of identification information, the request of UE_A10 is accepted. May be shown. Two or more pieces of identification information of these pieces of identification information may be configured as one or more pieces of identification information.
  • the AMF_A240 may indicate that the network supports RQoS by transmitting one or more pieces of identification information among the 11th to 19th pieces of identification information included in the registration acceptance message, and RQoS may be used. It may indicate that the request to transition to the state has been accepted.
  • AMF_A240 shall include the 11th identification information, and/or the 12th identification information, and/or the 17th identification information, and/or the 18th identification information in the registration acceptance message and transmit the same. It may indicate that the network supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane, or that the request to transition to the state where RQoS controlled via Control Plane is enabled is accepted. Good. In this case, the AMF_A240 sends the 13th identification information and/or the 19th identification information without including it in the registration acceptance message, thereby confirming that the network does not support RQoS controlled via the User Plane. It may be shown, or it may be shown that the request to transit to the state in which the RQoS controlled via the User Plane can be used is rejected.
  • AMF_A240 by transmitting the 11th identification information, and/or the 12th identification information, and/or the 17th identification information, and/or the 18th identification information included in the registration acceptance message, Control It may indicate that the network does not support RQoS controlled via Plane, or may indicate that the request for transitioning to the state in which RQoS controlled via Control Plane can be used is rejected.
  • AMF_A240 by including the 11th identification information, and/or the 13th identification information, and/or the 17th identification information, and/or the 19th identification information in the registration acceptance message, It may indicate that the network supports RQoS controlled via Plane, or may indicate that the request for transitioning to the state where RQoS controlled via User Plane can be used has been accepted.
  • the AMF_A240 sends the 12th identification information and/or the 18th identification information without including it in the registration acceptance message, thereby confirming that the network does not support RQoS controlled via the Control Plane. It may be shown, or it may be shown that the request to transit to the state in which the RQoS controlled through the Control Plane can be used is rejected.
  • AMF_A240 by transmitting the 11th identification information, and/or the 13th identification information, and/or the 17th identification information, and/or the 19th identification information included in the registration acceptance message, It may indicate that the network does not support RQoS controlled via Plane, or may indicate that the request for transitioning to the state in which RQoS controlled via User Plane can be used is rejected.
  • the AMF_A240 by transmitting one or more of the identification information of the 17th to 19th identification information and the 14th identification information in association with each other, identification by the 14th identification information. It may indicate whether the network supports RQoS for the PDU session established for the DN to be established, or whether the request to transition to the state where RQoS is available is accepted. Good.
  • the AMF_A240 by transmitting one or more of the identification information of the 17th to 19th identification information and the 15th identification information in association with each other, the AMF_A240 identifies the 15th identification information.
  • the PDU session to be performed it may be indicated whether the network supports RQoS, or whether the request for transitioning to the state where RQoS is available is accepted.
  • the AMF_A240 by including one or more pieces of identification information among the 11th to 19th pieces of identification information in the registration acceptance message, and indicating whether or not the network supports RQoS controlled by UE. Alternatively, it may indicate whether or not a request for transitioning to a state in which UE-controlled RQoS can be used is accepted.
  • the AMF_A240 indicates whether or not the network supports RQoS controlled by the network by transmitting one or more pieces of identification information among the 11th to 19th pieces of identification information included in the registration acceptance message. Alternatively, it may indicate whether or not the request for transitioning to the state in which RQoS controlled by the network is enabled is accepted.
  • the AMF_A240 is applied to user data communication by associating and transmitting one or more pieces of identification information among the 11th to 15th identification information and the 17th to 19th identification information and the 16th identification information.
  • the valid period of RQoS may be indicated, the valid period of RQoS after enabling RQoS for user data communication may be indicated, or the RQoS timer started when RQoS for user data communication is activated may be displayed. It may indicate the period until expiration.
  • UE_A10 by transmitting the eleventh identification information, or by transmitting the twelfth identification information and thirteenth identification information, or by transmitting the seventeenth identification information, or, By transmitting the eighteenth identification information and the nineteenth identification information, or, if two or more identification information of these identification information are configured as one or more identification information, one or more of them
  • the identification information it may be indicated that the network supports RQoS controlled via the Control Plane and the network supports RQoS controlled via the User Plane. It may indicate that the request to transit to the state in which the RQoS controlled via the above is accepted and the request to transit to the state in which the RQoS controlled via the User Plane is available are accepted.
  • the AMF_A240 may make a request that combines the above-mentioned matters by combining and transmitting two or more pieces of identification information among the 11th to 19th pieces of identification information. Note that the fact that AMF_A240 transmits each piece of identification information is not limited to these.
  • AMF_A240 of the 11th to 19th identification information, which identification information to put in the registration acceptance message, the received identification information, and/or network capability information, and/or operator policy, and/or Alternatively, it may be determined based on the network status and/or user registration information (user subscription).
  • the eleventh identification information, and/or the seventeenth identification information if the network supports RQoS, and/or the first to third identification information, and/or the sixth to eighth identification information. It may be information transmitted when received. Furthermore, the twelfth identification information, and/or the eighteenth identification information, if the network supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane, and/or the first to third identification information, and/or It may be information transmitted when the sixth to eighth identification information is received. Furthermore, the thirteenth identification information, and/or the nineteenth identification information, if the network supports RQoS controlled via User Plane, and/or the first to third identification information, and/or It may be information transmitted when the sixth to eighth identification information is received.
  • the 14th identification information may be information indicating the same DNN as the DNN indicated by the fourth identification information, or may be information indicating a different DNN.
  • the fifteenth identification information may be information indicating the same PDU session ID as the PDU session ID indicated by the fifth identification information, or may be information indicating a different PDU session ID. Note that the determination of which identification information is included in the registration acceptance message by AMF_A240 is not limited to this.
  • UE_A10 receives the registration acceptance message via NRnode_A122 (S908). Upon receiving the registration acceptance message, UE_A10 recognizes the contents of various identification information included in the registration acceptance message.
  • UE_A10 further executes the first process based on the reception of the registration acceptance message (S909). It should be noted that the UE_A 10 may perform the first process based on the transmission of the registration completion message or may perform the first process based on the completion of this procedure.
  • the first process may be a process in which UE_A10 recognizes the matter indicated by AMF_A240. Furthermore, the first process may be a process in which the UE_A10 stores the received identification information as a context, or may be a process of transferring the received identification information to an upper layer and/or a lower layer. .. Furthermore, the first process may be a process in which the UE_A10 recognizes that the request for this procedure has been accepted.
  • the first process is UE_A10, the RQoS activation procedure, at any timing after the PDU session is established. It may be a process of transitioning to an executable state or a process of starting the RQoS enabling procedure after the PDU session is established.
  • the first process It may be a process of transitioning the RQoS activation procedure controlled via the Control Plane to an executable state at an arbitrary timing after the PDU session is established. Furthermore, if the UE_A10 receives the 11th identification information, and/or the 13th identification information, and/or the 17th identification information, and/or the 19th identification information, the first processing is UserPlane. It may be a process of transiting the RQoS activation procedure controlled via the VoIP session to an executable state at an arbitrary timing after the PDU session is established.
  • the first process is UE_A10
  • the 16th identification information indicates the value of RQoS. It may be a process of setting a timer value. The first process is not limited to these processes.
  • the UE_A10 transmits a Registration Complete message to the AMF_A240 based on the reception of the registration acceptance message and/or the completion of the first process (S910).
  • the registration completion message may be transmitted by including the SM message such as the PDU session establishment completion message, or by including the SM message. , May indicate to complete the procedure for SM.
  • the registration completion message may be transmitted as a response message to the registration acceptance message.
  • the registration completion message is a NAS message transmitted and received on the N1 interface.
  • UE_A10 transmits to the NR node_A122 by including it in the RRC message, and the NR node_A122 that receives this transmits the N2 interface to the AMF_A240. It may be transmitted as a control message.
  • AMF_A240 receives the registration completion message (S910). Further, each device completes the procedure (A) in this procedure based on the transmission and reception of the registration acceptance message and/or the registration completion message.
  • the AMF_A240 starts the procedure of (B) in this procedure by transmitting a Registration Reject message to the UE_A10 via the NR node_A122 (S912).
  • the registration refusal message may be transmitted as a response message to the registration request message.
  • the registration rejection message is a NAS message transmitted/received on the N1 interface.
  • AMF_A240 transmits it to the NR node_A122 as a control message of the N2 interface, and the NR node_A122 that receives this message is an RRC message to the UE_A10. May be included and transmitted.
  • the registration refusal message transmitted by AMF_A240 is not limited to this as long as it is a message that rejects the request of UE_A10.
  • the procedure (B) in this procedure may be started when the procedure (A) in this procedure is stopped.
  • the AMF_A240 may send a registration rejection message including an SM message indicating rejection such as a PDU session establishment rejection message, or may reject the rejection.
  • the inclusion of the implied SM message may indicate that the procedure for SM has been rejected.
  • the UE_A 10 may further receive an SM message indicating rejection such as a PDU session establishment rejection message, or may recognize that the procedure for SM has been rejected.
  • AMF_A240 the registration rejection message, the identification information of the 21st to 29th, may include one or more identification information of the 72nd identification information, by including these identification information, the request of UE_A10 May be rejected. Two or more pieces of identification information of these pieces of identification information may be configured as one or more pieces of identification information.
  • the AMF_A240 may indicate that the network does not support RQoS by transmitting one or more pieces of identification information out of the 21st to 29th identification information included in the registration refusal message, or RQoS can be used. It may indicate that the request to transition to the state has been rejected.
  • AMF_A240 is the 21st identification information, and/or the 22nd identification information, and/or the 23rd identification information, and/or the 27th identification information, and/or the 28th identification information. By including it in the registration refusal message, it may indicate that the network does not support RQoS controlled via Control Plane, or transit to a state where RQoS controlled via Control Plane can be used. It may indicate that the request was rejected. In this case, the AMF_A240 sends the 24th identification information and/or the 29th identification information without including it in the registration refusal message so that the network supports RQoS controlled via the User Plane. It may be shown, or it may be shown that the request to transit to the state in which the RQoS controlled through the User Plane can be used is accepted.
  • AMF_A240 the 21st identification information, and / or 22nd identification information, and / or 24th identification information, and / or 27th identification information, and / or 29th identification information registration refusal message.
  • AMF_A240 may indicate that the network supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane by transmitting without including the 23rd identification information and/or the 28th identification information. However, it may indicate that the request to transit to the state in which the RQoS controlled through the Control Plane can be used has been accepted.
  • the AMF_A240 transmits the 21st identification information, and/or associates the 22nd to 24th identification information and the 27th to 29th identification information with one or more identification information and the 25th identification information. Indicates that the network does not support RQoS for the PDU session established for the DN identified by the fourth identification information and/or the 25th identification information received by AMF_A240. It may indicate that the request for transitioning to the RQoS enabled state has been rejected.
  • the AMF_A240 transmits the 21st identification information, and/or associates the 26th identification information with one or more identification information of the 22nd to 24th identification information and the 27th to 29th identification information.
  • the fifth identification information received by AMF_A240, and / or for the PDU session identified by the 26th identification information may indicate that the network does not support RQoS, RQoS is It may indicate that the request to transition to the usable state has been rejected.
  • AMF_A240 by including one or more pieces of identification information among the 21st to 29th pieces of identification information in the registration refusal message, UE_A10 is currently in a registration area (Registration Area: RA), and/or For the tracking area (Tracking Area: TA), it may be indicated that the network does not support RQoS, or that the request to transit to a state in which RQoS can be used is rejected.
  • Registration Area: RA Registration Area
  • TA For the tracking area
  • AMF_A240 by including one or more pieces of identification information among the 21st to 29th pieces of identification information in the registration refusal message, and transmitting the access network to which UE_A10 is currently connected, the network does not support RQoS. May be indicated, or that the request to transit to the state in which RQoS is available may be rejected.
  • AMF_A240 may indicate that the network does not support RQoS controlled by UE by transmitting one or more pieces of identification information among the 21st to 29th pieces of identification information included in the registration rejection message. , It may indicate that the request to transit to the state in which UE-controlled RQoS is enabled is rejected.
  • the AMF_A240 may indicate that the network does not support RQoS controlled by the network by transmitting one or more pieces of identification information included in the 21st to 29th identification information in the registration refusal message. , It may indicate that the request to transit to a network-initiated controlled RQoS enabled state is rejected.
  • UE_A10 by transmitting the 21st identification information, or, by transmitting the 22nd identification information, or by transmitting the 23rd identification information and the 24th identification information, or, By transmitting the 27th identification information, or by transmitting the 28th identification information and the 29th identification information, or, two or more identification information of these identification information is configured as one or more identification information If more than one of them is transmitted, the network does not support RQoS controlled via Control Plane, and the network does not support RQoS controlled via User Plane. May not be supported, or the request to transit to the state where RQoS controlled via Control Plane can be used is rejected, and the state where RQoS controlled via User Plane becomes available It may indicate that the request to transition is rejected.
  • AMF_A240 by including the 72nd identification information, and/or the 25th identification information, and/or the 26th identification information in the registration refusal message, thereby establishing the PDU session belonging to the network slice. It may indicate that the request was rejected, the network slice that the PDU session was not allowed to belong to, or the network slice that the PDU session was denied to belong to.
  • the AMF_A240 transmits the 72nd identification information and the 25th identification information in association with each other, in the PDU session established for the DN identified by the 25th identification information, in the network. It may indicate that the request to establish the PDU session belonging to the slice has been rejected, or it may indicate a network slice that is not allowed to belong to the PDU session.
  • the AMF_A240 sends the 61st identification information and the 26th identification information in association with each other, thereby requesting the establishment of the PDU session belonging to the network slice in the PDU session identified by the 26th identification information. May be rejected, or it may indicate a network slice that is not allowed to belong to the PDU session.
  • AMF_A240 by including the 72nd identification information included in the registration rejection message, in the registration area to which UE_A10 currently belongs, and/or in the tracking area, the establishment of the PDU session belonging to the network slice is confirmed. It may indicate that the request has been denied, or it may indicate a network slice that is not allowed to belong to the PDU session.
  • AMF_A240 by including the 72nd identification information in the registration reject message, in the access network to which UE_A10 is currently connected, the request for establishment of the PDU session belonging to the network slice is rejected. It may indicate a network slice that is not permitted to belong to the PDU session.
  • the AMF_A240 may indicate the value of the first timer by including the 72nd identification information in the registration refusal message, and after completing this procedure, the same procedure as this procedure should be performed again. You may indicate whether or not it is.
  • the AMF_A240 may make a request that combines the above-mentioned matters by transmitting a combination of two or more pieces of identification information of the 21st to 29th identification information and/or the 72nd identification information. Note that the fact that AMF_A240 transmits each piece of identification information is not limited to these.
  • AMF_A240 is the identification information received from the 21st to 29th identification information and the 72nd identification information, which identification information is to be included in the registration refusal message, and/or the capability information of the network, and/or It may be determined based on a policy such as an operator policy and/or the state of the network.
  • the 21st identification information may be information transmitted when the network does not support RQoS and/or when one or more identification information items among the identification information items 1 to 8 are received. .. Furthermore, the 22nd identification information, and / or 27th identification information, if the network does not support RQoS, and / or 1 to 3 identification information, and / or 6 to 8 identification information It may be information transmitted when received. Furthermore, the 23rd identification information, and / or 28th identification information, if the network supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane, and / or 1 to 3 identification information, and / or It may be information transmitted when the sixth to eighth identification information is received. Furthermore, the 24th identification information, and/or the 29th identification information, when the network supports RQoS controlled via User Plane, and/or the first to third identification information, and/or It may be information transmitted when the sixth to eighth identification information is received.
  • the 25th identification information may be information indicating the same DNN as the DNN indicated by the fourth identification information.
  • the 26th identification information may be information indicating the same PDU session ID as the PDU session ID indicated by the fifth identification information.
  • the 72nd identification information may be information transmitted when the 71st identification information is received and/or when the network slice indicated by the 71st identification information is not permitted by the network. The determination by AMF_A240 which identification information is included in the registration refusal message is not limited to this.
  • UE_A10 receives the registration refusal message.
  • UE_A10 performs the second process based on the reception of the registration refusal message (S914). Further, the UE_A10 may perform the second process based on the completion of this procedure.
  • the second process may be a process in which UE_A10 recognizes the matter indicated by AMF_A240. Furthermore, the second process may be a process in which the UE_A10 stores the received identification information as a context, or may be a process of transferring the received identification information to an upper layer and/or a lower layer. .. Further, the second process may be a process in which the UE_A10 recognizes that the request for this procedure is rejected.
  • the second process is UE_A10, a process of transitioning to a state in which the RQoS enabling procedure is not executable, or RQoS. It may be to maintain the non-application state.
  • the second process It may be a process of transiting to a state in which the RQoS activation procedure controlled via the Control Plane is not executable. Furthermore, if the UE_A10 receives the 22nd identification information, and/or the 24th identification information, and/or the 27th identification information, and/or the 29th identification information, the second process is the UserPlane. The processing may be a process of transiting to a state in which the RQoS enabling procedure controlled via the non-executable state.
  • the second process UE_A10 may be a process of setting the value indicated by the 72nd identification information as the first timer value, the timer value. It may be a process of starting the first timer having set. Furthermore, when the UE_A10 receives the 72nd identification information, the second process may be a process of executing one or more of the first to eleventh behaviors.
  • the second process may be a process in which the UE_A10 may start the procedure again after a certain period of time, and a process in which the request of the UE_A10 transits to a limited state.
  • the second process is not limited to these processes.
  • UE_A10 may recognize that the request of UE_A10 is rejected by receiving the registration refusal message or by not receiving the registration acceptance message.
  • Each device completes the procedure (B) in this procedure based on the transmission and reception of the registration refusal message.
  • Each device completes this procedure (registration procedure) based on the completion of procedure (A) or (B) in this procedure.
  • Each device may transition to the state (RM_REGISTERED state) in which UE_A10 is registered in the network based on the completion of the procedure (A) during this procedure, or the procedure (B) during this procedure.
  • the UE_A10 may maintain the state (RM_DEREGISTERED state) in which the UE_A10 is not registered in the network based on the completion of the.
  • the transition of each device to each state may be performed based on the completion of this procedure or may be performed based on the establishment of the PDU session.
  • each device may perform processing based on the identification information transmitted and received in this procedure based on the completion of this procedure.
  • the UE_A 10 may perform the first process or the second process based on the completion of this procedure.
  • the first condition determination may be executed based on the identification information and/or the subscriber information and/or the operator policy included in the registration request message. For example, the first condition determination may be true when the network permits the request of UE_A10. Further, the first condition determination may be false if the network does not permit the request of UE_A10. Further, the first condition determination, the network of the UE_A10 registration destination, and / or devices in the network, the function requested by UE_A10 may be true if it supports, false if it does not support. Good. Furthermore, the first condition determination may be true when the network is determined to be in a congestion state, and may be false when it is determined that the network is not in a congestion state. The condition that determines whether the first condition determination is true or false is not limited to the condition described above.
  • the fourth condition determination may be executed based on whether the AMF_A240 has received the SM, or may be executed based on whether the registration request message includes the SM message. For example, the fourth condition determination may be true if the AMF_A240 receives the SM and/or the SM message is included in the registration request message, if the AMF_A240 does not receive the SM, and / Or it may be false if the SM message was not included in the registration request message.
  • the condition that determines whether the fourth condition determination is true or false is not limited to the condition described above.
  • This procedure is a procedure for each device to establish a PDU session. It should be noted that each device may execute this procedure in a state where the registration procedure is completed, or may be executed during the registration procedure. Further, each device may start this procedure in the registered state, or may start this procedure at any timing after the registration procedure. Further, each device may establish a PDU session based on the completion of the PDU session establishment procedure. Furthermore, each device may establish a plurality of PDU sessions by executing this procedure a plurality of times.
  • PDU session establishment procedure example An example of a procedure for executing the PDU session establishment procedure will be described with reference to FIG. Each step of this procedure will be described below.
  • UE_A10 starts a PDU session establishment procedure by transmitting a PDU Session Establishment Request message (PDU Session Establishment Request) to SMF_A230 via NR node_A122 and AMF_A240 (S1000) (S1002) (S1004).
  • PDU Session Establishment Request PDU Session Establishment Request
  • UE_A10 transmits a PDU session establishment request message to AMF_A240 via NR node_A122 using the N1 interface (S1000).
  • the AMF_A240 selects SMF_A230 as the NF of the routing destination of the PDU session establishment request message (S1002), and transmits the PDU session establishment request message to the selected SMF_A230 using the N11 interface, or Transfer (S1004).
  • the AMF_A240 may select the routing destination SMF_A230 based on the information included in the PDU session establishment request message.
  • AMF_A240 is each identification information acquired based on the reception of the PDU session establishment request message, and / or subscriber information, and / or network capability information, and / or operator policy, and / or network
  • the routing destination SMF_A 230 may be selected based on the state and/or the context that the AMF_A 240 already holds.
  • the PDU session establishment request message may be a NAS message. Further, the PDU session establishment request message is not limited to this as long as it is a message requesting establishment of a PDU session.
  • UE_A10 the PDU session establishment request message, the identification information of the first to eighth, 61st identification information, may include one or more identification information of the 71st identification information, these identification information May be included to indicate the request of UE_A10. Two or more pieces of identification information of these pieces of identification information may be configured as one or more pieces of identification information.
  • UE_A10 may indicate that R_QoS is supported by UE_A10 by including one or more pieces of identification information among the first to eighth pieces of identification information in the PDU session establishment request message and used by RQoS. It may be required to transition to a possible state.
  • UE_A10 may indicate that UE_A10 does not support RQoS by transmitting by including one or more pieces of identification information in the PDU session establishment request message among the first to eighth pieces of identification information, and used by RQoS. It may indicate that the transition to a possible state is not required.
  • the UE_A10 transmits the first identification information, and/or the second identification information, and/or the sixth identification information, and/or the seventh identification information included in the PDU session establishment request message. By doing so, it may indicate that UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane, or may request that RQoS controlled via Control Plane transits to a usable state. .. In this case, UE_A10 does not support RQoS controlled via User Plane by transmitting without including the third identification information and/or the eighth identification information in the PDU session establishment request message. This may be indicated, or it may be indicated that RQoS controlled via the User Plane is not required to transit to a usable state.
  • UE_A10 by including the first identification information, and / or second identification information, and / or sixth identification information, and / or seventh identification information included in the PDU session establishment request message. , It may indicate that UE_A10 does not support RQoS controlled via Control Plane, or may indicate that RQoS controlled via Control Plane does not require transition to an available state. ..
  • UE_A10 by including the first identification information, and / or third identification information, and / or sixth identification information, and / or eighth identification information in the PDU session establishment request message by transmitting.
  • UE_A10 may support RQoS controlled via User Plane, or may request that RQoS controlled via User Plane transits to a usable state.
  • UE_A10 does not support RQoS controlled via Control Plane by transmitting the second identification information and/or the seventh identification information without including it in the PDU session establishment request message. This may be indicated, or it may be indicated that RQoS controlled via the Control Plane does not require transition to an available state.
  • UE_A10 by including the first identification information, and / or third identification information, and / or sixth identification information, and / or eighth identification information in the PDU session establishment request message by transmitting. , It may indicate that UE_A10 does not support RQoS controlled via User Plane, or it may indicate that RQoS controlled via User Plane does not require transition to an available state. ..
  • UE_A10 the first to the third identification information, by transmitting one or more identification information and fourth identification information among the sixth to eighth identification information in association with each other, identified by the fourth identification information.
  • UE_A10 For the PDU session established for the DN to be established, it may be indicated whether UE_A10 supports RQoS, or whether it is required to make a transition to an available state for RQoS. Good.
  • UE_A10 the first to third identification information, by transmitting one or more identification information and fifth identification information among the sixth to eighth identification information in association with each other, identified by the fifth identification information.
  • the PDU session to be performed it may be indicated whether the UE_A 10 supports RQoS, or whether it is required to make a transition to an available state for RQoS.
  • UE_A10 by including one or more pieces of identification information among the first to eighth pieces of identification information in the PDU session establishment request message, and indicating whether UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled by UE. Alternatively, it may indicate whether or not to request the RQoS controlled by UE to transit to a usable state.
  • UE_A10 by transmitting one or more pieces of identification information among the first to eighth pieces of identification information included in the PDU session establishment request message, indicating whether or not UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled by network initiative. Alternatively, it may indicate whether or not the network-controlled RQoS requires transition to a usable state.
  • UE_A10 by transmitting the first identification information, or by transmitting the second identification information and the third identification information, or by transmitting the sixth identification information, or, By transmitting the seventh identification information and the eighth identification information, or, if two or more identification information of these identification information is configured as the identification information of one or more identification information, among them By transmitting one or more pieces of identification information, UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane, and may indicate that UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled via User Plane, Alternatively, it may be requested to transit to a state where RQoS controlled via the User Plane can be used and to transit to a state where RQoS controlled via the User Plane can be used.
  • UE_A10 by including the 61st identification information, and / or fourth identification information, and / or fifth identification information included in the PDU session establishment request message, 3GPP interface (N6 interface and the like). You may request service authentication/authorization by DN via this, or you may request to perform the PDU session establishment authentication authorization procedure in this procedure.
  • UE_A10 by transmitting the 61st identification information and the fourth identification information in association with each other, in the PDU session established for the DN identified by the fourth identification information, 3GPP Service authentication/authorization by DN_A5 via the interface may be requested, or execution of the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure may be requested in this procedure.
  • UE_A10 by transmitting the 61st identification information and the 5th identification information in association with each other, in the PDU session identified by the 5th identification information, service authentication/authorization by DN_A5 via the 3GPP interface. May be requested, or the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure may be requested to be executed in this procedure.
  • UE_A10 by including the 71st identification information, and / or fourth identification information, and / or fifth identification information included in the PDU session establishment request message, the PDU session belonging to the network slice.
  • the establishment may be requested, the network slice to which the PDU session belongs, which the UE_A10 requests, may be indicated, or the network slice to which the PDU session is due to belong may be indicated.
  • UE_A10 by transmitting the 71st identification information and the fourth identification information in association with each other, in the PDU session established for the DN identified by the fourth identification information, the network The establishment of a PDU session belonging to a slice may be requested, the network slice requested by UE_A10 to which the PDU session belongs may be indicated, or the network slice to which the PDU session is due to belong may be indicated.
  • UE_A10 by transmitting the 61st identification information and the fifth identification information in association with each other, in the PDU session identified by the fifth identification information, request establishment of a PDU session belonging to the network slice.
  • the UE_A10 may indicate the network slice to which the PDU session belongs, or the network slice to which the PDU session will belong.
  • UE_A10, the first to eighth identification information, the 61st identification information by transmitting a combination of two or more identification information of the 71st identification information, even when making a request combining the above matters. Good. Note that the matter indicated by the UE_A10 transmitting each piece of identification information is not limited to these.
  • UE_A10 the identification information of the first to eight, the 61st identification information, of the 71st identification information, which identification information to put in the PDU session establishment request message, capability information of UE_A10, and / or UE It may be determined based on a policy such as a policy and/or a preference of UE_A10 and/or an application (upper layer). Note that the determination of which identification information is included in the PDU session establishment request message by the UE_A 10 is not limited to this.
  • ⁇ SMF_A230 receives the PDU session establishment request message and executes the third condition judgment.
  • the third condition determination is for the SMF_A230 to determine whether to accept the request of the UE_A10. In the third condition determination, the SMF_A230 determines whether the third condition determination is true or false.
  • the SMF_A230 starts the procedure (A) in this procedure when the third condition determination is true, and starts the procedure (B) in this procedure when the third condition determination is false. The steps when the third condition judgment is false will be described later.
  • SMF_A230 if the PDU session establishment request message includes SM PDU DN Request Container that includes the 61st identification information, and the 61st identification information conforms to the local policy and/or user subscriber information. , PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure is started (S1005). On the other hand, when the SMPDUN Request Request Container is not included in the PDU session establishment request message, the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure is omitted. Details of the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure will be described later.
  • the SMF_A230 that started the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure sends a session establishment request message to the selected UPF_A235 (S1006), and starts the procedure of (A) in this procedure. ..
  • the SMF_A 230 may start the procedure (B) in this procedure based on the completion of the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure, without starting the procedure (A) in this procedure.
  • SMF_A230 each identification information acquired based on the reception of the PDU session establishment request message, and / or network capability information, and / or subscriber information, and / or operator policy, and / or network status, And/or one or more UPF_A 235 may be selected based on the context that SMF_A 230 already holds.
  • the SMF_A230 may send a session establishment request message to each UPF_A235.
  • UPF_A235 receives the session establishment request message and creates a context for the PDU session. Further, the UPF_A 235 receives the session establishment request message and/or transmits the session establishment response (Session Establishment response) message to the SMF_A 230 based on the creation of the context for the PDU session (S1008). Further, SMF_A230 receives the session establishment response message.
  • the session establishment request message and the session establishment response message may be control messages transmitted and received on the N4 interface. Further, the session establishment response message may be a response message to the session establishment request message.
  • the SMF_A230 may perform the address assignment of the address assigned to the UE_A10 based on the reception of the PDU session establishment request message and/or the selection of the UPF_A235 and/or the reception of the session establishment response message.
  • the SMF_A 230 may perform the address assignment of the address assigned to the UE_A 10 during the PDU session establishment procedure or after the PDU session establishment procedure is completed.
  • the SMF_A230 may perform address allocation during the PDU session establishment procedure or may send the allocated address to UE_A10. Furthermore, SMF_A230, when assigning an IPv4 address using DHCPv4 or DHCPv6 or SLAAC (Stateless Address Autoconfiguration), and/or an IPv6 address, and/or an IPv6 prefix, after the PDU session establishment procedure, the address may be assigned, The assigned address may be sent to UE_A10.
  • the address allocation performed by SMF_A230 is not limited to these.
  • SMF_A230 may include the assigned address in the PDU session establishment acceptance message and send it to UE_A10 based on the completion of the address assignment of the address to be assigned to UE_A10, or send it to UE_A10 after the completion of the PDU session establishment procedure. You may.
  • the SMF_A230 receives the PDU session establishment request message, and/or selects the UPF_A235, and/or receives the session establishment response message, and/or based on the completion of the address assignment of the address assigned to the UE_A10, to the UE_A10 via the AMF_A240.
  • the SMF_A230 sends a PDU session establishment acceptance message to the AMF_A240 using the N11 interface
  • the AMF_A240 receiving the PDU session establishment acceptance message sends a PDU session establishment acceptance message to the UE_A10 using the N1 interface. ..
  • the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be a PDN connection acceptance (PDN connectivity accept) message. Further, the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be a NAS message transmitted/received on the N11 interface and the N1 interface.
  • the PDU session establishment acceptance message is not limited to this, and may be a message indicating that the establishment of the PDU session has been accepted.
  • the PDU session establishment acceptance message may include one or more pieces of identification information from the 11th to 19th identification information, by including these pieces of identification information, the request of UE_A10 was accepted. May be indicated. Two or more pieces of identification information of these pieces of identification information may be configured as one or more pieces of identification information.
  • the SMF_A230 may indicate that the network supports RQoS by transmitting one or more pieces of identification information among the 11th to 19th pieces of identification information included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message, and may be used by RQoS. It may indicate that the request to transition to a possible state has been accepted.
  • the SMF_A230 transmits the 11th identification information, and/or the 12th identification information, and/or the 17th identification information, and/or the 18th identification information in the PDU session establishment acceptance message. By doing so, it may be indicated that the network supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane, or that the request to transition to the state where RQoS controlled via Control Plane can be used is accepted. May be shown. In this case, the SMF_A230 sends the 13th identification information and/or the 19th identification information without including it in the PDU session establishment acceptance message, so that the network does not support RQoS controlled via the User Plane. This may be indicated, or it may be indicated that the request for transitioning to the state in which RQoS controlled via the User Plane can be used is rejected.
  • SMF_A230 by including the 11th identification information, and/or the 12th identification information, and/or the 17th identification information, and/or the 18th identification information in the PDU session establishment acceptance message. , It may indicate that the network does not support RQoS controlled via Control Plane, or it may indicate that the request to transition to the state where RQoS controlled via Control Plane can be used is rejected. Good.
  • SMF_A230 by including the 11th identification information, and/or the 13th identification information, and/or the 17th identification information, and/or the 19th identification information in the PDU session establishment acceptance message. , May indicate that the network supports RQoS controlled via User Plane, or may indicate that a request to transition to a state in which RQoS controlled via User Plane can be used has been accepted. .. In this case, the SMF_A230 transmits the 12th identification information and/or the 18th identification information without including it in the registration acceptance message, thereby confirming that the network does not support RQoS controlled via the Control Plane. It may be shown or it may be shown that the request to transit to the state in which RQoS controlled via the Control Plane can be used is rejected.
  • SMF_A230 by including the 11th identification information, and/or the 13th identification information, and/or the 17th identification information, and/or the 19th identification information in the PDU session establishment acceptance message. , May indicate that the network does not support RQoS controlled via User Plane, or may indicate that the request to transition to the state where RQoS controlled via User Plane can be used is rejected. ..
  • the SMF_A230 identifies the 14th identification information by transmitting the 11th to 13th identification information, the 1st or more identification information of the 17th to 19th identification information and the 14th identification information in association with each other. It may indicate whether the network supports RQoS for the PDU session established for the DN to be established, or whether the request to transition to the state where RQoS is available is accepted. Good.
  • the SMF_A230 identifies the 15th identification information by transmitting the 11th to 13th identification information and the 15th identification information by correlating one or more identification information among the 17th to 19th identification information. For the PDU session to be performed, it may be indicated whether or not the network supports RQoS, or it may be indicated whether or not the request to transit to the state in which RQoS is available is accepted.
  • SMF_A230 indicates whether the network supports UE-controlled RQoS by transmitting one or more pieces of identification information among the 11th to 19th pieces of identification information included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message. Alternatively, it may indicate whether or not the request to make a transition to a state in which RQoS controlled by the UE is enabled is accepted.
  • the SMF_A230 indicates whether or not the network supports RQoS controlled by the network by transmitting one or more pieces of identification information among the 11th to 19th pieces of identification information included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message. Alternatively, it may indicate whether or not a request to transit to a state in which RQoS controlled by the network is enabled is accepted.
  • the SMF_A230 is applied to user data communication by associating and transmitting one or more pieces of identification information among the eleventh to fifteenth identification information and the seventeenth to nineteenth identification information and the sixteenth identification information.
  • the RQoS valid period may be indicated, the RQoS effective period may be indicated after enabling RQoS for user data communication, or the RQoS timer started when RQoS is enabled for user data communication may be indicated. It may indicate the period until expiration.
  • UE_A10 by transmitting the eleventh identification information, or by transmitting the twelfth identification information and thirteenth identification information, or by transmitting the seventeenth identification information, or, By transmitting the eighteenth identification information and the nineteenth identification information, or when two or more identification information items of these identification information items are configured as the identification information items of one or more identification information items, among them.
  • the network supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane, and that the network supports RQoS controlled via User Plane, Indicates that the request to transition to the state where RQoS controlled via the Control Plane can be used has been accepted, and the request to transition to the state where RQoS controlled to be controlled via the User Plane has been accepted. Good.
  • the SMF_A230 may make a request that combines the above-mentioned matters by transmitting a combination of two or more pieces of identification information among the 11th to 19th pieces of identification information. It should be noted that the matters indicated by the SMF_A 230 transmitting each piece of identification information are not limited to these.
  • SMF_A230 the identification information received from the 11th to 19th identification information, which identification information to put in the PDU session establishment acceptance message, and/or the capability information of the network, and/or operator policy, etc. It may be determined based on the policy and/or the state of the network.
  • the eleventh identification information, and/or the seventeenth identification information if the network supports RQoS, and/or the first to third identification information, and/or the sixth to eighth identification information. It may be information transmitted when received. Furthermore, the twelfth identification information, and/or the eighteenth identification information, if the network supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane, and/or the first to third identification information, and/or It may be information transmitted when the sixth to eighth identification information is received. Furthermore, the thirteenth identification information, and/or the nineteenth identification information, if the network supports RQoS controlled via User Plane, and/or the first to third identification information, and/or It may be information transmitted when the sixth to eighth identification information is received.
  • the 14th identification information may be information indicating the same DNN as the DNN indicated by the fourth identification information, or may be information indicating a different DNN.
  • the fifteenth identification information may be information indicating the same PDU session ID as the PDU session ID indicated by the fifth identification information, or may be information indicating a different PDU session ID. Note that the determination by SMF_A230 which identification information is included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message is not limited to this.
  • UE_A10 receives the PDU session establishment acceptance message. Upon receiving the PDU session establishment acceptance message, UE_A10 recognizes the contents of various identification information included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message.
  • UE_A10 further executes the third processing based on the reception of the PDU session establishment acceptance message (S1012). Note that the UE_A 10 may perform the third process based on the transmission of the PDU session establishment completion message or may be performed based on the completion of this procedure.
  • the third process may be a process in which the UE_A10 recognizes the matter indicated by the SMF_A230. Furthermore, the third process may be a process in which the UE_A10 stores the received identification information as a context, or may be a process of transferring the received identification information to an upper layer and/or a lower layer. .. Furthermore, the third process may be a process in which the UE_A10 recognizes that the request for this procedure has been accepted.
  • the third process is a process in which UE_A10 transitions the RQoS enabling procedure to an executable state at any timing. It may be present or it may be the process of starting the RQoS activation procedure.
  • the third processing is, It may be a process of transitioning the RQoS activation procedure controlled via the Control Plane to a state in which it can be executed at an arbitrary timing. Furthermore, if the UE_A10 receives the 11th identification information, and/or the 13th identification information, and/or the 17th identification information, and/or the 19th identification information, the third processing is the UserPlane. It may be a process of transiting the RQoS enabling procedure controlled via the state to an executable state at an arbitrary timing.
  • the third process is UE_A10, the 16th identification information indicates the value of RQoS. It may be a process of setting a timer value. The third process is not limited to these processes.
  • UE_A10 receives the PDU session establishment acceptance message, and / or based on the completion of the third process, transmits a PDU session establishment completion message to SMF_A230 via AMF_A240 (SDU session establishment complete) message (S1014). .. Further, the SMF_A 230 receives the PDU session establishment completion message and executes the second condition determination.
  • UE_A10 transmits a PDU session establishment completion message to AMF_A240 using the N1 interface, and AMF_A240 that has received the PDU session establishment completion message sends a PDU session establishment completion message to SMF_A230 using the N11 interface. ..
  • the PDU session establishment complete message may be a PDN connection complete message or a default EPS bearer context activation accept message. Further, the PDU session establishment completion message may be a NAS message transmitted/received on the N1 interface and the N11 interface. Further, the PDU session establishment completion message may be a response message to the PDU session establishment acceptance message, and is not limited to this, and may be a message indicating that the PDU session establishment procedure is completed.
  • the second condition determination is for SMF_A230 to determine the type of message on the N4 interface that is sent and received.
  • SMF_A230 sends a session modification request message (SessionModification request) to UPF_A235 (S1018), and further, session modification acceptance (Session Modificationresponse) sent by UPF_A235 that received the session modification request message. ) Receive the message (S1020). If the second condition determination is false, SMF_A230 sends a session establishment request message to UPF_A235 (S1018), and further receives a session change accept message sent by UPF_A235 that received the session establishment request message (S1020). ..
  • Each device transmits/receives a PDU session establishment completion message, and/or a session change response message, and/or a session establishment response message, and/or sends/receives an RA based on (A) Complete the procedure.
  • the SMF_A230 transmits a PDU session establishment rejection message to the UE_A10 via the AMF_A240 (S1022), and starts the procedure (B) in this procedure.
  • the SMF_A230 sends a PDU session establishment rejection message to the AMF_A240 using the N11 interface
  • the AMF_A240 that receives the PDU session establishment request message sends a PDU session establishment rejection message to the UE_A10 using the N1 interface. ..
  • the PDU session establishment rejection message may be a PDN connectivity reject message. Further, the PDU session establishment rejection message may be a NAS message transmitted and received on the N11 interface and the N1 interface. Further, the PDU session establishment rejection message is not limited to this, and may be a message indicating that the establishment of the PDU session is rejected.
  • SMF_A230 in the PDU session establishment rejection message, the 21st to 29th identification information, may include one or more identification information of the 72nd identification information, by including these identification information, UE_A10 Request may have been denied. Two or more pieces of identification information of these pieces of identification information may be configured as one or more pieces of identification information.
  • the SMF_A230 may indicate that the network does not support RQoS by transmitting one or more pieces of identification information out of the 21st to 29th identification information included in the PDU session establishment rejection message and used by RQoS. It may indicate that the request to transition to a possible state has been rejected.
  • the SMF_A230 is the 21st identification information, and/or the 22nd identification information, and/or the 23rd identification information, and/or the 27th identification information, and/or the 28th identification information. It may be possible to indicate that the network does not support RQoS controlled via Control Plane by including it in the PDU session establishment rejection message, and RQoS controlled via Control Plane can be used. It may indicate that the request to transition is rejected. In this case, the SMF_A230 transmits the 24th identification information and/or the 29th identification information without including it in the registration refusal message, so that the network supports RQoS controlled via the User Plane. It may be shown or it may be shown that the request to transit to the state in which RQoS controlled via the User Plane can be used is accepted.
  • the SMF_A230 establishes the PDU session with the 21st identification information, and/or the 22nd identification information, and/or the 24th identification information, and/or the 27th identification information, and/or the 29th identification information. It may be indicated that the network does not support RQoS controlled via User Plane by including it in the rejection message and a request to transit to a state where RQoS controlled via User Plane can be used. You may indicate that you have been rejected. In this case, the SMF_A 230 may indicate that the network supports RQoS controlled via the Control Plane by transmitting without including the 23rd identification information and/or the 28th identification information. However, it may indicate that the request for transitioning to the state in which RQoS controlled through the Control Plane can be used has been accepted.
  • the SMF_A230 transmits the 21st identification information, and/or the 22nd to 24th identification information, and the 27th to 29th identification information one or more of the identification information and the 25th identification information are associated with each other.
  • the SMF_A230 indicates that the network does not support RQoS for the PDU session established for the DN identified by the fourth identification information and/or the 25th identification information. It may indicate that the request for transitioning to the RQoS enabled state has been rejected.
  • the SMF_A230 transmits the 21st identification information, and/or the 22nd to 24th identification information, the 27th to 29th identification information, and one or more of the identification information and the 26th identification information are associated with each other. May be transmitted to indicate that the network does not support RQoS for the PDU session identified by the fifth identification information and the 26th identification information received by SMF_A230, or RQoS can be used. It may indicate that the request to transition to the state has been rejected.
  • SMF_A230 by including one or more pieces of identification information among the 21st to 29th pieces of identification information in the PDU session establishment rejection message, the registration area to which UE_A10 currently belongs, and/or the tracking area. On the other hand, it may indicate that the network does not support RQoS, or it may indicate that the request for transitioning to the RQoS enabled state has been rejected.
  • SMF_A230 by including one or more pieces of identification information in the 21st to 29th pieces of identification information in the PDU session establishment rejection message, and transmitting the RQoS to the access network to which UE_A10 is currently connected. It may indicate that it is not supported, or that the request to transition to the state in which RQoS is available is rejected.
  • SMF_A230 by including one or more pieces of identification information among the 21st to 29th pieces of identification information in the PDU session establishment rejection message, and indicating that the network does not support UE-controlled RQoS. Alternatively, it may indicate that the request for transitioning to the UE-controlled RQoS enabled state is rejected. Further, the SMF_A230 sends one or more pieces of identification information out of the 21st to 29th pieces of identification information included in the PDU session establishment rejection message to indicate that the network does not support RQoS controlled by the network. It may indicate that the request to transit to the state where network-controlled RQoS is available is rejected.
  • UE_A10 by transmitting the 21st identification information, or, by transmitting the 22nd identification information, or by transmitting the 23rd identification information and the 24th identification information, or, By transmitting the 27th identification information, or by transmitting the 28th identification information and the 29th identification information, or two or more of these identification information identification of one or more identification information
  • the network does not support RQoS controlled via Control Plane by transmitting one or more pieces of identification information among them, and it is controlled via User Plane. It may indicate that the network does not support RQoS, the request to transition to the state where RQoS controlled via Control Plane can be used is rejected, and RQoS controlled via User Plane can be used. It may indicate that the request to transition to a different state has been rejected.
  • SMF_A230 by including the 72nd identification information, and / or 25th identification information, and / or 26th identification information included in the PDU session establishment rejection message, of the PDU session belonging to the network slice. It may indicate that the request for establishment has been rejected, or it may indicate a network slice that is not allowed to belong to the PDU session.
  • the SMF_A230 transmits the 72nd identification information and the 25th identification information in association with each other, in the PDU session established for the DN identified by the 25th identification information, in the network. It may indicate that the request to establish the PDU session belonging to the slice has been denied, or it may indicate a network slice that is not allowed to belong to the PDU session.
  • the SMF_A230 transmits the 61st identification information and the 26th identification information in association with each other to request the establishment of the PDU session belonging to the network slice in the PDU session identified by the 26th identification information. May be rejected, or it may indicate a network slice that is not allowed to belong to the PDU session.
  • SMF_A230 by including the 72nd identification information included in the PDU session establishment rejection message, the registration area UE_A10 currently belongs to, and / or in the tracking area, in the PDU session belonging to the network slice. It may indicate that the request for establishment has been rejected, or it may indicate a network slice that is not allowed to belong to the PDU session.
  • SMF_A230 by including the 72nd identification information in the PDU session establishment rejection message, in the access network to which UE_A10 is currently connected, the request to establish the PDU session belonging to the network slice is rejected. May be indicated, or a network slice not permitted to belong to the PDU session may be indicated.
  • the SMF_A230 may indicate the value of the first timer by including the 72nd identification information in the PDU session establishment refusal message and transmitting it, and after the completion of this procedure, the same procedure as this procedure may be performed again. It may indicate whether or not to implement.
  • the SMF_A230 may make a request that combines the above-mentioned matters by transmitting a combination of two or more pieces of identification information of the 21st to 29th identification information and/or the 72nd identification information. It should be noted that the matters indicated by the SMF_A 230 transmitting each piece of identification information are not limited to these.
  • SMF_A230 is the identification information received from the 21st to 29th identification information and the 72nd identification information, which identification information is to be included in the PDU session establishment rejection message, and/or network capability information, and It may be determined based on a policy such as an operator policy and/or a network state.
  • the 21st identification information may be information transmitted when the network RQoS is not supported and/or when one or more identification information items among the identification information items 1 to 8 are received.
  • the 22nd identification information, and / or 27th identification information if the network does not support RQoS, and / or 1 to 3 identification information, and / or 6 to 8 identification information It may be information transmitted when received.
  • the 23rd identification information, and / or 28th identification information if the network supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane, and / or 1 to 3 identification information, and / or It may be information transmitted when the sixth to eighth identification information is received.
  • the 24th identification information, and/or the 29th identification information when the network supports RQoS controlled via User Plane, and/or the first to third identification information, and/or It may be information transmitted when the sixth to eighth identification information is received.
  • the 25th identification information may be information indicating the same DNN as the DNN indicated by the fourth identification information.
  • the 26th identification information may be information indicating the same PDU session ID as the PDU session ID indicated by the fifth identification information.
  • the 72nd identification information may be information transmitted when the 71st identification information is received and/or when the network slice indicated by the 71st identification information is not permitted by the network. The determination by SMF_A230 which identification information should be included in the PDU session establishment rejection message is not limited to this.
  • UE_A10 receives the PDU session establishment rejection message.
  • UE_A10 performs the fourth process based on the reception of the PDU session establishment rejection message (S1024). Also, the UE_A 10 may perform the fourth process based on the completion of this procedure.
  • the fourth process may be a process in which UE_A10 recognizes the matter indicated by SMF_A230. Furthermore, the fourth process may be a process in which the UE_A10 stores the received identification information as a context, or may be a process of transferring the received identification information to an upper layer and/or a lower layer. .. Furthermore, the fourth process may be a process in which the UE_A10 recognizes that the request for this procedure is rejected.
  • the fourth processing is UE_A10, a processing for transitioning to a state in which the RQoS enabling procedure is not executable, or RQoS. It may be to maintain the non-application state.
  • the fourth process is, It may be a process of transiting to a state in which the RQoS activation procedure controlled via the Control Plane is not executable. Furthermore, if the UE_A10 receives the 22nd identification information, and/or the 24th identification information, and/or the 27th identification information, and/or the 29th identification information, the fourth processing is the UserPlane. The processing may be a process of transiting to a state in which the RQoS enabling procedure controlled via the non-executable state.
  • the fourth process may be a process of setting the value indicated by the 72nd identification information as the first timer value, or the timer value. It may be a process of starting the first timer having set. Furthermore, when the UE_A10 receives the 72nd identification information, the fourth process may be a process of executing one or more of the first to eleventh behaviors.
  • the fourth process may be a process in which the UE_A10 may restart this procedure after a certain period of time, or a process in which the request of the UE_A10 transits to a limited state.
  • the 4th processing is the DNN and/or S-NSSAI used in the PDU session establishment procedure rejected for the rejection reason indicated by the 21st identification information. And/or a process of suppressing the process of reconnecting the PDU session using the same information as the user identifier.
  • UE_10 may implement the following first procedure example as the fourth processing example.
  • UE_A10 is DNN#A and/or S-NSSAI#A and/or mapped configured S-NSSAI#A from the configured NSSAI for the HPLMN, using the user identifier #A indicated by the 61st identification information 1 PDU session establishment request message (S1000) is sent, the PDU session establishment rejection message (S1002) received from the network contains the 21st identification information indicating User authentication authentication or authorization failed, and the 121st identification information When not including, the UE_A10 may recognize that the PDU session establishment request is rejected because of User authentication authentication or authorization failed.
  • condition determination that SMF_A230 rejects due to User authentication or authorization failed may be determined based on the third condition determination.
  • the transmission of the used second PDU session establishment request message may be set to be restricted.
  • UE_A10 changes the user identifier indicated by the 61st identification information used in the first PDU session establishment request message (1000) and/or turns the terminal power on/off and/or USIM (Universal SubscriberIdentity Module). ) Is inserted/removed, targeting DNN#A and/or S-NSSAI#A and/or mapped configured S-NSSAI#A from the configured NSSAI for the HPLMN sent in the first PDU session establishment request message (1000). The procedure may be such that reconnection using another PDU session establishment request message is not automatically performed.
  • USIM Universal SubscriberIdentity Module
  • the conditions for reconnection by UE_A10 are not limited to these.
  • UE_10 may implement the following second procedure example as the fourth processing example.
  • UE_A10 is DNN#A and/or S-NSSAI#A and/or mapped configured S-NSSAI#A from the configured NSSAI for the HPLMN, using the user identifier #A indicated by the 61st identification information 1 PDU session establishment request message (S1000) is sent, and the PDU session establishment rejection message (S1002) received from the network contains the 21st identification information indicating User authentication authentication or authorization failed, and indicates EAP-failure.
  • S1000 PDU session establishment request message
  • S1002 PDU session establishment rejection message
  • the transmission of the second PDU session establishment request message using the 61st identification information indicating the user identifier #A is restricted, and the transmission of the second PDU session establishment request message is restricted.
  • DNN#A and/or S-NSSAI#A and/or mapped configured sent in the first PDU session establishment request message (1000) S-NSSAI#A from the configured NSSAI for the Set to allow the transmission of another PDU session establishment request message using the 61st identification information indicating a user identifier different from the user identifier #A for HPLMN May be done.
  • UE_10 may also implement the following third procedure example as the fourth processing example.
  • UE_A10 is DNN#A and/or S-NSSAI#A and/or mapped configured S-NSSAI#A from the configured NSSAI for the HPLMN, using the user identifier #A indicated by the 61st identification information 1 PDU session establishment request message (S1000) is sent, and the PDU session establishment rejection message (S1002) received from the network contains the 21st identification information indicating User authentication authentication or authorization failed, and indicates EAP-failure.
  • S1000 PDU session establishment request message
  • S1002 PDU session establishment rejection message
  • the transmission of the second PDU session establishment request message using the 61st identification information indicating the user identifier #A is restricted, and the transmission of the second PDU session establishment request message is restricted.
  • the terminal power is turned on/off during the operation, the DNN#A and/or S-NSSAI#A and/or mapped configured S-NSSAI# sent in the first PDU session establishment request message (1000) are sent. It may be set to allow the transmission of another PDU session establishment request message using the 61st identification information for A from the configured NSSAI for the HPLMN.
  • the user identifier indicated by the 61st identification information may be user identifier #A or a user identifier different from user identifier #A.
  • UE_10 may also implement the following fourth procedure example as the fourth processing example.
  • UE_A10 is DNN#A and/or S-NSSAI#A and/or mapped configured S-NSSAI#A from the configured NSSAI for the HPLMN, using the user identifier #A indicated by the 61st identification information 1 PDU session establishment request message (S1000) is sent, and the PDU session establishment rejection message (S1002) received from the network contains the 21st identification information indicating User authentication authentication or authorization failed, and indicates EAP-failure.
  • S1000 PDU session establishment request message
  • S1002 PDU session establishment rejection message
  • the transmission of the second PDU session establishment request message using the 61st identification information indicating the user identifier #A is restricted, and the transmission of the second PDU session establishment request message is restricted.
  • USIM Universal Subscriber Identity Module
  • the user identifier indicated by the 61st identification information may be user identifier #A or a user identifier different from user identifier #A.
  • UE_A10 is DNN#A and/or S-NSSAI#A and/or mapped configured S-NSSAI#A from the configured NSSAI for the To the HPLMN
  • the first PDU session establishment request message (S1000) is transmitted using the user identifier #A indicated by the 61st identification information
  • the PDU session establishment rejection message (S1002) received from the network is User It may be applied even when including the 21st identification information indicating authorization and the 121st identification information indicating EAP-failure.
  • the user identifier indicated by the 61st identification information included in the reconnection using the above PDU session establishment request message is indicated by the 61st identification information used in the first PDU session establishment request message (1000). It is not limited to the user identifier. For example, even if the user identifier #B different from the user identifier #A is used in the 61st identification information, the reconnection using the PDU session establishment request message may be set to be restricted.
  • UE_A10 may recognize that the request of UE_A10 is rejected by receiving the PDU session establishment reject message or by not receiving the PDU session establishment accept message.
  • Each device completes the procedure (B) in this procedure based on the transmission and reception of the PDU session establishment rejection message.
  • Each device completes this procedure based on the completion of procedure (A) or (B) in this procedure. It should be noted that each device may transition to a state where the PDU session is established based on the completion of the procedure (A) in this procedure, or based on the completion of the procedure (B) in the procedure. , It may be recognized that this procedure has been rejected, or it may transit to a state in which a PDU session is not established.
  • each device may perform processing based on the identification information transmitted and received in this procedure based on the completion of this procedure.
  • the UE_A 10 may perform the third processing or the fourth processing based on the completion of this procedure.
  • the third condition determination may be executed based on the identification information and/or the subscriber information and/or the operator policy included in the PDU session establishment request message. For example, the third condition determination may be true when the network permits the authentication and/or the authorization by DN_A5 to be performed in this procedure. The third condition determination may be false if the network does not permit the DN_A5 to perform authentication and/or authorization in this procedure. Furthermore, the third condition determination is true when the network to which UE_A10 is connected and/or the device in the network supports performing authentication and/or authorization by DN_A5 in this procedure. If you don't support it, you can fake it.
  • the third condition determination is that the PDU session establishment request message includes the SMPDUNDNRequestContainer that includes the 61st identification information, and the 61st identification information conforms to the local policy and/or user subscriber information. Can be true. It may also be true when the SMPDUN RequestContainer is not included in the PDU session establishment request message. On the other hand, if the PDU session establishment request message includes the SM PDU DN Request Container that includes the 61st identification information and the 61st identification information does not comply with the local policy and/or user subscriber information, it is false. You can The condition that determines whether the third condition determination is true or false is not limited to the condition described above. The condition that determines whether the third condition determination is true or false is not limited to the condition described above.
  • the second condition determination may be performed based on whether or not a session on the N4 interface for the PDU session is established. For example, the second condition determination may be true if the session on the N4 interface for the PDU session has been established, and false if not.
  • the condition that determines the authenticity of the second condition determination is not limited to the above-mentioned condition.
  • the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure is also referred to as this procedure.
  • This procedure is a procedure for the DN_A5 and/or the device in the DN_A5 to authenticate and/or approve the PDU session.
  • Each device may execute this procedure in a state where a PDU session is established, or may be executed in the PDU session establishment procedure.
  • the SMF_A 230 may start this procedure when receiving a PDU session establishment request message including at least the 61st identification information in the registration procedure and/or the PDU session establishment procedure.
  • the SMF_A 230 may start this procedure when the 21st condition determination is true in the registration procedure and/or the PDU session establishment procedure.
  • each device may start this procedure when the PDU session establishment procedure is completed, or may start this procedure at any timing after the PDU session establishment procedure. Further, each device may transit to a state where the PDU session is authenticated and/or approved by the device in the DN_A5 and/or the device in the DN_A5 based on the completion of the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure.
  • PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure example An example of the procedure for executing the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure will be described with reference to FIG. Each step of this procedure will be described below.
  • the SMF_A230 starts a PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure by transmitting an Authentication/Authorization Request message to the DN_A5 and/or a device in the DN_A5 via the UPF_A235 (S1100).
  • the SMF_A230 selects UPF_A235 and/or DN_A5 and/or a device within DN_A5, and sends an authentication/authorization request message to the selected UPF_A235 using the N4 interface.
  • the UPF_A235 Upon receiving the authentication/authorization request message, the UPF_A235 transmits or transfers the authentication/authorization request message to the DN_A5 and/or the device within the DN_A5 using the N6 interface.
  • the SMF_A230 is each identification information obtained based on the reception of the PDU session establishment request message, information obtained by inquiring the device in the core network, and/or subscriber information, and/or network capability.
  • DN_A5 and/or DN_A5 may be selected based on information and/or operator policy, and/or network status, and/or context already held by AMF_A240.
  • the PDU session establishment request message may be a NAS message. Further, the PDU session establishment request message may be any message as long as it is a message requesting establishment of a PDU session, and is not limited to this.
  • the resource publication of authentication/authorization for DN_A5 including the authentication/authorization request message exchange is performed even if the operator provides the API (Application Programming Interface) to DN_A5 and/or the service provider who provides the service on DN_A5. Good.
  • the authentication/approval request message is transmitted/received between SMF_A230, and/or UPF_A235 and DN_A5, and/or a device included in DN_A5, and may be a message requesting authentication by DN_A5 and/or approval. It is not limited to this.
  • SMF_A230, UE_A10, and / or information received from the device in the core network, and / or SMF_A230 may hold the information held in the authentication / authorization request message may be transmitted, or these identification information.
  • the inclusion may indicate the request of UE_A10 and/or SMF_A230.
  • -DN_A5 and/or the device in DN_A5 receives the authentication/authorization request message.
  • the DN_A5 and/or the device within the DN_A5 may perform the twenty-first condition determination based on the reception of the authentication/authorization request message.
  • the twenty-first condition determination is for determining whether or not the DN_A5 and/or the device within the DN_A5 executes the PDU session authentication and/or authorization procedure by the DN_A5.
  • the DN_A5 and/or the device within the DN_A5 determines whether the 21st condition determination is true or false.
  • DN_A5 and/or the device in DN_A5 may continue this procedure if the 21st condition determination is true, or do not continue this procedure if the 21st condition determination is false and reject the request.
  • the indicated message may be sent to SMF_A230 via UPF_A235.
  • the device in DN_A5 and/or DN_A5 receives an authentication/authorization request message, and/or based on the 21st condition determination, based on the 21st condition determination, authentication/authorization request (authentication/authorizationRequest) to SMF_A230 via UPF_A235. Send the message (S1102).
  • DN_A5 and/or the device in DN_A5 sends an authentication/authorization request message to UPF_A235 using the N6 interface.
  • UPF_A235 Upon receiving the authentication/authorization request message, UPF_A235 transmits or transfers the authentication/authorization request message to SMF_A230 using the N4 interface.
  • SMF_A230 Based on the reception of the authentication/authorization request message, SMF_A230 sends a PDU session authentication request message to UE_A10 via AMF_A240 (S1104).
  • the SMF_A230 sends a PDU session authentication request message to the AMF_A240 using the N11 interface
  • the AMF_A240 receiving the PDU session authentication request message sends a PDU session authentication request message to the UE_A10 using the N1 interface. ..
  • the PDU session authentication request message is not limited to this, and may be a message indicating that PDU session authentication/authorization by DN_A5 is requested.
  • the SMF_A230 may include the 62nd identification information in the PDU session authentication request message, or may include the identification information to indicate the request of the DN_A5 and/or the device in the DN_A5. ..
  • SMF_A230 by including the 62nd identification information in the PDU session authentication request message and transmitting, DN_A5 performs authentication and/or authorization for the PDU session and/or UE_A10 and/or application. May be indicated, or UE_A10 and/or application and/or user may indicate that the authentication/authorization information of DN_A5 needs to be confirmed and/or selected.
  • the SMF_A230 determines whether to include the 62nd identification information in the PDU session authentication request message, the received identification information and/or network capability information, and/or a policy such as an operator policy, and/or a network state. May be determined based on.
  • the SMF_A230 when the SMF_A230 receives the PDU session establishment request message including the 61st identification information in the registration procedure and/or the PDU session establishment procedure, the SMF_A230 sends the PDU session authentication request message including the 62nd identification information. You may.
  • the determination by SMF_A230 which identification information should be included in the PDU session authentication request message is not limited to this.
  • the UE_A10 receives the PDU session authentication request message. By receiving the PDU session authentication request message, the UE_A10 recognizes the contents of various identification information included in the PDU session authentication request message.
  • UE_A10 further executes the fifth process based on the reception of the PDU session authentication request message (S1106). Note that the UE_A10 may perform the fifth process based on the transmission of the PDU session authentication acceptance message or the PDU session authentication rejection message, or upon completion of this procedure. You may implement based on.
  • the fifth process may be a process in which the UE_A10 recognizes the matter indicated by the SMF_A230. Further, the fifth process, UE_A10 may be a process of storing the received identification information as a context, or may be a process of transferring the received identification information to an upper layer, and/or a lower layer. ..
  • UE_A10 may be a process of determining whether the authentication/approval information indicated by the 62nd identification information is appropriate, or the authentication indicated by the received 62nd identification information.
  • /It may be a process of inserting information indicating whether or not the approval information is appropriate in the 63rd identification information.
  • UE_A10 may be a process of recognizing that the authentication/approval information indicated by the 62nd identification information is DN authentication/permission information, or the received 62nd identification information. It may be a process of inserting information indicating a response into the 63rd identification information, or a process of inserting the same authentication/authorization information as the received 62nd identification information into the 63rd identification information.
  • UE_A10 may be a process of selecting appropriate authentication / authorization information from the authentication / authorization information indicated by the 62nd identification information, based on the 62nd identification information. It may be a process of inserting the selected authentication/authorization information into the 63rd identification information.
  • the fifth process may be a process in which UE_A10 notifies the upper layer, and/or the user of the 62nd identification information, or the upper layer notified of the 62nd identification information, and/or the user. May be a process of selecting appropriate authentication/approval information from the authentication/approval information indicated by the 62nd identification information.
  • UE_A10 may be a process of acquiring authentication/authorization information selected based on the notified 62nd information from the upper layer, and/or the user, or an upper layer, And/or the authentication/authorization information acquired from the user may be included in the 63rd identification information.
  • the fifth process may be a process in which the UE_A10 executes the 22nd condition determination.
  • the fifth process is not limited to these processes.
  • the UE_A10 executes the 22nd condition determination based on the reception of the PDU session authentication/authorization request message and/or the completion of the 5th process.
  • the 22nd condition determination is for determining whether or not the UE_A10 accepts the procedure of authenticating and/or approving the PDU session by the DN_A5.
  • the UE_A 10 determines whether the 22nd condition determination is true or false.
  • UE_A10 starts the procedure (A) in this procedure when the 22nd condition determination is true, and starts the procedure (B) in this procedure when the 22nd condition determination is false. The steps in the case where the 22nd condition determination is false will be described later.
  • UE_A10 receives the PDU session authentication/authorization request message, and/or completes the fifth process, and/or based on the twenty-second condition determination, based on AMF_A240 to SMF_A230, PDU session authentication acceptance (PDU session authentication accept) ) Send the message (S1108).
  • UE_A10 transmits a PDU session authentication acceptance message to AMF_A240 using the N1 interface
  • AMF_A240 that receives the PDU session authentication acceptance message transmits a PDU session authentication acceptance message to SMF_A230 using the N11 interface. ..
  • the PDU session authentication acceptance message may be a NAS message transmitted/received on the N1 interface and the N11 interface. Further, the PDU session authentication acceptance message may be a response message to the PDU session authentication request message, and is not limited to this, and may be a message indicating that the PDU session establishment authentication/approval procedure has been accepted.
  • UE_A10 may include the 63rd identification information in the PDU session authentication acceptance message, or may include the identification information to indicate that the network request has been accepted.
  • UE_A10 by including the 63rd identification information included in the PDU session authentication acceptance message, UE_A10, and / or application, and / or user, authentication / authorization information of DN_A5, indicates that. May be shown, the acceptance may be shown, or the selection may be shown.
  • UE_A10 whether to put the 63rd identification information in the PDU session authentication acceptance message, received identification information, and / or, UE_A10 capability information, and / or UE_A10 policy, and / or based on the state of UE_A10 You may decide.
  • the 63rd identification information is included in the PDU session authentication acceptance message and transmitted. Good. Note that the determination by the UE_A 10 which identification information should be included in the PDU session authentication acceptance message is not limited to this.
  • ⁇ SMF_A230 receives the PDU session authentication acceptance message. Furthermore, each device completes the procedure (A) in this procedure based on the transmission and reception of the PDU session authentication acceptance message.
  • the UE_A10 receives the PDU session authentication/authorization request message, and/or completes the fifth process, and/or based on the twenty-second condition determination, based on the AMF_A240 to the SMF_A230, the PDU session authentication rejection (PDU session authenticationreject). ) Send the message (S1110).
  • UE_A10 sends a PDU session authentication reject message to AMF_A240 using the N1 interface
  • AMF_A240 that receives the PDU session authentication reject message sends a PDU session authentication reject message to SMF_A230 using the N11 interface. ..
  • the PDU session authentication rejection message may be a NAS message transmitted/received on the N1 interface and the N11 interface. Further, the PDU session authentication rejection message may be a response message to the PDU session authentication request message, and is not limited to this, and may be a message indicating that the PDU session establishment authentication/authorization procedure is rejected.
  • UE_A10 may include information indicating the reason why the PDU session authentication request message is rejected in the PDU session authentication rejection message, or by including these identification information, the network request is rejected. May be indicated.
  • UE_A10 by including the information indicating the reason why the PDU session authentication request message is rejected in the PDU session authentication acceptance message, UE_A10, and / or application, and / or user, DN / A5 authentication / authorization.
  • the information may indicate unacceptable or unselectable.
  • UE_A10 is, among the reasons that the PDU session authentication request message is rejected, which identification information to put in the PDU session authentication rejection message, the received identification information, and/or capability information of UE_A10, and/or UE_A10. Policy and/or the state of UE_A10. Note that the determination by the UE_A 10 which identification information is included in the PDU session authentication rejection message is not limited to this.
  • ⁇ SMF_A230 receives the PDU session authentication rejection message. Further, each device completes the procedure (B) in this procedure based on the transmission and reception of the PDU session authentication rejection message.
  • SMF_A230 sends an Authentication/Authorization Response message via UPF_A235 based on the completion of the procedure (A) in this procedure and/or the completion of the procedure (B) in this procedure. It transmits to DN_A5 and/or the device in DN_A5 (S1112). In other words, SMF_A230 sends an authentication/authorization response message via UPF_A235 to the devices in DN_A5 and/or DN_A5 based on receiving the PDU session authentication accept message and/or receiving the PDU session authentication reject message. To do.
  • SMF_A230 sends an authentication/authorization response message to UPF_A235 using the N4 interface.
  • the UPF_A235 Upon receiving the authentication/authorization response message, the UPF_A235 transmits or transfers the authentication/authorization response message to the DN_A5 and/or the device within the DN_A5 using the N6 interface.
  • the API Application Programming Interface
  • the authentication/approval response message is transmitted/received between the SMF_A230 and/or UPF_A235 and the device included in DN_A5, and/or DN_A5, and may be any response message to the authentication/authorization request message, but is not limited to this. ..
  • SMF_A230, UE_A10, and / or information received from the device in the core network, and / or SMF_A230 may be transmitted by including the information held in the authentication / authorization response message, the identification information of these. The inclusion may indicate the request of UE_A10 and/or SMF_A230.
  • the authentication/approval response message may include the 63rd identification information, or by including these identification information, DN_A5 and/or DN_A5. It may indicate that the request of the device within has been accepted.
  • the authentication/authorization response message may include the reason why the PDU session authentication request message was rejected, or by including these identification information, It may indicate that the request for DN_A5 and/or the devices in DN_A5 has been denied.
  • the SMF_A230 may determine which identification information should be included in the authentication/authorization response message based on each identification information acquired based on the reception of the PDU session authentication acceptance message and/or the PDU session authentication rejection message. ..
  • the determination by SMF_A230 which identification information should be included in the authentication/approval response message is not limited to this.
  • each device completes this procedure based on the transmission/reception of the PDU session authentication acceptance message and/or the transmission/reception of the PDU session authentication rejection message and/or the transmission/reception of the authentication/approval response message. It should be noted that each device may transit to a state in which the PDU session is authenticated and/or approved by DN_A5 based on the completion of the procedure (A) in this procedure, or (B) in this procedure. Based on the completion of the procedure of 1., it may be recognized that the procedure is rejected, and the PDU session may transit to a state in which it has not been authenticated and/or approved by DN_A5.
  • each device may perform processing based on the identification information transmitted and received in this procedure based on the completion of this procedure.
  • the UE_A10 may adapt the acquired and/or selected DN_A5 issued authentication/authorization information based on the completion of this procedure.
  • the 21st condition determination may be performed based on the identification information and/or subscriber information included in the authentication/authorization request message and/or the DN_A5 policy. For example, the 21st condition determination may be true when the request of UE_A10 is granted by DN_A5 and/or the device in DN_A5. The twenty-first condition determination may be false if the request of UE_A10 is not permitted by DN_A5 and/or the device within DN_A5. Furthermore, the 21st condition determination is true if the device in the DN_A5 to which the UE_A10 is connected, and/or the device in the DN_A5 supports the function for authenticating and/or authorizing the PDU session by the DN_A5. Well, false if not supported.
  • the condition that determines the truth of the 21st condition determination is not limited to the above-described condition.
  • the 22nd condition determination may be performed based on the identification information included in the PDU session authentication request message, and/or the capability information of UE_A10, and/or the policy of UE_A10, and/or the state of UE_A10. For example, the 22nd condition determination may be true when UE_A10 permits a request for authentication and/or authorization of a PDU session by DN_A5. The twenty-second condition determination may be false if the UE_A10 does not permit the PDU session authentication and/or authorization request by the DN_A5.
  • the condition that determines the authenticity of the 22nd condition determination is not limited to the above-described condition.
  • RQoS activation (activation) procedure An outline of an RQoS activation (activation) procedure performed to activate (activate) RQoS for user data communication will be described. In this chapter, the RQoS activation procedure is also referred to as this procedure.
  • This procedure is a procedure for each device to enable RQoS for user data communication. This procedure includes a UE-controlled RQoS activation procedure initiated by UE_A10 and a network-initiated RQoS activation procedure initiated by a device in the core network.
  • each device may execute this procedure in a state where a PDU session is established, or may be executed during user data communication. Also, each device may start this procedure at any timing after the PDU session establishment procedure. Further, each device may activate RQoS for user data communication based on the completion of the RQoS activation procedure, or may perform user data communication using RQoS. Note that enabling RQoS for user data communication may mean controlling RQoS for user data communication, or may be enabling RQoS for a specific user data flow. ..
  • UE_A10 the downlink packet received, and / or based on the identification information contained in the downlink packet, for the uplink traffic, and / or for the uplink packet It may be that a QoS rule (also referred to as Derived QoS Rule) is created and the use of the created QoS rule is started.
  • a QoS rule also referred to as Derived QoS Rule
  • this procedure may be a procedure for each device to activate RQoS for user data communication via the User plane, and is referred to as an RQoS activation procedure controlled via the User Plane. Good.
  • UE_A10 transmits an uplink packet to UPF_A235 using a radio bearer and/or N3 interface and/or N9 interface.
  • the UE_A10 may select the routing destination UPF_A235 based on the information held by the UE_A10. More specifically, UE_A10, by comparing the routing information of the uplink packet, the routing rule that UE_A10 holds, and / or QoS rule, the QoS flow used to transmit the uplink packet, and / or UPF_A235. You may choose.
  • the routing rule that matches the routing information of the uplink packet, and / or if there is no QoS rule, the default routing rule, and / or QoS flow used to transmit the uplink packet using the default QoS rule, And/or UPF_A235 may be selected.
  • the default QoS rule is configured to include a QoS rule ID (QoS rule identifier), a QFI of a QoS flow, a packet filter of 1 or more, and a preceding value.
  • the default QoS rule may be configured without the packet filter among these components, and in this case, the preceding value is set to the maximum value. That is, the priority should be the lowest.
  • the routing information of the uplink packet may be information for identifying the application or may be a 5-tuple. More specifically, the routing information of the uplink packet is a destination IP address (target IP address), and/or a source IP address (source IP address), and/or a protocol number (protocol number), and/or Alternatively, it may be a destination port number (target port number) and/or a source port number (source port number), or may be information combining these.
  • the routing information of the uplink packet is not limited to this.
  • the uplink packet may be a message transmitted from the UE_A10 to the access network and/or the core network and/or the DN_A5 in the user data communication. Therefore, including the identification information in the uplink packet may mean including the identification information in the header of the uplink packet, or including the identification information in the header of the message of the uplink packet. Alternatively, the identification information may be included in the message of the uplink packet. Note that the UE_A10 may transmit a dummy uplink packet to the UPF_A235 when there is no uplink packet to be transmitted to the DN_A5 and/or the device in the DN_A5.
  • UE_A10 the uplink packet, may include the 41st identification information, and / or 42nd identification information, by including these identification information, to enable the RQoS for user data communication.
  • the request may be indicated.
  • UE_A10 may request to enable RQoS for user data communication by UE, by transmitting by including the 41st identification information and/or the 42nd identification information in the uplink packet. ..
  • UE_A10 the 41st identification information, and / or by transmitting the 42nd identification information included in the uplink packet, the QoS flow used in the transmission and reception of the uplink packet indicated by the routing information of the uplink packet. May be requested to be changed to the QoS flow indicated by the 42nd identification information.
  • UE_A10 the 41st identification information, of the 42nd identification information, which identification information to put in the uplink packet, capability information of UE_A10, and / or policies such as UE policy, and / or UE_A10. You may decide based on a preference. Note that the determination by the UE_A 10 which identification information should be included in the uplink packet is not limited to this.
  • UPF_A235 receives the uplink packet (S1200). UPF_A235 may transfer the received uplink packet to DN_A5 and/or a device included in DN_A5 based on the reception of the uplink packet.
  • UPF_A235 transmits a request notification message to SMF_A230 based on reception of an uplink packet and/or transfer of an uplink packet (S1202). Specifically, UPF_A235 sends a request notification message to SMF_A230 using the N4 interface. Furthermore, the request notification message is not limited to this as long as it is a message indicating a request to enable RQoS for user data communication.
  • UPF_A235 may include the identification information included in the received uplink packet in the request notification message.
  • the UPF_A235 may transmit the request notification message by including the received 41st identification information and/or the 42nd identification information, or by transmitting these identification information, user data communication May be indicated to require RQoS activation for.
  • SMF_A230 receives the request notification message (S1202) and executes the 31st condition determination.
  • the 31st condition determination is for the SMF_A230 to determine whether to accept the request from the UE_A10. In the 31st condition determination, the SMF_A 230 determines whether the 31st condition determination is true or false.
  • SMF_A230 if the 31st condition determination is true (that is, if accepting the request of UE_A10), start the procedure of (A) in this procedure, if the 31st condition determination is false (that is, If the request from UE_A10 is rejected), the procedure (B) in this procedure is started. The steps in the case where the 31st condition determination is false will be described later.
  • the SMF_A230 transmits the RQoS activation notification message to the UPF_A235 based on the 31st condition determination and/or the reception of the request notification message (S1204), and starts the procedure (A) in this procedure. Specifically, the SMF_A230 sends an RQoS activation notification message to the UPF_A235 using the N4 interface.
  • the RQoS activation notification message is not limited to this, and may be a message indicating the activation of RQoS for user data communication.
  • SMF_A230 the RQoS activation notification message
  • SMF_A230 by including the 31st identification information, and / or 32nd identification information included in the RQoS activation notification message, may indicate that the request for RQoS activation is accepted, It may be indicated that RQoS is enabled.
  • SMF_A230 by including the 31st identification information, and / or 32nd identification information included in the RQoS activation notification message, the QoS flow used in the transmission and reception of a specific downlink packet, the 32nd It may indicate to change to the QoS flow indicated by the identification information.
  • the SMF_A230, the 31st identification information, of the 32nd identification information which identification information to put in the RQoS activation notification message, the received identification information, and/or network capability information, and/or It may be determined based on a policy such as an operator policy and/or the state of the network.
  • the SMF_A230 when receiving the 41st identification information, and/or the 42nd identification information, and/or accepting the request indicated by the received 41st identification information and/or the 42nd identification information ,
  • the 31st identification information, and/or the 32nd identification information may be included in the RQoS activation notification message and transmitted.
  • the 32nd identification information may be determined based on the 42nd identification information.
  • the 32nd identification information may be information identifying the same QoS flow as the QoS flow indicated by the 42nd identification information, or may identify a QoS flow different from the QoS flow indicated by the 42nd identification information. It may be information to be provided.
  • the determination by SMF_A230 as to which identification information is included in the RQoS activation notification message is not limited to this.
  • SMF_A230 each identification information acquired based on the reception of the request notification message, and / or network capability information, and / or subscriber information, and / or operator policy, and / or network state, and / Alternatively, the context for RQoS may be created based on the context already held by SMF_A230.
  • the UPF_A235 receives the RQoS activation notification message (S1204).
  • the UPF_A 235 recognizes the contents of various identification information included in the RQoS validation notification message by receiving the RQoS validation notification message.
  • the UPF_A 235 may create a QoS rule and/or context for RQoS based on each piece of identification information acquired by receiving the RQoS activation notification message.
  • UPF_A235 may receive the downlink packet transmitted by DN_A5 and/or the device in DN_A5 (S1206). UPF_A235 transmits a downlink packet to UE_A10 based on the reception of the RQoS activation notification message and/or the reception of the downlink packet from DN_A5 (S1206).
  • UPF_A235 transmits downlink packets to UE_A10 using N9 interface and/or N3 interface and/or radio bearer.
  • the UPF_A 235 may select the UE_A 10 of the routing destination based on the information held by the UPF_A 235. More specifically, UPF_A235, by comparing the routing information of the downlink packet, the routing rule held by UPF_A235, and / or QoS rule, the QoS flow used for the transmission of the downlink packet, and / or UE_A10 You may choose.
  • UE_A10 if there is no routing rule that matches the routing information of the downlink packet, and / or QoS rule, the default routing rule, and / or QoS flow used to transmit the downlink packet using the default QoS rule , And/or UPF_A235 may be selected.
  • the routing information of the downlink packet may be information for identifying an application or may be a 5-tuple. More specifically, the routing information of the downlink packet is a destination IP address and/or a source IP address and/or a protocol number, a destination port number, and/or a source port number. Alternatively, the information may be a combination of these.
  • the routing information of the downlink packet is not limited to this.
  • the downlink packet in the user data communication, may be a message transmitted to the UE_A10 from the device in the DN_A5, and / or DN_A5, the message transmitted from the device in the core network to UE_A10 Or a message for transferring these user data communication messages. Therefore, including the identification information in the downlink packet may mean including the identification information in the header of the downlink packet, or including the identification information in the header of the downlink packet that does not include the message used for transfer. It may be that the identification information is included in the header of the message used for forwarding the downlink packet, or that the identification information is included in the message used for forwarding the downlink packet. May be. Note that UPF_A235 may transmit a dummy downlink packet to UE_A10 when there is no downlink packet received from DN_A5 and/or a device in DN_A5.
  • the UPF_A 235 may include the 31st identification information and/or the 32nd identification information in the downlink packet, and by including these identification information, the RQoS for user data communication is enabled. It may indicate that the request of UE_A10 is accepted.
  • UPF_A235 may indicate that the request for enabling RQoS has been accepted by transmitting by including the 31st identification information and/or the 32nd identification information in the downlink packet, or RQoS. May be enabled.
  • UPF_A235 by including the 31st identification information, and / or the 32nd identification information in the downlink packet to transmit, the QoS flow used in the transmission and reception of a specific downlink packet, the 32nd identification information. May be changed to the QoS flow indicated by.
  • UPF_A235 the 31st identification information, of the 32nd identification information, which identification information to put in the downlink packet, received identification information, and/or network capability information, and/or operator policy Etc., and/or may be determined based on the state of the network.
  • UPF_A235 if the 31st identification information, and/or the 32nd identification information is received, and/or the 41st identification information, and/or the 42nd identification information is received, and/or If the SMF_A230 determines that the received request indicated by the 41st identification information and/or the 42nd identification information can be accepted, the 31st identification information and/or the 32nd identification information is included in the downlink packet. You may send it.
  • the 32nd identification information may be determined based on the 42nd identification information.
  • the 32nd identification information may be information identifying the same QoS flow as the QoS flow indicated by the 42nd identification information, or may identify a QoS flow different from the QoS flow indicated by the 42nd identification information. It may be information to be provided. Note that the determination by the UPF_A 235 which identification information should be included in the downlink packet is not limited to this.
  • UE_A10 receives the downlink packet (S1206). By receiving the downlink packet, UE_A10 recognizes the contents of various identification information included in the downlink packet.
  • UE_A10 further executes the sixth processing based on the reception of the downlink packet (S1208).
  • the sixth process may be a process in which the UE_A10 recognizes the matter indicated by the UPF_A235. Furthermore, the sixth process may be a process in which the UE_A10 stores the received identification information as a context, and transfers the received identification information and/or user data to an upper layer and/or a lower layer. It may be processing.
  • the sixth process may be a process in which UE_A10 activates RQoS for user data communication.
  • the sixth process UE_A10, based on the received downlink packet, QoS rule for the uplink packet (Derived QoS QoS Rule), and / or may be a process of creating a routing rule. , The created QoS rule and/or the routing rule may be validated.
  • the sixth process, UE_A10 even if the QoS rule associated with the routing information of the uplink packet paired with the routing information of the received downlink packet, and / or create a routing rule
  • the created QoS rule and/or the routing rule may be validated.
  • the QoS flow used for transferring the uplink packet indicated by the created QoS rule and/or the routing rule may be the QoS flow indicated by the 32nd identification information.
  • the sixth process may be a process in which the UE_A10 recognizes the QoS flow and/or the QoS rule and/or the routing rule associated with the routing information of the received downlink packet. More specifically, in the sixth process, the UE_A10 recognizes that the QoS flow used to transfer the downlink packet indicated by the routing information of the received downlink packet is the QoS flow indicated by the 32nd identification information. You may.
  • the sixth process may be a process in which the UE_A10 starts an RQoS timer (also referred to as a Reflective QoS Timer:RQ timer). More specifically, the sixth process may be a process in which the UE_A10 starts the RQoS timer in which the timer value received from the network and/or the timer value held by the UE_A10 is set.
  • RQoS timer also referred to as a Reflective QoS Timer:RQ timer
  • the RQoS timer may be started based on the creation and/or activation of the QoS rule and/or the routing rule.
  • UE_A10 resets the running RQoS timer. You may start.
  • the timer value received from the network may be the timer value received from the device in the core network in the registration procedure and/or the PDU session establishment procedure, for example, in the registration procedure and/or the PDU session establishment procedure. It may be the timer value indicated by the 16th identification information.
  • the timer value received from the network may be the timer value received by the UE_A10 from the network before the sixth process, but is not limited to this.
  • the timer value held by UE_A10 may be the timer value preset in UE_A10 at the time of shipment.
  • the timer value held by the UE_A10 may be the timer value set in the UE_A10, but is not limited to this.
  • the sixth process is UE_A10, UE-controlled RQoS activation controlled. It may be a process of recognizing that the procedure has been accepted by the network. The sixth process is not limited to these processes.
  • the UE_A10 may transmit the uplink packet to the UPF_A235 based on the reception of the downlink packet and/or the completion of the sixth processing (S1210). Further, upon receiving the uplink packet, the UPF_A 235 may transfer the received uplink packet to the DN_A5 and/or the device within the DN_A5 (S1210). In this case, the DN_A5 and/or the device within the DN_A5 receives the uplink packet.
  • the UE_A10 may use the QoS rule generated in the sixth process and/or the routing for transmitting the uplink packet. Furthermore, the uplink packet may be the same message as the previously transmitted uplink packet (S1200) or may be a different message.
  • Each device based on the transmission and reception of downlink packets (S1206), and / or completion of the sixth process (S1208), and / or transmission and reception of uplink packets (S1210), the procedure of (A) in this procedure To complete.
  • the SMF_A230 transmits the RQoS validation rejection message to the UPF_A235 based on the thirty-first condition determination and/or the reception of the request notification message (S1212), and starts the procedure (B) in this procedure. Specifically, SMF_A230 sends an RQoS validation rejection message to UPF_A235 using the N4 interface.
  • the RQoS activation rejection message is not limited to this, and may be a message indicating that the request to activate RQoS for user data communication has been rejected.
  • the SMF_A230 may include the 51st identification information in the RQoS activation refusal message, or may include the identification information to indicate that the request of the UE_A10 is rejected.
  • the SMF_A230 may indicate that the request for enabling RQoS has been rejected by transmitting the 51st identification information included in the RQoS enabling notification message, or may have rejected the request for enabling RQoS. It may indicate the reason or may indicate that RQoS cannot be activated.
  • the SMF_A230 determines whether to include the 51st identification information in the RQoS activation rejection message, the received identification information, and/or the network capability information, and/or a policy such as an operator policy, and/or the network status. May be determined based on.
  • SMF_A230 when receiving the 41st identification information, and/or the 42nd identification information, and/or when the 41st identification information and/or the received request indicated by the 42nd identification information cannot be accepted.
  • the 51st identification information may be included in the RQoS activation notification message and transmitted.
  • the determination by SMF_A230 which identification information should be included in the RQoS validation rejection message is not limited to this.
  • UPF_A235 receives the RQoS activation rejection message (S1212). UPF_A235 recognizes the content of various identification information contained in the RQoS validation rejection message by receiving the RQoS validation rejection message.
  • UPF_A235 may receive the downlink packet transmitted from DN_A5 and/or the device in DN_A5 (S1214). UPF_A235 transmits the downlink packet to UE_A10 based on the reception of the RQoS activation rejection message and/or the reception of the downlink packet from DN_A5 (S1214).
  • UPF_A235 transmits downlink packets to UE_A10 using N9 interface and/or N3 interface and/or radio bearer.
  • the UPF_A 235 may select the UE_A 10 of the routing destination based on the information held by the UPF_A 235. More specifically, UPF_A235, by comparing the routing information of the downlink packet, the routing rule held by UPF_A235, and / or QoS rule, the QoS flow used for the transmission of the downlink packet, and / or UE_A10 You may choose.
  • UE_A10 if there is no routing rule that matches the routing information of the downlink packet, and / or QoS rule, the default routing rule, and / or QoS flow used to transmit the downlink packet using the default QoS rule , And/or UPF_A235 may be selected.
  • the routing information of the downlink packet may be information for identifying an application or may be a 5-tuple. More specifically, the routing information of the downlink packet is a destination IP address and/or a source IP address and/or a protocol number, a destination port number, and/or a source port number. Alternatively, the information may be a combination of these.
  • the routing information of the downlink packet is not limited to this.
  • the downlink packet in the user data communication, may be a message transmitted to the UE_A10 from the device in the DN_A5, and / or DN_A5, the message transmitted from the device in the core network to UE_A10 Or a message for transferring these user data communication messages. Therefore, including the identification information in the downlink packet may mean including the identification information in the header of the downlink packet, or including the identification information in the header of the downlink packet that does not include the message used for transfer. It may be that the identification information is included in the header of the message used for forwarding the downlink packet, or that the identification information is included in the message used for forwarding the downlink packet. May be. Note that UPF_A235 may transmit a dummy downlink packet to UE_A10 when there is no downlink packet received from DN_A5 and/or a device in DN_A5.
  • the downlink packet may include the 51st identification information, by including this identification information, may indicate that RQoS for user data communication was not enabled, It may indicate that the UE_A10 request was not accepted.
  • the UPF_A235 may indicate that the request for enabling RQoS has been rejected by including the 51st identification information in the RQoS enabling notification message and transmitting it, or the request for enabling RQoS may be rejected. It may indicate the reason why it was done or indicate that RQoS cannot be activated.
  • the UPF_A235 determines whether to put the 51st identification information in the downlink packet, based on the received identification information and/or network capability information, and/or a policy such as an operator policy, and/or a network state. You may decide.
  • UPF_A235 if the 51st identification information is received, and/or the 41st identification information, and/or if the 42nd identification information is received, and/or the received 41st identification information, and/or Alternatively, if the SMF_A 230 determines that the request indicated by the 42nd identification information cannot be accepted, the 51st identification information may be included in the RQoS activation notification message and transmitted. Note that the determination by the UPF_A 235 which identification information should be included in the downlink packet is not limited to this.
  • UE_A10 receives the downlink packet (S1214). By receiving the downlink packet, UE_A10 recognizes the contents of various identification information included in the downlink packet.
  • UE_A10 further executes the seventh process based on the reception of the downlink packet (S1216).
  • UE_A10 is the 41st identification information, and / or if previously transmitted an uplink packet containing the 42nd identification information, the seventh process, UE_A10, UE-controlled RQoS activation procedure controlled May be the process of recognizing that it was rejected by the network, or the process of recognizing the reason why it was rejected.
  • the seventh process, UE_A10 may be a process of recognizing that the UE-led RQoS activation procedure controlled by the UE based on the received 51st identification information is not permitted, and is not permitted. It may be a process of recognizing the reason.
  • the seventh process may be a process in which the UE_A10 starts a backoff timer for prohibiting the start of the RQoS activation procedure controlled by the UE for a certain period.
  • the value of the back-off timer for prohibiting the start of the RQoS activation procedure controlled by the UE for a certain period may be a value preset in UE_A10 or a timer value received from the network. May be.
  • UE_A10 may be a process of starting this procedure again after a certain period of time, is a process of starting a procedure for changing and/or disconnecting the established PDU session. It may be present, or may be a process of transitioning to a limited state of the request of UE_A10. The seventh process is not limited to these processes.
  • Each device completes the procedure (B) in this procedure based on transmission/reception of downlink packets (S1214) and/or completion of the seventh processing (S1216).
  • Each device completes this procedure based on the completion of procedure (A) or (B) in this procedure. It should be noted that each device may transition to a state in which RQoS for user data communication is enabled based on the completion of the procedure (A) in this procedure, or the procedure in (B) in this procedure. Based on the completion, it may be possible to recognize that this procedure has been rejected, transition to a state in which RQoS for user data communication is not enabled, or a state in which RQoS for user data communication is not applied. May be maintained.
  • each device may perform processing based on the identification information transmitted and received in this procedure based on the completion of this procedure.
  • UE_A10 may perform the sixth process or the seventh process based on the completion of this procedure.
  • each device may perform user data communication using the QoS rule and/or the routing rule validated in this procedure. Furthermore, each device may start the RQoS deactivation procedure after completion of this procedure.
  • the 31st condition determination may be performed based on the uplink packet and/or the identification information and/or the subscriber information included in the request notification message, and/or the operator policy. For example, the thirty-first condition determination may be true when the network permits the request of UE_A10. The thirty-first condition determination may be false if the network does not permit the request from UE_A10. Further, the 31st condition determination, the network of the UE_A10 registration destination, and / or devices in the network, the function requested by UE_A10 may be true if it supports, false if it does not support. Good.
  • the condition that determines the truth of the 31st condition determination is not limited to the above-described condition.
  • UE_A10 performs the above-described sixth process (S1208) based on the reception of the downlink packet (S1206).
  • the UE_A 10 can further reject the application of RQoS.
  • UE_A10 transmits an uplink packet including information indicating that application of RQoS is rejected to UPF_A235 (S1210).
  • RQoS deactivation procedure a procedure for deactivating (also referred to as invalidating) activated Reflective QoS (RQoS) will be described.
  • the procedures for deactivating RQoS include a first deactivation procedure initiated by the UE and a second deactivation procedure initiated by the network. These procedures are started while RQoS controlled via UP (User Plane) is valid. In other words, these procedures are started while the value of the RQoS timer has not expired.
  • UP User Plane
  • UE_A10 is a device in the core network, in the header of the uplink packet to be transmitted, QFI (QoS Flow ID) for identifying the QoS flow to be deactivated, and a deactivation request (deactivation request). ) Indicating RQI (Reflective QoS Indication).
  • RQI Reflective QoS Indication
  • the RQI is composed of 1 bit, it is preferably set to 0, but it may be set to 1. Further, when the RQI is composed of a plurality of bits, it is preferable to set all 0s, but not limited to this, it may be set to all 1, for example.
  • the UE_A10 may include information indicating a deactivation request in the header of the uplink packet to be transmitted, instead of the RQI, and transmit the header.
  • a set of QFI and RQI or a set of information indicating QFI and deactivation request is set in the header of the uplink packet. It can be included and sent.
  • QFI may not be included.
  • that UE_A10 includes information such as QFI and RQI in the header of the uplink packet may mean that UE_A10 includes information such as QFI and RQI in the uplink packet.
  • the device in the core network receives, from UE_A10, a header of an uplink packet including one or more sets of QFI and RQI, or one or more sets of QFI and information indicating a deactivation request.
  • the device in the core network may accept the request for deactivation for all the QoS flows when the deactivation is requested from the UE_A10 for the plurality of QoS flows, or all the QoS flows may be accepted.
  • Request may be rejected, or a request for deactivation for some QoS flows may be accepted and a request for deactivation for the remaining QoS flows may be rejected.
  • the device in the core network When the device in the core network accepts the deactivation request for a certain QoS flow, the QFI corresponding to the QoS flow and information indicating that the deactivation request is accepted are included in the downlink packet header. And send to UE_A10. Further, when rejecting a deactivation request for a certain QoS flow, the device in the core network sends the QFI corresponding to the QoS flow and information indicating that the deactivation request is rejected to the downlink packet. Include in the header of and send to UE_A10. Note that these pieces of information may be included in the header of one downlink packet and transmitted, or may be included in the headers of different downlink packets and transmitted.
  • a device in the core network may not include a QFI if it accepts or rejects deactivation requests for all QoS flows. It should be noted that the fact that the device in the core network puts information such as QFI and RQI in the header of the downlink packet means that the device in the core network includes information such as QFI and RQI in the downlink packet. May be.
  • UE_A10 When UE_A10 receives the QFI and the header of the downlink packet containing the information indicating acceptance of the deactivation request, UE_A10 supports the QoS flow identified by the QFI even if the value of the RQoS timer has not disappeared. Delete the settings related to RQoS. In other words, UE_A10 receives the QFI and the header of the downlink packet containing the information indicating acceptance of the deactivation request, even if the execution of the RQoS timer has not expired, QoS identified by QFI. Delete the settings related to RQoS corresponding to the flow. At this time, UE_A10 applies default QoS to the QoS flow.
  • UE_A10 when receiving the header of the downlink packet including information indicating that the request for deactivation is rejected, UE_A10, the setting related to RQoS corresponding to the QoS flow identified by QFI To maintain.
  • UE_A10 when there is uplink data to be transmitted, at least part of various information that was included in the header of the uplink packet and transmitted, even if included in the uplink data and transmitted. Good. At this time, the network side can recognize the meaning of various information included in the uplink data. Further, when there is downlink data to be transmitted, the network may include at least a part of various information included in the header of the downlink packet for transmission in the downlink data. Good. At this time, the UE_A10 side can recognize the meaning of various types of information included in the downlink data.
  • the device in the core network may be inactivated for all one or more QoS flows, may be inactivated for some QoS flows, or may be inactivated for some QoS flows. May be deactivated by When deactivating a certain QoS flow, the device in the core network includes a QFI corresponding to the QoS flow and information indicating deactivation, in the header of the downlink packet, and in UE_A10. To send. When deactivating a certain QoS flow, these pieces of information may be included in the header of one downlink packet and transmitted, or may be included in the headers of different downlink packets and transmitted. good. The device in the core network may not include the QFI when deactivating all the QoS flows. Note that the device in the core network does not transmit anything unless it is deactivated for a certain QoS flow.
  • the UE_A10 When the UE_A10 receives the QFI and the header of the downlink packet including the information indicating that it is deactivated, the RQoS-related settings corresponding to the QoS flow identified by the QFI even if the value of the RQoS timer has not disappeared. To delete.
  • UE_A10 when receiving the QFI and the header of the downlink packet containing information indicating deactivation, corresponds to the QoS flow identified by the QFI even if the execution of the RQoS timer has not expired. Delete the settings related to RQoS. At this time, UE_A10 applies default QoS to the QoS flow.
  • UE_A10 when UE_A10 does not receive the QFI and the header of the downlink packet including the information indicating the deactivation, UE_A10 maintains the setting related to the RQoS corresponding to the QoS flow identified by the QFI.
  • the network may include at least a part of various information included in the header of the downlink packet for transmission in the downlink data. Good.
  • the UE_A10 side can recognize the meaning of various types of information included in the downlink data.
  • the program that operates in the device related to the present invention may be a program that controls a Central Processing Unit (CPU) or the like to cause a computer to function so as to realize the functions of the embodiments related to the present invention.
  • the program or information handled by the program is temporarily stored in a volatile memory such as a Random Access Memory (RAM) or a non-volatile memory such as a flash memory, a Hard Disk Drive (HDD), or another storage device system.
  • RAM Random Access Memory
  • HDD Hard Disk Drive
  • the program for realizing the functions of the embodiments according to the present invention may be recorded in a computer-readable recording medium. It may be realized by causing a computer system to read and execute the program recorded in this recording medium.
  • the “computer system” here is a computer system built in the apparatus and includes an operating system and hardware such as peripheral devices.
  • the “computer-readable recording medium” is a semiconductor recording medium, an optical recording medium, a magnetic recording medium, a medium that dynamically holds a program for a short time, or another computer-readable recording medium. Is also good.
  • each functional block or various features of the device used in the above-described embodiments may be implemented or executed by an electric circuit, for example, an integrated circuit or a plurality of integrated circuits.
  • An electrical circuit designed to perform the functions described herein may be a general purpose processor, digital signal processor (DSP), application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), field programmable gate array (FPGA), or other. Programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or combinations thereof.
  • a general purpose processor may be a microprocessor, conventional processor, controller, microcontroller, or state machine.
  • the electric circuit described above may be formed of a digital circuit or an analog circuit. Further, in the case where an integrated circuit technology that replaces the current integrated circuit has emerged due to the progress of semiconductor technology, one or more aspects of the present invention can use a new integrated circuit according to the technology.
  • the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment. Although one example of the device is described in the embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and a stationary or non-movable electronic device installed indoors or outdoors, such as an AV device or a kitchen device. It can be applied to terminal devices or communication devices such as cleaning/laundry equipment, air conditioning equipment, office equipment, vending machines, and other household appliances.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Security & Cryptography (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention provides a communication control method pertaining to control signal management based on reasons for refusal pertaining to a DN authentication procedure. The transmission of a new PDU session establishment message that uses the same parameter as the DNN included in a PDU session establishment message having been refused on the basis of a reason for refusal that indicates DN authentication failure other than EAP failure is suppressed. The transmission of a new PDU session establishment message that uses the same information as the combination of the DNN and an S-NSSAI included in the refused PDU session establishment message is suppressed.

Description

UE、及びSMFUE and SMF
 本発明は、UE(User Equipment;端末装置)、及びSMF(Session Management Function)に関する。本願は、2019年1月10日に日本に出願された特願2019-2868号に基づき優先権を主張し、その内容をここに援用する。 The present invention relates to a UE (User Equipment; terminal device) and an SMF (Session Management Function). The present application claims priority based on Japanese Patent Application No. 2019-2868 filed in Japan on January 10, 2019, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
 近年の移動通信システムの標準化活動を行う3GPP(3rd Generation Partnership Project)は、LTE(Long Term Evolution)のシステムアーキテクチャであるSAE(System Architecture Evolution)の検討を行っている。3GPPは、オールIP(Internet Protocol)化を実現する通信システムとしてEPS(Evolved Packet System)の仕様化を行っている。尚、EPSを構成するコアネットワークはEPC(Evolved Packet Core)と呼ばれる。 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project), which conducts standardization activities for mobile communication systems in recent years, is examining SAE (System Architecture Evolution), which is the system architecture of LTE (Long Term Evolution). 3GPP specifies EPS (Evolved Packet System) as a communication system that realizes all-IP (Internet Protocol). The core network that constitutes EPS is called EPC (Evolved Packet Core).
 また、近年3GPPでは、次世代移動通信システムである5G(5th Generation)移動通信システムの次世代通信技術やシステムアーキテクチャの検討も行っており、特に、5G移動通信システムを実現するシステムとして、5GS(5G System)の仕様化を行っている(非特許文献1及び非特許文献2参照)。5GSでは、多種多様な端末をセルラーネットワークに接続する為の技術課題を抽出し、解決策を仕様化している。 In recent years, 3GPP is also studying the next-generation communication technology and system architecture of the 5G (5th Generation) mobile communication system, which is the next-generation mobile communication system. 5G System) is being specified (see Non-Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 2). 5GS extracts the technical issues for connecting a wide variety of terminals to the cellular network and specifies solutions.
 例えば、多種多様なアクセスネットワークをサポートする端末に応じた、継続的な移動通信サービスをサポートする為の通信手続きの最適化及び多様化や、通信手続きの最適化及び多様化に合わせたシステムアーキテクチャの最適化等も要求条件として挙げられている。 For example, optimization and diversification of communication procedures for supporting continuous mobile communication services according to terminals supporting a wide variety of access networks, and system architecture matching the optimization and diversification of communication procedures Optimization and the like are also listed as requirements.
 5GSでは、輻輳管理に相当する機能を提供する仕組みに加えて、さらに、輻輳管理以外の理由に基づく制御信号管理について検討が行われている (非特許文献1及び非特許文献2及び非特許文献3参照)。 In 5GS, control signal management based on reasons other than congestion management is being studied in addition to a mechanism that provides a function equivalent to congestion management (Non-Patent Documents 1 and 2 and Non-Patent Documents). 3).
 しかし、ネットワークが、輻輳管理以外の理由に基づく制御信号管理を適用する為に端末に通知する理由達を受信した端末のセッションマネジメントに関する動作処理が明確になっていない。特に、DN認証手続きの起動を求めるPDUセッション確立要求が認証手続き以外の理由で拒絶された場合の制御信号管理処理が明確になっていない。 However, the operation process related to session management of the terminal that the network has received the reason to notify the terminal to apply the control signal management based on the reason other than the congestion management is not clear. In particular, the control signal management process is not clarified when the PDU session establishment request for invoking the DN authentication procedure is rejected for reasons other than the authentication procedure.
 本発明の一態様は、このような事情を鑑みてなされたものであり、その目的は、輻輳管理以外の理由に基づく制御信号管理処理を実現するための仕組みや通信制御方法を提供することである。 One aspect of the present invention is made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a mechanism and a communication control method for realizing a control signal management process based on a reason other than congestion management. is there.
 本発明のUE(User Equipment;端末装置)は、送信部を備え、第1のPDU(Protocol Data Unit又はPacket Data Unit)セッション確立要求メッセージは、第1のユーザ識別子及び第1のDNN(Data Network Name)を用いたPDUセッション確立要求メッセージであり、前記送信部は、第1のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージに対して、user authentication or authorization failedを示す拒絶理由値を含みEAP(Extensible Authentication Protocol)-failureを示す拒絶理由情報を含まないPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージを受信した場合、第1のユーザ識別子とは異なるユーザ識別子に変更するまで、または端末電源オン/オフ、またはUSIM(Universal Subscriber Identity Module)の抜き差しまで、第1のDNNに対してのユーザ識別子を用いた第2のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信を規制する、ことを特徴とする。 UE (User Equipment; terminal device) of the present invention includes a transmission unit, the first PDU (Protocol Data Unit or Packet Data Unit) session establishment request message, the first user identifier and the first DNN (Data Network) Name) is a PDU session establishment request message, the transmission unit, for the first PDU session establishment request message, EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol)-failure including a rejection reason value indicating userauthentication or authorization failed When a PDU session establishment rejection message that does not include rejection reason information that indicates the message is received, the terminal power is turned on/off, or the USIM (Universal Subscriber Identity Module) is removed/inserted until the user ID is changed to a user ID different from the first user ID. Up to the above, the transmission of the second PDU session establishment request message using the user identifier for the first DNN is regulated.
 本発明のUEは、送信部を備え、第1のPDUセッション確立要求は、第1のユーザ識別子及び第1のDNN及び第1のS-NSSAIを用いたPDUセッション確立要求であり、前記送信部は、第1のPDUセッション確立要求に対して、user authentication or authorization failedを示す拒絶の理由値を示すcause valueを受信した場合、第1のユーザ識別子とは異なるユーザ識別子に変更するまで、または端末電源オン/オフ、またはUSIM(Universal Subscriber Identity Module)の抜き差しまで、第1のDNN及び第1のS-NSSAIに対して、ユーザ識別子を用いた第2のPDUセッション確立要求を行わない、ことを特徴とする。 UE of the present invention comprises a transmission unit, the first PDU session establishment request is a PDU session establishment request using the first user identifier and the first DNN and the first S-NSSAI, the transmission unit In response to the first PDU session establishment request, when a causevalue indicating the reason value of rejection indicating user authentication or authorization failed is received, until changing to a user identifier different from the first user identifier, or the terminal Until the power is turned on/off or the USIM (Universal Subscriber Identity Module) is removed/inserted, the second DPDU session establishment request using the user identifier is not made to the first DNN and the first S-NSSAI. Characterize.
 本発明の一態様によれば、5GSを構成する端末装置や、コアネットワーク内の装置は、端末装置主導やネットワーク主導でネットワークスライス及び/又はDNN又はAPN毎に、特にDN認証手続きに関する輻輳管理以外の制御管理処理を実施することができる。 According to one aspect of the present invention, the terminal device constituting the 5GS, and the device in the core network, each network slice and / or DNN or APN by the terminal device initiative or network initiative, especially except congestion management related to the DN authentication procedure. The control management process of can be implemented.
移動通信システムの概略を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the outline of a mobile communication system. 移動通信システム内のアクセスネットワークの構成等の1例を示す図である。FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of an access network in a mobile communication system. 移動通信システム内のコアネットワークの構成等の1例を示す図である。FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a core network in a mobile communication system. UEの装置構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the apparatus structure of UE. eNB/NR node/WAGの装置構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the apparatus structure of eNB/NR node/WAG. AMFの装置構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the apparatus structure of AMF. SMF/UPFの装置構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the apparatus structure of SMF/UPF. 初期手続きを示す図である。It is a figure which shows an initial procedure. 登録手続きを示す図である。It is a figure which shows a registration procedure. PDUセッション確立手続きを示す図である。It is a figure which shows the PDU session establishment procedure. PDUセッション確立認証承認手続きを示す図である。It is a figure which shows the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure. RQoS有効化手続きを示す図である。It is a figure which shows the RQoS activation procedure.
 以下、図面を参照して本発明を実施する為に最良の形態について説明する。尚、本実施形態では1例として、本発明を適用した場合の移動通信システムの実施形態について説明する。 The best mode for carrying out the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. As an example of the present embodiment, an embodiment of a mobile communication system to which the present invention is applied will be described.
 [1.システム概要]
 本実施形態における移動通信システムの概略について、図1、図2、図3を用いて説明する。図2は、図1の移動通信システムのうち、アクセスネットワークの詳細を記載した図である。図3は、図1の移動通信システムのうち、主にコアネットワークの詳細を記載した図である。図1に示すように、本実施形態における移動通信システム1(5GSとも称する)は、端末装置(ユーザ装置、移動端末装置とも称する)UE(User Equipment)_A10、アクセスネットワーク(AN; Access Network)_B、コアネットワーク(CN; Core Network)_B190、及びデータネットワーク(DN; Data Network)_A5、DN_B105により構成されている。
[1. System overview]
An outline of the mobile communication system in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1, 2, and 3. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing details of an access network in the mobile communication system of FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram mainly showing details of a core network in the mobile communication system of FIG. As shown in FIG. 1, the mobile communication system 1 (also referred to as 5GS) in the present embodiment is a terminal device (also referred to as a user device or a mobile terminal device) UE (User Equipment)_A10, an access network (AN; Access Network)_B. , A core network (CN; Core Network)_B190, and a data network (DN; Data Network)_A5, DN_B105.
 ここで、UE_A10は、3GPPアクセス(3GPP access又は3GPP access networkとも称する)及び/又はnon-3GPPアクセス(non-3GPP access又はnon-3GPP access networkとも称する)を介して、ネットワークサービスに対して接続可能な装置であってよい。また、UE_A10は、UICC(Universal Integrated Circuit Card)やeUICC(Embedded UICC)を備えてもよい。また、UE_A10は無線接続可能な端末装置であってもよく、ME(Mobile Equipment)、MS(Mobile Station)、又はCIoT(Cellular Internet of Things)端末(CIoT UE)等であってもよい。 Here, UE_A10 can connect to the network service via 3GPP access (also called 3GPP access or 3GPP access network) and/or non-3GPP access (also called non-3GPP access or non-3GPP access network). Any device. Also, the UE_A10 may include a UICC (Universal Integrated Circuit Card) and an eUICC (Embedded UICC). Further, UE_A10 may be a wirelessly connectable terminal device, ME (Mobile Equipment), MS (Mobile Station), CIoT (Cellular Internet of Things) terminal (CIoT UE), or the like.
 また、UE_A10は、アクセスネットワーク及び/又はコアネットワークと接続することができる。また、UE_A10は、アクセスネットワーク及び/又はコアネットワークを介して、DN_A5と接続することができる。UE_A10は、DN_A5との間で、PDU(Protocol Data Unit又はPacket Data Unit)セッションを用いて、ユーザデータを送受信(通信)する。さらに、ユーザデータの通信は、IP(Internet Protocol)通信に限らず、non-IP通信であってもよい。 UE_A10 can also connect to the access network and/or the core network. UE_A10 can also connect to DN_A5 via the access network and/or the core network. UE_A10 transmits/receives (communicates) user data with DN_A5 using a PDU (Protocol Data Unit or Packet Data Unit) session. Furthermore, communication of user data is not limited to IP (Internet Protocol) communication, and may be non-IP communication.
 ここで、IP通信とは、IPを用いたデータの通信のことであり、IPヘッダが付与されたIPパケットの送受信によって実現されるデータ通信のことである。尚、IPパケットを構成するペイロード部にはUE_A10が送受信するユーザデータが含まれてよい。また、non-IP通信とは、IPを用いないデータの通信のことであり、IPヘッダが付与されていないデータの送受信によって実現されるデータ通信のことである。例えば、non-IP通信は、IPパケットが付与されていないアプリケーションデータの送受信によって実現されるデータ通信でもよいし、マックヘッダやEthernet(登録商標)フレームヘッダ等の別のヘッダを付与してUE_A10が送受信するユーザデータを送受信してもよい。 Here, IP communication is data communication using IP, and is data communication realized by transmitting and receiving IP packets to which an IP header is added. Note that the payload portion forming the IP packet may include user data transmitted/received by the UE_A 10. In addition, non-IP communication is data communication that does not use IP, and is data communication that is realized by transmitting and receiving data that does not have an IP header. For example, the non-IP communication may be data communication realized by transmitting and receiving application data to which an IP packet is not added, or UE_A10 by adding another header such as a MAC header or an Ethernet (registered trademark) frame header. User data to be transmitted/received may be transmitted/received.
 また、PDUセッションとは、PDU接続サービスを提供する為に、UE_A10とDN_A5及び/又はDN_B105との間で確立される接続性である。より具体的には、PDUセッションは、UE_A10と外部ゲートウェイとの間で確立する接続性でよい。ここで、外部ゲートウェイは、UPFやPGW(Packet Data Network Gateway)等であってもよい。また、PDUセッションは、UE_A10と、コアネットワーク及び/又はDN(DN_A5及び/又はDN_B105)との間でユーザデータを送受信する為に確立される通信路でもよく、PDUを送受信する為の通信路でもよい。さらに、PDUセッションは、UE_A10と、コアネットワーク及び/又はDN(DN_A5及び/又はDN_B105)との間で確立されるセッションでもよく、移動通信システム1内の各装置間の1以上のベアラ等の転送路で構成される論理的な通信路でもよい。より具体的には、PDUセッションは、UE_A10が、コアネットワーク_B190、及び/又は外部ゲートウェイとの間に確立するコネクションでもよく、UE_A10とUPF(UPF_A235及び/又はUPF_B237)との間に確立するコネクションでもよい。また、PDUセッションは、NR node_A122を介したUE_A10とUPF(UPF_A235及び/又はUPF_B237)との間の接続性及び/又はコネクションでもよい。さらに、PDUセッションは、PDUセッションID及び/又はEPSベアラIDで識別されてもよい。 Also, a PDU session is the connectivity established between UE_A10 and DN_A5 and/or DN_B105 to provide a PDU connection service. More specifically, the PDU session may be the connectivity established between UE_A10 and the external gateway. Here, the external gateway may be UPF, PGW (Packet Data Network Gateway), or the like. Also, the PDU session may be a communication path established for transmitting/receiving user data between the UE_A10 and the core network and/or DN (DN_A5 and/or DN_B105), or a communication path for transmitting/receiving PDU. Good. Furthermore, the PDU session may be a session established between UE_A10 and the core network and/or DN (DN_A5 and/or DN_B105), and transfer of one or more bearers or the like between each device in the mobile communication system 1. It may be a logical communication path configured by a path. More specifically, the PDU session may be a connection that UE_A10 establishes between the core network_B190 and/or an external gateway, and a connection established between UE_A10 and UPF (UPF_A235 and/or UPF_B237). But it's okay. Further, the PDU session may be connectivity and/or connection between the UE_A10 and the UPF (UPF_A235 and/or UPF_B237) via the NR node_A122. Further, the PDU session may be identified by the PDU session ID and/or the EPS bearer ID.
 尚、UE_A10は、DN_A5及び/又はDN_B105に配置するアプリケーションサーバー等の装置と、PDUセッションを用いてユーザデータの送受信を実行することができる。言い換えると、PDUセッションは、UE_A10とDN_A5及び/又はDN_B105に配置するアプリケーションサーバー等の装置との間で送受信されるユーザデータを転送することができる。さらに、各装置(UE_A10、アクセスネットワーク内の装置、及び/又はコアネットワーク内の装置、及び/又はデータネットワーク内の装置)は、PDUセッションに対して、1以上の識別情報を対応づけて管理してもよい。尚、これらの識別情報には、APN(Access Point Name)、TFT(Traffic Flow Template)、セッションタイプ、アプリケーション識別情報、DN_A5及び/又はDN_B105の識別情報、NSI(Network Slice Instance)識別情報、及びDCN(Dedicated Core Network)識別情報、及びアクセスネットワーク識別情報のうち、少なくとも1つが含まれてもよいし、その他の情報がさらに含まれてもよい。さらに、PDUセッションを複数確立する場合には、PDUセッションに対応づけられる各識別情報は、同じ内容でもよいし、異なる内容でもよい。さらに、NSI識別情報は、NSIを識別する情報であり、以下NSI ID又はSlice Instance IDであってもよい。 Note that UE_A10 can execute transmission/reception of user data using a PDU session with a device such as an application server arranged in DN_A5 and/or DN_B105. In other words, the PDU session can transfer user data transmitted and received between the UE_A10 and a device such as an application server arranged in the DN_A5 and/or DN_B105. Furthermore, each device (UE_A10, a device in the access network, and / or a device in the core network, and / or a device in the data network), in association with the PDU session, manages one or more pieces of identification information. May be. These identification information include APN (Access Point Name), TFT (Traffic Flow Template), session type, application identification information, DN_A5 and/or DN_B105 identification information, NSI (Network Slice Instance) identification information, and DCN. At least one of (Dedicated Core Network) identification information and access network identification information may be included, and other information may be further included. Further, when a plurality of PDU sessions are established, each piece of identification information associated with the PDU session may have the same content or different content. Furthermore, the NSI identification information is information that identifies the NSI, and may be the NSI ID or Slice Instance ID below.
 また、アクセスネットワーク_Bとしては、図2に示すように、E-UTRAN(Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network)_A80、5G-RAN_A120、WLAN ANc125のいずれであってもよい。尚、E-UTRAN_A80及び/又は5G-RAN_A120は3GPPアクセスネットワークとも呼び、WLAN ANc125はnon-3GPPアクセスネットワークと呼んでもよい。各無線アクセスネットワークには、UE_A10が実際に接続する装置(例えば、基地局装置やアクセスポイント)等が含まれている。 The access network_B may be any of E-UTRAN (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network)_A80, 5G-RAN_A120, and WLAN ANc125, as shown in FIG. The E-UTRAN_A80 and/or 5G-RAN_A120 may be called a 3GPP access network, and the WLAN ANc125 may be called a non-3GPP access network. Each radio access network includes a device to which the UE_A 10 is actually connected (for example, a base station device or an access point) and the like.
 例えば、E-UTRAN_A80は、LTEのアクセスネットワークであり、1以上のeNB_A45を含んで構成される。eNB_A45はE-UTRA(Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access)でUE_A10が接続する無線基地局である。また、E-UTRAN_A80内に複数のeNBがある場合、各eNBは互いに接続してよい。 For example, E-UTRAN_A80 is an LTE access network and is configured to include one or more eNB_A45. The eNB_A45 is a wireless base station to which the UE_A10 connects by E-UTRA (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access). Moreover, when there are a plurality of eNBs in the E-UTRAN_A80, each eNB may be connected to each other.
 また、5G-RAN_A120は、5Gのアクセスネットワークであり、1以上のNR node(New Radio Access Technology node)_A122を含んで構成される。NR node_A122は5Gの無線アクセス(5G Radio Access)でUE_A10が接続する無線基地局である。また、5G-RAN_A120内に複数のNR node_A122がある場合、各NR node_A122は互いに接続してよい。 5G-RAN_A120 is a 5G access network, and is configured to include one or more NR node (New Radio Access Technology node)_A122. NR node_A122 is a wireless base station to which UE_A10 connects in 5G wireless access (5G Radio Access). Also, when there are multiple NR node_A 122 in 5G-RAN_A 120, each NR node_A 122 may be connected to each other.
 尚、5G-RAN_A120は、E-UTRA及び/又は5G Radio Accessで構成されるアクセスネットワークであってもよい。言い換えると、5G-RAN_A120には、eNB_A45が含まれてもよいし、NR node_A122が含まれてもよいし、その両方が含まれてもよい。この場合、eNB_A45とNR node_A122とは同様の装置であってもよい。従って、NR node_A122は、eNB_A45と置き換えことができる。 Note that 5G-RAN_A120 may be an access network composed of E-UTRA and/or 5G RadioAccess. In other words, 5G-RAN_A120 may include eNB_A45, NR node_A122, or both. In this case, the eNB_A45 and the NR node_A122 may be the same device. Therefore, NR node_A122 can be replaced with eNB_A45.
 また、WLAN ANc125は、無線LANアクセスネットワークであり、1以上のWAG(WLAN Access Gateway)_A126が含まれて構成される。WAG_A126は、無線LANアクセスでUE_A10が接続する無線基地局である。さらに、WAG_A126はコアネットワーク_B190とWLAN ANc125のゲートウェイでもよい。また、WAG_A126は、無線基地局の機能部とゲートウェイの機能部とが別の装置として構成されてもよい。 WLAN ANc125 is a wireless LAN access network and is configured to include one or more WAG (WLAN Access Gateway)_A126. WAG_A126 is a wireless base station to which UE_A10 connects by wireless LAN access. Further, WAG_A126 may be a gateway for core network_B190 and WLAN ANc125. Further, in WAG_A126, the functional unit of the wireless base station and the functional unit of the gateway may be configured as separate devices.
 尚、本明細書において、UE_A10が各無線アクセスネットワークに接続されるということは、各無線アクセスネットワークに含まれる基地局装置やアクセスポイント等に接続されることであり、送受信されるデータや信号等も、基地局装置やアクセスポイントを経由するということである。尚、UE_A10とコアネットワーク_B190間で送受信する制御メッセージは、アクセスネットワークの種類によらず、同じ制御メッセージでもよい。従って、UE_A10とコアネットワーク_B190とがNR node_A122を介してメッセージを送受信するということは、UE_A10とコアネットワーク_B190とがeNB_A45、及び/又はWAG_A126を介してメッセージを送信することと同じであってよい。 In this specification, UE_A10 being connected to each radio access network means being connected to a base station device, an access point, etc. included in each radio access network, and data and signals to be transmitted and received. Also means that it goes through a base station device and an access point. The control message transmitted/received between UE_A10 and core network_B190 may be the same control message regardless of the type of access network. Therefore, UE_A10 and core network _B190 to send and receive messages via NR node_A122 is the same as UE_A10 and core network _B190 eNB_A45, and / or the same as sending a message via WAG_A126. Good.
 さらに、アクセスネットワークは、UE_A10及び/又はコアネットワークと接続した無線ネットワークのことである。アクセスネットワークは、3GPPアクセスネットワークでもよく、non-3GPPアクセスネットワークでもよい。尚、3GPPアクセスネットワークは、E-UTRAN_A80、5G-RAN(Radio Access Network)_A120でもよく、non-3GPPアクセスネットワークは、WLAN ANc125でもよい。尚、UE_A10はコアネットワークに接続する為に、アクセスネットワークに接続してもよく、アクセスネットワークを介してコアネットワークに接続してもよい。 Furthermore, the access network is a wireless network connected to UE_A10 and/or the core network. The access network may be a 3GPP access network or a non-3GPP access network. The 3GPP access network may be E-UTRAN_A80, 5G-RAN (Radio Access Network)_A120, and the non-3GPP access network may be WLAN ANc125. The UE_A10 may be connected to the access network in order to connect to the core network, or may be connected to the core network via the access network.
 また、DN_A5及びDN_B105は、UE_A10に通信サービスを提供するデータネットワーク(Data Network)であり、パケットデータサービス網として構成されてもよいし、サービス毎に構成されてもよい。さらに、DN_A5及びDN_B105は、接続された通信端末を含んでもよい。従って、DN_A5及び/又はDN_B105と接続することは、DN_A5及び/又はDN_B105に配置された通信端末やサーバ装置と接続することであってもよい。さらに、DN_A5及び/又はDN_B105との間でユーザデータを送受信することは、DN_A5及び/又はDN_B105に配置された通信端末やサーバ装置とユーザデータを送受信することであってもよい。また、DN_A5及び/又はDN_B105は、図1ではコアネットワークの外にあるが、コアネットワーク内にあってもよい。 Also, DN_A5 and DN_B105 are data networks that provide communication services to UE_A10, and may be configured as a packet data service network or may be configured for each service. Further, DN_A5 and DN_B105 may include connected communication terminals. Therefore, connecting with DN_A5 and/or DN_B105 may be connecting with a communication terminal or server device arranged in DN_A5 and/or DN_B105. Furthermore, transmitting/receiving user data to/from DN_A5 and/or DN_B105 may be transmitting/receiving user data to/from a communication terminal or server device arranged in DN_A5 and/or DN_B105. Further, DN_A5 and/or DN_B105 are outside the core network in FIG. 1, but may be inside the core network.
 また、コアネットワーク_B190は、1以上のコアネットワーク内の装置として構成されてもよい。ここで、コアネットワーク内の装置は、コアネットワーク_B190に含まれる各装置の処理又は機能の一部又は全てを実行する装置であってよい。尚、コアネットワーク内の装置は、コアネットワーク装置と称してもよい。 Also, the core network_B 190 may be configured as a device in one or more core networks. Here, the device in the core network may be a device that executes some or all of the processes or functions of each device included in the core network_B 190. The device in the core network may be referred to as a core network device.
 さらに、コアネットワークは、アクセスネットワーク及び/又はDN_A5と接続した移動体通信こと業者(MNO; Mobile Network Operator)が運用するIP移動通信ネットワークのことである。コアネットワークは、移動通信システム1を運用、管理する移動通信こと業者の為のコアネットワークでもよいし、MVNO(Mobile Virtual Network Operator)、MVNE(Mobile Virtual Network Enabler)等の仮想移動通信こと業者や仮想移動体通信サービス提供者の為のコアネットワークでもよい。尚、コアネットワーク_B190は、EPS(Evolved Packet System)を構成するEPC(Evolved Packet Core)でもよく、5GSを構成する5GC(5G Core Network)でもよい。さらに、コアネットワーク_B190は、5G通信サービスを提供するシステムのコアネットワークでもよい。尚、コアネットワーク_B190は、これに限らず、モバイル通信サービスを提供するためのネットワークでもよい。 Furthermore, the core network is an IP mobile communication network operated by a mobile communication operator (MNO; Mobile Network Operator) connected to the access network and/or DN_A5. The core network may be a core network for a mobile communication operator that operates and manages the mobile communication system 1, or a virtual mobile communication operator or a virtual mobile communication operator such as MVNO (Mobile Virtual Network Operator) and MVNE (Mobile Virtual Network Enabler). It may be a core network for mobile communication service providers. The core network_B 190 may be an EPC (Evolved Packet Core) that constitutes an EPS (Evolved Packet System) or a 5GC (5G Core Network) that constitutes a 5GS. Furthermore, the core network_B 190 may be a core network of a system that provides 5G communication services. The core network_B 190 is not limited to this, and may be a network for providing mobile communication services.
 次に、コアネットワーク_B190について説明する。コアネットワーク_B190には、AUSF(Authentication Server Function)、AMF(Access and Mobility Management Function)_A240、SDSF(Structured Data Storage network function)、UDSF(Unstructured Data Storage network function)、NEF(Network Exposure Function)、NRF(NF Repository Function)、PCF(Policy Control Function)、SMF(Session Management Function)_A230、SMF(Session Management Function)_B232、UDM(Unified Data Management)、UPF(User Plane Function)_A235、UPF(User Plane Function)_B237、AF(Application Function)、N3IWF(Non-3GPP InterWorking Function)のうち、少なくとも1つが含まれてよい。そして、これらはNF(Network Function)として構成されてもよい。NFとは、ネットワーク内に構成される処理機能を指してもよい。 Next, the core network_B190 will be explained. Core network_B190 includes AUSF (Authentication Server Function), AMF (Access and Mobility Management Function)_A240, SDSF (Structured Data Storage network function), UDSF (Unstructured Data Storage network function), NEF (Network Exposure Function), NRF (NF Repository Function), PCF (Policy Control Function), SMF (Session Management Function)_A230, SMF (Session Management Function)_B232, UDM (Unified Data Management), UPF (User Plane Function)_A235, UPF (User Plane Function) _B237, AF (Application Function), N3IWF (Non-3GPP InterWorking Function), at least one may be included. Then, these may be configured as an NF (Network Function). The NF may refer to a processing function configured in the network.
 図3には、簡単化のために、これらのうち、AMF(AMF_A240)、SMF(SMF_A230及びSMF_B232)、及びUPF(UPF_A235及びUPF_B237)についてのみ記載されているが、これら以外のもの(装置及び/又はNF)が含まれないということを意味するものではない。尚、簡単化のため、UE_A10はUEと、AMF_A240はAMFと、SMF_A230及びSMF_B232はSMFと、UPF_A235及びUPF_B237はUPFと、DN_A5及びDN_B105はDNとも称する。 For the sake of simplification, FIG. 3 shows only AMF (AMF_A240), SMF (SMF_A230 and SMF_B232), and UPF (UPF_A235 and UPF_B237) among them, but the others (device and// Or NF) is not included. For simplification, UE_A10 is also referred to as UE, AMF_A240 is referred to as AMF, SMF_A230 and SMF_B232 are referred to as SMF, UPF_A235 and UPF_B237 are referred to as UPF, and DN_A5 and DN_B105 are also referred to as DN.
 また、図3には、N1インタフェース(以下、参照点、reference pointとも称する)、N2インタフェース、N3インタフェース、N4インタフェース、N6インタフェース、N9インタフェース、N11インタフェースが記載されている。ここで、N1インタフェースはUEとAMFとの間のインタフェースであり、N2インタフェースは(R)AN(アクセスネットワーク)とAMFとの間のインタフェースであり、N3インタフェースは(R)AN(アクセスネットワーク)とUPFとの間のインタフェースであり、N4インタフェースはSMFとUPFとの間のインタフェースであり、N6インタフェースはUPFとDNとの間のインタフェースであり、N9インタフェースはUPFとUPFとの間のインタフェースであり、N11インタフェースはAMFとSMFとの間のインタフェースである。これらのインタフェースを利用して、各装置間は通信を行うことができる。 Also, in FIG. 3, an N1 interface (hereinafter also referred to as a reference point), an N2 interface, an N3 interface, an N4 interface, an N6 interface, an N9 interface, and an N11 interface are described. Here, the N1 interface is an interface between the UE and AMF, the N2 interface is an interface between (R)AN (access network) and AMF, and the N3 interface is (R)AN (access network). Interface between UPF, N4 interface between SMF and UPF, N6 interface between UPF and DN, N9 interface between UPF and UPF , N11 interface is the interface between AMF and SMF. Using these interfaces, communication can be performed between each device.
 尚、図3は、UEが、複数のPDUセッションを用いて、2つのDNに同時にアクセスする場合のシステム構成図である。2つの異なるPDUセッションに対して、2つのSMFが選択されている。また、図3ではSMF_A230とUPF_A235が2つずつある。 Note that FIG. 3 is a system configuration diagram when the UE simultaneously accesses two DNs using a plurality of PDU sessions. Two SMFs have been selected for two different PDU sessions. Also, in FIG. 3, there are two SMF_A230s and two UPF_A235s.
 以下、コアネットワーク_B190内に含まれる各装置の簡単な説明をする。 The following is a brief description of each device included in Core Network_B190.
 まず、AMF_A240は、他のAMF、SMF(SMF_A230及び/又はSMF_B232)、アクセスネットワーク(つまり、E-UTRAN_A80と5G-RAN_A120とWLAN ANc125)、UDM、AUSF、PCFに接続される。AMF_A240は、登録管理(Registration management)、接続管理(Connection management)、到達可能性管理(Reachability management)、UE_A10等の移動性管理(Mobility management)、UEとSMF間のSM(Session Management)メッセージの転送、アクセス認証(Access Authentication、Access Authorization)、セキュリティアンカー機能(SEA; Security Anchor Function)、セキュリティコンテキスト管理(SCM; Security Context Management)、N3IWFに対するN2インタフェースのサポート、N3IWFを介したUEとのNAS信号の送受信のサポート、N3IWFを介して接続するUEの認証、RM状態(Registration Management states)の管理、CM状態(Connection Management states)の管理等の役割を担ってもよい。また、AMF_A240は、コアネットワーク_B190内に1以上配置されてもよい。また、AMF_A240は、1以上のNSI(Network Slice Instance)を管理するNFでもよい。また、AMF_A240は、複数のNSI間で共有される共有CPファンクション(CCNF; Common CPNF(Control Plane Network Function))でもよい。 First, AMF_A240 is connected to other AMF, SMF (SMF_A230 and/or SMF_B232), access network (that is, E-UTRAN_A80 and 5G-RAN_A120 and WLANANc125), UDM, AUSF, and PCF. AMF_A240 is the registration management (Registration management), connection management (Connection management), reachability management (Reachability management), mobility management (Mobility management) such as UE_A10, SM (Session Management) message transfer between UE and SMF. , Access Authentication (Access Authentication, Access Authorization), Security Anchor Function (SEA; Security Anchor Function), Security Context Management (SCM; Security Context Management), N2 interface support for N3IWF, NAS signal with UE via N3IWF It may play roles such as support of transmission/reception, authentication of UE connecting via N3IWF, management of RM states (Registration Management states), management of CM states (Connection Management states). Further, one or more AMF_A240 may be arranged in the core network_B190. AMF_A240 may be an NF that manages one or more NSI (Network Slice Instance). The AMF_A240 may be a shared CP function (CCNF; Control Plane Network Function) that is shared between multiple NSIs.
 また、RM状態としては、非登録状態(RM-DEREGISTERED state)と、登録状態(RM-REGISTERED state)がある。RM-DEREGISTERED状態では、UEはネットワークに登録されていないため、AMFにおけるUEコンテキストが、そのUEに対して有効な場所の情報やルーティングの情報を持っていない為、AMFはUEに到達できない状態である。また、RM-REGISTERED状態では、UEはネットワークに登録されているため、UEはネットワークとの登録が必要なサービスを受信することができる。 RM also has a non-registration state (RM-DEREGISTERED state) and a registration state (RM-REGISTERED state). In the RM-DEREGISTERED state, since the UE is not registered in the network, the UE context in AMF does not have valid location information or routing information for that UE, so AMF cannot reach the UE. is there. Further, in the RM-REGISTERED state, since the UE is registered in the network, the UE can receive a service that requires registration with the network.
 また、CM状態としては、非接続状態(CM-IDLE state)と、接続状態(CM-CONNECTED state)がある。CM-IDLE状態では、UEはRM-REGISTERED状態にあるが、N1インタフェースを介したAMFとの間で確立されるNASシグナリング接続(NAS signaling connection)を持っていない。また、CM-IDLE状態では、UEはN2インタフェースの接続(N2 connection)、及びN3インタフェースの接続(N3 connection)を持っていない。一方、CM-CONNECTED状態では、N1インタフェースを介したAMFとの間で確立されるNASシグナリング接続(NAS signaling connection)を持っている。また、CM-CONNECTED状態では、UEはN2インタフェースの接続(N2 connection)、及び/又はN3インタフェースの接続(N3 connection)を持っていてもよい。 Also, as the CM state, there are a non-connection state (CM-IDLE state) and a connection state (CM-CONNECTED state). In the CM-IDLE state, the UE is in the RM-REGISTERED state but does not have a NAS signaling connection (NAS signaling connection) established with the AMF via the N1 interface. In the CM-IDLE state, the UE does not have the N2 interface connection (N2 connection) and the N3 interface connection (N3 connection). On the other hand, in the CM-CONNECTED state, it has a NAS signaling connection established with the AMF via the N1 interface. Further, in the CM-CONNECTED state, the UE may have an N2 interface connection (N2 connection) and/or an N3 interface connection (N3 connection).
 また、SMF_A230は、AMF_A240、UPF_A235、UDM、PCFに接続される。SMF_B232は、AMF_A240、UPF_B237、UDM、PCFに接続される。SMF_A230及びSMF_B232は、PDUセッション等のセッション管理(Session Management)、UEに対するIPアドレス割り当て(IP address allocation)、UPFの選択と制御、適切な目的地へトラフィックをルーティングする為のUPFの設定、下りリンクのデータが到着したことを通知する機能(Downlink Data Notification)、AMFを介してANに対してN2インタフェースを介して送信される、AN特有の(ANごとの)SM情報の識別子、セッションに対するSSCモード(Session and Service Continuity mode)の決定、ローミング機能等の役割を担ってもよい。また、SMF_A230及びSMF_B232は、別々の装置又はNFとして記載したが、同一の装置又は機能であってもよい。 Also, SMF_A230 is connected to AMF_A240, UPF_A235, UDM, and PCF. SMF_B232 is connected to AMF_A240, UPF_B237, UDM, and PCF. SMF_A230 and SMF_B232 are session management such as PDU session (Session Management), IP address allocation (IP address allocation) for UE, UPF selection and control, UPF setting for routing traffic to an appropriate destination, downlink Function to notify the arrival of data (Downlink Data Notification), AN specific SM information identifier (for each AN) sent via AN2 to AN via AMF, SSC mode for session It may play a role of determining (Session and Service Continuity mode) and roaming function. Further, although SMF_A230 and SMF_B232 are described as separate devices or NFs, they may be the same device or function.
 また、UPF_A235は、DN_A5、SMF_A230、他のUPF、及び、アクセスネットワーク(つまり、E-UTRAN_A80と5G-RAN_A120とWLAN ANc125)に接続される。UPF_B237は、DN_B105、SMF_B232、他のUPF、及び、アクセスネットワーク(つまり、E-UTRAN_A80と5G-RAN_A120とWLAN ANc125)に接続される。UPF_A235及びUPF_B237は、intra-RAT mobility又はinter-RAT mobilityに対するアンカー、パケットのルーティングと転送(Packet routing & forwarding)、1つのDNに対して複数のトラフィックフローのルーティングをサポートするUL CL(Uplink Classifier)機能、マルチホームPDUセッション(multi-homed PDU session)をサポートするBranching point機能、user planeに対するQoS処理、上りリンクトラフィックの検証(verification)、下りリンクパケットのバッファリング、下りリンクデータ通知(Downlink Data Notification)のトリガ機能等の役割を担ってもよい。また、UPF_A235及びUPF_B237は、それぞれDN_A5とコアネットワーク_B190との間のゲートウェイ、及びDN_B105とコアネットワーク_B190との間のゲートウェイとして、ユーザデータの転送を行う中継装置でもよい。尚、UPF_A235及びUPF_B237は、IP通信及び/又はnon-IP通信の為のゲートウェイでもよい。さらに、UPF_A235及びUPF_B237は、IP通信を転送する機能を持っていてもよく、non-IP通信とIP通信を変換する機能を持っていてもよい。さらに複数配置されるゲートウェイは、コアネットワーク_B190と単一のDNを接続するゲートウェイでもよい。尚、UPF_A235及びUPF_B237は、他のNFとの接続性を備えてもよく、他のNFを介して各装置に接続してもよい。 UPF_A235 is also connected to DN_A5, SMF_A230, other UPFs, and access networks (that is, E-UTRAN_A80 and 5G-RAN_A120 and WLANANc125). UPF_B237 is connected to DN_B105, SMF_B232, another UPF, and an access network (that is, E-UTRAN_A80, 5G-RAN_A120, and WLANANc125). UPF_A235 and UPF_B237 are UL-CL (Uplink Classifier) that supports anchor for intra-RAT mobility or inter-RAT mobility, packet routing & forwarding, and routing of multiple traffic flows for one DN. Function, Branching point function that supports multi-homed PDU session, QoS processing for user plane, verification of uplink traffic (verification), buffering of downlink packet, downlink data notification (Downlink Data Notification) ), the trigger function, etc. may be taken. Further, UPF_A235 and UPF_B237 may be relay devices that transfer user data as a gateway between DN_A5 and core network_B190 and a gateway between DN_B105 and core network_B190, respectively. Note that UPF_A235 and UPF_B237 may be gateways for IP communication and/or non-IP communication. Further, UPF_A235 and UPF_B237 may have a function of transferring IP communication, or may have a function of converting non-IP communication and IP communication. Further, a plurality of gateways may be gateways connecting the core network_B 190 and a single DN. The UPF_A235 and UPF_B237 may have connectivity with another NF, or may be connected to each device via the other NF.
 尚、UPF_A235及びUPF_B237は、別々の装置又はNFとして記載したが、UPF_A235とアクセスネットワークとの間、及び、UPF_B237とアクセスネットワークとの間に、UPF_A235及びUPF_B237とは異なるUPFであって、共通のUPF_C239(branching point又はuplink classifierとも称する)が存在してもよい。UPF_C239が存在する場合、UE_A10とDN_A5との間のPDUセッションは、アクセスネットワーク、UPF_C239、UPF_A235を介して確立され、UE_A10とDN_B105との間のPDUセッションは、アクセスネットワーク、UPF_C239、UPF_B237を介して確立されることになる。 Note that UPF_A235 and UPF_B237 are described as separate devices or NFs, but between UPF_A235 and the access network, and between UPF_B237 and the access network, UPF_A235 and UPF_B237 are different UPF, and common UPF_C239. (also called branching point or uplink classifier) may exist. If UPF_C239 is present, a PDU session between UE_A10 and DN_A5 is established via the access network, UPF_C239, UPF_A235, and a PDU session between UE_A10 and DN_B105 is established via the access network, UPF_C239, UPF_B237. Will be done.
 尚、U-Plane(User Plane)とは、ユーザデータを送受信する為の通信路でもよく、複数のベアラで構成されてもよい。さらに、C-Plane(Control Plane)とは、制御メッセージを送受信する為の通信路でもよく、複数のベアラで構成されてもよい。 Note that the U-Plane (User Plane) may be a communication path for transmitting and receiving user data, and may be composed of multiple bearers. Furthermore, the C-Plane (Control Plane) may be a communication path for transmitting and receiving control messages, and may be composed of a plurality of bearers.
 また、AUSFは、UDM、AMF_A240に接続されている。AUSFは、認証サーバとして機能する。 Also, AUSF is connected to UDM and AMF_A240. AUSF functions as an authentication server.
 SDSFは、NEFが、構造化されたデータ(structured data)として、情報を保存したり、取得したりするための機能を提供する。 SDSF provides functions for NEF to save and acquire information as structured data.
 UDSFは、全てのNFが、構造化されていないデータ(unstructured data)として、情報を保存したり、取得したりするための機能を提供する。 UDSF provides a function for all NFs to store and retrieve information as unstructured data.
 NEFは、3GPPネットワークによって提供されるサービス・能力を安全に提供する手段を提供する。他のNFから受信した情報を、構造化されたデータ(structured data)として保存する。 NEF provides a means to securely provide the services and capabilities provided by the 3GPP network. Save information received from other NFs as structured data.
 NRFは、NFインスタンスからNF発見要求(NF Discovery Request)を受信すると、そのNFに対して、発見したNFインスタンスの情報を提供したり、利用可能なNFインスタンスや、そのインスタンスがサポートするサービスの情報を保持したりする。 Upon receiving an NF Discovery Request from an NF instance, the NRF provides the NF with information about the discovered NF instance, information on available NF instances, and information about the services supported by that instance. To hold.
 PCFは、SMF(SMF_A230、SMF_B232)、AF、AMF_A240に接続されている。ポリシールール(policy rule)等を提供する。 PCF is connected to SMF (SMF_A230, SMF_B232), AF, AMF_A240. Provide policy rules etc.
 UDMは、AMF_A240、SMF(SMF_A230、SMF_B232)、AUSF、PCFに接続される。UDMは、UDM FE(application front end)とUDR(User Data Repository)を含む。UDM FEは、認証情報(credentials)、場所管理(location management)、加入者管理(subscription management)等の処理を行う。UDRは、UDM FEが提供するのに必要なデータと、PCFが必要とするポリシープロファイル(policy profiles)を保存する。 UDM is connected to AMF_A240, SMF (SMF_A230, SMF_B232), AUSF, and PCF. UDM includes UDM (FE front) and UDR (User Data Repository). UDMFE performs processing such as authentication information (credentials), location management (location management), and subscriber management (subscription management). UDR saves the data necessary for UDMFE to provide and the policy profiles required by PCF.
 AFは、PCFに接続される。AFは、トラフィックルーティングに対して影響を与えたり、ポリシー制御に関与したりする。 ▽AF is connected to PCF. The AF influences traffic routing and participates in policy control.
 N3IWFは、UEとのIPsecトンネルの確立、UEとAMF間のNAS(N1)シグナリングの中継(relaying)、SMFから送信されAMFによってリレーされたN2シグナリングの処理、IPsec Security Association(IPsec SA)の確立、UEとUPF間のuser planeパケットの中継(relaying)、AMF選択等の機能を提供する。 N3IWF establishes an IPsec tunnel with UE, relays NAS (N1) signaling between UE and AMF, processes N2 signaling transmitted from SMF and relayed by AMF, and establishes IPsec Security Association (IPsec SA). It provides functions such as relaying user plane packets between UE and UPF, and AMF selection.
 [1.2.各装置の構成]
 以下、各装置の構成について説明する。尚、下記各装置及び各装置の各部の機能の一部又は全部は、物理的なハードウェア上で動作するものでもよいし、汎用的なハードウェア上に仮想的に構成された論理的なハードウェア上で動作するものでもよい。
[1.2. Configuration of each device]
The configuration of each device will be described below. It should be noted that some or all of the functions of each device and each unit of each device described below may operate on physical hardware, or may be a logical hardware virtually configured on general-purpose hardware. It may be one that operates on wear.
 [1.2.1.UEの構成]
 まず、UE_A10の装置構成例を、図4に示す。図4に示すように、UE_A10は、制御部_A400、送受信部_A420、記憶部_A440で構成される。送受信部_A420及び記憶部_A440は、制御部_A400とバスを介して接続されている。また、送受信部_A420には、外部アンテナ410が接続されている。また、記憶部_A440は、UEコンテキスト442を記憶している。
[1.2.1. UE configuration]
First, a device configuration example of UE_A10 is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, UE_A10 includes a control unit_A400, a transmission/reception unit_A420, and a storage unit_A440. The transmission/reception unit_A420 and the storage unit_A440 are connected to the control unit_A400 via a bus. An external antenna 410 is connected to the transmitter/receiver_A 420. Further, the storage unit_A 440 stores the UE context 442.
 制御部_A400は、UE_A10全体を制御する為の機能部であり、記憶部_A440に記憶されている各種の情報やプログラムを読みだして実行することにより、UE_A10全体の各種処理を実現する。 The control unit_A400 is a functional unit for controlling the entire UE_A10, and realizes various processes of the entire UE_A10 by reading and executing various information and programs stored in the storage unit_A440.
 送受信部_A420は、UE_A10がアクセスネットワーク内の基地局(E-UTRAN_A80と5G-RAN_A120)及び/又はアクセスポイント(WLAN ANc125)に接続し、アクセスネットワークへ接続する為の機能部である。言い換えると、UE_A10は、送受信部_A420に接続された外部アンテナ410を介して、アクセスネットワーク内の基地局及び/又はアクセスポイントと接続することができる。具体的には、UE_A10は、送受信部_A420に接続された外部アンテナ410を介して、アクセスネットワーク内の基地局及び/又はアクセスポイントとの間で、ユーザデータ及び/又は制御情報を送受信することができる。 The transceiver_A420 is a functional unit for the UE_A10 to connect to the base stations (E-UTRAN_A80 and 5G-RAN_A120) and/or the access point (WLANANc125) in the access network and to connect to the access network. In other words, the UE_A10 can connect to the base station and/or the access point in the access network via the external antenna 410 connected to the transceiver_A420. Specifically, UE_A10, via the external antenna 410 connected to the transceiver unit_A420, between the base station and / or access point in the access network, to transmit and receive user data and / or control information. You can
 記憶部_A440は、UE_A10の各動作に必要なプログラムやデータ等を記憶する機能部であり、例えば、半導体メモリ、HDD(Hard Disk Drive)、SSD(Solid State Drive)等により構成されている。記憶部_A440は、後述する通信手続き内で送受信する制御メッセージに含まれる識別情報、制御情報、フラグ、パラメータ等を記憶している。記憶部_A440で記憶されるUEコンテキスト442としては、アクセスネットワーク_B80/120/125に接続する際に用いるUEコンテキストと、コアネットワーク_B190に接続する際に用いるUEコンテキストとがあってもよい。また、UEコンテキスト442としては、UEごとに記憶されるUEコンテキスト、PDUセッションごとに記憶されるUEコンテキスト、ベアラごとに記憶されるUEコンテキストがあってもよい。UEごとに記憶されるUEコンテキストとしては、IMSI、EMM State、GUTI、ME Identityを含んでもよい。また、PDUセッションごとに記憶されるUEコンテキストとしては、APN in Use、Assigned Session Type、IP Address(es)、Default Bearerを含んでもよい。また、ベアラごとに記憶されるUEコンテキストとしては、EPS Bearer ID、TI、TFTを含んでもよい。 The storage unit_A440 is a functional unit that stores programs and data necessary for each operation of the UE_A10, and is configured by, for example, semiconductor memory, HDD (Hard Disk Drive), SSD (Solid State Drive), and the like. The storage unit_A440 stores identification information, control information, flags, parameters and the like included in control messages transmitted and received in a communication procedure described later. As the UE context 442 stored in the storage unit_A440, there may be a UE context used when connecting to the access network_B80/120/125 and a UE context used when connecting to the core network_B190. .. Also, the UE context 442 may include a UE context stored for each UE, a UE context stored for each PDU session, and a UE context stored for each bearer. The UE context stored for each UE may include IMSI, EMMState, GUTI, and MEIdentity. In addition, the UE context stored for each PDU session may include APN in Use, Assigned Session Type, IP Address(es), and Default Bearer. The UE context stored for each bearer may include EPS Bearer ID, TI, and TFT.
 [1.2.2.eNB/NR node/WAGの構成]
 次に、eNB_A45、NR node_A122及びWAG_A126の装置構成例を、図5に示す。図5に示すように、eNB_A45、NR node_A122及びWAG_A126は、制御部_B500、ネットワーク接続部_B520、送受信部_B530、記憶部_B540で構成されている。ネットワーク接続部_B520、送受信部_B530及び記憶部_B540は、制御部_B500とバスを介して接続されている。また、送受信部_B530には、外部アンテナ510が接続されている。
[1.2.2. eNB/NR node/WAG configuration]
Next, FIG. 5 shows a device configuration example of the eNB_A45, NR node_A122, and WAG_A126. As shown in FIG. 5, the eNB_A45, NR node_A122, and WAG_A126 are composed of a control unit_B500, a network connection unit_B520, a transmission/reception unit_B530, and a storage unit_B540. The network connection unit_B520, the transmission/reception unit_B530, and the storage unit_B540 are connected to the control unit_B500 via a bus. An external antenna 510 is connected to the transceiver_B530.
 制御部_B500は、eNB_A45、NR node_A122及びWAG_A126全体を制御する為の機能部であり、記憶部_B540に記憶されている各種の情報やプログラムを読みだして実行することにより、eNB_A45、NR node_A122、及びWAG_A126全体の各種処理を実現する。 The control unit_B500 is a functional unit for controlling the entire eNB_A45, NR node_A122 and WAG_A126, and by reading out and executing various information and programs stored in the storage unit_B540, the eNB_A45, NR node_A122 , And various processes of the entire WAG_A126 are realized.
 ネットワーク接続部_B520は、eNB_A45、NR node_A122及びWAG_A126が、コアネットワーク内のAMF_A240やUPF_A235と接続する為の機能部である。言い換えると、eNB_A45、NR node_A122及びWAG_A126は、ネットワーク接続部_B520を介して、コアネットワーク内のAMF_A240やUPF_A235と接続することができる。具体的には、eNB_A45、NR node_A122及びWAG_A126は、ネットワーク接続部_B520を介して、AMF_A240及び/又はUPF_A235との間で、ユーザデータ及び/又は制御情報を送受信することができる。 The network connection part_B520 is a function part for the eNB_A45, NR node_A122 and WAG_A126 to connect with the AMF_A240 and UPF_A235 in the core network. In other words, the eNB_A45, NR node_A122 and WAG_A126 can be connected to the AMF_A240 and UPF_A235 in the core network via the network connection unit_B520. Specifically, the eNB_A45, NR node_A122, and WAG_A126 can transmit/receive user data and/or control information to/from the AMF_A240 and/or UPF_A235 via the network connection unit_B520.
 送受信部_B530は、eNB_A45、NR node_A122及びWAG_A126が、UE_A10と接続する為の機能部である。言い換えると、eNB_A45、NR node_A122及びWAG_A126は、送受信部_B530を介して、UE_A10との間で、ユーザデータ及び/又は制御情報を送受信することができる。 ・Transceiver_B530 is a functional unit for connecting eNB_A45, NR node_A122 and WAG_A126 with UE_A10. In other words, the eNB_A45, NR node_A122, and WAG_A126 can transmit/receive user data and/or control information to/from the UE_A10 via the transmitting/receiving unit_B530.
 記憶部_B540は、eNB_A45、NR node_A122及びWAG_A126の各動作に必要なプログラムやデータ等を記憶する機能部である。記憶部_B540は、例えば、半導体メモリや、HDD、SSD等により構成されている。記憶部_B540は、後述する通信手続き内で送受信する制御メッセージに含まれる識別情報、制御情報、フラグ、パラメータ等を記憶している。記憶部_B540は、これらの情報をコンテキストとしてUE_A10毎に記憶してもよい。 The storage unit_B540 is a functional unit that stores programs and data necessary for each operation of the eNB_A45, NR node_A122, and WAG_A126. The storage unit_B 540 includes, for example, a semiconductor memory, an HDD, an SSD, or the like. The storage unit_B 540 stores identification information, control information, flags, parameters and the like included in control messages transmitted and received in a communication procedure described later. The storage unit_B540 may store these pieces of information as contexts for each UE_A10.
 [1.2.3.AMFの構成]
 次に、AMF_A240の装置構成例を、図6に示す。図6に示すように、AMF_A240は、制御部_C600、ネットワーク接続部_C620、記憶部_C640で構成されている。ネットワーク接続部_C620及び記憶部_C640は、制御部_C600とバスを介して接続されている。また、記憶部_C640は、コンテキスト642を記憶している。
[1.2.3. AMF configuration]
Next, FIG. 6 shows a device configuration example of the AMF_A240. As shown in FIG. 6, the AMF_A240 includes a control unit_C600, a network connection unit_C620, and a storage unit_C640. The network connection unit_C620 and the storage unit_C640 are connected to the control unit_C600 via a bus. Further, the storage unit_C 640 stores the context 642.
 制御部_C600は、AMF_A240全体を制御する為の機能部であり、記憶部_C640に記憶されている各種の情報やプログラムを読みだして実行することにより、AMF_A240全体の各種処理を実現する。 The control unit_C600 is a functional unit for controlling the entire AMF_A240, and realizes various processes of the entire AMF_A240 by reading and executing various information and programs stored in the storage unit_C640.
 ネットワーク接続部_C620は、AMF_A240が、他のAMF_240、SMF_A230、アクセスネットワーク内の基地局(E-UTRAN_A80と5G-RAN_A120)及び/又はアクセスポイント(WLAN ANc125)、UDM、AUSF、PCFと接続する為の機能部である。言い換えると、AMF_A240は、ネットワーク接続部_C620を介して、アクセスネットワーク内の基地局及び/又はアクセスポイント、UDM、AUSF、PCFとの間で、ユーザデータ及び/又は制御情報を送受信することができる。 Network connection unit_C620 is for AMF_A240 to connect with other AMF_240, SMF_A230, base stations (E-UTRAN_A80 and 5G-RAN_A120) and/or access point (WLANANc125), UDM, AUSF, PCF in the access network. Is a functional part of. In other words, the AMF_A240 can send and receive user data and/or control information to/from the base station and/or access point in the access network, UDM, AUSF, PCF via the network connection unit_C620. ..
 記憶部_C640は、AMF_A240の各動作に必要なプログラムやデータ等を記憶する機能部である。記憶部_C640は、例えば、半導体メモリや、HDD、SSD等により構成されている。記憶部_C640は、後述する通信手続き内で送受信する制御メッセージに含まれる識別情報、制御情報、フラグ、パラメータ等を記憶している。記憶部_C640に記憶されているコンテキスト642としては、UEごとに記憶されるコンテキスト、PDUセッションごとに記憶されるコンテキスト、ベアラごとに記憶されるコンテキストがあってもよい。UEごとに記憶されるコンテキストとしては、IMSI、MSISDN、MM State、GUTI、ME Identity、UE Radio Access Capability、UE Network Capability、MS Network Capability、Access Restriction、MME F-TEID、SGW F-TEID、eNB Address、MME UE S1AP ID、eNB UE S1AP ID、NR node Address、NR node ID、WAG Address、WAG IDを含んでもよい。また、PDUセッションごとに記憶されるコンテキストとしては、APN in Use、Assigned Session Type、IP Address(es)、PGW F-TEID、SCEF ID、Default bearerを含んでもよい。また、ベアラごとに記憶されるコンテキストとしては、EPS Bearer ID、TI、TFT、SGW F-TEID、PGW F-TEID、MME F-TEID、eNB Address、NR node Address、WAG Address、eNB ID、NR node ID、WAG IDを含んでもよい。 The storage unit_C640 is a functional unit that stores programs and data necessary for each operation of the AMF_A240. The storage unit_C 640 includes, for example, a semiconductor memory, HDD, SSD, or the like. The storage unit_C 640 stores identification information, control information, flags, parameters and the like included in control messages transmitted and received in a communication procedure described later. The context 642 stored in the storage unit_C 640 may be a context stored for each UE, a context stored for each PDU session, or a context stored for each bearer. Contexts stored for each UE include IMSI, MSISDN, MM State, GUTI, MEIdentity, UERadioAccessCapability, UENetworkCapability, MSNetworkCapability, Access Restriction, MMEF-TEID, SGW F-TEID, eNB Address. , MMEUES1APID, eNBUES1APID, NRnodeAddress, NRnodeID, WAGAddress, WAGID. The context stored for each PDU session may include APNinUse, AssignedSessionType, IPAddress(es), PGWF-TEID, SCEFID, and Defaultbearer. Also, the contexts stored for each bearer are EPS Bearer ID, TI, TFT, SGW F-TEID, PGW F-TEID, MME F-TEID, eNB Address, NR node Address, WAG Address, eNB ID, NR node. It may include ID and WAG ID.
 [1.2.4.SMFの構成]
 次に、SMF_A230及びSMF_B232の装置構成例を、図7に示す。図7に示すように、SMF_A230は、それぞれ、制御部_D700、ネットワーク接続部_D720、記憶部_D740で構成されている。ネットワーク接続部_D720及び記憶部_D740は、制御部_D700とバスを介して接続されている。また、記憶部_D740は、コンテキスト742を記憶している。
[1.2.4. SMF configuration]
Next, FIG. 7 shows a device configuration example of the SMF_A230 and SMF_B232. As shown in FIG. 7, the SMF_A230 includes a control unit_D700, a network connection unit_D720, and a storage unit_D740, respectively. The network connection unit_D720 and the storage unit_D740 are connected to the control unit_D700 via a bus. The storage unit_D 740 stores the context 742.
 SMF_A230の制御部_D700は、SMF_A230全体を制御する為の機能部であり、記憶部_D740に記憶されている各種の情報やプログラムを読みだして実行することにより、SMF_A230全体の各種処理を実現する。 The control unit_D700 of the SMF_A230 is a functional unit for controlling the entire SMF_A230, and realizes various processes of the entire SMF_A230 by reading and executing various information and programs stored in the storage unit_D740. To do.
 また、SMF_A230のネットワーク接続部_D720は、SMF_A230が、AMF_A240、UPF_A235、UDM、PCFと接続する為の機能部である。言い換えると、SMF_A230は、ネットワーク接続部_D720を介して、AMF_A240、UPF_A235、UDM、PCF との間で、ユーザデータ及び/又は制御情報を送受信することができる。 Also, the network connection part_D720 of SMF_A230 is a function part for SMF_A230 to connect with AMF_A240, UPF_A235, UDM, and PCF. In other words, the SMF_A230 can transmit/receive user data and/or control information to/from the AMF_A240, UPF_A235, UDM, and PCF via the network connection unit_D720.
 また、SMF_A230の記憶部_D740は、SMF_A230 の各動作に必要なプログラムやデータ等を記憶する機能部である。SMF_A230の記憶部_D740は、例えば、半導体メモリや、HDD、SSD等により構成されている。SMF_A230の記憶部_D740は、後述する通信手続き内で送受信する制御メッセージに含まれる識別情報、制御情報、フラグ、パラメータ等を記憶している。また、SMF_A230の記憶部_D740で記憶されるコンテキスト742としては、UEごとに記憶されるコンテキストと、APNごとに記憶されるコンテキストと、PDUセッションごとに記憶されるコンテキストと、ベアラごとに記憶されるコンテキストがあってよい。UEごとに記憶されるコンテキストは、IMSI、ME Identity、MSISDN、RAT typeを含んでもよい。APNごとに記憶されるコンテキストは、APN in useを含んでもよい。尚、APNごとに記憶されるコンテキストは、Data Network Identifierごとに記憶されてもよい。PDUセッションごとに記憶されるコンテキストは、Assigned Session Type、IP Address(es)、SGW F-TEID、PGW F-TEID、Default Bearerを含んでもよい。ベアラごとに記憶されるコンテキストは、EPS Bearer ID、TFT、SGW F-TEID、PGW F-TEIDを含んでもよい。 Also, the storage unit_D740 of the SMF_A230 is a functional unit that stores programs and data necessary for each operation of the SMF_A230. The storage unit_D740 of the SMF_A230 is configured by, for example, a semiconductor memory, HDD, SSD or the like. The storage unit_D740 of the SMF_A230 stores identification information, control information, flags, parameters and the like included in control messages transmitted and received in a communication procedure described later. Further, as the context 742 stored in the storage unit _D740 of the SMF_A230, the context stored for each UE, the context stored for each APN, the context stored for each PDU session, and the bearer stored for each bearer. There may be context. The context stored for each UE may include IMSI, MEIdentity, MSISDN, and RATtype. The context stored for each APN may include APN in use. The context stored for each APN may be stored for each Data Network Identifier. The context stored for each PDU session may include Assigned Session Type, IP Address(es), SGW F-TEID, PGW F-TEID, and Default Bearer. The context stored for each bearer may include EPS Bearer ID, TFT, SGW F-TEID, and PGW F-TEID.
 尚、SMF_B232も、SMA_A230と同様に構成される。 Note that SMF_B232 has the same configuration as SMA_A230.
 [1.2.5.UPFの構成]
 次に、UPF_A235及びUPF_B237の装置構成例を、図7に示す。図7に示すように、UPF_A235は、それぞれ、制御部_D700、ネットワーク接続部_D720、記憶部_D740で構成されている。ネットワーク接続部_D720及び記憶部_D740は、制御部_D700とバスを介して接続されている。また、記憶部_D740は、コンテキスト742を記憶している。
[1.2.5. UPF configuration]
Next, FIG. 7 shows a device configuration example of UPF_A235 and UPF_B237. As shown in FIG. 7, the UPF_A235 includes a control unit_D700, a network connection unit_D720, and a storage unit_D740, respectively. The network connection unit_D720 and the storage unit_D740 are connected to the control unit_D700 via a bus. The storage unit_D 740 stores the context 742.
 UPF_A235の制御部_D700は、UPF_A235全体を制御する為の機能部であり、記憶部_D740に記憶されている各種の情報やプログラムを読みだして実行することにより、UPF_A235全体の各種処理を実現する。 The control unit_D700 of the UPF_A235 is a functional unit for controlling the entire UPF_A235, and realizes various processes of the entire UPF_A235 by reading and executing various information and programs stored in the storage unit_D740. To do.
 また、UPF_A235のネットワーク接続部_D720は、UPF_A235が、DN(つまり、DN_A5及び/又はDN_B105)、SMF_A230、他のUPF_A235、及び、アクセスネットワーク(つまり、E-UTRAN_A80と5G-RAN_A120とWLAN ANc125)と接続する為の機能部である。言い換えると、UPF_A235は、ネットワーク接続部_D720を介して、DN(つまり、DN_A5及び/又はDN_B105)、SMF_A230、他のUPF_A235、及び、アクセスネットワーク(つまり、E-UTRAN_A80と5G-RAN_A120とWLAN ANc125)との間で、ユーザデータ及び/又は制御情報を送受信することができる。 The UPF_A235 network connection unit_D720 is configured such that the UPF_A235 is a DN (that is, DN_A5 and/or DN_B105), an SMF_A230, another UPF_A235, and an access network (that is, E-UTRAN_A80, 5G-RAN_A120, and WLANANc125). It is a functional part for connecting. In other words, the UPF_A235, via the network connection_D720, the DN (i.e., DN_A5 and/or DN_B105), the SMF_A230, other UPF_A235, and the access network (i.e., E-UTRAN_A80 and 5G-RAN_A120 and WLANANc125). User data and/or control information can be sent to and received from.
 また、UPF_A235の記憶部_D740は、UPF_A235の各動作に必要なプログラムやデータ等を記憶する機能部である。UPF_A235の記憶部_D740は、例えば、半導体メモリや、HDD、SSD等により構成されている。UPF_A235の記憶部_D740は、後述する通信手続き内で送受信する制御メッセージに含まれる識別情報、制御情報、フラグ、パラメータ等を記憶している。また、UPF_A235の記憶部_D740で記憶されるコンテキスト742としては、UEごとに記憶されるコンテキストと、APNごとに記憶されるコンテキストと、PDUセッションごとに記憶されるコンテキストと、ベアラごとに記憶されるコンテキストがあってよい。UEごとに記憶されるコンテキストは、IMSI、ME Identity、MSISDN、RAT typeを含んでもよい。APNごとに記憶されるコンテキストは、APN in useを含んでもよい。尚、APNごとに記憶されるコンテキストは、Data Network Identifierごとに記憶されてもよい。PDUセッションごとに記憶されるコンテキストは、Assigned Session Type、IP Address(es)、SGW F-TEID、PGW F-TEID、Default Bearerを含んでもよい。ベアラごとに記憶されるコンテキストは、EPS Bearer ID、TFT、SGW F-TEID、PGW F-TEIDを含んでもよい。 Also, the storage unit_D740 of the UPF_A235 is a functional unit that stores programs and data necessary for each operation of the UPF_A235. The storage unit_D740 of the UPF_A235 is configured by, for example, a semiconductor memory, HDD, SSD, or the like. The storage unit_D 740 of the UPF_A 235 stores identification information, control information, flags, parameters, etc. included in control messages transmitted/received in a communication procedure described later. As the context 742 stored in the storage unit _D740 of the UPF_A235, the context stored for each UE, the context stored for each APN, the context stored for each PDU session, and the bearer stored for each bearer. There may be context. The context stored for each UE may include IMSI, MEIdentity, MSISDN, and RATtype. The context stored for each APN may include APN in use. The context stored for each APN may be stored for each Data Network Identifier. The context stored for each PDU session may include Assigned Session Type, IP Address(es), SGW F-TEID, PGW F-TEID, and Default Bearer. The context stored for each bearer may include EPS Bearer ID, TFT, SGW F-TEID, and PGW F-TEID.
 尚、UPF_B237も、UPF_A235と同様に構成される。 Note that UPF_B237 has the same configuration as UPF_A235.
 [1.2.6.上記各装置の記憶部に記憶される情報]
 次に、上記各装置の記憶部で記憶される各情報について、説明する。
[1.2.6. Information stored in the storage unit of each device above]
Next, each information stored in the storage unit of each device will be described.
 IMSI(International Mobile Subscriber Identity)は、加入者(ユーザ)の永久的な識別情報であり、UEを使用するユーザに割り当てられる識別情報である。UE_A10及びMME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A2400及びSGW_A35が記憶するIMSIは、HSS_A50が記憶するIMSIと等しくてよい。 IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity) is permanent identification information of the subscriber (user), and is identification information assigned to the user who uses the UE. The IMSI stored by UE_A10 and MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A2400 and SGW_A35 may be equal to the IMSI stored by HSS_A50.
 EMM State/MM Stateは、UE_A10又はMME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240の移動管理(Mobility management)状態を示す。例えば、EMM State/MM Stateは、UE_A10がネットワークに登録されているEMM-REGISTERED状態(登録状態)、及び/又はUE_A10がネットワークに登録されていないEMM-DEREGISTERD状態(非登録状態)でもよい。また、EMM State/MM Stateは、UE_A10とコアネットワーク間の接続が維持されているECM-CONNECTED状態、及び/又は接続が解放されているECM-IDLE状態でもよい。尚、EMM State/MM Stateは、UE_A10がEPCに登録されている状態と、NGC又は5GCに登録されている状態とを、区別できる情報であってもよい。 EMM State/MM State indicates the mobility management state of UE_A10 or MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240. For example, the EMM State/MM State may be an EMM-REGISTERED state in which UE_A10 is registered in the network (registration state) and/or an EMM-DEREGISTERD state in which UE_A10 is not registered in the network (non-registration state). The EMM State/MM State may be an ECM-CONNECTED state in which the connection between the UE_A 10 and the core network is maintained and/or an ECM-IDLE state in which the connection is released. The EMM State/MM State may be information that can distinguish the state in which the UE_A10 is registered in the EPC and the state in which the UE_A10 is registered in the NGC or 5GC.
 GUTI(Globally Unique Temporary Identity)は、UE_A10の一時的な識別情報である。GUTIは、MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240の識別情報(GUMMEI(Globally Unique MME Identifier))と特定MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240内でのUE_A10の識別情報(M-TMSI(M-Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity))とにより構成される。ME Identityは、UE_A10又はMEのIDであり、例えば、IMEI(International Mobile Equipment Identity)やIMEISV(IMEI Software Version)でもよい。MSISDNは、UE_A10の基本的な電話番号を表す。MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240が記憶するMSISDNはHSS_A50の記憶部により示された情報でよい。尚、GUTIには、CPF_140を識別する情報が含まれてもよい。 GUTI (Globally Unique Temporary Identity) is temporary identification information of UE_A10. GUTI consists of MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240 identification information (GUMMEI (Globally Unique MME Identifier)) and specific MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240 identification information (M-TMSI (M-Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity)). To be done. MEIdentity is the ID of UE_A10 or ME, and may be, for example, IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity) or IMEISV (IMEI Software Version). MSISDN represents the basic telephone number of UE_A10. The MSISDN stored by MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240 may be the information indicated by the storage unit of HSS_A50. Note that the GUTI may include information that identifies the CPF_140.
 MME F-TEIDは、MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240を識別する情報である。MME F-TEIDには、MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240のIPアドレスが含まれてもよいし、MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240のTEID(Tunnel Endpoint Identifier)が含まれてもよいし、これらの両方が含まれてもよい。また、MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240のIPアドレスとMME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240のTEIDは独立して記憶されてもよい。また、MME F-TEIDは、ユーザデータ用の識別情報でもよいし、制御情報用の識別情報でもよい。 MME F-TEID is information that identifies MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240. The MMEF-TEID may include the IP address of MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240, may include the TEID (Tunnel Endpoint Identifier) of MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240, or both of them. Good. Further, the IP address of MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240 and the TEID of MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240 may be stored independently. Further, the MME F-TEID may be identification information for user data or identification information for control information.
 SGW F-TEIDは、SGW_A35を識別する情報である。SGW F-TEIDには、SGW_A35のIPアドレスが含まれてもよいし、SGW_A35のTEIDが含まれてもよいし、これら両方が含まれてもよい。また、SGW_A35のIPアドレスとSGW_A35のTEIDとは、独立して記憶されてもよい。また、SGW F-TEIDは、ユーザデータ用の識別情報でもよいし、制御情報用の識別情報でもよい。 ∙ SGW F-TEID is information that identifies SGW_A35. The SGW F-TEID may include the IP address of SGW_A35, the TEID of SGW_A35, or both of them. Also, the IP address of SGW_A35 and the TEID of SGW_A35 may be stored independently. Moreover, the SGW F-TEID may be identification information for user data or identification information for control information.
 PGW F-TEIDは、PGW_A30/UPGW_A130/SMF_A230/UPF_A235を識別する情報である。PGW F-TEIDには、PGW_A30/UPGW_A130/SMF_A230/UPF_A235のIPアドレスが含まれてもよいし、PGW_A30/UPGW_A130/SMF_A230/UPF_A235のTEIDが含まれてもよいし、これらの両方が含まれてもよい。また、PGW_A30/UPGW_A130/SMF_A230/UPF_A235のIPアドレスとPGW_A30/UPGW_A130/SMF_A230/UPF_A235のTEIDは独立して記憶されてもよい。また、PGW F-TEIDは、ユーザデータ用の識別情報でもよいし、制御情報用の識別情報でもよい。 PGW F-TEID is information that identifies PGW_A30/UPGW_A130/SMF_A230/UPF_A235. The PGW F-TEID may include the IP address of PGW_A30/UPGW_A130/SMF_A230/UPF_A235, may include the TEID of PGW_A30/UPGW_A130/SMF_A230/UPF_A235, or may include both of them. Good. Also, the IP address of PGW_A30/UPGW_A130/SMF_A230/UPF_A235 and the TEID of PGW_A30/UPGW_A130/SMF_A230/UPF_A235 may be stored independently. Moreover, the PGW F-TEID may be identification information for user data or identification information for control information.
 eNB F-TEIDはeNB_A45を識別する情報である。eNB F-TEIDには、eNB_A45のIPアドレスが含まれてもよいし、eNB_A45のTEIDが含まれてもよいし、これら両方が含まれてもよい。また、eNB_A45のIPアドレスとSGW_A35のTEIDとは、独立して記憶されてもよい。また、eNB F-TEIDは、ユーザデータ用の識別情報でもよいし、制御情報用の識別情報でもよい。 ENB F-TEID is information that identifies eNB_A45. The eNB-F-TEID may include the IP address of the eNB_A45, the TEID of the eNB_A45, or both of them. Also, the IP address of eNB_A45 and the TEID of SGW_A35 may be stored independently. Further, the eNB F-TEID may be identification information for user data or identification information for control information.
 また、APNは、コアネットワークとDN等の外部ネットワークとを識別する識別情報でよい。さらに、APNは、コアネットワークA_90を接続するPGW_A30/UPGW_A130/UPF_A235等のゲートウェイを選択する情報として用いることもできる。尚、APNは、DNN(Data Network Name)であってもよい。従って、APNのことをDNNと表現してもよいし、DNNのことをAPNと表現してもよい。 Also, the APN may be identification information that identifies the core network and an external network such as a DN. Furthermore, the APN can also be used as information for selecting a gateway such as PGW_A30/UPGW_A130/UPF_A235 that connects the core network A_90. The APN may be a DNN (Data Network Name). Therefore, the APN may be expressed as a DNN or the DNN may be expressed as an APN.
 尚、APNは、こうしたゲートウェイを識別する識別情報でもよいし、DN等の外部ネットワークを識別する識別情報でもよい。尚、コアネットワークとDNとを接続するゲートウェイが複数配置される場合には、APNによって選択可能なゲートウェイは複数あってもよい。さらに、APN以外の識別情報を用いた別の手法によって、こうした複数のゲートウェイの中から1つのゲートウェイを選択してもよい。 Note that the APN may be identification information that identifies such a gateway, or identification information that identifies an external network such as a DN. When a plurality of gateways that connect the core network and the DN are arranged, there may be a plurality of gateways that can be selected by the APN. Further, one gateway may be selected from the plurality of gateways by another method using identification information other than APN.
 UE Radio Access Capabilityは、UE_A10の無線アクセス能力を示す識別情報である。UE Network Capabilityは、UE_A10にサポートされるセキュリティーのアルゴリズムと鍵派生関数を含める。MS Network Capabilityは、GERAN_A25及び/又はUTRAN_A20機能をもつUE_A10に対して、SGSN_A42に必要な1以上の情報を含める情報である。Access Restrictionは、アクセス制限の登録情報である。eNB Addressは、eNB_A45のIPアドレスである。MME UE S1AP IDは、MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240内でUE_A10を識別する情報である。eNB UE S1AP IDは、eNB_A45内でUE_A10を識別する情報である。 UE Radio Access Capability is identification information indicating the wireless access capability of UE_A10. UENetworkCapability includes the security algorithms and key derivation functions supported by UE_A10. MS Network Capability is information including one or more pieces of information required for SGSN_A42 for UE_A10 having GERAN_A25 and/or UTRAN_A20 function. Access Restriction is registration information of access restriction. eNB Address is the IP address of eNB_A45. MMEUES1APID is information that identifies UE_A10 in MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240. The eNBUES1APID is information that identifies the UE_A10 in the eNB_A45.
 APN in Useは、最近使用されたAPNである。APN in UseはData Network Identifierでもよい。このAPNは、ネットワークの識別情報と、デフォルトのオペレータの識別情報とで構成されてよい。さらに、APN in Useは、PDUセッションの確立先のDNを識別する情報でもよい。 APN in use is the recently used APN. APN in Use may be Data Network Identifier. This APN may be composed of network identification information and default operator identification information. Furthermore, APNinUse may be information that identifies the DN of the establishment destination of the PDU session.
 Assigned Session Typeは、PDUセッションのタイプを示す情報である。Assigned Session TypeはAssigned PDN Typeでもよい。PDUセッションのタイプは、IPでもよいし、non-IPでもよい。さらに、PDUセッションのタイプがIPである場合、ネットワークから割り当てられたPDNのタイプを示す情報をさらに含んでもよい。尚、Assigned Session Typeは、IPv4、IPv6、又はIPv4v6でよい。 Assigned Session Type is information indicating the type of PDU session. AssignedSessionType may be AssignedPDNType. The type of PDU session may be IP or non-IP. Further, when the PDU session type is IP, it may further include information indicating the type of PDN assigned from the network. The Assigned Session Type may be IPv4, IPv6, or IPv4v6.
 また、特に記載がない場合には、IP Addressは、UEに割り当てられたIPアドレスである。IPアドレスは、IPv4アドレスでもよいし、IPv6アドレスでもよいし、IPv6プレフィックスでもよいし、インタフェースIDであってもよい。尚、Assigned Session Typeがnon-IPを示す場合、IP Addressの要素を含まなくてもよい。 Also, unless otherwise specified, the IP Address is the IP address assigned to the UE. The IP address may be an IPv4 address, an IPv6 address, an IPv6 prefix, or an interface ID. If the Assigned Session Type indicates non-IP, the IP Address element may not be included.
 DN IDは、コアネットワーク_B190とDN等の外部ネットワークとを識別する識別情報である。さらに、DN IDは、コアネットワーク_B190を接続するUPGW_A130又はPF_A235等のゲートウェイを選択する情報として用いることもできる。 DN ID is identification information that identifies the core network_B190 and an external network such as a DN. Further, the DN ID can also be used as information for selecting a gateway such as UPGW_A130 or PF_A235 that connects the core network_B190.
 尚、DN IDは、こうしたゲートウェイを識別する識別情報でもよいし、DN等の外部ネットワークを識別する識別情報でもよい。尚、コアネットワーク_B190とDNとを接続するゲートウェイが複数配置される場合には、DN IDによって選択可能なゲートウェイは複数あってもよい。さらに、DN ID以外の識別情報を用いた別の手法によって、こうした複数のゲートウェイの中から1つのゲートウェイを選択してもよい。 Note that the DN ID may be identification information that identifies such a gateway, or identification information that identifies an external network such as a DN. If a plurality of gateways connecting the core network_B 190 and the DN are arranged, there may be a plurality of gateways selectable by the DN ID. Further, one gateway may be selected from the plurality of gateways by another method using identification information other than the DN ID.
 さらに、DN IDは、APNと等しい情報でもよいし、APNとは異なる情報でもよい。尚、DN IDとAPNが異なる情報である場合、各装置は、DN IDとAPNとの対応関係を示す情報を管理してもよいし、DN IDを用いてAPNを問い合わせる手続きを実施してもよいし、APNを用いてDN IDを問い合わせる手続きを実施してもよい。 Furthermore, the DN ID may be information equal to the APN or information different from the APN. If the DN ID and the APN are different information, each device may manage the information indicating the correspondence between the DN ID and the APN, or perform the procedure for inquiring the APN using the DN ID. You can also use the APN to carry out the procedure for inquiring the DN ID.
 SCEF IDは、PDUセッションで用いられているSCEF_A46のIPアドレスである。Default Bearerは、PDUセッション確立時に取得及び/又は生成する情報であり、PDUセッションに対応づけられたデフォルトベアラ(default bearer)を識別する為のEPSベアラ識別情報である。 -SCEF ID is the IP address of SCEF_A46 used in the PDU session. The Default Bearer is information acquired and/or generated when a PDU session is established, and is EPS bearer identification information for identifying a default bearer associated with the PDU session.
 EPS Bearer IDは、EPSベアラの識別情報である。また、EPS Bearer IDは、SRB(Signalling Radio Bearer)及び/又はCRB(Control-plane Radio bearer)を識別する識別情報でもよいし、DRB(Data Radio Bearer)を識別する識別情報でもよい。TI(Transaction Identifier)は、双方向のメッセージフロー(Transaction)を識別する識別情報である。尚、EPS Bearer IDは、デディケイテッドベアラ(dedicated bearer)を識別するEPSベアラ識別情報でよい。したがって、デフォルトベアラとは異なるEPSベアラを識別する識別情報でよい。TFTは、EPSベアラと関連づけられた全てのパケットフィルターを示す。TFTは送受信するユーザデータの一部を識別する情報であり、UE_A10は、TFTによって識別されたユーザデータを、TFTに関連付けたEPSベアラを用いて送受信する。さらに言い換えると、UE_A10は、TFTによって識別されたユーザデータを、TFTに関連づけたRB(Radio Bearer)を用いて送受信する。また、TFTは、送受信するアプリケーションデータ等のユーザデータを適切な転送路に対応づけるものでもよく、アプリケーションデータを識別する識別情報でもよい。また、UE_A10は、TFTで識別できないユーザデータを、デフォルトベアラを用いて送受信してもよい。また、UE_A10は、デフォルトベアラに関連付けられたTFTを予め記憶しておいてもよい。 EPS EPS Bearer ID is the identification information of the EPS bearer. Further, the EPS Bearer ID may be identification information for identifying an SRB (Signalling Radio Bearer) and/or a CRB (Control-plane Radio bearer) or may be identification information for identifying a DRB (Data Radio Bearer). TI (Transaction Identifier) is identification information that identifies a bidirectional message flow (Transaction). The EPS Bearer ID may be EPS bearer identification information for identifying a dedicated bearer. Therefore, the identification information for identifying the EPS bearer different from the default bearer may be used. TFT indicates all packet filters associated with the EPS bearer. The TFT is information for identifying a part of the user data to be transmitted/received, and the UE_A10 transmits/receives the user data identified by the TFT using the EPS bearer associated with the TFT. In other words, UE_A10 transmits/receives the user data identified by TFT using RB (Radio Bearer) associated with TFT. Further, the TFT may associate user data such as transmitted/received application data with an appropriate transfer path, or may be identification information for identifying the application data. Also, the UE_A10 may send and receive user data that cannot be identified by TFT using the default bearer. Further, the UE_A 10 may store the TFT associated with the default bearer in advance.
 Default Bearerは、PDUセッションに対応づけられたデフォルトベアラを識別するEPSベアラ識別情報である。尚、EPSベアラとは、UE_A10とPGW_A30/UPGW_A130/UPF_A235との間で確立する論理的な通信路でもよく、PDNコネクション/PDUセッションを構成する通信路でもよい。さらに、EPSベアラは、デフォルトベアラでもよく、デディケイテッドベアラでもよい。さらに、EPSベアラは、UE_A10とアクセスネットワーク内の基地局及び/又はアクセスポイントとの間で確立するRBを含んで構成されてよい。さらに、RBとEPSベアラとは1対1に対応づけられてよい。その為、RBの識別情報は、EPSベアラの識別情報と1対1に対応づけられてもよいし、同じ識別情報でもよい。尚、RBは、SRB及び/又はCRBでもよいし、DRBでもよい。また、Default Bearerは、PDUセッション確立時にUE_A10及び/又はSGW_A35及び/又はPGW_A30/UPGW_A130/SMF_A230/UPF_A235がコアネットワークから取得する情報でよい。尚、デフォルトベアラとは、PDNコネクション/PDUセッション中で最初に確立されるEPSベアラであり、1つのPDNコネクション/PDUセッション中に、1つしか確立することができないEPSベアラである。デフォルトベアラは、TFTに対応付けられていないユーザデータの通信に用いることができるEPSベアラであってもよい。また、デディケイテッドベアラとは、PDNコネクション/PDUセッション中でデフォルトベアラが確立された後に確立されるEPSベアラであり、1つのPDNコネクション/PDUセッション中に、複数確立することができるEPSベアラである。デディケイテッドベアラは、TFTに対応付けられたユーザデータの通信に用いることができるEPSベアラである。 -Default Bearer is EPS bearer identification information that identifies the default bearer associated with the PDU session. The EPS bearer may be a logical communication path established between the UE_A10 and PGW_A30/UPGW_A130/UPF_A235, or a communication path forming a PDN connection/PDU session. Further, the EPS bearer may be a default bearer or a dedicated bearer. Further, the EPS bearer may be configured to include an RB established between the UE_A 10 and a base station and/or an access point in the access network. Furthermore, RBs and EPS bearers may be associated with each other on a one-to-one basis. Therefore, the RB identification information may be associated with the EPS bearer identification information in a one-to-one correspondence, or may be the same identification information. RB may be SRB and/or CRB or DRB. Further, the Default Bearer may be information acquired by the UE_A10 and/or SGW_A35 and/or PGW_A30/UPGW_A130/SMF_A230/UPF_A235 from the core network when the PDU session is established. The default bearer is an EPS bearer that is first established in a PDN connection/PDU session, and only one EPS bearer can be established in one PDN connection/PDU session. The default bearer may be an EPS bearer that can be used for communication of user data that is not associated with TFT. Further, the dedicated bearer is an EPS bearer that is established after the default bearer is established in the PDN connection/PDU session, and is an EPS bearer that can be established multiple times in one PDN connection/PDU session. is there. The dedicated bearer is an EPS bearer that can be used for communication of user data associated with TFT.
 User Identityは、加入者を識別する情報である。User Identityは、IMSIでもよいし、MSISDNでもよい。さらに、User Identityは、IMSI、MSISDN以外の識別情報でもよい。Serving Node Informationは、PDUセッションで用いられているMME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240を識別する情報であり、MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240のIPアドレスでよい。 User Identity is information that identifies a subscriber. UserIdentity may be IMSI or MSISDN. Further, User Identity may be identification information other than IMSI and MSISDN. Serving Node Information is information that identifies MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240 used in the PDU session, and may be the IP address of MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240.
 eNB Addressは、eNB_A45のIPアドレスである。eNB IDは、eNB_A45内でUEを識別する情報である。MME Addressは、MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240のIPアドレスである。MME IDは、MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240を識別する情報である。NR node Addressは、NR node_A122のIPアドレスである。NR node IDは、NR node_A122を識別する情報である。WAG Addressは、WAG_A126のIPアドレスである。WAG IDは、WAG_A126を識別する情報である。 ENB Address is the IP address of eNB_A45. The eNB ID is information that identifies the UE within the eNB_A45. MME Address is the IP address of MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240. MME ID is information that identifies MME_A40/CPF_A140/AMF_A240. NRnodeAddress is the IP address of NRnode_A122. The NR node ID is information that identifies the NR node_A122. WAG Address is the IP address of WAG_A126. WAG_ID is information that identifies WAG_A126.
 [1.3.初期手続きの説明]
 次に、本実施形態における初期手続きの詳細手順を説明する前に、重複説明を避ける為、本実施形態で特有の用語や、各手続きに用いる主要な識別情報を予め説明する。
[1.3. Explanation of initial procedure]
Next, before explaining the detailed procedure of the initial procedure in the present embodiment, in order to avoid redundant explanation, terms unique to the present embodiment and main identification information used for each procedure will be explained in advance.
 まず、本実施形態における、ネットワークとは、アクセスネットワーク_B80/120/125、コアネットワーク_B190、DN_A5、及びDN_B105のうち、少なくとも一部を指す。また、アクセスネットワーク_B80/120/125、コアネットワーク_B190、DN_A5、及びDN_B105のうち、少なくとも一部に含まれる1以上の装置を、ネットワーク又はネットワーク装置と称してもよい。つまり、ネットワークがメッセージの送受信及び/又は手続きを実行するということは、ネットワーク内の装置(ネットワーク装置)がメッセージの送受信及び/又は手続きを実行することを意味する。 First, the network in this embodiment refers to at least a part of access network_B80/120/125, core network_B190, DN_A5, and DN_B105. Further, one or more devices included in at least a part of the access network_B80/120/125, the core network_B190, the DN_A5, and the DN_B105 may be referred to as a network or a network device. That is, the fact that the network transmits/receives messages and/or executes procedures means that the devices (network devices) in the network execute transmission/reception of messages and/or procedures.
 本実施形態における、セッションマネジメント(SM; Session Management)メッセージ(NAS (Non-Access-Stratum) SMメッセージとも称する)は、SMのための手続きで用いられるNASメッセージであってよく、AMF_A240を介してUE_A10とSMF_A230又はSMF_B232の間で送受信される制御メッセージであってよい。さらに、SMメッセージには、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージ、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージ、PDUセッション完了メッセージ、PDUセッション拒絶メッセージ、PDUセッション変更要求メッセージ、PDUセッション変更受諾メッセージ、PDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージ等が含まれてもよい。また、SMのための手続きには、PDUセッション確立手続き、PDUセッション変更手続き等が含まれてもよい。 In the present embodiment, the session management (SM; Session Management) message (also referred to as NAS (Non-Access-Stratum) SM message) may be a NAS message used in the procedure for SM, UE_A10 via AMF_A240. And SMF_A230 or SMF_B232. Further, the SM message includes a PDU session establishment request message, a PDU session establishment acceptance message, a PDU session completion message, a PDU session rejection message, a PDU session change request message, a PDU session change acceptance message, a PDU session change rejection message, etc. May be. Moreover, the procedure for SM may include a PDU session establishment procedure, a PDU session change procedure, and the like.
 本実施形態における、トラッキングエリア(TA; Tracking Areaとも称する)は、コアネットワークが管理する、UE_A10の位置情報で表すことが可能な範囲であり、例えば1以上のセルで構成されてもよい。また、TAは、ページングメッセージ等の制御メッセージがブロードキャストされる範囲でもよいし、UE_A10がハンドオーバー手続きをせずに移動できる範囲でもよい。 The tracking area (TA; also referred to as Tracking Area) in the present embodiment is a range that can be represented by the location information of UE_A10 managed by the core network, and may be composed of, for example, one or more cells. Further, the TA may be in a range in which a control message such as a paging message is broadcast, or in a range in which the UE_A 10 can move without performing a handover procedure.
 本実施形態における、TAリスト(TA list)は、ネットワークがUE_A10に割り当てた1以上のTAが含まれるリストである。尚、UE_A10は、TAリストに含まれる1以上のTA内を移動している間は、登録手続きを実行することなく移動することができてよい。言い換えると、TAリストは、UE_A10が登録手続きを実行することなく移動できるエリアを示す情報群であってよい。 The TA list in this embodiment is a list that includes one or more TAs assigned by the network to UE_A10. Note that UE_A10 may be able to move without executing the registration procedure while moving in one or more TAs included in the TA list. In other words, the TA list may be a group of information indicating areas where the UE_A 10 can move without executing the registration procedure.
 本実施形態における、RQoS(Reflective QoS(Quality of Service))は、5GC(5G Core)においてサポートされるQoSである。RQoSは、受信した下りリンクパケット、及び/又は下りリンクトラフィックを基にUE_A10がQoSルール(Derived QoS rule)を作成することによって実現されるQoSである。なお、各装置は、同一のPDUセッションにおいて、RQoSとRQoSではないQoSとを同時に適応することが可能であってもよい。さらに、RQoSのトラフィックへの適応を実現するために、上りリンクパケットのQoSには、対となる下りリンクパケットのQoSと同じQoSが適応されてもよい。 RQoS (Reflective QoS (Quality of Service)) in this embodiment is QoS supported by 5GC (5G Core). RQoS is QoS realized by UE_A10 creating a QoS rule (Derived QoS rule) based on the received downlink packet and/or downlink traffic. Note that each device may be capable of simultaneously applying RQoS and QoS that is not RQoS in the same PDU session. Further, in order to realize the adaptation of RQoS to traffic, the same QoS as that of the downlink packet to be paired may be applied to the QoS of the uplink packet.
 本実施形態における、QoSルール (Derived QoS rule)は、RQoSを用いたユーザデータ通信を実現するためのルールである。QoSルールには、パケットフィルター(Packet Filter)、及び/又はQFI(QoS Flow Identity)、及び/又は先行値(Precedence value)が含まれてもよい。ここで、QFIは、QoSフローを識別する為の識別子であってよい。また、先行値は、優先度を示すものであり、値が小さいほど優先度は高くなる。尚、上りリンクパケットのパケットフィルターは、下りリンクパケットを基に生成されてもよい。さらに、User Planeを介したRQoSが有効化された場合、QoSルールの先行値は、標準化された値に設定されてもよい。また、Control Planeを介したRQoSが有効化された場合、QoSルールの先行値は、Control Planeを介した制御メッセージで送受信さえた値に設定されてもよい。尚、UE_A10は、QoSルールを作成することでRQoSを有効化させてもよいし、QoSルールを削除することでRQoSを無効化してもよい。 The QoS rule (Derived QoS rule) in this embodiment is a rule for realizing user data communication using RQoS. The QoS rule may include a packet filter (Packet Filter), and/or a QFI (QoS Flow Identity), and/or a preceding value (Precedence value). Here, QFI may be an identifier for identifying a QoS flow. The preceding value indicates the priority, and the smaller the value, the higher the priority. The packet filter for the uplink packet may be generated based on the downlink packet. Furthermore, when RQoS via User Plane is enabled, the preceding value of the QoS rule may be set to a standardized value. Further, when RQoS via Control Plane is enabled, the preceding value of the QoS rule may be set to a value even transmitted/received by a control message via Control Plane. Note that the UE_A 10 may enable RQoS by creating a QoS rule, or may disable RQoS by deleting the QoS rule.
 本実施形態における、RQoSタイマー(Reflective QoS Timer)はRQoSの有効化を管理するためのタイマーである。各装置は、RQoSタイマーが実行されている間のみ、RQoSを有効化してもよい。言い換えると、各装置は、RQoSタイマーの開始に基づいて、RQoSを有効化してもよく、RQoSタイマーの満了に基づいて、RQoSを無効化してもよい。さらに、RQoSのタイマーの値は、PDUセッション確立手続き等で、ネットワークからUE_A10に送信された値であってもよいし、予め設定された値であってもよい。尚、RQタイマー(RQ Timer)であってもよい。また、RQoSタイマーは、RQoSの有効化を管理するためのタイマーであってよく、これに限らない。 The RQoS timer (Reflective QoS Timer) in this embodiment is a timer for managing the activation of RQoS. Each device may enable RQoS only while the RQoS timer is running. In other words, each device may enable RQoS based on the start of the RQoS timer, and may disable RQoS based on the expiration of the RQoS timer. Further, the value of the RQoS timer may be a value transmitted from the network to UE_A10 in a PDU session establishment procedure or the like, or may be a preset value. It may be an RQ timer. Further, the RQoS timer may be a timer for managing activation of RQoS, but is not limited to this.
 本実施形態における、認証承認要求情報は、UE_A10がDN認証承認手続きの起動を求める情報で、DN認証承認手続きの起動を希望するか希望しないかを示す変数であっても良いし、サービスを特定する名前空間であっても良いし、ユーザ識別子であっても良いし、ユーザのプロファイルを特定する識別子であっても良い。尚、DN認証承認手続きは、PDUセッション確立認証承認手続きであってよい。また、PDUセッション確立認証承認手続きは、IETFで採用又は定義された認証プロトコルEAP(Extensible Authentication Protocol)を用いて実現されてもよい。 In the present embodiment, the authentication approval request information is information that UE_A10 requests to start the DN authentication approval procedure, and may be a variable indicating whether the DN authentication approval procedure is desired to be started or a service is specified. Name space, a user identifier, or an identifier for specifying the profile of the user. The DN authentication approval procedure may be a PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure. Also, the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure may be realized using an authentication protocol EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) adopted or defined by the IETF.
 本実施形態における、認証/承認情報は、3GPP NWからのDN認証承認手続きに対しての応答時に認証承認結果を示す情報で、認証承認するかしないかを示す変数であっても良いし、サービスを特定する名前空間であっても良い。 In the present embodiment, the authentication/authorization information is information indicating the authorization approval result when responding to the DN authorization approval procedure from 3GPP NW, and may be a variable indicating whether the authorization is approved or not. It may be a namespace that specifies.
 本実施形態における、DN認証承認応答情報は、DNが発行する認証/承認情報に対してUE_A10が応答する情報に対して、UE_A10が応答する際に載せる、サービスを特定する名前空間であっても良いし、DNからの認証/承認情報に対してのメッセージ応答であっても良い。 In the present embodiment, the DN authentication approval response information, for the information that UE_A10 responds to the authentication/authorization information issued by the DN, put when UE_A10 responds, even a namespace that identifies the service It may be a message response to the authentication/authorization information from the DN.
 本実施形態における、ユーザIDは、DN認証承認において、ユーザを特定する識別子である。ユーザIDは、UE_A10がDN認証承認手続きの起動を求める情報であってもよい。 The user ID in this embodiment is an identifier that identifies a user in DN authentication approval. The user ID may be information that UE_A10 requests to activate the DN authentication approval procedure.
 本実施形態における、ユーザプロファイルIDは、DN認証承認において、ユーザのプロファイルを特定する識別子である。UE_A10がDN認証承認手続きの起動を求める情報であってもよい。 The user profile ID in this embodiment is an identifier that identifies a user profile in DN authentication approval. The UE_A10 may be information requesting activation of the DN authentication approval procedure.
 本実施形態における、DN認証承認は、次世代移動通信システムである5G移動通信システムの次世代セキュリティーシステムである。PDUセッション確立手続き中にDNによる認証承認を可能にする仕組みであり、従来の4Gシステムでは存在しないシステムであってよい。さらに、次世代セキュリティーシステムでは、DN認証承認に関連して、認証と承認とを分離してもよい。さらに、認証と承認を分離することで、認証リソースと承認リソースのオーナーがそれぞれの責任において認証承認ができる事となってよく、移動通信システムを用いた柔軟なサービス展開が可能となってよい。 The DN authentication approval in this embodiment is the next-generation security system of the 5G mobile communication system, which is the next-generation mobile communication system. This is a mechanism that enables authorization and authentication by DN during the PDU session establishment procedure, and may be a system that does not exist in the conventional 4G system. Further, in the next generation security system, the authentication and the authorization may be separated in relation to the DN authentication and authorization. Furthermore, by separating the authentication and the authorization, the owners of the authentication resource and the authorization resource may be able to perform the authorization and approval at their respective responsibilities, and flexible service deployment using the mobile communication system may be possible.
 本実施形態における第1のタイマーは、PDUセッション確立手続き等のセッションマネジメントのための手続きの開始、及び/又はPDUセッション確立要求メッセージ等のSM(Session Management)メッセージの送信を管理するタイマーである。第1のタイマーが実行されている間は、各装置の、セッションマネジメントのための手続きの開始、及び/又はSMメッセージの送受信は禁止されていてもよい。尚、第1のタイマーは、少なくともAPN/DNN、又はスライス単位のいずれかの一方で設定されていても良い。なお、SMメッセージは、セッションマネジメントのための手続きで用いられるNASメッセージであってよく、AMF_A240を介してUE_A10とSMF_A230の間で送受信される制御メッセージであってよい。さらに、SMメッセージには、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージ、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージ、PDUセッション完了メッセージ、PDUセッション拒絶メッセージ、PDUセッション変更要求メッセージ、PDUセッション変更受諾メッセージ、PDUセッション変更拒絶メッセージ等が含まれてもよい。さらに、セッションマネジメントのための手続きには、PDUセッション確立手続き、PDUセッション変更手続き等が含まれてもよい。 The first timer in the present embodiment is a timer for managing the start of a procedure for session management such as a PDU session establishment procedure and/or the transmission of an SM (Session Management) message such as a PDU session establishment request message. While the first timer is running, each device may be prohibited from starting a procedure for session management and/or transmitting/receiving an SM message. Note that the first timer may be set at least in either APN/DNN or slice unit. The SM message may be a NAS message used in the procedure for session management, and may be a control message transmitted/received between UE_A10 and SMF_A230 via AMF_A240. Further, the SM message includes a PDU session establishment request message, a PDU session establishment acceptance message, a PDU session completion message, a PDU session rejection message, a PDU session change request message, a PDU session change acceptance message, a PDU session change rejection message, etc. May be. Furthermore, the procedure for session management may include a PDU session establishment procedure, a PDU session change procedure, and the like.
 本実施形態における、ネットワークスライス(Network Slice)とは、特定のネットワーク能力及びネットワーク特性を提供する論理的なネットワークである。以下、ネットワークスライスはNWスライスと称してもよい。 A network slice in this embodiment is a logical network that provides specific network capabilities and network characteristics. Hereinafter, the network slice may be referred to as an NW slice.
 本実施形態における、ネットワークスライスインスタンス(NSI; Network Slice Instance)とは、ネットワーク機能(NF)のインスタンス(実体)と、必要なリソースのセットで構成され、配置されるネットワークスライスを形成する。ここで、NFとは、ネットワークにおける処理機能であって、3GPPで採用又は定義されたものである。NSIはコアネットワーク_B190内に1以上構成される、ネットワークスライス(Network Slice)の実体である。また、NSIはNST(Network Slice Template)を用いて生成された仮想的なNF(Network Function)により構成されてもよい。ここで、NSTとは、要求される通信サービスや能力(capability)を提供する為のリソース要求に関連付けられ、1以上のNF(Network Function)の論理的表現である。つまり、NSIとは、複数のNFにより構成されたコアネットワーク_B190内の集合体でよい。また、NSIはサービス等によって配送されるユーザデータを分ける為に構成された論理的なネットワークでよい。ネットワークスライスには、1以上のNFが構成されてよい。ネットワークスライスに構成されるNFは、他のネットワークスライスと共有される装置であってもよいし、そうでなくてもよい。UE_A10は、UE usage type及び/又は、1以上のネットワークスライスタイプID及び/又は、1以上のNS ID等の登録情報及び/又はAPNに基づいて、1以上のネットワークスライスに割り当てられることができる。 A network slice instance (NSI; Network Slice Instance) in this embodiment forms a network slice that is composed of an instance (entity) of a network function (NF) and a set of necessary resources and is arranged. Here, the NF is a processing function in the network and is adopted or defined by 3GPP. NSI is an entity of a network slice, which is composed of one or more in the core network_B 190. Further, the NSI may be configured by a virtual NF (Network Function) generated using NST (Network Slice Template). Here, NST is a logical representation of one or more NFs (Network Functions) associated with resource requests for providing required communication services and capabilities. That is, the NSI may be an aggregate in the core network_B 190 configured by a plurality of NFs. Further, the NSI may be a logical network configured to divide user data delivered by services or the like. One or more NFs may be configured in the network slice. The NF configured in the network slice may or may not be a device shared with other network slices. UE_A10 can be assigned to one or more network slices based on registration information and/or APN such as UE usage type and/or one or more network slice type IDs and/or one or more NS IDs.
 本実施形態におけるNSI (Network Slice Instance)とは、コアネットワーク_B190内に1又は複数構成される、ネットワークスライス(Network Slice)の実体である。また、本実施形態におけるNSIはNST(Network Slice Template)を用いて生成された仮想的なNF(Network Function)により構成されてもよい。ここで、NSTとは、要求される通信サービスや能力(capability)を提供する為のリソース要求に関連付けられ、1又は複数のNF(Network Function)の論理的表現である。つまり、NSIとは、複数のNFにより構成されたコアネットワーク_B190内の集合体でよい。また、NSIはサービス等によって配送されるユーザデータを分ける為に構成された論理的なネットワークでよい。ネットワークスライスには、少なくとも1つ以上のNFが構成されてよい。ネットワークスライスに構成されるNFは、他のネットワークスライスと共有される装置であってもよいし、そうでなくてもよい。UE_A10、及び/又ネットワーク内の装置は、NSSAI及び/又は、S-NSSAI及び/又は、UE usage type及び/又は、1又は複数のネットワークスライスタイプID及び/又は、1又は複数のNS ID等の登録情報及び/又はAPNに基づいて、1または複数のネットワークスライスに割り当てられることができる。 The NSI (Network Slice Instance) in the present embodiment is an entity of a network slice (Network Slice) configured to have one or more in the core network_B 190. Further, the NSI in the present embodiment may be configured by a virtual NF (Network Function) generated using NST (Network Slice Template). Here, NST is a logical representation of one or more NFs (Network Functions) associated with resource requests for providing required communication services and capabilities. That is, the NSI may be an aggregate in the core network_B 190 configured by a plurality of NFs. Further, the NSI may be a logical network configured to divide user data delivered by services or the like. At least one NF may be configured in the network slice. The NF configured in the network slice may or may not be a device shared with other network slices. UE_A10 and/or devices in the network are NSSAI and/or S-NSSAI and/or UE usage type and/or one or more network slice type IDs and/or one or more NS IDs etc. It can be assigned to one or more network slices based on registration information and/or APN.
 本実施形態におけるS-NSSAIは、Single Network Slice Selection Assistance informationの略であり、ネットワークスライスを識別するための情報である。S-NSSAIは、SST (Slice/Service type)とSD (Slice Differentiator)で構成されていてよい。S-NSSAIはSSTのみが構成されてもよいし、SSTとSDの両方で構成されてもよい。ここで、SSTとは、機能とサービスの面で期待されるネットワークスライスの動作を示す情報である。また、SDは、SSTで示される複数のNSIから1つのNSIを選択する際に、SSTを補完する情報であってもよい。S-NSSAIは、PLMNごとに特有な情報であってもよいし、PLMN間で共通化された標準の情報であってもよい。また、ネットワークは、デフォルトのS-NSSAIとして、UE_A10の登録情報に1つまたは複数のS-NSSAIを記憶してもよい。 The S-NSSAI in this embodiment is an abbreviation for Single Network Slice Selection Assistance information and is information for identifying a network slice. S-NSSAI may consist of SST (Slice/Service type) and SD (Slice Differentiator). S-NSSAI may be configured with only SST, or may be configured with both SST and SD. Here, SST is information indicating the operation of the network slice expected in terms of functions and services. Further, SD may be information that complements SST when selecting one NSI from a plurality of NSI indicated by SST. The S-NSSAI may be unique information for each PLMN or may be standard information shared by the PLMNs. The network may also store one or more S-NSSAIs in the registration information of UE_A10 as the default S-NSSAI.
 本実施形態におけるNSSAI (Single Network Slice Selection Assistance information)はS-NSSAIの集まりである。NSSAIに含まれる、各S-NSSAIはアクセスネットワークまたはコアネットワークがNSIを選択するのをアシストする情報である。UE_A10はPLMNごとにネットワークから許可されたNSSAIを記憶してもよい。また、NSSAIはAMF_A240を選択するのに用いられる情報であってよい。 NSSAI (Single Network Slice Selection Assistance information) in this embodiment is a collection of S-NSSAI. Each S-NSSAI included in NSSAI is information that assists the access network or core network in selecting the NSI. UE_A10 may store NSSAI permitted from the network for each PLMN. Also, NSSAI may be information used to select AMF_A240.
 本実施形態における、第1のNWスライスは、UE_A10が特定のDNに接続する際に確立PDUセッションが属するNWスライスである。第1のNWスライスは、オペレータA網内で管理されるNWスライスであっても良いし、オペレータB網内で共通して管理されるNWスライスであっても良い。 The first NW slice in this embodiment is the NW slice to which the established PDU session belongs when UE_A10 connects to a specific DN. The first NW slice may be an NW slice managed in the operator A network or may be a NW slice commonly managed in the operator B network.
 本実施形態における、第2のNWスライスは、第1のNWスライスに属するPDUセッションが接続先としているDNに接続できる別のPDUセッションが属するNWスライスである。第1のNWスライスと第2のNWスライスとは、同じオペレータによって運用されてもよいし、異なるオペレータによって運用されてもよい。 The second NW slice in this embodiment is an NW slice to which another PDU session that can be connected to the DN to which the PDU session belonging to the first NW slice is connected. The first NW slice and the second NW slice may be operated by the same operator or different operators.
 本実施形態におけるオペレータA網は、オペレータAが運用しているネットワークである。オペレータBと共通のNWスライスを展開していてもよい。 The operator A network in this embodiment is a network operated by operator A. The NW slice common to the operator B may be expanded.
 本実施形態におけるオペレータB網は、オペレータBが運用しているネットワークである。オペレータAと共通のNWスライスを展開していてもよい。 The operator B network in this embodiment is a network operated by operator B. The NW slice common to the operator A may be expanded.
 本実施形態におけるre-attempt情報は、拒絶されたPDUセッションについて、同一の識別情報を用いて再接続を許すかどうかをNWがUE_A10に指示する情報である。尚、re-attempt情報は、UTRANアクセス、E-UTRANアクセス、NRアクセス毎に設定されても良い。 The re-attempt information in the present embodiment is information for the NW to instruct the UE_A10 whether to allow reconnection using the same identification information for the rejected PDU session. The re-attempt information may be set for each UTRAN access, E-UTRAN access, and NR access.
 本実施形態における第1の挙動とは、UE_A10が、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージにおいて送信したスライス情報を、送信したPDUセッション識別子と関連付けて記憶する挙動である。第1の挙動では、UE_A10は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージで送信したスライス情報を記憶しておいてもよいし、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージが拒絶された際に受信するスライス情報を記憶してもよい。 The first behavior in this embodiment is a behavior in which the UE_A10 stores the slice information transmitted in the PDU session establishment request message in association with the transmitted PDU session identifier. In the first behavior, the UE_A10 may store the slice information transmitted in the PDU session establishment request message, or may store the slice information received when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected. ..
 本実施形態における第2の挙動とは、UE_A10が、以前にPDUセッション確立要求メッセージで指定したスライス情報とは別のスライス情報を用いて、以前に送信したPDUセッション確立要求メッセージで指定したAPN/DNNと同一のAPN/DNNに接続する為のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信する挙動である。具体的には、第2の挙動は、ネットワークから受信したバックオフタイマー値がゼロもしくは無効の場合、以前に送信したPDUセッション確立要求メッセージで指定したスライス情報とは別のスライス情報を用いて、以前にPDUセッション確立要求メッセージと同一のAPN/DNNに接続する為のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信する挙動であってよい。又、第2の挙動は、指定したAPN/DNNが接続している特定のPLMNの無線でサポートされていない為に、以前に送信したPDUセッション確立要求メッセージが拒絶された場合、もしくは、一時的な理由で、以前に送信したPDUセッション確立要求メッセージが拒絶された場合に、以前にPDUセッション確立要求メッセージで指定したスライス情報とは別のスライス情報を用いて、以前にPDUセッション確立要求メッセージで指定したAPN/DNNと同一のAPN/DNNに接続する為のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信する挙動であってもよい。 With the second behavior in the present embodiment, UE_A10, slice information different from the slice information previously specified in the PDU session establishment request message, using the APN / specified in the previously transmitted PDU session establishment request message. This is a behavior of transmitting a PDU session establishment request message for connecting to the same APN/DNN as the DNN. Specifically, the second behavior is that when the backoff timer value received from the network is zero or invalid, using slice information different from the slice information specified in the PDU session establishment request message transmitted previously, It may be the behavior of transmitting the PDU session establishment request message for connecting to the same APN/DNN as the PDU session establishment request message before. The second behavior is that if the previously transmitted PDU session establishment request message is rejected because it is not supported by the radio of the specific PLMN to which the specified APN/DNN is connected, or it is temporarily For this reason, if the previously sent PDU session establishment request message is rejected, the slice information different from the slice information previously specified in the PDU session establishment request message is used, and the previously sent PDU session establishment request message is sent. The behavior may be such that a PDU session establishment request message for connecting to the same APN/DNN as the specified APN/DNN is transmitted.
 本実施形態における第3の挙動とは、UE_A10が、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージが拒絶された際に、第1のタイマーが満了するまで、同一の識別情報を用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信しない挙動である。具体的には、第3の挙動は、ネットワークから受信したバックオフタイマー値がゼロでも無効でもない場合、第1のタイマーが満了するまで、同一の識別情報を用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信しない挙動であってもよい。又、第3の挙動は、別のPLMNを選択した場合、もしくは、別のNWスライスを選択した場合で、ネットワーク運用の設定障害に関する拒絶理由を受信した場合、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージが拒絶された際に受信したバックオフタイマーが起動されている場合に、第1のタイマーが満了するまで、同一の識別情報を用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信しない挙動であってもよい。 The third behavior in the present embodiment, UE_A10, when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected, until the first timer expires, using the same identification information, a new PDU session establishment request message. Is a behavior that does not send. Specifically, the third behavior is that if the backoff timer value received from the network is neither zero nor invalid, a new PDU session establishment request with the same identification information is used until the first timer expires. The behavior may be that the message is not transmitted. The third behavior is that the PDU session establishment request message is rejected when another PLMN is selected or when another NW slice is selected and the rejection reason for the network operation setting failure is received. When the backoff timer received at this time is activated, the behavior may be such that a new PDU session establishment request message using the same identification information is not transmitted until the first timer expires.
 本実施形態における第4の挙動とは、UE_A10が、Registration手続きに載せて送信したPDUセッション確立要求メッセージが拒絶された際に、第1のタイマーが満了するまで、スライス情報、及び/又はDNN/APN情報を載せない新たなPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信しない挙動である。具体的には、第4の挙動は、ネットワークから受信したバックオフタイマーがゼロでも無効でもない場合、第1のタイマーが満了するまで、スライス情報、及び/又はDNN/APN情報を載せない新たなPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信しない挙動であってもよい。 With the fourth behavior in the present embodiment, UE_A10 is, when the PDU session establishment request message sent in the Registration procedure is rejected, until the first timer expires, slice information, and / or DNN /. This is the behavior of not transmitting a new PDU session establishment request message that does not carry APN information. Specifically, the fourth behavior is that if the backoff timer received from the network is neither zero nor invalid, the slice information and/or the DNN/APN information is not added until the first timer expires. The behavior may be that the PDU session establishment request message is not transmitted.
 本実施形態における第5の挙動とは、UE_A10が、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージが拒絶された際に、同一の識別情報を用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信しない挙動である。具体的には、第5の挙動は、UE_A10とネットワークにおいてサポートしているPDU typeが異なる場合で均等PLMNに在圏している場合、同一の識別情報を用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信しない挙動であってもよい。 The fifth behavior in this embodiment is the behavior in which the UE_A10 does not send a new PDU session establishment request message using the same identification information when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected. Specifically, the fifth behavior is a new PDU session establishment request message using the same identification information when UE_A10 and the PDU types supported by the network are different and the UEs are in the uniform PLMN. May not be transmitted.
 本実施形態における第6の挙動とは、UE_A10が、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージが拒絶された際に、同一の識別情報を用いて初期手続きとして、新たなPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信する挙動である。具体的には、第6の挙動は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージがnon 3GPPからのハンドオーバーにおいて対象のPDNセッションコンテキストが存在しない為、拒絶された場合、同一の識別情報を用いて初期手続きとして、新たなPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信する挙動であってもよい。 The sixth behavior in the present embodiment, UE_A10, when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected, using the same identification information, as an initial procedure, is a behavior to send a new PDU session establishment request message. .. Specifically, the sixth behavior is that when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected because the target PDN session context does not exist in the handover from non-3GPP, the same identification information is used as an initial procedure, It may be a behavior of transmitting a new PDU session establishment request message.
 本実施形態における第7の挙動とは、PLMN選択手続きにおいて、別のNWスライスを選択した場合、前回のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージが拒絶された際に受信したバックオフタイマーを継続する挙動である。具体的には、第7の挙動は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージが拒絶された際に、PLMN選択を行った場合で、選択先のPLMNにおいて、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージで指定したNWスライスと共通のNWスライスの指定が可能な場合、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージが拒絶された際に受信したバックオフタイマーを継続する挙動であってもよい。 The seventh behavior in this embodiment is the behavior of continuing the backoff timer received when the previous PDU session establishment request message was rejected when another NW slice was selected in the PLMN selection procedure. Specifically, the seventh behavior is that when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected, PLMN selection is performed, and in the selected PLMN, the NW slice specified in the PDU session establishment request message is common. When the NW slice can be designated, the behavior may be such that the backoff timer received when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected is continued.
 本実施形態における第8の挙動とは、UE_A10が、第1のタイマー値をネットワークから通知された値を設定しても良いし、事前にUE_A10に設定された値を設定する挙動である。具体的には、第8の挙動は、UE_A10が、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージの拒絶通知で受信したバックオフタイマー値を第1のタイマー値として設定する挙動であってもよいし、事前にUE_A10に設定、もしくは、保持する値を第1のタイマー値として設定する挙動であってもよい。尚、事前にUE_A10に設定、もしくは、保持するタイマーを第1のタイマー値として設定する場合の第8の挙動は、HPLMN、もしくは、均等PLMN在圏時に限ってもよい。 The eighth behavior in this embodiment is a behavior in which the UE_A10 may set the value notified from the network as the first timer value, or sets the value set in the UE_A10 in advance. Specifically, the eighth behavior, UE_A10 may be a behavior to set the backoff timer value received in the rejection notification of the PDU session establishment request message as the first timer value, or to UE_A10 in advance. The behavior may be setting or a value to be held may be set as the first timer value. It should be noted that the eighth behavior in the case where the timer to be set in UE_A10 in advance or the timer to be held is set as the first timer value may be limited to HPLMN or uniform PLMN presence.
 本実施形態における第9の挙動とは、UE_A10が、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージが拒絶された際に、端末電源オン/オフ、もしくはUSIM抜き差しまで、新たなPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信しない挙動である。具体的には、第9の挙動は、ネットワークから受信したバックオフタイマーが無効の場合、もしくは、PDUセッション拒絶メッセージに含まれる理由がUE_A10とNWとの間でPDU typeが異なる場合に、端末電源オン/オフ、もしくはUSIM抜き差しまで、新たなPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信しない挙動であってもよい。又、第9の挙動は、指定したAPN/DNNが接続しているPLMNの無線でサポートされていない為にPDUセッション確立要求メッセージが拒絶された場合で、ネットワークからのバックオフタイマーの情報要素が無く、Re-attempt情報が無い場合、もしくは、均等PLMNへのPDUセッションの再接続が許容されている場合、接続しているPLMNでは、端末電源オン/オフ、もしくはUSIM抜き差しまで、新たなPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信しない挙動であってもよい。又、第9の挙動は、指定したAPN/DNNが接続しているPLMNの無線でサポートされていない為に第1のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージが拒絶された場合で、ネットワークからのバックオフタイマーの情報要素が無く、Re-attempt情報が無い場合、もしくは、均等PLMNへのPDUセッションの再接続が許容されていない場合、接続しているPLMNでは、端末電源オン/オフ、もしくはUSIM抜き差しまで、新たなPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信しない挙動であってもよい。又、第9の挙動は、指定したAPN/DNNが接続しているPLMNの無線でサポートされていない為にPDUセッション確立要求メッセージが拒絶された場合で、ネットワークからのバックオフタイマーがゼロでも無効でもない場合、端末電源オン/オフ、もしくはUSIM抜き差しまで、新たなPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信しない挙動であってもよい。又、第9の挙動は、指定したAPN/DNNが接続しているPLMNの無線でサポートされていない為にPDUセッション確立要求メッセージが拒絶された場合で、ネットワークからのバックオフタイマーが無効の場合、端末電源オン/オフ、もしくはUSIM抜き差しまで、新たなPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信しない挙動であってもよい。 The ninth behavior in the present embodiment, UE_A10, when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected, terminal power on/off, or until USIM removal and insertion, is a behavior that does not send a new PDU session establishment request message. .. Specifically, the ninth behavior is when the backoff timer received from the network is invalid or when the reason included in the PDU session rejection message is different between UE_A10 and NW in PDU type. The behavior may be such that a new PDU session establishment request message is not transmitted until it is turned on/off or the USIM is removed/inserted. The ninth behavior is when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected because the specified APN/DNN is not supported by the connected PLMN radio, and the backoff timer information element from the network is If there is no Re-attempt information, or if reconnection of the PDU session to the uniform PLMN is allowed, the connected PLMN does not turn on/off the terminal power or insert/remove the USIM until a new PDU session. The behavior may be that the establishment request message is not transmitted. The ninth behavior is when the first PDU session establishment request message is rejected because the specified APN/DNN is not supported by the connected PLMN radio, and the backoff timer from the network If there is no information element and there is no Re-attempt information, or if reconnection of the PDU session to the uniform PLMN is not allowed, the connected PLMN does not turn on/off the terminal power or insert/remove the USIM. PDU session establishment request message may not be transmitted. The ninth behavior is when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected because the specified APN/DNN is not supported by the connected PLMN radio, and even if the backoff timer from the network is zero, it is invalid. Otherwise, the behavior may be such that a new PDU session establishment request message is not transmitted until the terminal power is turned on/off or the USIM is removed/inserted. The ninth behavior is when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected because the specified APN/DNN is not supported by the connected PLMN radio, and the backoff timer from the network is invalid. , A new PDU session establishment request message may not be transmitted until the terminal power is turned on/off or the USIM is removed/inserted.
 本実施形態における第10の挙動とは、UE_A10が、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージが拒絶された際に、新たなPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信する挙動である。具体的には、第10の挙動は、NWから受信したバックオフタイマーがゼロの場合、もしくは、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージが一時的な理由で拒絶された場合でネットワークから通知されるバックオフタイマー情報要素自体が無い場合、新たなPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信する挙動であってもよい。又、第10の挙動は、別のPLMNを選択した場合、もしくは、別のNWスライスを選択した場合で、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージが一時的な理由で拒絶された場合で、選択したPLMNで対象のAPN/DNNについてバックオフタイマーが起動されていない場合、もしくは、ネットワークから受信したバックオフタイマーが無効の場合、新たなPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信する挙動であってもよい。又、第10の挙動は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージがUE_A10とネットワークのPDU typeが異なる為に拒絶された場合で、異なるPLMNを選択した際に、Re-attempt情報を受信しない、もしくは、均等PLMNリストに無いPLMNを選択した場合、もしくは、PDP typeが変更された場合、もしくは、端末電源オン/オフ、もしくは、USIMの抜き差しをした場合、新たなPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信する挙動であってもよい。又、第10の挙動は、指定したAPN/DNNが接続しているPLMNの無線でサポートされていない為に第1のPDUセッション拒絶された場合でネットワークから通知を受けたバックオフタイマーがゼロの場合、新たなPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信する挙動であってもよい。 The tenth behavior in this embodiment is the behavior in which the UE_A10 transmits a new PDU session establishment request message when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected. Specifically, the tenth behavior is the backoff timer information notified from the network when the backoff timer received from the NW is zero or when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected for a temporary reason. If there is no element itself, the behavior may be to send a new PDU session establishment request message. The tenth behavior is the case where another PLMN is selected, or another NW slice is selected, and the PDU session establishment request message is rejected for a temporary reason, and the target is the selected PLMN. If the back-off timer is not activated for the APN/DNN or if the back-off timer received from the network is invalid, the behavior may be that a new PDU session establishment request message is transmitted. The tenth behavior is when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected because the PDU type of the UE_A10 and the network are different, and when different PLMNs are selected, Re-attempt information is not received, or the equal PLMNs are received. If a PLMN not listed is selected, the PDP type is changed, the terminal power is turned on/off, or the USIM is removed/inserted, a new PDU session establishment request message is sent. Good. The 10th behavior is that the backoff timer notified by the network is zero when the first PDU session is rejected because the specified APN/DNN is not supported by the connected PLMN radio. In this case, the behavior may be to send a new PDU session establishment request message.
 本実施形態における第11の挙動とは、UE_A10が、第1のタイマー、及び、Re-attempt情報を無視する挙動である。具体的には、第11の挙動は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージがnon 3GPPからのハンドオーバーにおいて対象のPDNセッションコンテキストが存在しない為にPDUセッション確立要求メッセージが拒絶された場合、もしくは、当該PDN connectionにおいて張られているベアラの数が最大許数に到達した為に、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージが拒絶された場合、UE_A10が、第1のタイマー、及び、Re-attempt情報を無視する挙動であってもよい。 The eleventh behavior in this embodiment is behavior in which UE_A10 ignores the first timer and Re-attempt information. Specifically, the 11th behavior is when the PDU session establishment request message is rejected because the target PDN session context does not exist in the handover from non-3GPP, or the PDN connection In the case where the PDU session establishment request message is rejected because the number of bearers set up in has reached the maximum allowable number, UE_A10 is the behavior of ignoring the first timer and Re-attempt information. Good.
 本実施形態における、均等PLMNは、ネットワークで同じHPLMNと同じPLMNであるように扱われるPLMNのことである。 The equivalent PLMN in this embodiment is a PLMN treated as being the same HPLMN and the same PLMN in the network.
 次に、本実施形態における識別情報について説明する。本実施形態における第1の識別情報は、UE_A10がReflective Quality of Service(RQoS)をサポートするか否かを示す情報である。また、第1の識別情報は、UE_A10がUE主導で制御されるRQoSをサポートするか否か、及び/又は、UE_A10がネットワーク主導で制御されるRQoSをサポートするか否かを示してもよい。尚、UE主導で制御されるRQoSとは、UE主導のRQoS有効化手続きで有効化されるRQoSであってもよく、第1のRQoS非活性化手続きで無効化されるRQoSであってもよい。さらに、ネットワーク主導で制御されるRQoSとは、ネットワーク主導のRQoS有効化手続きで有効化されるRQoSであってもよく、第2のRQoS非活性化手続きで無効化されるRQoSであってもよい。また、第1の識別情報は、第4の識別情報又は第5の識別情報に対応するものであってもよい。すなわち、第1の識別情報は、第4の識別情報によって識別されるDNとの間のユーザデータ通信に対して、又は、第5の識別情報によって識別されるPDUセッションに対して、UE_A10がRQoSをサポートするか否かを示す情報を意味してもよい。また、第1の識別情報は、第2の識別情報、及び/又は第3の識別情報の意味を合わせもつ情報であってもよい。すなわち、第1の識別情報は、UE_A10がControl Plane、及び/又はUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートするか否かを示す情報を意味してもよい。尚、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSとは、Control Planeを介して有効化、及び/又は無効化されるRQoSであってもよく、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSとは、User Planeを介して有効化、及び/又は無効化されるRQoSであってもよい。また、第1の識別情報は、第6の識別情報の意味を合わせ持つ情報であってもよい。すなわち、第1の識別情報は、UE_A10がRQoSをサポートするか否かを示し、かつ、UE_A10がRQoSを要求することを示す情報であってもよい。 Next, the identification information in this embodiment will be described. The first identification information in the present embodiment is information indicating whether or not the UE_A 10 supports Reflective Quality of Service (RQoS). Further, the first identification information may indicate whether the UE_A10 supports UE-controlled RQoS and/or whether the UE_A10 supports network-led RQoS. The UE-controlled RQoS may be RQoS activated by the UE-initiated RQoS activation procedure, or may be RQoS invalidated by the first RQoS deactivation procedure. .. Further, the network-initiated controlled RQoS may be the RQoS activated by the network-initiated RQoS activation procedure or the RQoS invalidated by the second RQoS deactivation procedure. .. Further, the first identification information may correspond to the fourth identification information or the fifth identification information. That is, the first identification information, for user data communication with the DN identified by the fourth identification information, or for the PDU session identified by the fifth identification information, UE_A10 RQoS May mean information indicating whether or not to support. Further, the first identification information may be information having the meaning of the second identification information and/or the third identification information. That is, the first identification information may mean information indicating whether or not the UE_A 10 supports RQoS controlled via the Control Plane and/or the User Plane. Note that the RQoS controlled via the Control Plane may be the RQoS enabled and/or disabled via the Control Plane, and the RQoS controlled via the User Plane means the User Plane. RQoS may be enabled and/or disabled via the. Further, the first identification information may be information having the meaning of the sixth identification information. That is, the first identification information may be information indicating whether or not UE_A10 supports RQoS and also indicating that UE_A10 requests RQoS.
 本実施形態における第2の識別情報は、UE_A10がControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートするか否かを示す情報である。また、第2の識別情報は、UE_A10がUE主導でControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートするか否か、及び/又は、UE_A10がネットワーク主導でControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートするか否かを示してもよい。また、第2の識別情報は、第4の識別情報又は第5の識別情報に対応するものであってもよい。すなわち、第2の識別情報は、第4の識別情報によって識別されるDNとの間のユーザデータ通信に対して、又は、第5の識別情報によって識別されるPDUセッションに対して、UE_A10がControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートするか否かを示す情報を意味してもよい。また、第2の識別情報は、第7の識別情報の意味を合わせ持つ情報であってもよい。すなわち、第2の識別情報は、UE_A10がControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートするか否かを示し、かつ、UE_A10がControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSを要求することを示す情報であってもよい。 The second identification information in this embodiment is information indicating whether or not UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane. Also, the second identification information, whether UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane led by UE, and/or, UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane initiated by network. It may indicate whether or not to do. Further, the second identification information may correspond to the fourth identification information or the fifth identification information. That is, the second identification information, for user data communication with the DN identified by the fourth identification information, or for the PDU session identified by the fifth identification information, UE_A10 Control. It may mean information indicating whether to support RQoS controlled through Plane. Further, the second identification information may be information having the same meaning as the seventh identification information. That is, the second identification information indicates whether UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane, and, and, UE_A10 is information indicating that RQoS controlled via Control Plane is requested. It may be.
 本実施形態における第3の識別情報は、UE_A10がUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートするか否かを示す情報である。また、第3の識別情報は、UE_A10がUE主導でUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートするか否か、及び/又は、UE_A10がネットワーク主導でUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートするか否かを示してもよい。また、第3の識別情報は、第4の識別情報又は第5の識別情報に対応するものであってもよい。すなわち、第3の識別情報は、第4の識別情報によって識別されるDNとの間のユーザデータ通信に対して、又は、第5の識別情報によって識別されるPDUセッションに対して、UE_A10がUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートするか否かを示す情報を意味してもよい。また、第3の識別情報は、第8の識別情報の意味を合わせ持つ情報であってもよい。すなわち、第3の識別情報は、UE_A10がUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートするか否かを示し、かつ、UE_A10がUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSを要求することを示す情報であってもよい。 The third identification information in this embodiment is information indicating whether or not the UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled via User Plane. Also, the third identification information, whether UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled via User Plane led by UE, and/or, UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled via User Plane led by network. It may indicate whether or not to do. Further, the third identification information may correspond to the fourth identification information or the fifth identification information. That is, the third identification information, for user data communication with the DN identified by the fourth identification information, or for the PDU session identified by the fifth identification information, UE_A10 User It may mean information indicating whether to support RQoS controlled through Plane. Further, the third identification information may be information having the same meaning as the eighth identification information. That is, the third identification information indicates whether UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled via User Plane, and UE_A10 is information indicating that RQoS controlled via User Plane is requested. It may be.
 本実施形態における第4の識別情報は、DNN(Data Network Name)である。DNNは、DN(Data Network)を識別するために使用される情報であってよい。 The fourth identification information in this embodiment is a DNN (Data Network Name). The DNN may be information used to identify the DN (Data Network).
 本実施形態における第5の識別情報は、PDUセッションID(PDU Session ID)である。PDUセッションIDは、PDUセッション(PDU Session)を識別するために使用される情報であってよい。 The fifth identification information in this embodiment is a PDU session ID (PDU Session ID). The PDU session ID may be information used to identify a PDU session.
 本実施形態における第6の識別情報は、UE_A10がRQoSをenabled(使用可能な状態)に変更してもらうことを要求することを示す情報である。また、第6の識別情報は、UE_A10がUE主導で制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更してもらうことを要求すること、及び/又は、UE_A10がネットワーク主導で制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更してもらうことを要求することを示してもよい。尚、RQoSをenabledに変更してもらうことを要求するとは、RQoSの使用の許可を要求するということであってもよい。また、第6の識別情報は、第4の識別情報及び/又は第5の識別情報に対応するものであってもよい。すなわち、第6の識別情報は、第4の識別情報によって識別されるDNとの間のユーザデータ通信に対して、又は、第5の識別情報によって識別されるPDUセッションに対して、UE_A10がRQoSをenabledに変更してもらうことを要求することを示す情報を意味してもよい。また、第6の識別情報は、第7の識別情報、及び/又は第8の識別情報の意味を合わせもつ情報であってもよい。すなわち、第6の識別情報は、UE_A10がControl Plane、及び/又はUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更してもらうことを要求することを示す情報を意味してもよい。 The sixth identification information in this embodiment is information indicating that UE_A10 requests that RQoS be changed to enabled (usable state). Further, the sixth identification information, UE_A10 requests that the RQoS controlled by the UE is changed to enabled, and / or, UE_A10 is changed to the RQoS controlled by the network to enabled. It may indicate that the request is received. Requesting that RQoS should be changed to enabled may mean requesting permission to use RQoS. The sixth identification information may correspond to the fourth identification information and/or the fifth identification information. That is, the sixth identification information, for user data communication with the DN identified by the fourth identification information, or for the PDU session identified by the fifth identification information, UE_A10 RQoS May also mean information indicating that it is requested to have changed to enabled. Further, the sixth identification information may be information having the meanings of the seventh identification information and/or the eighth identification information. That is, the sixth identification information may mean information indicating that the UE_A10 requests that the RQoS controlled via the Control Plane and/or the User Plane be changed to enabled.
 本実施形態における第7の識別情報は、UE_A10がControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更してもらうことを要求することを示す情報である。また、第7の識別情報は、UE_A10がUE主導でControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更してもらうことを要求すること、及び/又は、UE_A10がネットワーク主導でControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更してもらうことを要求することを示してもよい。また、第7の識別情報は、第4の識別情報又は第5の識別情報に対応するものであってもよい。すなわち、第7の識別情報は、第4の識別情報によって識別されるDNとの間のユーザデータ通信に対して、又は、第5の識別情報によって識別されるPDUセッションに対して、UE_A10がControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更してもらうことを要求することを示す情報を意味してもよい。 The seventh identification information in this embodiment is information indicating that the UE_A10 requests that the RQoS controlled via the Control Plane be changed to enabled. Further, the seventh identification information, UE_A10 is requested by the UE is requested to change the RQoS controlled via Control Plane to enabled, and / or, UE_A10 is the network initiative via Control Plane. It may indicate that the controlled RQoS should be requested to be changed to enabled. Further, the seventh identification information may correspond to the fourth identification information or the fifth identification information. That is, the seventh identification information, for user data communication with the DN identified by the fourth identification information, or for the PDU session identified by the fifth identification information, UE_A10 Control. It may mean information indicating that the RQoS controlled through the Plane is requested to be changed to enabled.
 本実施形態における第8の識別情報は、UE_A10がUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更してもらうことを要求することを示す情報である。また、第8の識別情報は、UE_A10がUE主導でUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更してもらうことを要求すること、及び/又は、UE_A10がネットワーク主導でUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更してもらうことを要求することを示してもよい。また、第8の識別情報は、第4の識別情報又は第5の識別情報に対応するものであってもよい。すなわち、第8の識別情報は、第8の識別情報によって識別されるDNとの間のユーザデータ通信に対して、又は、第5の識別情報によって識別されるPDUセッションに対して、UE_A10がUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更してもらうことを要求することを示す情報を意味してもよい。 The eighth identification information in this embodiment is information indicating that the UE_A10 requests to change the RQoS controlled via the User Plane to enabled. Further, the eighth identification information, UE_A10 is requested by the UE to request to change the RQoS controlled via the User Plane to enabled, and / or, UE_A10 is the network initiative via the User Plane. It may indicate that the controlled RQoS should be requested to be changed to enabled. Also, the eighth identification information may correspond to the fourth identification information or the fifth identification information. That is, the eighth identification information, for user data communication with the DN identified by the eighth identification information, or for the PDU session identified by the fifth identification information, UE_A10 User It may mean information indicating that the RQoS controlled through the Plane is requested to be changed to enabled.
 本実施形態における第61の識別情報は、DN接続において、3GPPインタフェースを介してDNによるサービス認証/承認を要求する情報である。さらに、第61の識別情報は、登録手続き、及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、PDUセッション確立認証承認手続きの実行を要求する情報であってもよい。言い換えると、第61の識別情報は、登録手続き、及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、3GPPインタフェースを介したDNによるサービス認証/承認を要求する情報であってもよい。具体例としては、第61の識別情報は、DNサービス認証/承認を要求するフラグであってもよいし、特定のDNサービスを識別できるサービス名であってもよいし、ユーザ識別子(DN-specific identityと称する)であってもよいし、ユーザプロファイル識別子であってもよい。さらに、第61の識別情報は、認証承認要求情報であってもよい。 The 61st identification information in the present embodiment is information for requesting service authentication/authorization by the DN via the 3GPP interface in the DN connection. Furthermore, the 61st identification information may be information requesting execution of a PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure in the registration procedure and/or the PDU session establishment procedure. In other words, the 61st identification information may be information requesting service authentication/authorization by DN via the 3GPP interface in the registration procedure and/or the PDU session establishment procedure. As a specific example, the 61st identification information may be a flag requesting DN service authentication/authorization, a service name capable of identifying a specific DN service, or a user identifier (DN-specific It may be an identity) or a user profile identifier. Furthermore, the 61st identification information may be authentication approval request information.
 本実施形態における第71の識別情報は、第1のNWスライスに属する事を識別する情報である。言い換えると、第71の識別情報は、第1のNWスライスに属したPDUセッションの確立をUE_A10が望んでいることを示す情報であってもよい。具体例としては、第71の識別情報は第1のNWスライスを識別するNSSAIであってもよい。尚、第71の識別情報は、オペレータA網内において特定のNWスライスを識別する情報であってもよいし、オペレータB内(オペレータA以外のその他オペレータ)でも共通して同一のNWスライスを識別する情報であってもよい。さらに、第71の識別情報は、HPLMNから設定された第1のNWスライスを示す情報であってもよいし、レジストレーション手続きでAMF_A240から取得した第1のNWスライスを示す情報であってもよいし、ネットワークから許可された第1のNWスライスを示す情報であってもよい。さらに、第71の識別情報は、PLMNごとに記憶された第1のNWスライスを示す情報であってよい。 The 71st identification information in this embodiment is information identifying that it belongs to the first NW slice. In other words, the 71st identification information may be information indicating that UE_A10 wants to establish a PDU session belonging to the first NW slice. As a specific example, the 71st identification information may be NSSAI that identifies the first NW slice. Note that the 71st identification information may be information for identifying a specific NW slice in the operator A network, or may be the same NW slice commonly in operator B (other operators than operator A). It may be information to be provided. Further, the 71st identification information may be information indicating the first NW slice set from the HPLMN, or may be information indicating the first NW slice acquired from AMF_A240 in the registration procedure. However, the information may be information indicating the first NW slice permitted from the network. Further, the 71st identification information may be information indicating the first NW slice stored for each PLMN.
 本実施形態における第11の識別情報は、ネットワークがRQoSをサポートするか否かを示す情報である。また、第11の識別情報は、ネットワークがUE主導で制御されるRQoSをサポートするか否か、及び/又は、ネットワークがネットワーク主導で制御されるRQoSをサポートするか否かを示してもよい。また、第11の識別情報は、第14の識別情報又は第15の識別情報に対応するものであってもよい。すなわち、第11の識別情報は、第14の識別情報によって識別されるDNとの間のユーザデータ通信に対して、又は、第15の識別情報によって識別されるPDUセッションに対して、ネットワークがRQoSをサポートするか否かを示す情報を意味してもよい。また、第11の識別情報は、第12の識別情報、及び/又は第13の識別情報の意味を合わせもつ情報であってもよい。すなわち、第11の識別情報は、ネットワークがControl Plane、及び/又はUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートするか否かを示す情報を意味してもよい。また、第11の識別情報は、第17の識別情報の意味を合わせ持つ情報であってもよい。すなわち、第11の識別情報は、ネットワークがRQoSをサポートするか否かを示し、かつ、ネットワークがRQoSを受諾することを示す情報であってもよい。 The eleventh identification information in this embodiment is information indicating whether or not the network supports RQoS. Further, the eleventh identification information may indicate whether the network supports UE-controlled RQoS, and/or whether the network supports network-controlled RQoS. The eleventh identification information may correspond to the fourteenth identification information or the fifteenth identification information. That is, the eleventh identification information is used by the network for RQoS for user data communication with the DN identified by the fourteenth identification information, or for the PDU session identified by the fifteenth identification information. May mean information indicating whether or not to support. Further, the eleventh identification information may be information having the meaning of the twelfth identification information and/or the thirteenth identification information. That is, the eleventh identification information may mean information indicating whether the network supports RQoS controlled via the Control Plane and/or the User Plane. Further, the eleventh identification information may be information having the meaning of the seventeenth identification information. That is, the eleventh identification information may be information indicating whether or not the network supports RQoS and also indicating that the network accepts RQoS.
 本実施形態における第12の識別情報は、ネットワークがControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートするか否かを示す情報である。また、第12の識別情報は、ネットワークがUE主導でControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートするか否か、及び/又は、ネットワークがネットワーク主導でControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートするか否かを示してもよい。また、第12の識別情報は、第14の識別情報又は第15の識別情報に対応するものであってもよい。すなわち、第12の識別情報は、第14の識別情報によって識別されるDNとの間のユーザデータ通信に対して、又は、第15の識別情報によって識別されるPDUセッションに対して、ネットワークがControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートするか否かを示す情報を意味してもよい。また、第12の識別情報は、第18の識別情報の意味を合わせ持つ情報であってもよい。すなわち、第12の識別情報は、ネットワークがControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートするか否かを示し、かつ、ネットワークがControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSを受諾することを示す情報であってもよい。 The twelfth identification information in this embodiment is information indicating whether or not the network supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane. Further, the twelfth identification information supports whether or not the network supports RQoS controlled by the UE through the Control Plane, and/or supports the network controlled RQoS by the network initiated through the Control Plane. It may indicate whether or not to do. The twelfth identification information may correspond to the fourteenth identification information or the fifteenth identification information. That is, the twelfth identification information is used by the network for controlling user data communication with the DN identified by the fourteenth identification information, or for a PDU session identified by the fifteenth identification information. It may mean information indicating whether to support RQoS controlled through Plane. Further, the twelfth identification information may be information having the meaning of the eighteenth identification information. That is, the twelfth identification information is information indicating whether or not the network supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane, and that the network accepts RQoS controlled via Control Plane. It may be.
 本実施形態における第13の識別情報は、ネットワークがUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートするか否かを示す情報である。また、第13の識別情報は、ネットワークがUE主導でUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートするか否か、及び/又は、ネットワークがネットワーク主導でUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートするか否かを示してもよい。また、第13の識別情報は、第14の識別情報又は第15の識別情報に対応するものであってもよい。すなわち、第13の識別情報は、第14の識別情報によって識別されるDNとの間のユーザデータ通信に対して、又は、第15の識別情報によって識別されるPDUセッションに対して、ネットワークがUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートするか否かを示す情報を意味してもよい。また、第13の識別情報は、第19の識別情報の意味を合わせ持つ情報であってもよい。すなわち、第13の識別情報は、ネットワークがUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートするか否かを示し、かつ、ネットワークがUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSを受諾することを示す情報であってもよい。 The thirteenth identification information in this embodiment is information indicating whether or not the network supports RQoS controlled via User Plane. In addition, the 13th identification information, whether the network supports RQoS controlled via User Plane initiated by the UE, and/or the network supports RQoS controlled via User Plane initiated by the network. It may indicate whether or not to do. The thirteenth identification information may correspond to the fourteenth identification information or the fifteenth identification information. That is, the thirteenth identification information is used by the network for User data communication with the DN identified by the fourteenth identification information, or for the PDU session identified by the fifteenth identification information. It may mean information indicating whether to support RQoS controlled through Plane. The thirteenth identification information may also be information having the meaning of the nineteenth identification information. That is, the 13th identification information is information indicating whether or not the network supports RQoS controlled via User Plane, and that the network accepts RQoS controlled via User Plane. It may be.
 本実施形態における第14の識別情報は、DNNである。第14の識別情報は、ネットワークが許可したDNNであってもよいし、ネットワークが選択したDNNであってもよい。さらに、第14の識別情報は、第4の識別情報と同じDNNであってもよいし、異なるDNNであってもよい。 The 14th identification information in this embodiment is DNN. The fourteenth identification information may be a DNN permitted by the network or a DNN selected by the network. Furthermore, the 14th identification information may be the same DNN as the 4th identification information or a different DNN.
 本実施形態における第15の識別情報は、PDUセッションIDである。第15の識別情報は、ネットワークが許可したPDUセッションIDであってもよいし、ネットワークが選択したPDUセッションIDであってもよい。さらに、第15の識別情報は、第5の識別情報と同じPDUセッションIDであってもよいし、異なるPDUセッションIDであってもよい。 The fifteenth identification information in this embodiment is a PDU session ID. The fifteenth identification information may be a PDU session ID permitted by the network or a PDU session ID selected by the network. Furthermore, the fifteenth identification information may be the same PDU session ID as the fifth identification information, or may be a different PDU session ID.
 本実施形態における第16の識別情報は、RQoSのタイマーのタイマー値である。第16の識別情報が示す値は、コアネットワーク内の装置が決定した値であってもよいし、オペレータが決定した値であってもよいし、オペレータ以外のサービス事業者が決定した値であってもよい。尚、第16の識別情報は、第11から13の識別情報、第17から19の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報と対応づけて送受信されてもよい。 The 16th identification information in this embodiment is the timer value of the RQoS timer. The value indicated by the 16th identification information may be a value determined by the device in the core network, a value determined by the operator, or a value determined by a service provider other than the operator. May be. The 16th identification information may be transmitted and received in association with at least one of the 11th to 13th identification information and the 17th to 19th identification information.
 本実施形態における第17の識別情報は、ネットワークがRQoSをenabledに変更することを受諾することを示す情報である。また、第17の識別情報は、ネットワークがUE主導で制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更することを受諾すること、及び/又は、また、ネットワークがネットワーク主導で制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更することを受諾することを示してもよい。尚、RQoSをenabledに変更することを受諾するとは、RQoSの使用を許可するということであってもよい。また、第17の識別情報は、第14の識別情報又は第15の識別情報に対応するものであってもよい。すなわち、第17の識別情報は、第14の識別情報によって識別されるDNとの間のユーザデータ通信に対して、又は、第15の識別情報によって識別されるPDUセッションに対して、ネットワークがRQoSをenabledに変更することを受諾することを示す情報を意味してもよい。また、第17の識別情報は、第18の識別情報、及び/又は第19の識別情報の意味を合わせもつ情報であってもよい。すなわち、第17の識別情報は、ネットワークがControl Plane、及び/又はUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更することを受諾することを示す情報であってもよい。 The 17th identification information in this embodiment is information indicating that the network accepts to change RQoS to enabled. Further, the 17th identification information is that the network accepts that the RQoS controlled by the UE is changed to enabled, and/or, the RQoS that the network is controlled by the network is changed to enabled. May be indicated to be accepted. Accepting that RQoS is changed to enabled may mean that the use of RQoS is permitted. Further, the 17th identification information may correspond to the 14th identification information or the 15th identification information. That is, the 17th identification information is used by the network for RQoS for user data communication with the DN identified by the 14th identification information, or for the PDU session identified by the 15th identification information. It may mean information indicating that acceptance to change to enabled. Further, the 17th identification information may be information having the meaning of the 18th identification information and/or the 19th identification information. That is, the 17th identification information may be information indicating that the network accepts to change the RQoS controlled via the Control Plane and/or the User Plane to enabled.
 本実施形態における第18の識別情報は、ネットワークがControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更することを受諾することを示す情報である。また、第18の識別情報は、ネットワークがUE主導でControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更することを受諾すること、及び/又は、ネットワークがネットワーク主導でControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更することを受諾することを示してもよい。また、第18の識別情報は、第14の識別情報又は第15の識別情報に対応するものであってもよい。すなわち、第18の識別情報は、第14の識別情報によって識別されるDNとの間のユーザデータ通信に対して、又は、第15の識別情報によって識別されるPDUセッションに対して、ネットワークがControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更することを受諾することを示す情報を意味してもよい。 The 18th identification information in this embodiment is information indicating that the network accepts to change the RQoS controlled via the Control Plane to enabled. Further, the 18th identification information is that the network accepts that the RUE controlled by the UE via Control Plane is changed to enabled, and/or the network is controlled by the network via the Control Plane. It may indicate that it accepts to change RQoS to enabled. Further, the 18th identification information may correspond to the 14th identification information or the 15th identification information. That is, the 18th identification information is used by the network for controlling user data communication with the DN identified by the 14th identification information, or for a PDU session identified by the 15th identification information. It may mean information indicating acceptance to change the RQoS controlled via the Plane to enabled.
 本実施形態における第19の識別情報は、ネットワークがUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更することを受諾することを示す情報である。また、第19の識別情報は、ネットワークがUE主導でUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更することを受諾すること、及び/又は、ネットワークがネットワーク主導でUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更することを受諾することを示してもよい。また、第19の識別情報は、第14の識別情報又は第15の識別情報に対応するものであってもよい。すなわち、第19の識別情報は、第14の識別情報によって識別されるDNとの間のユーザデータ通信に対して、又は、第15の識別情報によって識別されるPDUセッションに対して、ネットワークがUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更することを受諾することを示す情報を意味してもよい。 The 19th identification information in this embodiment is information indicating that the network accepts to change the RQoS controlled via the User Plane to enabled. Also, the 19th identification information is that the network accepts that the UE takes the initiative to change the RQoS controlled via the User Plane to enabled, and/or the network takes the initiative to control the network via the User Plane. Accepting that the RQoS is changed to enabled. Further, the 19th identification information may correspond to the 14th identification information or the 15th identification information. That is, the 19th identification information is used by the network for User data communication with the DN identified by the 14th identification information, or for the PDU session identified by the 15th identification information. It may mean information indicating acceptance to change the RQoS controlled via the Plane to enabled.
 本実施形態における第21の識別情報は、Cause valueである。Cause valueとは、拒絶の理由を示すものであり、具体的には、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージにおいて要求されたサービスがユーザ認証失敗により外部DNにより拒絶された、又は外部DNにより取り消された、又は外部パケットデータネットワークにより取り消されたこと(User authentication or authorization failedと称する)、RQoSをenabledに変更することを許可しない(拒絶する)こと、Control Plane及びUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更することを許可しない(拒絶する)こと、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSのみをenabledに変更することを許可しない(拒絶する)こと、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSのみをenabledに変更することを許可しない(拒絶する)こと、の少なくとも1つを示してもよい。尚、RQoSをenabledに変更することを拒絶するとは、RQoSの使用を許可しないということであってもよい。さらに、第21の識別情報は、一部の要求が拒絶されたことを示す情報であってもよい。第21の情報は、第22から29の識別情報のうち、1または複数の識別情報で示される意味を含む情報であってもよい。また、第21の識別情報は、第25の識別情報又は第26の識別情報に対応するものであってもよい。すなわち、第21の識別情報は、第25の識別情報によって識別されるDNに対するCause value、又は、第26の識別情報によって識別されるPDUセッションに対するCause valueを意味してもよい。また、第21の識別情報は、レジストレーションエリア(RA; Registration Area)、トラッキングエリア(TA; Tracking Area)、又は、アクセスネットワーク(AN; Access Network)に対応するものであってもよい。すなわち、第21の識別情報は、レジストレーションエリア、トラッキングエリア、又は、アクセスネットワークに対するCause valueを意味してもよい。具体的には、第21の識別情報は、第25の識別情報によって識別されるDNにおいてRQoSが許可されないことを示すCause valueであってもよいし、第26の識別情報によって識別されるPDUセッションにおいてRQoSが許可されないことを示すCause valueであってもよい。さらに、第21の識別情報は、UE_A10が現在属しているレジストレーションエリア、及び/又はトラッキングエリアにおいてRQoSが許可されないことを示すCause valueであってもよいし、UE_A10が接続しているアクセスネットワークにおいてRQoSが許可されないことを示すCause valueであってもよい。尚、第21の識別情報が示すCause valueは、これらに限らなくてもよい。 The 21st identification information in this embodiment is a Cause value. The Cause value indicates the reason for refusal.Specifically, the service requested in the PDU session establishment request message is rejected by the external DN due to user authentication failure, or canceled by the external DN, or Canceled by the external packet data network (referred to as User authentication authentication or authorization failed), not allowing (rejecting) changing RQoS to enabled, enabling RQoS controlled via Control Plane and User Plane Do not allow to change (reject), do not allow to change (reject) only RQoS controlled via Control Plane, and enable only RQoS controlled via User Plane. At least one of not permitting (rejecting) to change may be indicated. Note that refusing to change RQoS to enabled may mean not allowing the use of RQoS. Furthermore, the 21st identification information may be information indicating that some requests have been rejected. The 21st information may be information including the meaning indicated by one or more of the 22nd to 29th identification information. Further, the 21st identification information may correspond to the 25th identification information or the 26th identification information. That is, the 21st identification information may mean the Cause value for the DN identified by the 25th identification information or the Cause value for the PDU session identified by the 26th identification information. The 21st identification information may correspond to a registration area (RA; Registration Area), a tracking area (TA; Tracking Area), or an access network (AN; Access Network). That is, the 21st identification information may mean the Cause area for the registration area, the tracking area, or the access network. Specifically, the 21st identification information may be a Cause value indicating that RQoS is not permitted in the DN identified by the 25th identification information, or the PDU session identified by the 26th identification information. It may be a Cause value indicating that RQoS is not allowed in. Furthermore, the 21st identification information may be a Cause value indicating that RQoS is not allowed in the registration area to which UE_A10 currently belongs, and/or the tracking area, or in the access network to which UE_A10 is connected. It may be a Cause value indicating that RQoS is not permitted. The Cause value indicated by the 21st identification information is not limited to these.
 本実施形態における第121の識別情報は、第21の識別情報がUser authentication or authorization failedを示す場合、第21の識別情報が示す拒絶理由を補足する詳細の拒絶理由を示す情報であってよい。尚、詳細の拒絶理由は、PDUセッション確立認証承認手続きが失敗した事を示す情報及び/又はPDUセッション確立認証承認手続きにおけるEAPを用いた認証手続きが失敗した事を示す情報であっても良い。以降の説明で用いるEAP-failureとは、こうした詳細の拒絶理由を示す情報であってよい。具体的には、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含まれる第61の識別情報がローカルポリシー及び/又はユーザ加入者情報に準拠しており、SMF_A230による第3の条件判別が真と判別された場合、PDUセッション確立認証承認手続き(S1005)が実行される。この時、PDUセッション確立認証承認手続きが失敗した場合、SMF_A230が送信するPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージ(S1022)には、User authentication or authorization failedを示す第21の識別情報及びEAP-failureを示す第121の識別情報が含まれても良い。一方、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含まれる第61の識別情報がローカルポリシー及び/又はユーザ加入者情報に準拠していない為、第3の条件判別が偽と判別された場合、PDUセッション確立認証承認手続き(S1005)は実行されない。この時、SMF_A230が送信するPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージ(S1022)には、User authentication or authorization failedを示す第21の識別情報は含まれるが、EAP-failureを示す第121の識別情報が含まれなくて良い。ここで、EAP-failureを示す第121の識別情報がPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージ(S1022)に含まれるとは、EAPを用いたPDUセッション確立認証承認手続きが実行され、その手続きが失敗した事を示す場合であってよい。一方、EAP-failureを示す第121の識別情報がPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージ(S1022)に含まれないとは、EAPを用いたPDUセッション確立認証承認手続きが実行されず、EAPを用いたPDUセッション確立認証承認手続き失敗以外の拒絶理由を示す場合であってよい。例えば、EAPを用いたPDUセッション確立認証承認手続き失敗以外の拒絶理由とは、前述した通り、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含まれる第61の識別情報がローカルポリシー及び/又はユーザ加入者情報に準拠していない場合であってよい。 The 121st identification information in the present embodiment may be information indicating a detailed rejection reason supplementing the rejection reason indicated by the 21st identification information when the 21st identification information indicates User authentication or authorization authorization failed. The detailed rejection reason may be information indicating that the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure has failed and/or information indicating that the authentication procedure using EAP in the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure has failed. The EAP-failure used in the following description may be information indicating the reason for refusal of such details. Specifically, when the 61st identification information included in the PDU session establishment request message conforms to the local policy and/or the user subscriber information and the third condition determination by SMF_A230 is determined to be true, the PDU The session establishment authentication approval procedure (S1005) is executed. At this time, if the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure fails, the PDU session establishment rejection message sent by SMF_A230 (S1022), the 21st identification information indicating User authentication authentication or authorization authorization failed and the 121st indicating EAP-failure. Identification information may be included. On the other hand, since the 61st identification information included in the PDU session establishment request message does not comply with the local policy and/or user subscriber information, if the third condition determination is determined to be false, PDU session establishment authentication approval The procedure (S1005) is not executed. At this time, the PDU session establishment rejection message (S1022) transmitted by SMF_A230 includes the 21st identification information indicating User authentication authentication or authorization authorization failed, but does not include the 121st identification information indicating EAP-failure. good. Here, if the 121st identification information indicating EAP-failure is included in the PDU session establishment rejection message (S1022), it means that the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure using EAP is executed, and that procedure has failed. May be the case. On the other hand, if the 121st identification information indicating EAP-failure is not included in the PDU session establishment rejection message (S1022), the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure using EAP is not executed, and the PDU session establishment using EAP is established. This may be the case where the reason for refusal other than the failure of the certification approval procedure is indicated. For example, as the reason for rejection other than the failure of the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure using EAP, as described above, the 61st identification information included in the PDU session establishment request message conforms to the local policy and/or the user subscriber information. May not be the case.
 本実施形態における第22の識別情報は、ネットワークがRQoSをサポートしないことを示す情報である。また、第22の識別情報は、ネットワークがUE主導で制御されるRQoSをサポートしないこと、及び/又は、ネットワークがネットワーク主導で制御されるRQoSをサポートしないことを示してもよい。また、第22の識別情報は、第25の識別情報又は第26の識別情報に対応するものであってもよい。この場合、第22の識別情報は、第25の識別情報によって識別されるDNとの間のユーザデータ通信に対して、又は、第26の識別情報によって識別されるPDUセッションに対して、ネットワークがRQoSをサポートしないことを示す情報を意味してもよい。また、第22の識別情報は、レジストレーションエリア、トラッキングエリア、又は、アクセスネットワークに対応するものであってもよい。この場合、第22の識別情報は、レジストレーションエリア、トラッキングエリア、又は、アクセスネットワークに対して、ネットワークがRQoSをサポートしないことを示す情報を意味してもよい。また、第22の識別情報は、第23の識別情報、及び/又は第24の識別情報の意味を合わせもつ情報であってもよい。すなわち、第22の識別情報は、ネットワークがControl Plane、及び/又はUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートしないことを示す情報であってもよい。また、第22の識別情報は、第27の識別情報の意味を合わせ持つ情報であってもよい。すなわち、第22の識別情報は、ネットワークがRQoSをサポートしないことを示し、かつ、ネットワークがRQoSを許可しない(拒絶する)ことを示す情報であってもよい。 The 22nd identification information in this embodiment is information indicating that the network does not support RQoS. The 22nd identification information may indicate that the network does not support UE-controlled RQoS and/or that the network does not support network-controlled RQoS. Further, the 22nd identification information may correspond to the 25th identification information or the 26th identification information. In this case, the 22nd identification information is used by the network for user data communication with the DN identified by the 25th identification information, or for the PDU session identified by the 26th identification information. It may mean information indicating that RQoS is not supported. The 22nd identification information may correspond to the registration area, the tracking area, or the access network. In this case, the 22nd identification information may mean, for the registration area, the tracking area, or the access network, information indicating that the network does not support RQoS. Further, the 22nd identification information may be information having the meanings of the 23rd identification information and/or the 24th identification information. That is, the 22nd identification information may be information indicating that the network does not support RQoS controlled via the Control Plane and/or the User Plane. Further, the 22nd identification information may be information having the meaning of the 27th identification information. That is, the 22nd identification information may be information indicating that the network does not support RQoS and that the network does not permit (reject) RQoS.
 本実施形態における第23の識別情報は、ネットワークがControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートしないことを示す情報である。また、第23の識別情報は、ネットワークがUE主導でControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートしないこと、及び/又は、ネットワークがネットワーク主導でControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートしないことを示してもよい。また、第23の識別情報は、第25の識別情報又は第26の識別情報に対応するものであってもよい。すなわち、第23の識別情報は、第25の識別情報によって識別されるDNとの間のユーザデータ通信に対して、又は、第26の識別情報によって識別されるPDUセッションに対して、ネットワークがControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートしないことを示す情報を意味してもよい。また、第23の識別情報は、レジストレーションエリア、トラッキングエリア、又は、アクセスネットワークに対応するものであってもよい。すなわち、第23の識別情報は、レジストレーションエリア、トラッキングエリア、又は、アクセスネットワークに対して、ネットワークがControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートしないことを示す情報を意味してもよい。また、第23の識別情報は、第28の識別情報の意味を合わせ持つ情報であってもよい。すなわち、第23の識別情報は、ネットワークがControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートしないことを示し、かつ、ネットワークがControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSを許可しない(拒絶する)ことを示す情報であってもよい。 The 23rd identification information in this embodiment is information indicating that the network does not support RQoS controlled via Control Plane. In addition, the 23rd identification information, the network does not support RQoS controlled via the Control Plane initiated by the UE, and/or the network does not support RQoS controlled by the Control Plane initiated by the network. May be indicated. In addition, the 23rd identification information may correspond to the 25th identification information or the 26th identification information. That is, the 23rd identification information is used by the network for controlling user data communication with the DN identified by the 25th identification information, or for a PDU session identified by the 26th identification information. It may mean information indicating that RQoS controlled through Plane is not supported. The 23rd identification information may correspond to the registration area, the tracking area, or the access network. That is, the 23rd identification information may mean, for the registration area, the tracking area, or the access network, information indicating that the network does not support RQoS controlled via the Control Plane. Further, the 23rd identification information may be information having the meaning of the 28th identification information. That is, the 23rd identification information indicates that the network does not support RQoS controlled via Control Plane, and indicates that the network does not permit (reject) RQoS controlled via Control Plane. It may be information.
 本実施形態における第24の識別情報は、ネットワークがUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートしないことを示す情報である。また、第24の識別情報は、ネットワークがUE主導でUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートしないこと、及び/又は、ネットワークがネットワーク主導でUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートしないことを示してもよい。また、第24の識別情報は、第25の識別情報又は第26の識別情報に対応するものであってもよい。すなわち、第24の識別情報は、第25の識別情報によって識別されるDNとの間のユーザデータ通信に対して、又は、第26の識別情報によって識別されるPDUセッションに対して、ネットワークがUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートしないことを示す情報を意味してもよい。また、第24の識別情報は、レジストレーションエリア、トラッキングエリア、又は、アクセスネットワークに対応するものであってもよい。すなわち、第24の識別情報は、レジストレーションエリア、トラッキングエリア、又は、アクセスネットワークに対して、ネットワークがUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートしないことを示す情報を意味してもよい。また、第24の識別情報は、第29の識別情報の意味を合わせ持つ情報であってもよい。すなわち、第24の識別情報は、ネットワークがUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートしないことを示し、かつ、ネットワークがUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSを許可しない(拒絶する)ことを示す情報であってもよい。 The 24th identification information in this embodiment is information indicating that the network does not support RQoS controlled via User Plane. Further, the 24th identification information, the network does not support RQoS controlled via the User Plane initiated by the UE, and / or the network does not support RQoS controlled by the User initiated Plane initiated by the network. May be indicated. Further, the 24th identification information may correspond to the 25th identification information or the 26th identification information. That is, the 24th identification information is used by the network for User data communication with the DN identified by the 25th identification information, or for the PDU session identified by the 26th identification information. It may mean information indicating that RQoS controlled through Plane is not supported. Further, the 24th identification information may correspond to the registration area, the tracking area, or the access network. That is, the 24th identification information may mean, for the registration area, the tracking area, or the access network, information indicating that the network does not support RQoS controlled through the User Plane. Further, the 24th identification information may be information having the meaning of the 29th identification information. That is, the 24th identification information indicates that the network does not support RQoS controlled via the User Plane, and indicates that the network does not permit (reject) RQoS controlled via the User Plane. It may be information.
 本実施形態における第25の識別情報は、DNNである。第25の識別情報は、ネットワークが許可しなかったDNNであってもよいし、第4の識別情報で識別されるDNNが許可されていないことを示す情報であってもよい。さらに、第25の識別情報は、第4の識別情報と同じDNNであってもよい。 The 25th identification information in this embodiment is a DNN. The 25th identification information may be a DNN not permitted by the network, or may be information indicating that the DNN identified by the fourth identification information is not permitted. Furthermore, the 25th identification information may be the same DNN as the 4th identification information.
 本実施形態における第26の識別情報は、PDU Session IDである。第26の識別情報は、ネットワークが許可しなかったPDUセッションIDであってもよいし、第5の識別情報で識別されるPDUセッションIDが許可されていないことを示す情報であってもよい。さらに、第26の識別情報は、第5の識別情報と同じPDUセッションIDであってもよい。 The 26th identification information in this embodiment is a PDU Session ID. The 26th identification information may be a PDU session ID not permitted by the network, or may be information indicating that the PDU session ID identified by the fifth identification information is not permitted. Furthermore, the 26th identification information may be the same PDU session ID as the 5th identification information.
 本実施形態における第27の識別情報は、ネットワークがRQoSをenabledに変更することを許可しない(拒絶する)ことを示す情報である。また、第27の識別情報は、ネットワークがUE主導で制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更することを許可しない(拒絶する)こと、及び/又は、ネットワークがネットワーク主導で制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更することを許可しない(拒絶する)ことを示してもよい。また、第27の識別情報は、第25の識別情報又は第26の識別情報に対応するものであってもよい。すなわち、第27の識別情報は、第25の識別情報によって識別されるDNとの間のユーザデータ通信に対して、又は、第26の識別情報によって識別されるPDUセッションに対して、ネットワークがRQoSをenabledに変更することを許可しない(拒絶する)ことを示す情報を意味してもよい。また、第27の識別情報は、レジストレーションエリア、トラッキングエリア、又は、アクセスネットワークに対応するものであってもよい。すなわち、第27の識別情報は、レジストレーションエリア、トラッキングエリア、又は、アクセスネットワークに対して、ネットワークがRQoSをenabledに変更することを許可しない(拒絶する)ことを示す情報を意味してもよい。また、第27の識別情報は、第28の識別情報、及び/又は第29の識別情報の意味を合わせもつ情報であってもよい。すなわち、第27の識別情報は、ネットワークがControl Plane、及び/又はUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更することを許可しない(拒絶する)ことを示す情報であってもよい。 The 27th identification information in this embodiment is information indicating that the network does not allow (reject) changing RQoS to enabled. The 27th identification information does not allow (reject) changing the network-controlled RQoS to enabled to enabled, and/or changes the network-controlled RQoS to enabled to enabled RQoS. You may indicate that you do not permit (reject). Further, the 27th identification information may correspond to the 25th identification information or the 26th identification information. That is, the 27th identification information is used by the network for RQoS for user data communication with the DN identified by the 25th identification information or for the PDU session identified by the 26th identification information. It may mean the information indicating that the change to enabled is not permitted (rejected). The 27th identification information may correspond to a registration area, a tracking area, or an access network. That is, the 27th identification information may mean information indicating that the registration area, the tracking area, or the access network does not allow (reject) the network to change RQoS to enabled. .. The 27th identification information may be information having the meaning of the 28th identification information and/or the 29th identification information. That is, the 27th identification information may be information indicating that the network does not allow (reject) changing the RQoS controlled through the Control Plane and/or the User Plane to enabled.
 本実施形態における第28の識別情報は、ネットワークがControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更することを許可しない(拒絶する)ことを示す情報である。また、第28の識別情報は、ネットワークがUE主導でControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更することを許可しない(拒絶する)こと、及び/又は、ネットワークがネットワーク主導でControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更することを許可しない(拒絶する)ことを示してもよい。また、第28の識別情報は、第25の識別情報又は第26の識別情報に対応するものであってもよい。すなわち、第28の識別情報は、第25の識別情報によって識別されるDNとの間のユーザデータ通信に対して、又は、第26の識別情報によって識別されるPDUセッションに対して、ネットワークがControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更することを許可しない(拒絶する)ことを示す情報を意味してもよい。また、第28の識別情報は、レジストレーションエリア、トラッキングエリア、又は、アクセスネットワークに対応するものであってもよい。すなわち、第28の識別情報は、レジストレーションエリア、トラッキングエリア、又は、アクセスネットワークに対して、ネットワークがControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更することを許可しない(拒絶する)ことを示す情報を意味してもよい。 The 28th identification information in this embodiment is information indicating that the network does not allow (reject) changing the RQoS controlled via the Control Plane to enabled. Further, the 28th identification information does not allow (reject) changing the RQoS controlled by the network via Control Plane to enabled by the UE, and/or the network takes Control Plane by the network. It may indicate not to allow (reject) changing the RQoS controlled via the. Further, the 28th identification information may correspond to the 25th identification information or the 26th identification information. That is, the 28th identification information is used by the network for controlling user data communication with the DN identified by the 25th identification information or for a PDU session identified by the 26th identification information. It may mean information indicating that the RQoS controlled through the Plane is not permitted (rejected) to be changed to enabled. The 28th identification information may correspond to a registration area, a tracking area, or an access network. That is, the 28th identification information does not allow (reject) the registration area, the tracking area, or the access network from changing the RQoS controlled by the network via the Control Plane to enabled. It may mean the information shown.
 本実施形態における第29の識別情報は、ネットワークがUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更することを許可しない(拒絶する)ことを示す情報である。また、第29の識別情報は、ネットワークがUE主導でUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更することを許可しない(拒絶する)こと、及び/又は、ネットワークがネットワーク主導でUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更することを許可しない(拒絶する)ことを示してもよい。また、第29の識別情報は、第25の識別情報又は第26の識別情報に対応するものであってもよい。すなわち、第29の識別情報は、第25の識別情報によって識別されるDNとの間のユーザデータ通信に対して、又は、第26の識別情報によって識別されるPDUセッションに対して、ネットワークがUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更することを許可しない(拒絶する)ことを示す情報を意味してもよい。また、第29の識別情報は、レジストレーションエリア、トラッキングエリア、又は、アクセスネットワークに対応するものであってもよい。すなわち、第29の識別情報は、レジストレーションエリア、トラッキングエリア、又は、アクセスネットワークに対して、ネットワークがUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをenabledに変更することを許可しない(拒絶する)ことを示す情報を意味してもよい。 The 29th identification information in this embodiment is information indicating that the network does not allow (reject) changing the RQoS controlled via the User Plane to enabled. Further, the 29th identification information does not allow (reject) changing the RQoS controlled via the User Plane to enabled by the UE, and/or the network takes the User Plane on the initiative of the network. It may indicate not to allow (reject) changing the RQoS controlled via the. Further, the 29th identification information may correspond to the 25th identification information or the 26th identification information. That is, the 29th identification information is used by the network for user data communication with the DN identified by the 25th identification information or for the PDU session identified by the 26th identification information. It may mean information indicating that the RQoS controlled via the Plane is not permitted (rejected) to be changed to enabled. The 29th identification information may correspond to the registration area, the tracking area, or the access network. That is, the 29th identification information does not allow (reject) the registration area, the tracking area, or the access network from changing the RQoS controlled by the network via the User Plane to enabled. It may mean the information shown.
 本実施形態における第72の識別情報は、本手続きが拒絶されたことを示す理由値(cause)を示す情報である。第72の識別情報は、DNに接続するPDUセッションの確立の要求が拒絶されたことを示す情報であってもよい。言い換えると、第72の識別情報は、第1のスライスに属するPDUセッションの確立の要求が拒絶されたことを示す情報であってもよいし、第1のスライスに属するPDUセッションの確立が許可されていないことを示す情報であってもよい。ここで、第1のスライスは、第71の識別情報が示すスライスであってもよいし、異なるスライスであってもよい。さらに、第72の識別情報は、第25の識別情報によって識別されるDNにおいて第1のスライスに属するPDUセッションの確立が許可されないことを示す情報であってもよいし、第26の識別情報によって識別されるPDUセッションにおいて第1のスライスに属するPDUセッションの確立が許可されないことを示す情報であってもよい。さらに、第72の識別情報は、UE_A10が現在属しているレジストレーションエリア、及び/又はトラッキングエリアにおいて第1のスライスに属するPDUセッションの確立が許可されないことを示す情報であってもよいし、UE_A10が接続しているアクセスネットワークにおいて第1のスライスに属するPDUセッションの確立が許可されないことを示す情報であってもよい。尚、第72の識別情報が示す本手続きが拒絶されたことを示す理由値は、これらに限らなくてもよい。さらに、第72の識別情報は、第1のタイマーの値を示す情報であってもよい。UE_A10は、第72の識別情報の受信に基づいて、第1のタイマーに第72の識別情報で示された値を設定してもよいし、別の方法で設定されたタイマー値を設定してもよいし、ランダム値を設定してもよい。さらに、第72の識別情報は、拒絶されたPDUセッション要求が属するNWスライス情報を識別する識別子で有ってもよい。尚、第72の識別情報が示すNWスライスは、第71の識別情報が示すNWスライスと同じNWスライスであってもよいし、異なるNWスライスであってもよい。さらに、第72の識別情報は、PDUセッションが拒絶された後、NWが再接続を指示する識別子であってもよい。さらに、UE_A10は、拒絶理由値、NWスライス情報、NWからの再接続を指示する識別子に基づき、設定したタイマーの実行を開始してもよい。 The 72nd identification information in this embodiment is information indicating a reason value (cause) indicating that this procedure is rejected. The 72nd identification information may be information indicating that the request for establishing the PDU session connecting to the DN is rejected. In other words, the 72nd identification information may be information indicating that the request for establishing the PDU session belonging to the first slice has been rejected, or establishment of the PDU session belonging to the first slice is permitted. The information may be information indicating that there is not. Here, the first slice may be the slice indicated by the 71st identification information, or may be a different slice. Further, the 72nd identification information may be information indicating that establishment of a PDU session belonging to the first slice in the DN identified by the 25th identification information is not permitted, or by the 26th identification information. It may be information indicating that establishment of the PDU session belonging to the first slice is not permitted in the identified PDU session. Further, the 72nd identification information may be information indicating that the registration area to which UE_A10 currently belongs, and/or that the establishment of the PDU session belonging to the first slice in the tracking area is not permitted, UE_A10 It may be information indicating that the establishment of the PDU session belonging to the first slice is not permitted in the access network to which is connected. The reason value indicating that this procedure indicated by the 72nd identification information is rejected is not limited to these. Further, the 72nd identification information may be information indicating the value of the first timer. UE_A10 may set the value indicated by the 72nd identification information in the first timer based on the reception of the 72nd identification information, or set the timer value set by another method. Alternatively, a random value may be set. Furthermore, the 72nd identification information may be an identifier that identifies the NW slice information to which the rejected PDU session request belongs. The NW slice indicated by the 72nd identification information may be the same NW slice as the NW slice indicated by the 71st identification information, or may be a different NW slice. Furthermore, the 72nd identification information may be an identifier that the NW instructs to reconnect after the PDU session is rejected. Further, the UE_A 10 may start execution of the set timer based on the rejection reason value, the NW slice information, and the identifier for instructing reconnection from the NW.
 本実施形態における第31の識別情報は、RQI(Reflective QoS Indication)である。RQIは、RQoSを有効化したことを示す情報であってもよいし、RQoSを有効化することを示す情報であってもよい。より詳細には、第31の識別情報は、下りリンクパケットのユーザデータ通信に対してRQoSを有効化したことを示す情報であってもよいし、上りリンクパケットのユーザデータ通信に対してRQoSを有効化することを示す情報であってもよい。さらに、第31の識別情報は、上りリンクパケットのユーザデータ通信のためのQoSルールの作成を要求する情報であってもよい。 The 31st identification information in this embodiment is RQI (Reflective QoS Indication). The RQI may be information indicating that RQoS is activated or information indicating that RQoS is activated. More specifically, the 31st identification information may be information indicating that RQoS is enabled for user data communication of downlink packets, or RQoS for user data communication of uplink packets. It may be information indicating activation. Furthermore, the 31st identification information may be information requesting creation of a QoS rule for user data communication of an uplink packet.
 本実施形態における第32の識別情報は、QFIである。第32の識別情報は、QoSフローを識別する情報であってよい。さらに、第32の識別情報は、RQoSを有効化した下りリンクパケットが転送されるフローを示す情報であってもよいし、RQoSを有効化した後に上りリンクパケットが転送されるフローを示す情報であってもよい。さらに、第32の識別情報は、上りリンクパケットのユーザデータ通信に、第32の識別情報が示すQoSフローを用いることを要求する情報であってもよい。さらに、第32の識別情報は、第32の識別情報が示すQoSフローを用いた上りリンクパケットのユーザデータ通信のためのQoSルールの作成を要求する情報であってもよい。 The 32nd identification information in this embodiment is QFI. The 32nd identification information may be information identifying a QoS flow. Further, the 32nd identification information may be information indicating a flow in which a downlink packet with RQoS enabled is transferred, or information indicating a flow in which an uplink packet is transferred after enabling RQoS. It may be. Furthermore, the 32nd identification information may be information requesting that the user data communication of the uplink packet uses the QoS flow indicated by the 32nd identification information. Furthermore, the 32nd identification information may be information requesting the creation of a QoS rule for user data communication of an uplink packet using the QoS flow indicated by the 32nd identification information.
 本実施形態における第41の識別情報は、UE主導でRQoSを要求することを示す情報、又は、UE主導でRQoSの有効化を要求することを示す情報である。より詳細には、第41の識別情報は、上りリンクパケット、及び/又は下りリンクパケットのユーザデータ通信に対するRQoSの有効化を要求する情報であってもよい。さらに、第41の識別情報は、上りリンクパケット、及び/又は下りリンクパケットのユーザデータ通信のためのQoSルールの作成を要求する情報であってもよい。さらに、第41の識別情報は、ネットワーク主導のRQoS有効化手続きの開始を要求する情報であってもよい。 The forty-first identification information in this embodiment is information indicating that RQoS is requested by the initiative of the UE, or that activation of RQoS is requested by the initiative of the UE. More specifically, the 41st identification information may be information requesting activation of RQoS for user data communication of an uplink packet and/or a downlink packet. Furthermore, the 41st identification information may be information requesting creation of a QoS rule for user data communication of an uplink packet and/or a downlink packet. Furthermore, the 41st identification information may be information requesting the start of the network-initiated RQoS activation procedure.
 本実施形態における第42の識別情報は、QFI(QoS Flow ID)である。QFIは、RQoSを適用するフローを識別するために使用される情報である。第42の識別情報は、QoSフローを識別する情報であってよい。さらに、第42の識別情報は、RQoSを有効化した後に上りリンクパケット、及び/又は下りリンクパケットが転送されるフローを示す情報であってもよい。さらに、第42の識別情報は、上りリンクパケット、及び/又は下りリンクパケットのユーザデータ通信に、第42の識別情報が示すQoSフローを用いることを要求する情報であってもよい。さらに、第42の識別情報は、第42の識別情報が示すQoSフローを用いた上りリンクパケット、及び/又は下りリンクパケットのユーザデータ通信のためのQoSルールの作成を要求する情報であってもよい。さらに、第42の識別情報は、ネットワーク主導のRQoS有効化手続きの開始を要求する情報であってもよいし、ネットワーク主導のRQoS有効化手続きにおいて用いられるQoSフローを第42の識別情報が示すRQoSフローにすることを要求する情報であってもよい。 The 42nd identification information in this embodiment is QFI (QoS Flow ID). QFI is information used to identify a flow to which RQoS is applied. The 42nd identification information may be information identifying a QoS flow. Further, the 42nd identification information may be information indicating a flow in which the uplink packet and/or the downlink packet is transferred after RQoS is enabled. Further, the 42nd identification information may be information requesting use of the QoS flow indicated by the 42nd identification information for user data communication of the uplink packet and/or the downlink packet. Further, the 42nd identification information may be information requesting the creation of a QoS rule for user data communication of an uplink packet and/or a downlink packet using the QoS flow indicated by the 42nd identification information. Good. Further, the 42nd identification information may be information requesting the start of the network-initiated RQoS activation procedure, or the RQoS indicating the QoS flow used in the network-initiated RQoS activation procedure indicated by the 42nd identification information. It may be information requesting a flow.
 本実施形態における第51の識別情報は、RQoSを許可しない(拒絶する)ことを示す情報、又は、RQoSの有効化の要求を許可しない(拒絶する)ことを示す情報である。さらに、第51の識別情報は、UE_A10の要求が拒絶された理由を示す情報であってもよい。尚、UE_A10の要求が拒絶された理由は、UE_A10が現在接続しているアクセスネットワーク、及び/又はレジストレーションエリア、及び/又はトラッキングエリアにおいて、RQoSを有効化することが許可されていないことを示す情報であってもよいし、UE_A10がRQoSの有効化を要求した上りリンクパケットにおいて、RQoSを有効化することが許可されていないことを示す情報であってもよい。さらに、UE_A10の要求が拒絶された理由は、一時的にRQoSの有効化が禁止されていることを示す情報であってもよいし、UE主導のRQoS有効化手続きが禁止されていることを示す情報であってもよい。尚、UE_A10の要求が拒絶された理由は、ネットワークがUE主導のRQoS有効化手続きを受諾できないことを示す情報であってよく、これに限らない。 The 51st identification information in the present embodiment is information indicating that RQoS is not permitted (rejected), or information indicating that a request for enabling RQoS is not permitted (rejected). Furthermore, the 51st identification information may be information indicating the reason why the request of UE_A10 is rejected. Incidentally, the reason that the request of UE_A10 is rejected indicates that the access network to which UE_A10 is currently connected, and/or the registration area, and/or the tracking area is not permitted to enable RQoS. The information may be information, or may be information indicating that activation of RQoS is not permitted in the uplink packet for which UE_A10 has requested activation of RQoS. Furthermore, the reason that the request of UE_A10 is rejected may be information indicating that the activation of RQoS is temporarily prohibited, or indicates that the UE-initiated RQoS activation procedure is prohibited. It may be information. The reason why the request from UE_A10 is rejected may be information indicating that the network cannot accept the RQoS activation procedure initiated by the UE, and is not limited to this.
 本実施形態における第62の識別情報は、SMF_A230がDNとの認証/承認手順において取得したDNが発行する認証/承認情報である。具体例としては、第62の識別情報はDNが認証/承認するサービス名であってもよいし、承認フラグであってもよい。さらに、第62の識別情報は、DN_A5が、PDUセッション、及び/又はUE_A10、及び/又はアプリケーションに対する認証、及び/又は承認の実施を示す情報であってもよい。さらに、第62の識別情報は、UE_A10、及び/又はアプリケーション、及び/又はユーザの、第62の識別情報が示すDNが発行する認証/承認情報の確認を要求する情報であってもよい。さらに、第62の識別情報は、UE_A10、及び/又はアプリケーション、及び/又はユーザの、第62の識別情報が示すDNが認証/承認するサービス名の中からのサービス利用選択を要求する情報であってもよい。 The 62nd identification information in this embodiment is the authentication/approval information issued by the DN acquired by the SMF_A230 in the authentication/approval procedure with the DN. As a specific example, the 62nd identification information may be a service name that the DN authenticates/approves, or an approval flag. Furthermore, the 62nd identification information may be information indicating that the DN_A5 indicates that the PDU session and/or the UE_A10 and/or the application is authenticated and/or authorized. Furthermore, the 62nd identification information may be information requesting confirmation of the authentication/authorization information issued by the DN indicated by the 62nd identification information of the UE_A10 and/or the application and/or the user. Furthermore, the 62nd identification information is information requesting service use selection from the service names of the UE_A10 and/or the application and/or the user that the DN indicated by the 62nd identification information authenticates/approves. May be.
 本実施形態における第63の識別情報は、SMF_A230がDNとの認証/承認手順において取得したDNが発行する認証/承認情報に対しての応答を示す情報である。具体例としては、第63の識別情報は、第62の識別情報に対してのメッセージ応答を示す情報でもよいし、第62の識別情報が示す情報と同じ内容を示す情報でもよいし、第62の識別情報にあるサービス名の中からUE_A10がサービス利用選択したサービス名を示す情報でもよい。さらに、第63の識別情報は、UE_A10、及び/又はアプリケーション、及び/又はユーザの、第62の識別情報が示すDNが発行する認証/承認情報の確認が実施されたことを示す情報であってもよい。さらに、第63の識別情報は、UE_A10、及び/又はアプリケーション、及び/又はユーザの、第62の識別情報が示すDNが認証/承認するサービス名の中からのサービス利用選択が実施されたことを示す情報であってもよい。さらに、第63の識別情報は、DN認証承認応答情報であってもよい。 The 63rd identification information in this embodiment is information indicating a response to the authentication/authorization information issued by the DN acquired by the SMF_A230 in the authentication/authorization procedure with the DN. As a specific example, the 63rd identification information may be information indicating a message response to the 62nd identification information, information indicating the same content as the information indicated by the 62nd identification information, or the 62nd Information indicating the service name selected by the UE_A 10 from among the service names included in the identification information may be used. Furthermore, the 63rd identification information, UE_A10, and/or the application, and/or the user, is information indicating that the authentication/authorization information issued by the DN indicated by the 62nd identification information has been confirmed. Good. Furthermore, the 63rd identification information is UE_A10, and/or the application, and/or the user, and the DN indicated by the 62nd identification information indicates that the service use selection is performed from the service names authenticated/approved. It may be information indicating. Furthermore, the 63rd identification information may be DN authentication approval response information.
 次に、本実施形態における初期手続きを、図8を用いて説明する。以下、初期手続きは本手続きとも称し、初期手続き(本手続き)には、登録手続き(Registration procedure)、PDUセッション確立手続き(PDU session establishment procedure)、RQoS(Reflective QoS(Quality of Service))有効化手続きが含まれる。登録手続き、PDUセッション確立手続き、RQoS有効化手続きの詳細は、後述する。 Next, the initial procedure in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, the initial procedure is also referred to as this procedure, and the initial procedure (this procedure) includes the registration procedure (Registration procedure), PDU session establishment procedure (PDU session establishment procedure), and RQoS (Reflective QoS (Quality of Service)) activation procedure. Is included. Details of the registration procedure, PDU session establishment procedure, and RQoS activation procedure will be described later.
 具体的には、各装置が登録手続き(S800)を実行することにより、UE_A10はネットワークに登録された状態(RM-REGISTERED状態)に遷移する。次に、各装置がPDUセッション確立手続き(S802)を実行することにより、UE_A10は、コアネットワーク_B190を介して、PDU接続サービスを提供するDN_A5との間でPDUセッションを確立し、各装置間でPDUセッションが確立された状態に遷移する。尚、このPDUセッションは、アクセスネットワーク、UPF_A235を介して確立されていることを想定しているが、それに限られない。すなわち、UPF_A235とアクセスネットワークとの間に、UPF_A235とは異なるUPF(UPF_C239)が存在してもよい。このとき、このPDUセッションは、アクセスネットワーク、UPF_C239、UPF_A235を介して確立されることになる。 Specifically, UE_A10 transitions to the state registered in the network (RM-REGISTERED state) when each device executes the registration procedure (S800). Next, each device executes the PDU session establishment procedure (S802), and UE_A10 establishes a PDU session with DN_A5 that provides the PDU connection service via the core network_B190, and the inter-device communication is performed. Transitions to the state where the PDU session is established. Note that this PDU session is assumed to be established via the access network, UPF_A235, but is not limited to this. That is, a UPF (UPF_C239) different from the UPF_A235 may exist between the UPF_A235 and the access network. At this time, this PDU session will be established via the access network, UPF_C239, and UPF_A235.
 次に、各装置は、RQoS有効化手続き(S804)を実行することにより、特定のユーザデータに対する特定のQoSルールを作成する。さらに、各装置は、特定のQoSルールの作成に基づいて、特定のユーザデータに対して、特定のQoSルールに対応付けられた特定のQoSフローを用いたユーザデータ通信が実行可能な状態へと遷移する。 Next, each device creates a specific QoS rule for specific user data by executing the RQoS activation procedure (S804). Furthermore, each device, based on the creation of a specific QoS rule, enters a state in which user data communication using a specific QoS flow associated with a specific QoS rule can be executed for specific user data. Transition.
 次に、各装置は、特定のQoSフローを用いたユーザデータ通信が実行可能な状態へ遷移した後に、RQoS非活性化手続きを実行し、特定のユーザデータに対する特定のQoSルールを削除する。さらに、各装置は、特定のQoSルールの削除に基づいて、特定のユーザデータに対して、特定のQoSルールに対応付けられた特定のQoSフローを用いたユーザデータ通信が実行可能ではない状態へと遷移する。以上により、本手続きは完了する。 Next, after transitioning to a state where user data communication using a specific QoS flow can be executed, each device executes the RQoS deactivation procedure and deletes the specific QoS rule for the specific user data. Furthermore, each device, based on the deletion of the specific QoS rule, moves to a state in which the user data communication using the specific QoS flow associated with the specific QoS rule cannot be executed for the specific user data. And transition. This procedure is complete.
 尚、各装置は、登録手続き及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、各装置の各種能力情報及び/又は各種要求情報を交換してもよい。また、各装置は、各種情報の交換及び/又は各種要求の交渉を登録手続きで実施した場合、各種情報の交換及び/又は各種要求の交渉をPDUセッション確立手続きで実施しなくてもよい。また、各装置は、各種情報の交換及び/又は各種要求の交渉を登録手続きで実施しなかった場合、各種情報の交換及び/又は各種要求の交渉をPDUセッション確立手続きで実施してもよい。また、各装置は、各種情報の交換及び/又は各種要求の交渉を登録手続きで実施した場合でも、各種情報の交換及び/又は各種要求の交渉をPDUセッション確立手続きで実施してもよい。 Note that each device may exchange various capability information and/or various request information of each device in the registration procedure and/or the PDU session establishment procedure. Further, when each device exchanges various information and/or negotiates various requests in the registration procedure, each device does not need to exchange various information and/or negotiate various requests in the PDU session establishment procedure. In addition, each device may perform the exchange of various information and/or the negotiation of various requests in the PDU session establishment procedure if the exchange of various information and/or the negotiation of various requests is not performed in the registration procedure. In addition, each device may exchange various information and/or negotiate various requests in the PDU session establishment procedure even when performing various information exchanges and/or various request negotiations in the registration procedure.
 また、各装置は、PDUセッション確立手続きを、登録手続きの中で実行してもよく、登録手続きの完了後に実行してもよい。また、PDUセッション確立手続きが登録手続きの中で実行される場合、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージは登録要求メッセージに含まれて送受信されてよく、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージは登録受諾メッセージに含まれて送受信されてよく、PDUセッション確立完了メッセージは登録完了メッセージに含まれて送受信されてよく、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージは登録拒絶メッセージに含まれて送受信されてよい。また、PDUセッション確立手続きが登録手続きの中で実行された場合、各装置は、登録手続きの完了に基づいてPDUセッションを確立してもよいし、各装置間でPDUセッションが確立された状態へ遷移してもよい。 Also, each device may execute the PDU session establishment procedure during the registration procedure or after the completion of the registration procedure. In addition, when the PDU session establishment procedure is performed during the registration procedure, the PDU session establishment request message may be included in the registration request message and may be transmitted/received, and the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be included in the registration acceptance message. The PDU session establishment completion message may be included in the registration completion message and transmitted/received, and the PDU session establishment rejection message may be included in the registration rejection message and transmitted/received. When the PDU session establishment procedure is executed during the registration procedure, each device may establish the PDU session based on the completion of the registration procedure, or the PDU session may be established between the devices. You may make a transition.
 また、本手続きに関わる各装置は、本手続きで説明する各制御メッセージを送受信することにより、各制御メッセージに含まれる1以上の識別情報を送受信し、送受信した各識別情報をコンテキストとして記憶してもよい。 In addition, each device involved in this procedure transmits and receives each control message described in this procedure, thereby transmitting and receiving one or more identification information included in each control message, and storing each transmitted and received identification information as a context. Good.
 [1.3.1.登録手続きの概要]
 まず、登録手続きの概要について説明する。登録手続きは、UE_A10が主導してネットワーク(アクセスネットワーク、及び/又はコアネットワーク_B190、及び/又はDN(DN_A5)へ登録する為の手続きである。UE_A10は、ネットワークに登録していない状態であれば、電源投入時等の任意のタイミングで本手続きを実行することができる。言い換えると、UE_A10は、非登録状態(RM-DEREGISTERED state)であれば任意のタイミングで本手続きを開始してもよい。また、各装置は、登録手続きの完了に基づいて、登録状態(RM-REGISTERED state)に遷移してもよい。
[1.3.1. Overview of registration procedure]
First, the outline of the registration procedure will be described. The registration procedure is a procedure for UE_A10 to register on the network (access network and/or core network_B190 and/or DN (DN_A5)) led by UE_A10. UE_A10 must be registered in the network. In other words, this procedure can be executed at any timing when the power is turned on, etc. In other words, UE_A10 may start this procedure at any timing if it is in the non-registered state (RM-DEREGISTERED state). Further, each device may transit to the registration state (RM-REGISTERED state) based on the completion of the registration procedure.
 さらに、本手続きは、ネットワークにおけるUE_A10の位置登録情報を更新する、及び/又は、UE_A10からネットワークへ定期的にUE_A10の状態を通知する、及び/又は、ネットワークにおけるUE_A10に関する特定のパラメータを更新する為の手続きであってもよい。 Furthermore, this procedure updates the location registration information of the UE_A10 in the network, and / or, from the UE_A10 to the network to periodically notify the state of UE_A10, and / or to update specific parameters for the UE_A10 in the network. May be the procedure.
 UE_A10は、TAを跨ぐモビリティをした際に、本手続きを開始してもよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、保持しているTAリストで示されるTAとは異なるTAに移動した際に、本手続きを開始してもよい。さらに、UE_A10は、実行しているタイマーが満了した際に本手続きを開始してもよい。さらに、UE_A10は、PDUセッションの切断や無効化(非活性化とも称する)が原因で各装置のコンテキストの更新が必要な際に本手続きを開始してもよい。さらに、UE_A10は、UE_A10のPDUセッション確立に関する、能力情報、及び/又はプリファレンスに変化が生じた場合、本手続きを開始してもよい。さらに、UE_A10は、定期的に本手続きを開始してもよい。尚、UE_A10は、これらに限らず、PDUセッションが確立された状態であれば、任意のタイミングで本手続きを実行することができる。 UE_A10 may start this procedure when it moves across TAs. In other words, the UE_A 10 may start this procedure when moving to a TA different from the TA shown in the held TA list. Further, the UE_A10 may start this procedure when the running timer expires. Furthermore, the UE_A 10 may start this procedure when the context of each device needs to be updated due to disconnection or invalidation (also referred to as deactivation) of the PDU session. Further, the UE_A10 may start this procedure when the capability information and/or the preference regarding the PDU session establishment of the UE_A10 change. Furthermore, UE_A10 may start this procedure periodically. Note that the UE_A 10 is not limited to these, and if the PDU session is established, the UE_A 10 can execute this procedure at any timing.
 [1.3.1.1.登録手続き例]
 図9を用いて、登録手続きを実行する手順の例を説明する。本章では、本手続きとは登録手続きを指す。以下、本手続きの各ステップについて説明する。
[1.3.1.1. Example of registration procedure]
An example of the procedure for executing the registration procedure will be described with reference to FIG. In this chapter, this procedure refers to the registration procedure. Each step of this procedure will be described below.
 まず、UE_A10は、NR node(gNBとも称する)_A122を介して、AMF_A240に登録要求(Registration Request)メッセージを送信することにより(S900)(S902)(S904)、登録手続きを開始する。また、UE_A10は、登録要求メッセージにSM(Session Management)メッセージ(例えば、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージ)を含めて送信することで、又は登録要求メッセージとともにSMメッセージ(例えば、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージ)を送信することで、登録手続き中にPDUセッション確立手続き等のSMのための手続きを開始してもよい。 First, UE_A10 starts the registration procedure by transmitting a Registration Request message to AMF_A240 via NRnode (also called gNB)_A122 (S900) (S902) (S904). Further, UE_A10, by including the SM (Session Management) message (e.g., PDU session establishment request message) in the registration request message, or by sending the SM message (e.g., PDU session establishment request message) together with the registration request message. By doing so, procedures for SM such as PDU session establishment procedure may be started during the registration procedure.
 具体的には、UE_A10は、登録要求メッセージを含むRRC(Radio Resource Control)メッセージを、NR node_A122に送信する(S900)。NR node_A122は、登録要求メッセージを含むRRCメッセージを受信すると、RRCメッセージの中から登録要求メッセージを取り出し、登録要求メッセージのルーティング先のNF又は共有CPファンクションとして、AMF_A240を選択する(S902)。ここで、NR node_A122は、RRCメッセージに含まれる情報に基づき、AMF_A240を選択してもよい。NR node_A122は、選択したAMF_A240に、登録要求メッセージを送信又は転送する(S904)。 Specifically, UE_A10 transmits an RRC (Radio Resource Control) message including a registration request message to NR node_A122 (S900). When receiving the RRC message including the registration request message, the NR node_A 122 extracts the registration request message from the RRC message and selects AMF_A240 as the NF or the shared CP function of the routing destination of the registration request message (S902). Here, the NR node_A122 may select the AMF_A240 based on the information included in the RRC message. The NR node_A122 transmits or transfers the registration request message to the selected AMF_A240 (S904).
 尚、登録要求メッセージは、N1インタフェース上で送受信されるNAS(Non-Access-Stratum)メッセージである。また、RRCメッセージは、UE_A10とNR node_A122との間で送受信される制御メッセージである。また、NASメッセージはNASレイヤで処理され、RRCメッセージはRRCレイヤで処理され、NASレイヤはRRCレイヤよりも上位のレイヤである。 Note that the registration request message is a NAS (Non-Access-Stratum) message sent and received on the N1 interface. Also, the RRC message is a control message transmitted and received between the UE_A10 and the NR node_A122. Further, the NAS message is processed in the NAS layer, the RRC message is processed in the RRC layer, and the NAS layer is a layer higher than the RRC layer.
 また、UE_A10は、登録を要求するNSIが複数存在する場合は、そのNSIごとに登録要求メッセージを送信してもよく、複数の登録要求メッセージを、1以上のRRCメッセージに含めて送信してもよい。また、上記の複数の登録要求メッセージを1つの登録要求メッセージとして、1以上のRRCメッセージに含めて送信してもよい。 Further, UE_A10, when there are a plurality of NSI requesting registration, may send a registration request message for each NSI, or send a plurality of registration request message, included in one or more RRC message. Good. Further, the plurality of registration request messages may be included in one or more RRC messages and transmitted as one registration request message.
 ここで、UE_A10は、登録要求メッセージ及び/又はRRCメッセージに、第1から8の識別情報、第61の識別情報、第71の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報を含めてもよい。尚、これらの識別情報の2以上の識別情報は、1以上の識別情報として構成されてもよい。 Here, the UE_A 10 may include one or more pieces of identification information among the first to eighth pieces of identification information, the 61st piece of identification information, and the 71st piece of identification information in the registration request message and/or the RRC message. Two or more pieces of identification information of these pieces of identification information may be configured as one or more pieces of identification information.
 さらに、UE_A10は、第1から8の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報を登録要求メッセージ及び/又はRRCメッセージに含めて送信することで、RQoSをUE_A10がサポートすることを示してもよいし、RQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移することを要求してもよい。 Further, UE_A10, by transmitting one or more pieces of identification information among the first to eighth pieces of identification information in the registration request message and/or the RRC message, may indicate that UE_A10 supports RQoS, It may be required to transit to a state in which RQoS can be used.
 さらに、UE_A10は、第1から8の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報を登録要求メッセージ及び/又はRRCメッセージに含めて送信することで、RQoSをUE_A10がサポートしないことを示してもよいし、RQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移することを要求しないことを示してもよい。 Furthermore, UE_A10, by transmitting one or more pieces of identification information among the first to eighth pieces of identification information in the registration request message and/or the RRC message, may indicate that UE_A10 does not support RQoS. It may indicate that RQoS does not require transition to a usable state.
 より詳細には、UE_A10は、第1の識別情報、及び/又は第2の識別情報、及び/又は第6の識別情報、及び/又は第7の識別情報を登録要求メッセージ及び/又はRRCメッセージに含めて送信することで、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをUE_A10がサポートすることを示してもよいし、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移することを要求してもよい。この場合において、UE_A10は、第3の識別情報、及び/又は第8の識別情報を登録要求メッセージ及び/又はRRCメッセージに含めずに送信することで、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをUE_A10がサポートしないことを示してもよいし、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移することを要求しないことを示してもよい。 More specifically, UE_A10, the first identification information, and / or second identification information, and / or sixth identification information, and / or 7 identification information in the registration request message and / or RRC message. By including it, it may be shown that UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane, or request that the RQoS controlled via Control Plane transits to a usable state. May be. In this case, UE_A10, the third identification information, and / or by transmitting without identifying the eighth identification information in the registration request message and / or RRC message, RQoS controlled via User Plane UE_A10. May not be supported, or may indicate that RQoS controlled via User Plane does not require transition to a usable state.
 また、UE_A10は、第1の識別情報、及び/又は第2の識別情報、及び/又は第6の識別情報、及び/又は第7の識別情報を登録要求メッセージ及び/又はRRCメッセージに含めて送信することで、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをUE_A10がサポートしないことを示してもよいし、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移することを要求しないことを示してもよい。 UE_A10 transmits the first identification information, and/or the second identification information, and/or the sixth identification information, and/or the seventh identification information included in the registration request message and/or the RRC message. By doing so, it may indicate that the UE_A10 does not support RQoS controlled via the Control Plane, or indicates that the RQoS controlled via the Control Plane does not require transition to a usable state. May be.
 さらに、UE_A10は、第1の識別情報、及び/又は第3の識別情報、及び/又は第6の識別情報、及び/又は第8の識別情報を登録要求メッセージ及び/又はRRCメッセージに含めて送信することで、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをUE_A10がサポートすることを示してもよいし、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移することを要求してもよい。この場合において、UE_A10は、第2の識別情報、及び/又は第7の識別情報を登録要求メッセージ及び/又はRRCメッセージに含めずに送信することで、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをUE_A10がサポートしないことを示してもよいし、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移することを要求しないことを示してもよい。 Furthermore, UE_A10 transmits the first identification information, and/or the third identification information, and/or the sixth identification information, and/or the eighth identification information included in the registration request message and/or the RRC message. By doing so, it may indicate that UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled via User Plane, or may request that RQoS controlled via User Plane transits to a usable state. .. In this case, UE_A10, the second identification information, and / or by transmitting without identifying the seventh identification information in the registration request message and / or RRC message, RQoS controlled via Control Plane UE_A10. May not be supported, or may indicate that RQoS controlled via the Control Plane does not require transition to a usable state.
 また、UE_A10は、第1の識別情報、及び/又は第3の識別情報、及び/又は第6の識別情報、及び/又は第8の識別情報を登録要求メッセージ及び/又はRRCメッセージに含めて送信することで、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをUE_A10がサポートしないことを示してもよいし、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移することを要求しないことを示してもよい。 UE_A10 transmits the first identification information, and/or the third identification information, and/or the sixth identification information, and/or the eighth identification information included in the registration request message and/or the RRC message. By doing so, it is possible to indicate that UE_A10 does not support RQoS controlled via User Plane, or to indicate that RQoS controlled via User Plane does not require transition to a usable state. May be.
 さらに、UE_A10は、第1から3の識別情報、第6から8の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報と第4の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、第4の識別情報で識別されるDNに対して確立されるPDUセッションに対して、RQoSをUE_A10がサポートするか否かを示してもよいし、RQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移することを要求するか否かを示してもよい。 Further, UE_A10, the first to the third identification information, by transmitting one or more identification information and fourth identification information among the sixth to eighth identification information in association with each other, identified by the fourth identification information. For the PDU session established for the DN to be established, it may be indicated whether UE_A10 supports RQoS, or whether it is required to make a transition to an available state for RQoS. Good.
 さらに、UE_A10は、第1から3の識別情報、第6から8の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報と第5の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、第5の識別情報で識別されるPDUセッションに対して、RQoSをUE_A10がサポートするか否かを示してもよいし、RQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移することを要求するか否かを示してもよい。 Further, UE_A10, the first to third identification information, by transmitting one or more identification information and fifth identification information among the sixth to eighth identification information in association with each other, identified by the fifth identification information. For the PDU session to be performed, it may be indicated whether the UE_A 10 supports RQoS, or whether it is required to make a transition to an available state for RQoS.
 さらに、UE_A10は、第1から8の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報を登録要求メッセージ及び/又はRRCメッセージに含めて送信することで、UE主導で制御されるRQoSをUE_A10がサポートするか否かを示してもよいし、UE主導で制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移することを要求するか否かを示してもよい。 Further, UE_A10, by including one or more pieces of identification information among the first to eighth pieces of identification information in the registration request message and/or the RRC message, whether UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled by UE. This may be indicated, or it may be indicated whether or not the UE-controlled RQoS requires a transition to a usable state.
 さらに、UE_A10は、第1から8の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報を登録要求メッセージ及び/又はRRCメッセージに含めて送信することで、ネットワーク主導で制御されるRQoSをUE_A10がサポートするか否かを示してもよいし、ネットワーク主導で制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移することを要求するか否かを示してもよい。 Further, UE_A10, by including one or more pieces of identification information among the first to eighth pieces of identification information in the registration request message and/or the RRC message, whether or not UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled by the network. This may be indicated, or it may be indicated whether or not RQoS controlled by the network is required to transit to a usable state.
 また、UE_A10は、第1の識別情報を送信することにより、あるいは、第2の識別情報及び第3の識別情報を送信することにより、あるいは、第6の識別情報を送信することにより、あるいは、第7の識別情報及び第8の識別情報を送信することにより、あるいは、これらの識別情報の2以上の識別情報が1以上の識別情報として構成されている場合にはそれらのうちの1以上の識別情報を送信することにより、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをUE_A10がサポートし、かつ、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをUE_A10がサポートすることを示してもよいし、あるいは、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移し、かつ、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移することを要求してもよい。 Also, UE_A10, by transmitting the first identification information, or by transmitting the second identification information and the third identification information, or by transmitting the sixth identification information, or, By transmitting the seventh identification information and the eighth identification information, or, if two or more identification information of these identification information is configured as one or more identification information, one or more of them By transmitting the identification information, UE_A10 may support RQoS controlled via Control Plane, and UE_A10 may support RQoS controlled via User Plane, or User It may be required to make a transition to a state in which RQoS controlled via Plane can be used and a state to be able to use RQoS controlled via User Plane.
 さらに、UE_A10は、第61の識別情報、及び/又は第4の識別情報、及び/又は第5の識別情報を登録要求メッセージ及び/又はRRCメッセージに含めて送信することで、3GPPインターフェース(N6インターフェース等)を介したDNによるサービス認証/承認を要求してもよいし、本手続きにおいてPDUセッション確立認証承認手続きを実行することを要求してもよい。 Furthermore, UE_A10, by including the 61st identification information, and/or the fourth identification information, and/or the fifth identification information in the registration request message and/or the RRC message, and transmitting the 3GPP interface (N6 interface). Service authentication/authorization by DN via the above), or the PDU session establishment authentication and authorization procedure may be requested in this procedure.
 より詳細には、UE_A10は、第61の識別情報と第4の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、第4の識別情報で識別されるDNに対して確立されるPDUセッションにおいて、3GPPインタフェースを介したDN_A5によるサービス認証/承認を要求してもよいし、本手続きにおいてPDUセッション確立認証承認手続きを実行することを要求してもよい。 More specifically, UE_A10, by transmitting the 61st identification information and the fourth identification information in association with each other, in the PDU session established for the DN identified by the fourth identification information, 3GPP Service authentication/authorization by DN_A5 via the interface may be requested, or execution of the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure may be requested in this procedure.
 さらに、UE_A10は、第61の識別情報と第5の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、第5の識別情報で識別されるPDUセッションにおいて、3GPPインタフェースを介したDN_A5によるサービス認証/承認を要求してもよいし、本手続きにおいてPDUセッション確立認証承認手続きを実行することを要求してもよい。 Further, UE_A10, by transmitting the 61st identification information and the 5th identification information in association with each other, in the PDU session identified by the 5th identification information, service authentication/authorization by DN_A5 via the 3GPP interface. May be requested, or the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure may be requested to be executed in this procedure.
 さらに、UE_A10は、第71の識別情報、及び/又は第4の識別情報、及び/又は第5の識別情報を登録要求メッセージ及び/又はRRCメッセージに含めて送信することで、ネットワークスライスに属したPDUセッションの確立を要求してもよいし、UE_A10が要求する、PDUセッションが属するネットワークスライスを示してもよいし、PDUセッションがこれから属する予定であるネットワークスライスを示してもよい。 Furthermore, UE_A10 belongs to the network slice by transmitting by including the 71st identification information, and/or the fourth identification information, and/or the fifth identification information in the registration request message and/or the RRC message. The establishment of a PDU session may be requested, the network slice to which the PDU session belongs requested by the UE_A 10 may be indicated, or the network slice to which the PDU session is due to belong may be indicated.
 より詳細には、UE_A10は、第71の識別情報と第4の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、第4の識別情報で識別されるDNに対して確立されるPDUセッションにおいて、ネットワークスライスに属したPDUセッションの確立を要求してもよいし、UE_A10が要求する、PDUセッションが属するネットワークスライスを示してもよいし、PDUセッションがこれから属する予定であるネットワークスライスを示してもよい。 More specifically, UE_A10, by transmitting the 71st identification information and the fourth identification information in association with each other, in the PDU session established for the DN identified by the fourth identification information, the network The establishment of a PDU session belonging to a slice may be requested, the network slice requested by UE_A10 to which the PDU session belongs may be indicated, or the network slice to which the PDU session is due to belong may be indicated.
 さらに、UE_A10は、第71の識別情報と第5の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、第5の識別情報で識別されるPDUセッションにおいて、ネットワークスライスに属したPDUセッションの確立を要求してもよいし、UE_A10が要求する、PDUセッションが属するネットワークスライスを示してもよいし、PDUセッションがこれから属する予定であるネットワークスライスを示してもよい。 Further, UE_A10, by transmitting the 71st identification information and the fifth identification information in association with each other, in the PDU session identified by the fifth identification information, request establishment of a PDU session belonging to the network slice. The UE_A10 may indicate the network slice to which the PDU session belongs, or the network slice to which the PDU session will belong.
 さらに、UE_A10は、第1から8の識別情報、第61の識別情報、第71の識別情報のうち2以上の識別情報を組合せて送信することにより、上述した事柄を組合せた要求を行ってもよい。尚、UE_A10が各識別情報を送信することで示す事柄はこれらに限らなくてもよい。 Further, UE_A10, the first to eighth identification information, the 61st identification information, by transmitting a combination of two or more identification information of the 71st identification information, even when making a request combining the above matters. Good. Note that the matter indicated by the UE_A10 transmitting each piece of identification information is not limited to these.
 尚、UE_A10は、第1から8の識別情報、第61の識別情報、第71の識別情報のうち、どの識別情報を登録要求メッセージに入れるかを、UE_A10の能力情報、及び/又はUEポリシー等のポリシー、及び/又はUE_A10のプリファレンス、及び/又はアプリケーション(上位層)に基づいて決定してもよい。尚、どの識別情報を登録要求メッセージに入れるかのUE_A10による決定はこれに限らない。 Incidentally, UE_A10, the identification information of the first to eight, the 61st identification information, of the 71st identification information, which identification information to put in the registration request message, capability information of UE_A10, and / or UE policy etc. Policy and/or UE_A10 preference and/or application (upper layer). Note that the determination of which identification information is included in the registration request message by the UE_A 10 is not limited to this.
 また、UE_A10は、これらの識別情報を、登録要求メッセージとは異なる制御メッセージ(例えばNASメッセージまたはRRCメッセージ)に含めて送信してもよい。 Also, UE_A10 may include these pieces of identification information in a control message (for example, a NAS message or an RRC message) different from the registration request message, and transmit the control message.
 AMF_A240は、登録要求メッセージ及び/又は登録要求メッセージとは異なる制御メッセージを受信すると、第1の条件判別を実行する。第1の条件判別は、AMF_A240がUE_A10の要求を受諾するか否かを判別するためのものである。第1の条件判別において、AMF_A240は第1の条件判別が真であるか偽であるかを判定する。AMF_A240は、第1の条件判別が真の場合(すなわち、ネットワークがUE_A10の要求を受諾する場合)、本手続き中の(A)の手続きを開始し、第1の条件判別が偽の場合(すなわち、ネットワークがUE_A10の要求を受諾しない場合)、本手続き中の(B)の手続きを開始する。 When AMF_A240 receives a registration request message and/or a control message different from the registration request message, AMF_A240 executes the first condition determination. The first condition judgment is for judging whether AMF_A240 accepts the request of UE_A10. In the first condition determination, the AMF_A240 determines whether the first condition determination is true or false. AMF_A240, if the first condition determination is true (i.e., if the network accepts the request of UE_A10), starts the procedure (A) in this procedure, if the first condition determination is false (i.e. , If the network does not accept the request from UE_A10), start the procedure (B) in this procedure.
 以下、第1の条件判別が真の場合のステップ、すなわち本手続き中の(A)の手続きの各ステップを説明する。AMF_A240は、第4の条件判別を実行し、本手続き中の(A)の手続きを開始する。第4の条件判別は、AMF_A240がSMF_A230との間でSMメッセージの送受信を実施するか否かを判別するためのものである。言い換えると、第4の条件判別は、AMF_A240が本手続き中で、PDUセッション確立手続きを実施するか否かを判別するものであってもよい。AMF_A240は、第4の条件判別が真の場合(すなわち、AMF_A240がSMF_A230との間でSMメッセージの送受信を実施する場合)には、SMF_A230の選択、及び選択したSMF_A230との間でSMメッセージの送受信を実行し、第4の条件判別が偽の場合(すなわち、AMF_A240がSMF_A230との間でSMメッセージの送受信を実施しない場合)には、それらを省略する(S906)。尚、AMF_A240は、SMF_A230から拒絶を示すSMメッセージを受信した場合は、本手続き中の(A)の手続きを中止し、本手続き中の(B)の手続きを開始してもよい。 The following describes the steps when the first condition judgment is true, that is, each step of procedure (A) in this procedure. The AMF_A240 executes the fourth condition determination and starts the procedure (A) in this procedure. The fourth condition determination is to determine whether the AMF_A240 performs SM message transmission/reception with the SMF_A230. In other words, the fourth condition determination may be performed by the AMF_A240 during this procedure to determine whether or not to execute the PDU session establishment procedure. The AMF_A240 selects the SMF_A230 and transmits/receives the SM message to/from the selected SMF_A230 when the fourth condition determination is true (that is, when the AMF_A240 transmits/receives the SM message to/from the SMF_A230). When the fourth condition determination is false (that is, when the AMF_A240 does not perform the SM message transmission/reception with the SMF_A230), they are omitted (S906). When the AMF_A240 receives the SM message indicating the refusal from the SMF_A230, the AMF_A240 may stop the procedure (A) in this procedure and start the procedure (B) in this procedure.
 さらに、AMF_A240は、UE_A10からの登録要求メッセージの受信、及び/又はSMF_A230との間のSMメッセージの送受信の完了に基づいて、NR node_A122を介して、UE_A10に登録受諾(Registration Accept)メッセージを送信する(S908)。例えば、第4の条件判別が真の場合、AMF_A240は、UE_A10からの登録要求メッセージの受信に基づいて、登録受諾メッセージを送信してもよい。また、第4の条件判別が偽の場合、AMF_A240は、SMF_A230との間のSMメッセージの送受信の完了に基づいて、登録受諾メッセージを送信してもよい。ここで、登録受諾メッセージは、登録要求メッセージに対する応答メッセージとして送信されてよい。また、登録受諾メッセージは、N1インタフェース上で送受信されるNASメッセージであり、例えば、AMF_A240はNR node_A122に対してN2インタフェースの制御メッセージとして送信し、これを受信したNR node_A122はUE_A10に対してRRCメッセージに含めて送信してもよい。 Further, AMF_A240, based on the reception of the registration request message from UE_A10, and/or the completion of the transmission and reception of the SM message with SMF_A230, through NR node_A122, transmits a registration acceptance (Registration Accept) message to UE_A10. (S908). For example, when the fourth condition determination is true, AMF_A240 may transmit the registration acceptance message based on the reception of the registration request message from UE_A10. Further, when the fourth condition determination is false, the AMF_A240 may send the registration acceptance message based on the completion of the transmission/reception of the SM message with the SMF_A230. Here, the registration acceptance message may be transmitted as a response message to the registration request message. Further, the registration acceptance message is a NAS message transmitted/received on the N1 interface, for example, AMF_A240 transmits to the NR node_A122 as a control message of the N2 interface, and the NR node_A122 that receives the RRC message is transmitted to the UE_A10. May be included and transmitted.
 さらに、第4の条件判別が真の場合、AMF_A240は、登録受諾メッセージに、SMメッセージ(例えば、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージ)を含めて送信するか、又は登録受諾メッセージとともに、SMメッセージ(例えば、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージ)を送信してもよい。この送信方法は、登録要求メッセージの中にSMメッセージ(例えば、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージ)が含められており、かつ、第4の条件判別が真の場合に、実行されてもよい。また、この送信方法は、登録要求メッセージとともにSMメッセージ(例えば、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージ)を含められており、かつ、第4の条件判別が真の場合に、実行されてもよい。AMF_A240は、このような送信方法を行うことにより、SMのための手続きが受諾されたことを示してもよい。 Furthermore, when the fourth condition determination is true, the AMF_A240 sends the registration acceptance message including the SM message (e.g., PDU session establishment acceptance message) or the SM message (e.g., PDU) together with the registration acceptance message. Session establishment acceptance message). This transmission method may be executed when the SM message (for example, the PDU session establishment request message) is included in the registration request message and the fourth condition determination is true. Further, this transmission method may be executed when the SM message (for example, the PDU session establishment request message) is included together with the registration request message, and the fourth condition determination is true. AMF_A240 may indicate that the procedure for the SM has been accepted by performing such a transmission method.
 ここで、AMF_A240は、登録受諾メッセージに、第11から19の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報を含めてもよいし、これらの識別情報を含めることで、UE_A10の要求が受諾されたことを示してもよい。尚、これらの識別情報の2以上の識別情報は、1以上の識別情報として構成されてもよい。 Here, AMF_A240, the registration acceptance message may include one or more pieces of identification information among the eleventh to nineteenth pieces of identification information, and by including these pieces of identification information, the request of UE_A10 is accepted. May be shown. Two or more pieces of identification information of these pieces of identification information may be configured as one or more pieces of identification information.
 さらに、AMF_A240は、第11から19の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報を登録受諾メッセージに含めて送信することで、RQoSをネットワークがサポートすることを示してもよいし、RQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が受諾されたことを示してもよい。 Further, the AMF_A240 may indicate that the network supports RQoS by transmitting one or more pieces of identification information among the 11th to 19th pieces of identification information included in the registration acceptance message, and RQoS may be used. It may indicate that the request to transition to the state has been accepted.
 より詳細には、AMF_A240は、第11の識別情報、及び/又は第12の識別情報、及び/又は第17の識別情報、及び/又は第18の識別情報を登録受諾メッセージに含めて送信することで、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートすることを示してもよいし、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が受諾されたことを示してもよい。この場合において、AMF_A240は、第13の識別情報、及び/又は第19の識別情報を登録受諾メッセージに含めずに送信することで、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートしないことを示してもよいし、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。 More specifically, AMF_A240 shall include the 11th identification information, and/or the 12th identification information, and/or the 17th identification information, and/or the 18th identification information in the registration acceptance message and transmit the same. It may indicate that the network supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane, or that the request to transition to the state where RQoS controlled via Control Plane is enabled is accepted. Good. In this case, the AMF_A240 sends the 13th identification information and/or the 19th identification information without including it in the registration acceptance message, thereby confirming that the network does not support RQoS controlled via the User Plane. It may be shown, or it may be shown that the request to transit to the state in which the RQoS controlled via the User Plane can be used is rejected.
 また、AMF_A240は、第11の識別情報、及び/又は第12の識別情報、及び/又は第17の識別情報、及び/又は第18の識別情報を登録受諾メッセージに含めて送信することで、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートしないことを示してもよいし、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。 Further, AMF_A240, by transmitting the 11th identification information, and/or the 12th identification information, and/or the 17th identification information, and/or the 18th identification information included in the registration acceptance message, Control It may indicate that the network does not support RQoS controlled via Plane, or may indicate that the request for transitioning to the state in which RQoS controlled via Control Plane can be used is rejected.
 さらに、AMF_A240は、第11の識別情報、及び/又は第13の識別情報、及び/又は第17の識別情報、及び/又は第19の識別情報を登録受諾メッセージに含めて送信することで、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートすることを示してもよいし、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が受諾されたことを示してもよい。この場合において、AMF_A240は、第12の識別情報、及び/又は第18の識別情報を登録受諾メッセージに含めずに送信することで、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートしないことを示してもよいし、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。 Furthermore, AMF_A240, by including the 11th identification information, and/or the 13th identification information, and/or the 17th identification information, and/or the 19th identification information in the registration acceptance message, It may indicate that the network supports RQoS controlled via Plane, or may indicate that the request for transitioning to the state where RQoS controlled via User Plane can be used has been accepted. In this case, the AMF_A240 sends the 12th identification information and/or the 18th identification information without including it in the registration acceptance message, thereby confirming that the network does not support RQoS controlled via the Control Plane. It may be shown, or it may be shown that the request to transit to the state in which the RQoS controlled through the Control Plane can be used is rejected.
 また、AMF_A240は、第11の識別情報、及び/又は第13の識別情報、及び/又は第17の識別情報、及び/又は第19の識別情報を登録受諾メッセージに含めて送信することで、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートしないことを示してもよいし、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。 Also, AMF_A240, by transmitting the 11th identification information, and/or the 13th identification information, and/or the 17th identification information, and/or the 19th identification information included in the registration acceptance message, It may indicate that the network does not support RQoS controlled via Plane, or may indicate that the request for transitioning to the state in which RQoS controlled via User Plane can be used is rejected.
 さらに、AMF_A240は、第11から13の識別情報、第17から19の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報と第14の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、第14の識別情報で識別されるDNに対して確立されるPDUセッションに対して、RQoSをネットワークがサポートするか否かを示してもよいし、RQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が受諾されたか否かを示してもよい。 Further, the AMF_A240, the 11th to 13th identification information, by transmitting one or more of the identification information of the 17th to 19th identification information and the 14th identification information in association with each other, identification by the 14th identification information. It may indicate whether the network supports RQoS for the PDU session established for the DN to be established, or whether the request to transition to the state where RQoS is available is accepted. Good.
 さらに、AMF_A240は、第11から13の識別情報、第17から19の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報と第15の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、第15の識別情報で識別されるPDUセッションに対して、RQoSをネットワークがサポートするか否かを示してもよいし、RQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が受諾されたか否かを示してもよい。 Further, the AMF_A240, the 11th to 13th identification information, by transmitting one or more of the identification information of the 17th to 19th identification information and the 15th identification information in association with each other, the AMF_A240 identifies the 15th identification information. For the PDU session to be performed, it may be indicated whether the network supports RQoS, or whether the request for transitioning to the state where RQoS is available is accepted.
 さらに、AMF_A240は、第11から19の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報を登録受諾メッセージに含めて送信することで、UE主導で制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートするか否かを示してもよいし、UE主導で制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が受諾されたか否かを示してもよい。 Further, the AMF_A240, by including one or more pieces of identification information among the 11th to 19th pieces of identification information in the registration acceptance message, and indicating whether or not the network supports RQoS controlled by UE. Alternatively, it may indicate whether or not a request for transitioning to a state in which UE-controlled RQoS can be used is accepted.
 さらに、AMF_A240は、第11から19の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報を登録受諾メッセージに含めて送信することで、ネットワーク主導で制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートするか否かことを示してもよいし、ネットワーク主導で制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が受諾されたか否かことを示してもよい。 Further, the AMF_A240 indicates whether or not the network supports RQoS controlled by the network by transmitting one or more pieces of identification information among the 11th to 19th pieces of identification information included in the registration acceptance message. Alternatively, it may indicate whether or not the request for transitioning to the state in which RQoS controlled by the network is enabled is accepted.
 さらに、AMF_A240は、第11から15の識別情報、第17から19の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報と第16の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、ユーザデータ通信に対して適用するRQoSの有効期間を示してもよいし、ユーザデータ通信に対するRQoSを有効化した後にRQoSが有効な期間を示してもよいし、ユーザデータ通信に対するRQoSを有効化した時に開始されるRQoSタイマーが満了するまでの期間を示してもよい。 Furthermore, the AMF_A240 is applied to user data communication by associating and transmitting one or more pieces of identification information among the 11th to 15th identification information and the 17th to 19th identification information and the 16th identification information. The valid period of RQoS may be indicated, the valid period of RQoS after enabling RQoS for user data communication may be indicated, or the RQoS timer started when RQoS for user data communication is activated may be displayed. It may indicate the period until expiration.
 また、UE_A10は、第11の識別情報を送信することにより、あるいは、第12の識別情報及び第13の識別情報を送信することにより、あるいは、第17の識別情報を送信することにより、あるいは、第18の識別情報及び第19の識別情報を送信することにより、あるいは、これらの識別情報の2以上の識別情報が1以上の識別情報として構成されている場合にはそれらのうちの1以上の識別情報を送信することにより、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートし、かつ、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートすることを示してもよいし、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が受諾され、かつ、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が受諾されたことを示してもよい。 Also, UE_A10, by transmitting the eleventh identification information, or by transmitting the twelfth identification information and thirteenth identification information, or by transmitting the seventeenth identification information, or, By transmitting the eighteenth identification information and the nineteenth identification information, or, if two or more identification information of these identification information are configured as one or more identification information, one or more of them By transmitting the identification information, it may be indicated that the network supports RQoS controlled via the Control Plane and the network supports RQoS controlled via the User Plane. It may indicate that the request to transit to the state in which the RQoS controlled via the above is accepted and the request to transit to the state in which the RQoS controlled via the User Plane is available are accepted.
 さらに、AMF_A240は、第11から19の識別情報のうち2以上の識別情報を組合せて送信することにより、上述した事柄を組合せた要求を行ってもよい。尚、AMF_A240が各識別情報を送信することで示す事柄はこれらに限らなくてもよい。 Further, the AMF_A240 may make a request that combines the above-mentioned matters by combining and transmitting two or more pieces of identification information among the 11th to 19th pieces of identification information. Note that the fact that AMF_A240 transmits each piece of identification information is not limited to these.
 尚、AMF_A240は、第11から19の識別情報のうち、どの識別情報を登録受諾メッセージに入れるか否かを、受信した識別情報、及び/又はネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態、及び/又はユーザの登録情報(user subscription)等に基づいて決定してもよい。 Incidentally, AMF_A240, of the 11th to 19th identification information, which identification information to put in the registration acceptance message, the received identification information, and/or network capability information, and/or operator policy, and/or Alternatively, it may be determined based on the network status and/or user registration information (user subscription).
 例えば、第11の識別情報、及び/又は第17の識別情報は、ネットワークがRQoSをサポートしている場合、及び/又は第1から3の識別情報、及び/又は第6から8の識別情報を受信した場合に送信される情報であってもよい。さらに、第12の識別情報、及び/又は第18の識別情報は、ネットワークがControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートしている場合、及び/又は第1から3の識別情報、及び/又は第6から8の識別情報を受信した場合に送信される情報であってもよい。さらに、第13の識別情報、及び/又は第19の識別情報は、ネットワークがUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートしている場合、及び/又は第1から3の識別情報、及び/又は第6から8の識別情報を受信した場合に送信される情報であってもよい。 For example, the eleventh identification information, and/or the seventeenth identification information, if the network supports RQoS, and/or the first to third identification information, and/or the sixth to eighth identification information. It may be information transmitted when received. Furthermore, the twelfth identification information, and/or the eighteenth identification information, if the network supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane, and/or the first to third identification information, and/or It may be information transmitted when the sixth to eighth identification information is received. Furthermore, the thirteenth identification information, and/or the nineteenth identification information, if the network supports RQoS controlled via User Plane, and/or the first to third identification information, and/or It may be information transmitted when the sixth to eighth identification information is received.
 さらに、第14の識別情報は、第4の識別情報が示すDNNと同じDNNを示す情報であってもよいし、異なるDNNを示す情報であってもよい。さらに、第15の識別情報は、第5の識別情報が示すPDUセッションIDと同じPDUセッションIDを示す情報であってもよいし、異なるPDUセッションIDを示す情報であってもよい。尚、どの識別情報を登録受諾メッセージに入れるかのAMF_A240による決定はこれに限らない。 Furthermore, the 14th identification information may be information indicating the same DNN as the DNN indicated by the fourth identification information, or may be information indicating a different DNN. Further, the fifteenth identification information may be information indicating the same PDU session ID as the PDU session ID indicated by the fifth identification information, or may be information indicating a different PDU session ID. Note that the determination of which identification information is included in the registration acceptance message by AMF_A240 is not limited to this.
 UE_A10は、NR node_A122介して、登録受諾メッセージを受信する(S908)。UE_A10は、登録受諾メッセージを受信することで、登録受諾メッセージに含まれる各種の識別情報の内容を認識する。 UE_A10 receives the registration acceptance message via NRnode_A122 (S908). Upon receiving the registration acceptance message, UE_A10 recognizes the contents of various identification information included in the registration acceptance message.
 UE_A10は、登録受諾メッセージの受信に基づいて、さらに、第1の処理を実施する(S909)。尚、UE_A10は、第1の処理を、登録完了メッセージの送信に基づいて実施してもよいし、本手続きの完了に基づいて実施してもよい。 UE_A10 further executes the first process based on the reception of the registration acceptance message (S909). It should be noted that the UE_A 10 may perform the first process based on the transmission of the registration completion message or may perform the first process based on the completion of this procedure.
 ここで、第1の処理は、UE_A10が、AMF_A240によって示された事柄を認識する処理であってよい。さらに、第1の処理は、UE_A10が、受信した識別情報をコンテキストとして記憶する処理であってもよいし、受信した識別情報を上位層、及び/又は下位層に転送する処理であってもよい。さらに、第1の処理は、UE_A10が、本手続きの要求が受諾されたことを認識する処理であってもよい。 Here, the first process may be a process in which UE_A10 recognizes the matter indicated by AMF_A240. Furthermore, the first process may be a process in which the UE_A10 stores the received identification information as a context, or may be a process of transferring the received identification information to an upper layer and/or a lower layer. .. Furthermore, the first process may be a process in which the UE_A10 recognizes that the request for this procedure has been accepted.
 さらに、UE_A10が第11から19の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報を受信した場合、第1の処理は、UE_A10が、RQoS有効化手続きを、PDUセッションが確立された後の任意のタイミングで実行可能な状態に遷移する処理であってもよいし、PDUセッションが確立された後にRQoS有効化手続きを開始する処理であってもよい。 Furthermore, when UE_A10 receives one or more pieces of identification information from the eleventh to nineteenth pieces of identification information, the first process is UE_A10, the RQoS activation procedure, at any timing after the PDU session is established. It may be a process of transitioning to an executable state or a process of starting the RQoS enabling procedure after the PDU session is established.
 より詳細には、UE_A10が第11の識別情報、及び/又は第12の識別情報、及び/又は第17の識別情報、及び/又は第18の識別情報を受信した場合、第1の処理は、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoS有効化手続きを、PDUセッションが確立された後の任意のタイミングで実行可能な状態に遷移する処理であってもよい。さらに、UE_A10が第11の識別情報、及び/又は第13の識別情報、及び/又は第17の識別情報、及び/又は第19の識別情報を受信した場合、第1の処理は、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoS有効化手続きを、PDUセッションが確立された後の任意のタイミングで実行可能な状態に遷移する処理であってもよい。 More specifically, if the UE_A10 receives the 11th identification information, and/or the 12th identification information, and/or the 17th identification information, and/or the 18th identification information, the first process, It may be a process of transitioning the RQoS activation procedure controlled via the Control Plane to an executable state at an arbitrary timing after the PDU session is established. Furthermore, if the UE_A10 receives the 11th identification information, and/or the 13th identification information, and/or the 17th identification information, and/or the 19th identification information, the first processing is UserPlane. It may be a process of transiting the RQoS activation procedure controlled via the VoIP session to an executable state at an arbitrary timing after the PDU session is established.
 さらに、UE_A10が第11から19の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報と第16の識別情報とを受信した場合、第1の処理は、UE_A10が、第16の識別情報が示す値をRQoSのタイマー値と設定する処理であってもよい。尚、第1の処理はこれらの処理に限らなくてもよい。 Furthermore, if UE_A10 received one or more identification information and 16th identification information among the 11th to 19th identification information, the first process is UE_A10, the 16th identification information indicates the value of RQoS. It may be a process of setting a timer value. The first process is not limited to these processes.
 次に、UE_A10は、登録受諾メッセージの受信、及び/又は第1の処理の完了に基づいて、登録完了(Registration Complete)メッセージを、AMF_A240に送信する(S910)。尚、UE_A10は、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージ等のSMメッセージを受信した場合は、登録完了メッセージに、PDUセッション確立完了メッセージ等のSMメッセージを含めて送信してもよいし、SMメッセージを含めることで、SMのための手続きを完了することを示してもよい。ここで、登録完了メッセージは、登録受諾メッセージに対する応答メッセージとして送信されてよい。また、登録完了メッセージは、N1インタフェース上で送受信されるNASメッセージであり、例えば、UE_A10はNR node_A122に対してRRCメッセージに含めて送信し、これを受信したNR node_A122はAMF_A240に対してN2インタフェースの制御メッセージとして送信してもよい。 Next, the UE_A10 transmits a Registration Complete message to the AMF_A240 based on the reception of the registration acceptance message and/or the completion of the first process (S910). Incidentally, when the UE_A10 receives the SM message such as the PDU session establishment acceptance message, the registration completion message may be transmitted by including the SM message such as the PDU session establishment completion message, or by including the SM message. , May indicate to complete the procedure for SM. Here, the registration completion message may be transmitted as a response message to the registration acceptance message. Further, the registration completion message is a NAS message transmitted and received on the N1 interface.For example, UE_A10 transmits to the NR node_A122 by including it in the RRC message, and the NR node_A122 that receives this transmits the N2 interface to the AMF_A240. It may be transmitted as a control message.
 AMF_A240は、登録完了メッセージを受信する(S910)。また、各装置は、登録受諾メッセージ、及び/又は登録完了メッセージの送受信に基づき、本手続き中の(A)の手続きを完了する。 AMF_A240 receives the registration completion message (S910). Further, each device completes the procedure (A) in this procedure based on the transmission and reception of the registration acceptance message and/or the registration completion message.
 次に、第1の条件判別が偽の場合のステップ、すなわち本手続き中の(B)の手続きの各ステップを説明する。AMF_A240は、NR node_A122を介して、UE_A10に登録拒絶(Registration Reject)メッセージを送信することにより(S912)、本手続き中の(B)の手続きを開始する。ここで、登録拒絶メッセージは、登録要求メッセージに対する応答メッセージとして送信されてよい。また、登録拒絶メッセージは、N1インタフェース上で送受信されるNASメッセージであり、例えば、AMF_A240はNR node_A122に対してN2インタフェースの制御メッセージとして送信し、これを受信したNR node_A122はUE_A10に対してRRCメッセージに含めて送信してもよい。また、AMF_A240が送信する登録拒絶メッセージは、UE_A10の要求を拒絶するメッセージであれば、これに限らない。 Next, the step when the first condition judgment is false, that is, each step of the procedure (B) in this procedure will be described. The AMF_A240 starts the procedure of (B) in this procedure by transmitting a Registration Reject message to the UE_A10 via the NR node_A122 (S912). Here, the registration refusal message may be transmitted as a response message to the registration request message. Further, the registration rejection message is a NAS message transmitted/received on the N1 interface.For example, AMF_A240 transmits it to the NR node_A122 as a control message of the N2 interface, and the NR node_A122 that receives this message is an RRC message to the UE_A10. May be included and transmitted. The registration refusal message transmitted by AMF_A240 is not limited to this as long as it is a message that rejects the request of UE_A10.
 尚、本手続き中の(B)の手続きは、本手続き中の(A)の手続きを中止した場合に開始される場合もある。(A)の手続きにおいて、第4の条件判別が真の場合、AMF_A240は、登録拒絶メッセージに、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージ等の拒絶を意味するSMメッセージを含めて送信してもよいし、拒絶を意味するSMメッセージを含めることで、SMのための手続きが拒絶されたことを示してもよい。その場合、UE_A10は、さらに、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージ等の拒絶を意味するSMメッセージを受信してもよいし、SMのための手続きが拒絶されたことを認識してもよい。 Note that the procedure (B) in this procedure may be started when the procedure (A) in this procedure is stopped. In the procedure of (A), if the fourth condition determination is true, the AMF_A240 may send a registration rejection message including an SM message indicating rejection such as a PDU session establishment rejection message, or may reject the rejection. The inclusion of the implied SM message may indicate that the procedure for SM has been rejected. In that case, the UE_A 10 may further receive an SM message indicating rejection such as a PDU session establishment rejection message, or may recognize that the procedure for SM has been rejected.
 ここで、AMF_A240は、登録拒絶メッセージに、第21から29の識別情報、第72の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報を含めてもよいし、これらの識別情報を含めることで、UE_A10の要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。尚、これらの識別情報の2以上の識別情報は、1以上の識別情報として構成されてもよい。 Here, AMF_A240, the registration rejection message, the identification information of the 21st to 29th, may include one or more identification information of the 72nd identification information, by including these identification information, the request of UE_A10 May be rejected. Two or more pieces of identification information of these pieces of identification information may be configured as one or more pieces of identification information.
 さらに、AMF_A240は、第21から29の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報を登録拒絶メッセージに含めて送信することで、RQoSをネットワークがサポートしないことを示してもよいし、RQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。 Further, the AMF_A240 may indicate that the network does not support RQoS by transmitting one or more pieces of identification information out of the 21st to 29th identification information included in the registration refusal message, or RQoS can be used. It may indicate that the request to transition to the state has been rejected.
 より詳細には、AMF_A240は、第21の識別情報、及び/又は第22の識別情報、及び/又は第23の識別情報、及び/又は第27の識別情報、及び/又は第28の識別情報を登録拒絶メッセージに含めて送信することで、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートしないことを示してもよいし、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。この場合において、AMF_A240は、第24の識別情報、及び/又は第29の識別情報を登録拒絶メッセージに含めずに送信することで、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートすることを示してもよいし、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が受諾されたことを示してもよい。 More specifically, AMF_A240 is the 21st identification information, and/or the 22nd identification information, and/or the 23rd identification information, and/or the 27th identification information, and/or the 28th identification information. By including it in the registration refusal message, it may indicate that the network does not support RQoS controlled via Control Plane, or transit to a state where RQoS controlled via Control Plane can be used. It may indicate that the request was rejected. In this case, the AMF_A240 sends the 24th identification information and/or the 29th identification information without including it in the registration refusal message so that the network supports RQoS controlled via the User Plane. It may be shown, or it may be shown that the request to transit to the state in which the RQoS controlled through the User Plane can be used is accepted.
 さらに、AMF_A240は、第21の識別情報、及び/又は第22の識別情報、及び/又は第24の識別情報、及び/又は第27の識別情報、及び/又は第29の識別情報を登録拒絶メッセージに含めて送信することで、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートしないことを示してもよいし、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。この場合において、AMF_A240は、第23の識別情報、及び/又は第28の識別情報を含めずに送信することで、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートすることを示してもよいし、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が受諾されたことを示してもよい。 Further, AMF_A240, the 21st identification information, and / or 22nd identification information, and / or 24th identification information, and / or 27th identification information, and / or 29th identification information registration refusal message. , It may indicate that the network does not support RQoS controlled via User Plane, or a request to transition to a state where RQoS controlled via User Plane can be used is rejected. You may indicate that it was done. In this case, AMF_A240 may indicate that the network supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane by transmitting without including the 23rd identification information and/or the 28th identification information. However, it may indicate that the request to transit to the state in which the RQoS controlled through the Control Plane can be used has been accepted.
 さらに、AMF_A240は、第21の識別情報を送信すること、及び/又は第22から24の識別情報、第27から29の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報と第25の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、AMF_A240が受信した第4の識別情報、及び/又は第25の識別情報で識別されるDNに対して確立されるPDUセッションに対して、RQoSをネットワークがサポートしないことを示してもよいし、RQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。 Further, the AMF_A240 transmits the 21st identification information, and/or associates the 22nd to 24th identification information and the 27th to 29th identification information with one or more identification information and the 25th identification information. Indicates that the network does not support RQoS for the PDU session established for the DN identified by the fourth identification information and/or the 25th identification information received by AMF_A240. It may indicate that the request for transitioning to the RQoS enabled state has been rejected.
 さらに、AMF_A240は、第21の識別情報を送信すること、及び/又は第22から24の識別情報、第27から29の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報と第26の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、AMF_A240が受信した第5の識別情報、及び/又は第26の識別情報で識別されるPDUセッションに対して、RQoSをネットワークがサポートしないことを示してもよいし、RQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。 Further, the AMF_A240 transmits the 21st identification information, and/or associates the 26th identification information with one or more identification information of the 22nd to 24th identification information and the 27th to 29th identification information. By transmitting, by the fifth identification information received by AMF_A240, and / or for the PDU session identified by the 26th identification information, may indicate that the network does not support RQoS, RQoS is It may indicate that the request to transition to the usable state has been rejected.
 さらに、AMF_A240は、第21から29の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報を登録拒絶メッセージに含めて送信することで、UE_A10が現在属しているレジストレーションエリア(Registration Area: RA)、及び/又はトラッキングエリア(Tracking Area: TA)に対して、RQoSをネットワークがサポートしないことを示してもよいし、RQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。 Further, AMF_A240, by including one or more pieces of identification information among the 21st to 29th pieces of identification information in the registration refusal message, UE_A10 is currently in a registration area (Registration Area: RA), and/or For the tracking area (Tracking Area: TA), it may be indicated that the network does not support RQoS, or that the request to transit to a state in which RQoS can be used is rejected.
 さらに、AMF_A240は、第21から29の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報を登録拒絶メッセージに含めて送信することで、UE_A10が現在接続しているアクセスネットワークに対して、RQoSをネットワークがサポートしないことを示してもよいし、RQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。 Further, AMF_A240, by including one or more pieces of identification information among the 21st to 29th pieces of identification information in the registration refusal message, and transmitting the access network to which UE_A10 is currently connected, the network does not support RQoS. May be indicated, or that the request to transit to the state in which RQoS is available may be rejected.
 さらに、AMF_A240は、第21から29の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報を登録拒絶メッセージに含めて送信することで、UE主導で制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートしないことを示してもよいし、UE主導で制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。 Furthermore, AMF_A240 may indicate that the network does not support RQoS controlled by UE by transmitting one or more pieces of identification information among the 21st to 29th pieces of identification information included in the registration rejection message. , It may indicate that the request to transit to the state in which UE-controlled RQoS is enabled is rejected.
 さらに、AMF_A240は、第21から29の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報を登録拒絶メッセージに含めて送信することで、ネットワーク主導で制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートしないことを示してもよいし、ネットワーク主導で制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。 Furthermore, the AMF_A240 may indicate that the network does not support RQoS controlled by the network by transmitting one or more pieces of identification information included in the 21st to 29th identification information in the registration refusal message. , It may indicate that the request to transit to a network-initiated controlled RQoS enabled state is rejected.
 また、UE_A10は、第21の識別情報を送信することにより、あるいは、第22の識別情報を送信することにより、あるいは、第23の識別情報及び第24の識別情報を送信することにより、あるいは、第27の識別情報を送信することにより、あるいは、第28の識別情報及び第29の識別情報を送信することにより、あるいは、これらの識別情報の2以上の識別情報が1以上の識別情報として構成されている場合にはそれらのうちの1以上の識別情報を送信することにより、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートせず、かつ、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートしないことを示してもよいし、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶され、かつ、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。 Also, UE_A10, by transmitting the 21st identification information, or, by transmitting the 22nd identification information, or by transmitting the 23rd identification information and the 24th identification information, or, By transmitting the 27th identification information, or by transmitting the 28th identification information and the 29th identification information, or, two or more identification information of these identification information is configured as one or more identification information If more than one of them is transmitted, the network does not support RQoS controlled via Control Plane, and the network does not support RQoS controlled via User Plane. May not be supported, or the request to transit to the state where RQoS controlled via Control Plane can be used is rejected, and the state where RQoS controlled via User Plane becomes available It may indicate that the request to transition is rejected.
 さらに、AMF_A240は、第72の識別情報、及び/又は第25の識別情報、及び/又は第26の識別情報を登録拒絶メッセージに含めて送信することで、ネットワークスライスに属したPDUセッションの確立の要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよいし、PDUセッションが属することが許可されなかったネットワークスライスを示してもよいし、PDUセッションが属することが拒絶されたネットワークスライスを示してもよい。 Furthermore, AMF_A240, by including the 72nd identification information, and/or the 25th identification information, and/or the 26th identification information in the registration refusal message, thereby establishing the PDU session belonging to the network slice. It may indicate that the request was rejected, the network slice that the PDU session was not allowed to belong to, or the network slice that the PDU session was denied to belong to.
 より詳細には、AMF_A240は、第72の識別情報と第25の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、第25の識別情報で識別されるDNに対して確立されるPDUセッションにおいて、ネットワークスライスに属したPDUセッションの確立の要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよいし、PDUセッションを属することが許可されていないネットワークスライスを示してもよい。 More specifically, the AMF_A240 transmits the 72nd identification information and the 25th identification information in association with each other, in the PDU session established for the DN identified by the 25th identification information, in the network. It may indicate that the request to establish the PDU session belonging to the slice has been rejected, or it may indicate a network slice that is not allowed to belong to the PDU session.
 さらに、AMF_A240は、第61の識別情報と第26の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、第26の識別情報で識別されるPDUセッションにおいて、ネットワークスライスに属したPDUセッションの確立の要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよいし、PDUセッションを属することが許可されていないネットワークスライスを示してもよい。 Further, the AMF_A240 sends the 61st identification information and the 26th identification information in association with each other, thereby requesting the establishment of the PDU session belonging to the network slice in the PDU session identified by the 26th identification information. May be rejected, or it may indicate a network slice that is not allowed to belong to the PDU session.
 さらに、AMF_A240は、第72の識別情報を登録拒絶メッセージに含めて送信することで、UE_A10が現在属しているレジストレーションエリア、及び/又は、トラッキングエリアにおいて、ネットワークスライスに属したPDUセッションの確立の要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよいし、PDUセッションを属することが許可されていないネットワークスライスを示してもよい。 Furthermore, AMF_A240, by including the 72nd identification information included in the registration rejection message, in the registration area to which UE_A10 currently belongs, and/or in the tracking area, the establishment of the PDU session belonging to the network slice is confirmed. It may indicate that the request has been denied, or it may indicate a network slice that is not allowed to belong to the PDU session.
 さらに、AMF_A240は、第72の識別情報を登録拒絶メッセージに含めて送信することで、UE_A10が現在接続しているアクセスネットワークにおいて、ネットワークスライスに属したPDUセッションの確立の要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよいし、PDUセッションを属することが許可されていないネットワークスライスを示してもよい。 Furthermore, AMF_A240, by including the 72nd identification information in the registration reject message, in the access network to which UE_A10 is currently connected, the request for establishment of the PDU session belonging to the network slice is rejected. It may indicate a network slice that is not permitted to belong to the PDU session.
 さらに、AMF_A240は、第72の識別情報を登録拒絶メッセージに含めて送信することで、第1のタイマーの値を示してもよいし、本手続きの完了後に、本手続きと同じ手続きを再び実施すべきか否かを示してもよい。 Furthermore, the AMF_A240 may indicate the value of the first timer by including the 72nd identification information in the registration refusal message, and after completing this procedure, the same procedure as this procedure should be performed again. You may indicate whether or not it is.
 さらに、AMF_A240は、第21から29の識別情報、及び/又は第72の識別情報のうち2以上の識別情報を組合せて送信することにより、上述した事柄を組合せた要求を行ってもよい。尚、AMF_A240が各識別情報を送信することで示す事柄はこれらに限らなくてもよい。 Furthermore, the AMF_A240 may make a request that combines the above-mentioned matters by transmitting a combination of two or more pieces of identification information of the 21st to 29th identification information and/or the 72nd identification information. Note that the fact that AMF_A240 transmits each piece of identification information is not limited to these.
 尚、AMF_A240は、第21から29の識別情報、第72の識別情報のうち、どの識別情報を登録拒絶メッセージに入れるかを、受信した識別情報、及び/又は、ネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー等のポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態に基づいて決定してもよい。 Incidentally, AMF_A240 is the identification information received from the 21st to 29th identification information and the 72nd identification information, which identification information is to be included in the registration refusal message, and/or the capability information of the network, and/or It may be determined based on a policy such as an operator policy and/or the state of the network.
 例えば、第21の識別情報は、ネットワークがRQoSをサポートしていない場合、及び/又は第1から8の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報を受信した場合に送信される情報であってもよい。さらに、第22の識別情報、及び/又は第27の識別情報は、ネットワークがRQoSをサポートしていない場合、及び/又は第1から3の識別情報、及び/又は第6から8の識別情報を受信した場合に送信される情報であってもよい。さらに、第23の識別情報、及び/又は第28の識別情報は、ネットワークがControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートしている場合、及び/又は第1から3の識別情報、及び/又は第6から8の識別情報を受信した場合に送信される情報であってもよい。さらに、第24の識別情報、及び/又は第29の識別情報は、ネットワークがUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートしている場合、及び/又は第1から3の識別情報、及び/又は第6から8の識別情報を受信した場合に送信される情報であってもよい。 For example, the 21st identification information may be information transmitted when the network does not support RQoS and/or when one or more identification information items among the identification information items 1 to 8 are received. .. Furthermore, the 22nd identification information, and / or 27th identification information, if the network does not support RQoS, and / or 1 to 3 identification information, and / or 6 to 8 identification information It may be information transmitted when received. Furthermore, the 23rd identification information, and / or 28th identification information, if the network supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane, and / or 1 to 3 identification information, and / or It may be information transmitted when the sixth to eighth identification information is received. Furthermore, the 24th identification information, and/or the 29th identification information, when the network supports RQoS controlled via User Plane, and/or the first to third identification information, and/or It may be information transmitted when the sixth to eighth identification information is received.
 さらに、第25の識別情報は、第4の識別情報が示すDNNと同じDNNを示す情報であってよい。さらに、第26の識別情報は、第5の識別情報が示すPDUセッションIDと同じPDUセッションIDを示す情報であってよい。さらに、第72の識別情報は、第71の識別情報を受信した場合、及び/又は第71の識別情報が示すネットワークスライスがネットワークによって許可されていない場合に送信される情報であってよい。尚、どの識別情報を登録拒絶メッセージに入れるかのAMF_A240による決定はこれに限らない。 Furthermore, the 25th identification information may be information indicating the same DNN as the DNN indicated by the fourth identification information. Furthermore, the 26th identification information may be information indicating the same PDU session ID as the PDU session ID indicated by the fifth identification information. Further, the 72nd identification information may be information transmitted when the 71st identification information is received and/or when the network slice indicated by the 71st identification information is not permitted by the network. The determination by AMF_A240 which identification information is included in the registration refusal message is not limited to this.
 UE_A10は、登録拒絶メッセージを受信する。UE_A10は、登録拒絶メッセージの受信に基づいて、第2の処理を実施する(S914)。また、UE_A10は、第2の処理を本手続きの完了に基づいて実施してもよい。 UE_A10 receives the registration refusal message. UE_A10 performs the second process based on the reception of the registration refusal message (S914). Further, the UE_A10 may perform the second process based on the completion of this procedure.
 ここで、第2の処理は、UE_A10が、AMF_A240によって示された事柄を認識する処理であってよい。さらに、第2の処理は、UE_A10が、受信した識別情報をコンテキストとして記憶する処理であってもよいし、受信した識別情報を上位層、及び/又は下位層に転送する処理であってもよい。さらに、第2の処理は、UE_A10が、本手続きの要求が拒絶されたことを認識する処理であってもよい。 Here, the second process may be a process in which UE_A10 recognizes the matter indicated by AMF_A240. Furthermore, the second process may be a process in which the UE_A10 stores the received identification information as a context, or may be a process of transferring the received identification information to an upper layer and/or a lower layer. .. Further, the second process may be a process in which the UE_A10 recognizes that the request for this procedure is rejected.
 さらに、UE_A10が第21から29の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報を受信した場合、第2の処理は、UE_A10が、RQoS有効化手続きが実行可能ではない状態に遷移する処理、又はRQoSを適用しない状態を維持することであってもよい。 Furthermore, if UE_A10 receives one or more pieces of identification information from the 21st to 29th identification information, the second process is UE_A10, a process of transitioning to a state in which the RQoS enabling procedure is not executable, or RQoS. It may be to maintain the non-application state.
 より詳細には、UE_A10が第22の識別情報、及び/又は第23の識別情報、及び/又は第27の識別情報、及び/又は第28の識別情報を受信した場合、第2の処理は、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoS有効化手続きが実行可能ではない状態に遷移する処理であってもよい。さらに、UE_A10が第22の識別情報、及び/又は第24の識別情報、及び/又は第27の識別情報、及び/又は第29の識別情報を受信した場合、第2の処理は、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoS有効化手続きが実行可能ではない状態に遷移する処理であってもよい。 More specifically, if the UE_A10 receives the 22nd identification information, and/or the 23rd identification information, and/or the 27th identification information, and/or the 28th identification information, the second process, It may be a process of transiting to a state in which the RQoS activation procedure controlled via the Control Plane is not executable. Furthermore, if the UE_A10 receives the 22nd identification information, and/or the 24th identification information, and/or the 27th identification information, and/or the 29th identification information, the second process is the UserPlane. The processing may be a process of transiting to a state in which the RQoS enabling procedure controlled via the non-executable state.
 さらに、UE_A10が第72の識別情報を受信した場合、第2の処理は、UE_A10が、第72の識別情報が示す値を第1のタイマー値と設定する処理であってもよいし、タイマー値を設定した第1のタイマーを開始する処理であってもよい。さらに、UE_A10が第72の識別情報を受信した場合、第2の処理は、第1から11の挙動うち1以上の挙動を実行する処理であってもよい。 Furthermore, if the UE_A10 receives the 72nd identification information, the second process, UE_A10 may be a process of setting the value indicated by the 72nd identification information as the first timer value, the timer value. It may be a process of starting the first timer having set. Furthermore, when the UE_A10 receives the 72nd identification information, the second process may be a process of executing one or more of the first to eleventh behaviors.
 さらに、第2の処理は、UE_A10が、一定期間後に再び本手続きを開始する処理であってもよいUE_A10の要求が限定された状態へ遷移する処理であってもよい。尚、第2の処理はこれらの処理に限らなくてもよい。 Further, the second process may be a process in which the UE_A10 may start the procedure again after a certain period of time, and a process in which the request of the UE_A10 transits to a limited state. The second process is not limited to these processes.
 さらに、UE_A10は、登録拒絶メッセージを受信することにより、あるいは、登録受諾メッセージを受信しないことにより、UE_A10の要求が拒絶されたことを認識してもよい。各装置は、登録拒絶メッセージの送受信に基づき、本手続き中の(B)の手続きを完了する。 Further, UE_A10 may recognize that the request of UE_A10 is rejected by receiving the registration refusal message or by not receiving the registration acceptance message. Each device completes the procedure (B) in this procedure based on the transmission and reception of the registration refusal message.
 各装置は、本手続き中の(A)又は(B)の手続きの完了に基づいて、本手続き(登録手続き)を完了する。尚、各装置は、本手続き中の(A)の手続きの完了に基づいて、UE_A10がネットワークに登録された状態(RM_REGISTERED state)に遷移してもよいし、本手続き中の(B)の手続きの完了に基づいて、UE_A10がネットワークに登録されていない状態(RM_DEREGISTERED state)を維持してもよい。また、各装置の各状態への遷移は、本手続きの完了に基づいて行われてもよく、PDUセッションの確立に基づいて行われてもよい。 Each device completes this procedure (registration procedure) based on the completion of procedure (A) or (B) in this procedure. Each device may transition to the state (RM_REGISTERED state) in which UE_A10 is registered in the network based on the completion of the procedure (A) during this procedure, or the procedure (B) during this procedure. The UE_A10 may maintain the state (RM_DEREGISTERED state) in which the UE_A10 is not registered in the network based on the completion of the. Further, the transition of each device to each state may be performed based on the completion of this procedure or may be performed based on the establishment of the PDU session.
 さらに、各装置は、本手続きの完了に基づいて、本手続きで送受信した識別情報に基づいた処理を実施してもよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、本手続きの完了に基づいて、第1の処理を実施してもよいし、第2の処理を実施してもよい。 Furthermore, each device may perform processing based on the identification information transmitted and received in this procedure based on the completion of this procedure. In other words, the UE_A 10 may perform the first process or the second process based on the completion of this procedure.
 また、第1の条件判別は、登録要求メッセージに含まれる識別情報、及び/又は加入者情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシーに基づいて実行されてもよい。例えば、第1の条件判別は、UE_A10の要求をネットワークが許可する場合、真でよい。また、第1の条件判別は、UE_A10の要求をネットワークが許可しない場合、偽でよい。さらに、第1の条件判別は、UE_A10の登録先のネットワーク、及び/又はネットワーク内の装置が、UE_A10が要求する機能を、サポートしている場合は真でよく、サポートしていない場合は偽でよい。さらに、第1の条件判別は、ネットワークが、輻輳状態であると判断した場合は真であってよく、輻輳状態ではないと判断した場合は偽であってよい。尚、第1の条件判別の真偽が決まる条件は前述した条件に限らなくてもよい。 Also, the first condition determination may be executed based on the identification information and/or the subscriber information and/or the operator policy included in the registration request message. For example, the first condition determination may be true when the network permits the request of UE_A10. Further, the first condition determination may be false if the network does not permit the request of UE_A10. Further, the first condition determination, the network of the UE_A10 registration destination, and / or devices in the network, the function requested by UE_A10 may be true if it supports, false if it does not support. Good. Furthermore, the first condition determination may be true when the network is determined to be in a congestion state, and may be false when it is determined that the network is not in a congestion state. The condition that determines whether the first condition determination is true or false is not limited to the condition described above.
 また、第4の条件判別は、AMF_A240がSMを受信したか否かに基づいて実行されてよく、登録要求メッセージにSMメッセージが含まれているかに基づいて実行されてもよい。例えば、第4の条件判別は、AMF_A240がSMを受信した場合、及び/又は登録要求メッセージにSMメッセージが含まれていた場合は真であってよく、AMF_A240がSMを受信しなかった場合、及び/又は登録要求メッセージにSMメッセージが含まれていなかった場合は偽であってよい。尚、第4の条件判別の真偽が決まる条件は前述した条件に限らなくてもよい。 Also, the fourth condition determination may be executed based on whether the AMF_A240 has received the SM, or may be executed based on whether the registration request message includes the SM message. For example, the fourth condition determination may be true if the AMF_A240 receives the SM and/or the SM message is included in the registration request message, if the AMF_A240 does not receive the SM, and / Or it may be false if the SM message was not included in the registration request message. The condition that determines whether the fourth condition determination is true or false is not limited to the condition described above.
 [1.3.2.PDUセッション確立手続きの概要]
 次に、DN_A5に対するPDUセッションを確立するために行うPDUセッション確立手続きの概要について説明する。以下、PDUセッション確立手続きは、本手続きとも称する。本手続きは、各装置がPDUセッションを確立する為の手続きである。尚、各装置は、本手続きを、登録手続きを完了した状態で実行してもよいし、登録手続きの中で実行してもよい。また、各装置は、登録状態で本手続きを開始してもよいし、登録手続き後の任意のタイミングで本手続きを開始してもよい。また、各装置は、PDUセッション確立手続きの完了に基づいて、PDUセッションを確立してもよい。さらに、各装置は、本手続きを複数回実行することで、複数のPDUセッションを確立してもよい。
[1.3.2. Overview of PDU session establishment procedure]
Next, an outline of a PDU session establishment procedure performed to establish a PDU session for DN_A5 will be described. Hereinafter, the PDU session establishment procedure is also referred to as this procedure. This procedure is a procedure for each device to establish a PDU session. It should be noted that each device may execute this procedure in a state where the registration procedure is completed, or may be executed during the registration procedure. Further, each device may start this procedure in the registered state, or may start this procedure at any timing after the registration procedure. Further, each device may establish a PDU session based on the completion of the PDU session establishment procedure. Furthermore, each device may establish a plurality of PDU sessions by executing this procedure a plurality of times.
 [1.3.2.1.PDUセッション確立手続き例]
 図10を用いて、PDUセッション確立手続きを実行する手順の例を説明する。以下、本手続きの各ステップについて説明する。まず、UE_A10は、NR node_A122とAMF_A240とを介して、SMF_A230にPDUセッション確立要求(PDU Session Establishment Request)メッセージを送信することにより(S1000) (S1002) (S1004)、PDUセッション確立手続きを開始する。
[1.3.2.1. PDU session establishment procedure example]
An example of a procedure for executing the PDU session establishment procedure will be described with reference to FIG. Each step of this procedure will be described below. First, UE_A10 starts a PDU session establishment procedure by transmitting a PDU Session Establishment Request message (PDU Session Establishment Request) to SMF_A230 via NR node_A122 and AMF_A240 (S1000) (S1002) (S1004).
 具体的には、UE_A10は、N1インタフェースを用いて、NR node_A122を介して、AMF_A240に、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信する(S1000)。AMF_A240は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージを受信すると、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージのルーティング先のNFとしてSMF_A230を選択し(S1002)、N11インタフェースを用いて、選択したSMF_A230に、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信又は転送する(S1004)。ここで、AMF_A240は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含まれる情報に基づき、ルーティング先のSMF_A230を選択してもよい。より詳細には、AMF_A240は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージの受信に基づいて取得した各識別情報、及び/又は加入者情報、及び/又はネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態、及び/又はAMF_A240が既に保持しているコンテキストに基づいて、ルーティング先のSMF_A230を選択してもよい。 Specifically, UE_A10 transmits a PDU session establishment request message to AMF_A240 via NR node_A122 using the N1 interface (S1000). Upon receiving the PDU session establishment request message, the AMF_A240 selects SMF_A230 as the NF of the routing destination of the PDU session establishment request message (S1002), and transmits the PDU session establishment request message to the selected SMF_A230 using the N11 interface, or Transfer (S1004). Here, the AMF_A240 may select the routing destination SMF_A230 based on the information included in the PDU session establishment request message. More specifically, AMF_A240 is each identification information acquired based on the reception of the PDU session establishment request message, and / or subscriber information, and / or network capability information, and / or operator policy, and / or network The routing destination SMF_A 230 may be selected based on the state and/or the context that the AMF_A 240 already holds.
 尚、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージは、NASメッセージであってよい。また、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージは、PDUセッションの確立を要求するメッセージであればよく、これに限らない。 Note that the PDU session establishment request message may be a NAS message. Further, the PDU session establishment request message is not limited to this as long as it is a message requesting establishment of a PDU session.
 ここで、UE_A10は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージに、第1から8の識別情報、第61の識別情報、第71の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報を含めてもよいし、これらの識別情報を含めることで、UE_A10の要求を示してもよい。尚、これらの識別情報の2以上の識別情報は、1以上の識別情報として構成されてもよい。 Here, UE_A10, the PDU session establishment request message, the identification information of the first to eighth, 61st identification information, may include one or more identification information of the 71st identification information, these identification information May be included to indicate the request of UE_A10. Two or more pieces of identification information of these pieces of identification information may be configured as one or more pieces of identification information.
 さらに、UE_A10は、第1から8の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報をPDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含めて送信することで、RQoSをUE_A10がサポートすることを示してもよいし、RQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移することを要求してもよい。 Furthermore, UE_A10 may indicate that R_QoS is supported by UE_A10 by including one or more pieces of identification information among the first to eighth pieces of identification information in the PDU session establishment request message and used by RQoS. It may be required to transition to a possible state.
 さらに、UE_A10は、第1から8の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報をPDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含めて送信することで、RQoSをUE_A10がサポートしないことを示してもよいし、RQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移することを要求しないことを示してもよい。 Further, UE_A10 may indicate that UE_A10 does not support RQoS by transmitting by including one or more pieces of identification information in the PDU session establishment request message among the first to eighth pieces of identification information, and used by RQoS. It may indicate that the transition to a possible state is not required.
 より詳細には、UE_A10は、第1の識別情報、及び/又は第2の識別情報、及び/又は第6の識別情報、及び/又は第7の識別情報をPDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含めて送信することで、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをUE_A10がサポートすることを示してもよいし、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移することを要求してもよい。この場合において、UE_A10は、第3の識別情報、及び/又は第8の識別情報をPDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含めずに送信することで、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをUE_A10がサポートしないことを示してもよいし、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移することを要求しないことを示してもよい。 More specifically, the UE_A10 transmits the first identification information, and/or the second identification information, and/or the sixth identification information, and/or the seventh identification information included in the PDU session establishment request message. By doing so, it may indicate that UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane, or may request that RQoS controlled via Control Plane transits to a usable state. .. In this case, UE_A10 does not support RQoS controlled via User Plane by transmitting without including the third identification information and/or the eighth identification information in the PDU session establishment request message. This may be indicated, or it may be indicated that RQoS controlled via the User Plane is not required to transit to a usable state.
 また、UE_A10は、第1の識別情報、及び/又は第2の識別情報、及び/又は第6の識別情報、及び/又は第7の識別情報をPDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含めて送信することで、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをUE_A10がサポートしないことを示してもよいし、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移することを要求しないことを示してもよい。 Also, UE_A10, by including the first identification information, and / or second identification information, and / or sixth identification information, and / or seventh identification information included in the PDU session establishment request message. , It may indicate that UE_A10 does not support RQoS controlled via Control Plane, or may indicate that RQoS controlled via Control Plane does not require transition to an available state. ..
 さらに、UE_A10は、第1の識別情報、及び/又は第3の識別情報、及び/又は第6の識別情報、及び/又は第8の識別情報をPDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含めて送信することで、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをUE_A10がサポートすることを示してもよいし、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移することを要求してもよい。この場合において、UE_A10は、第2の識別情報、及び/又は第7の識別情報をPDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含めずに送信することで、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをUE_A10がサポートしないことを示してもよいし、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移することを要求しないことを示してもよい。 Furthermore, UE_A10, by including the first identification information, and / or third identification information, and / or sixth identification information, and / or eighth identification information in the PDU session establishment request message by transmitting. , UE_A10 may support RQoS controlled via User Plane, or may request that RQoS controlled via User Plane transits to a usable state. In this case, UE_A10 does not support RQoS controlled via Control Plane by transmitting the second identification information and/or the seventh identification information without including it in the PDU session establishment request message. This may be indicated, or it may be indicated that RQoS controlled via the Control Plane does not require transition to an available state.
 また、UE_A10は、第1の識別情報、及び/又は第3の識別情報、及び/又は第6の識別情報、及び/又は第8の識別情報をPDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含めて送信することで、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをUE_A10がサポートしないことを示してもよいし、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移することを要求しないことを示してもよい。 In addition, UE_A10, by including the first identification information, and / or third identification information, and / or sixth identification information, and / or eighth identification information in the PDU session establishment request message by transmitting. , It may indicate that UE_A10 does not support RQoS controlled via User Plane, or it may indicate that RQoS controlled via User Plane does not require transition to an available state. ..
 さらに、UE_A10は、第1から3の識別情報、第6から8の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報と第4の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、第4の識別情報で識別されるDNに対して確立されるPDUセッションに対して、RQoSをUE_A10がサポートするか否かを示してもよいし、RQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移することを要求するか否かを示してもよい。 Further, UE_A10, the first to the third identification information, by transmitting one or more identification information and fourth identification information among the sixth to eighth identification information in association with each other, identified by the fourth identification information. For the PDU session established for the DN to be established, it may be indicated whether UE_A10 supports RQoS, or whether it is required to make a transition to an available state for RQoS. Good.
 さらに、UE_A10は、第1から3の識別情報、第6から8の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報と第5の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、第5の識別情報で識別されるPDUセッションに対して、RQoSをUE_A10がサポートするか否かを示してもよいし、RQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移することを要求するか否かを示してもよい。 Further, UE_A10, the first to third identification information, by transmitting one or more identification information and fifth identification information among the sixth to eighth identification information in association with each other, identified by the fifth identification information. For the PDU session to be performed, it may be indicated whether the UE_A 10 supports RQoS, or whether it is required to make a transition to an available state for RQoS.
 さらに、UE_A10は、第1から8の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報をPDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含めて送信することで、UE主導で制御されるRQoSをUE_A10がサポートするか否かを示してもよいし、UE主導で制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移することを要求するか否かを示してもよい。 Further, UE_A10, by including one or more pieces of identification information among the first to eighth pieces of identification information in the PDU session establishment request message, and indicating whether UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled by UE. Alternatively, it may indicate whether or not to request the RQoS controlled by UE to transit to a usable state.
 さらに、UE_A10は、第1から8の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報をPDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含めて送信することで、ネットワーク主導で制御されるRQoSをUE_A10がサポートするか否かを示してもよいし、ネットワーク主導で制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移することを要求するか否かを示してもよい。 Further, UE_A10, by transmitting one or more pieces of identification information among the first to eighth pieces of identification information included in the PDU session establishment request message, indicating whether or not UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled by network initiative. Alternatively, it may indicate whether or not the network-controlled RQoS requires transition to a usable state.
 また、UE_A10は、第1の識別情報を送信することにより、あるいは、第2の識別情報及び第3の識別情報を送信することにより、あるいは、第6の識別情報を送信することにより、あるいは、第7の識別情報及び第8の識別情報を送信することにより、あるいは、これらの識別情報の2以上の識別情報が1以上の識別情報の識別情報として構成されている場合にはそれらのうちの1以上の識別情報を送信することにより、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをUE_A10がサポートし、かつ、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをUE_A10がサポートすることを示してもよいし、あるいは、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移し、かつ、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移することを要求してもよい。 Also, UE_A10, by transmitting the first identification information, or by transmitting the second identification information and the third identification information, or by transmitting the sixth identification information, or, By transmitting the seventh identification information and the eighth identification information, or, if two or more identification information of these identification information is configured as the identification information of one or more identification information, among them By transmitting one or more pieces of identification information, UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane, and may indicate that UE_A10 supports RQoS controlled via User Plane, Alternatively, it may be requested to transit to a state where RQoS controlled via the User Plane can be used and to transit to a state where RQoS controlled via the User Plane can be used.
 さらに、UE_A10は、第61の識別情報、及び/又は第4の識別情報、及び/又は第5の識別情報をPDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含めて送信することで、3GPPインターフェース(N6インターフェース等)を介したDNによるサービス認証/承認を要求してもよいし、本手続きにおいてPDUセッション確立認証承認手続きを実行することを要求してもよい。 Further, UE_A10, by including the 61st identification information, and / or fourth identification information, and / or fifth identification information included in the PDU session establishment request message, 3GPP interface (N6 interface and the like). You may request service authentication/authorization by DN via this, or you may request to perform the PDU session establishment authentication authorization procedure in this procedure.
 より詳細には、UE_A10は、第61の識別情報と第4の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、第4の識別情報で識別されるDNに対して確立されるPDUセッションにおいて、3GPPインタフェースを介したDN_A5によるサービス認証/承認を要求してもよいし、本手続きにおいてPDUセッション確立認証承認手続きを実行することを要求してもよい。 More specifically, UE_A10, by transmitting the 61st identification information and the fourth identification information in association with each other, in the PDU session established for the DN identified by the fourth identification information, 3GPP Service authentication/authorization by DN_A5 via the interface may be requested, or execution of the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure may be requested in this procedure.
 さらに、UE_A10は、第61の識別情報と第5の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、第5の識別情報で識別されるPDUセッションにおいて、3GPPインタフェースを介したDN_A5によるサービス認証/承認を要求してもよいし、本手続きにおいてPDUセッション確立認証承認手続きを実行することを要求してもよい。 Further, UE_A10, by transmitting the 61st identification information and the 5th identification information in association with each other, in the PDU session identified by the 5th identification information, service authentication/authorization by DN_A5 via the 3GPP interface. May be requested, or the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure may be requested to be executed in this procedure.
 さらに、UE_A10は、第71の識別情報、及び/又は第4の識別情報、及び/又は第5の識別情報をPDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含めて送信することで、ネットワークスライスに属したPDUセッションの確立を要求してもよいし、UE_A10が要求する、PDUセッションが属するネットワークスライスを示してもよいし、PDUセッションがこれから属する予定であるネットワークスライスを示してもよい。 Furthermore, UE_A10, by including the 71st identification information, and / or fourth identification information, and / or fifth identification information included in the PDU session establishment request message, the PDU session belonging to the network slice. The establishment may be requested, the network slice to which the PDU session belongs, which the UE_A10 requests, may be indicated, or the network slice to which the PDU session is due to belong may be indicated.
 より詳細には、UE_A10は、第71の識別情報と第4の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、第4の識別情報で識別されるDNに対して確立されるPDUセッションにおいて、ネットワークスライスに属したPDUセッションの確立を要求してもよいし、UE_A10が要求する、PDUセッションが属するネットワークスライスを示してもよいし、PDUセッションがこれから属する予定であるネットワークスライスを示してもよい。 More specifically, UE_A10, by transmitting the 71st identification information and the fourth identification information in association with each other, in the PDU session established for the DN identified by the fourth identification information, the network The establishment of a PDU session belonging to a slice may be requested, the network slice requested by UE_A10 to which the PDU session belongs may be indicated, or the network slice to which the PDU session is due to belong may be indicated.
 さらに、UE_A10は、第61の識別情報と第5の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、第5の識別情報で識別されるPDUセッションにおいて、ネットワークスライスに属したPDUセッションの確立を要求してもよいし、UE_A10が要求する、PDUセッションが属するネットワークスライスを示してもよいし、PDUセッションがこれから属する予定であるネットワークスライスを示してもよい。 Further, UE_A10, by transmitting the 61st identification information and the fifth identification information in association with each other, in the PDU session identified by the fifth identification information, request establishment of a PDU session belonging to the network slice. The UE_A10 may indicate the network slice to which the PDU session belongs, or the network slice to which the PDU session will belong.
 さらに、UE_A10は、第1から8の識別情報、第61の識別情報、第71の識別情報のうち2以上の識別情報を組合せて送信することにより、上述した事柄を組合せた要求を行ってもよい。尚、UE_A10が各識別情報を送信することで示す事柄はこれらに限らなくてもよい。 Further, UE_A10, the first to eighth identification information, the 61st identification information, by transmitting a combination of two or more identification information of the 71st identification information, even when making a request combining the above matters. Good. Note that the matter indicated by the UE_A10 transmitting each piece of identification information is not limited to these.
 尚、UE_A10は、第1から8の識別情報、第61の識別情報、第71の識別情報のうち、どの識別情報をPDUセッション確立要求メッセージに入れるかを、UE_A10の能力情報、及び/又はUEポリシー等のポリシー、及び/又はUE_A10のプリファレンス、及び/又はアプリケーション(上位層)に基づいて決定してもよい。尚、どの識別情報をPDUセッション確立要求メッセージに入れるかのUE_A10による決定はこれに限らない。 Incidentally, UE_A10, the identification information of the first to eight, the 61st identification information, of the 71st identification information, which identification information to put in the PDU session establishment request message, capability information of UE_A10, and / or UE It may be determined based on a policy such as a policy and/or a preference of UE_A10 and/or an application (upper layer). Note that the determination of which identification information is included in the PDU session establishment request message by the UE_A 10 is not limited to this.
 SMF_A230は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージを受信し、第3の条件判別を実行する。第3の条件判別は、SMF_A230が、UE_A10の要求を受諾するか否かを判断する為のものである。第3の条件判別において、SMF_A230は第3の条件判別が真であるか偽であるかを判定する。SMF_A230は、第3の条件判別が真の場合は本手続き中の(A)の手続きを開始し、第3の条件判別が偽の場合は本手続き中の(B)の手続きを開始する。尚、第3の条件判別が偽の場合のステップは後述する。 ㆍSMF_A230 receives the PDU session establishment request message and executes the third condition judgment. The third condition determination is for the SMF_A230 to determine whether to accept the request of the UE_A10. In the third condition determination, the SMF_A230 determines whether the third condition determination is true or false. The SMF_A230 starts the procedure (A) in this procedure when the third condition determination is true, and starts the procedure (B) in this procedure when the third condition determination is false. The steps when the third condition judgment is false will be described later.
 以下、第3の条件判別が真の場合のステップ、すなわち本手続き中の(A)の手続きの各ステップを説明する。 The following describes the steps when the third condition judgment is true, that is, each step of procedure (A) in this procedure.
 ここで、SMF_A230は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージに第61の識別情報を含むSM PDU DN Request Containerが含まれその第61の識別情報がローカルポリシー及び/又はユーザ加入者情報に準拠している場合は、PDUセッション確立認証承認手続きを開始する(S1005)。一方で、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージにSM PDU DN Request Containerが含まれない場合は、PDUセッション確立認証承認手続を省略する。尚、PDUセッション確立認証承認手続きの詳細は後述する。 Here, SMF_A230, if the PDU session establishment request message includes SM PDU DN Request Container that includes the 61st identification information, and the 61st identification information conforms to the local policy and/or user subscriber information. , PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure is started (S1005). On the other hand, when the SMPDUN Request Request Container is not included in the PDU session establishment request message, the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure is omitted. Details of the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure will be described later.
 次に、PDUセッション確立認証承認手続きを開始した(S1005)SMF_A230は、選択したUPF_A235にセッション確立要求(Session Establishment request)メッセージを送信し(S1006)、本手続き中の(A)の手続きを開始する。尚、SMF_A230は、PDUセッション確立認証承認手続きの完了に基づいて、本手続き中の(A)の手続きを開始せずに、本手続き中の(B)の手続きを開始してもよい。 Next, the SMF_A230 that started the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure (S1005) sends a session establishment request message to the selected UPF_A235 (S1006), and starts the procedure of (A) in this procedure. .. Note that the SMF_A 230 may start the procedure (B) in this procedure based on the completion of the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure, without starting the procedure (A) in this procedure.
 ここで、SMF_A230は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージの受信に基づいて取得した各識別情報、及び/又はネットワークの能力情報、及び/又は加入者情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態、及び/又はSMF_A230が既に保持しているコンテキストに基づいて、1以上のUPF_A235を選択してもよい。尚、複数のUPF_A235が選択された場合、SMF_A230は、各々のUPF_A235に対してセッション確立要求メッセージを送信してもよい。 Here, SMF_A230, each identification information acquired based on the reception of the PDU session establishment request message, and / or network capability information, and / or subscriber information, and / or operator policy, and / or network status, And/or one or more UPF_A 235 may be selected based on the context that SMF_A 230 already holds. When a plurality of UPF_A235 are selected, the SMF_A230 may send a session establishment request message to each UPF_A235.
 UPF_A235は、セッション確立要求メッセージを受信し、PDUセッションのためのコンテキストを作成する。さらに、UPF_A235は、セッション確立要求メッセージを受信、及び/又はPDUセッションのためのコンテキストの作成に基づいて、SMF_A230にセッション確立応答(Session Establishment response)メッセージを送信する(S1008)。さらに、SMF_A230は、セッション確立応答メッセージを受信する。尚、セッション確立要求メッセージ及びセッション確立応答メッセージは、N4インタフェース上で送受信される制御メッセージであってもよい。さらに、セッション確立応答メッセージは、セッション確立要求メッセージに対する応答メッセージであってよい。 UPF_A235 receives the session establishment request message and creates a context for the PDU session. Further, the UPF_A 235 receives the session establishment request message and/or transmits the session establishment response (Session Establishment response) message to the SMF_A 230 based on the creation of the context for the PDU session (S1008). Further, SMF_A230 receives the session establishment response message. The session establishment request message and the session establishment response message may be control messages transmitted and received on the N4 interface. Further, the session establishment response message may be a response message to the session establishment request message.
 さらに、SMF_A230は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージの受信、及び/又はUPF_A235の選択、及び/又はセッション確立応答メッセージの受信に基づいて、UE_A10に割り当てるアドレスのアドレス割り当てを行ってよい。尚、SMF_A230は、UE_A10に割り当てるアドレスのアドレス割り当てをPDUセッション確立手続き中で行ってもよいし、PDUセッション確立手続きの完了後に行ってもよい。 Further, the SMF_A230 may perform the address assignment of the address assigned to the UE_A10 based on the reception of the PDU session establishment request message and/or the selection of the UPF_A235 and/or the reception of the session establishment response message. The SMF_A 230 may perform the address assignment of the address assigned to the UE_A 10 during the PDU session establishment procedure or after the PDU session establishment procedure is completed.
 具体的には、SMF_A230は、DHCPv4を用いずにIPv4アドレスを割り当てる場合、PDUセッション確立手続き中に、アドレス割り当てを行ってもよいし、割り当てたアドレスをUE_A10に送信してもよい。さらに、SMF_A230は、DHCPv4又はDHCPv6又はSLAAC(Stateless Address Autoconfiguration)用いてIPv4アドレス、及び/又はIPv6アドレス、及び/又はIPv6プレフィックスを割り当てる場合、PDUセッション確立手続き後に、アドレス割り当てを行ってもよいし、割り当てたアドレスをUE_A10に送信してもよい。尚、SMF_A230が実施するアドレス割り当てはこれらに限らない。 Specifically, when allocating an IPv4 address without using DHCPv4, the SMF_A230 may perform address allocation during the PDU session establishment procedure or may send the allocated address to UE_A10. Furthermore, SMF_A230, when assigning an IPv4 address using DHCPv4 or DHCPv6 or SLAAC (Stateless Address Autoconfiguration), and/or an IPv6 address, and/or an IPv6 prefix, after the PDU session establishment procedure, the address may be assigned, The assigned address may be sent to UE_A10. The address allocation performed by SMF_A230 is not limited to these.
 さらに、SMF_A230は、UE_A10に割り当てるアドレスのアドレス割り当ての完了に基づいて、割り当てたアドレスをPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含めてUE_A10に送信してもよいし、PDUセッション確立手続きの完了後に、UE_A10に送信してもよい。 Further, SMF_A230 may include the assigned address in the PDU session establishment acceptance message and send it to UE_A10 based on the completion of the address assignment of the address to be assigned to UE_A10, or send it to UE_A10 after the completion of the PDU session establishment procedure. You may.
 SMF_A230は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージの受信、及び/又はUPF_A235の選択、及び/又はセッション確立応答メッセージの受信、及び/又はUE_A10に割り当てるアドレスのアドレス割り当ての完了に基づいて、AMF_A240を介してUE_A10にPDUセッション確立受諾(PDU session establishment accept)メッセージを送信する(S1010)。 The SMF_A230 receives the PDU session establishment request message, and/or selects the UPF_A235, and/or receives the session establishment response message, and/or based on the completion of the address assignment of the address assigned to the UE_A10, to the UE_A10 via the AMF_A240. Send a PDU session establishment acceptance message (S1010).
 具体的には、SMF_A230は、N11インタフェースを用いてAMF_A240にPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージを送信し、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージを受信したAMF_A240が、N1インタフェースを用いてUE_A10にPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージを送信する。 Specifically, the SMF_A230 sends a PDU session establishment acceptance message to the AMF_A240 using the N11 interface, and the AMF_A240 receiving the PDU session establishment acceptance message sends a PDU session establishment acceptance message to the UE_A10 using the N1 interface. ..
 尚、PDUセッションがPDNコネクションである場合、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージはPDN接続受諾(PDN connectivity accept)メッセージでよい。さらに、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージは、N11インタフェース、及びN1インタフェース上で送受信されるNASメッセージであってよい。また、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージは、これに限らず、PDUセッションの確立が受諾されたことを示すメッセージであればよい。 If the PDU session is a PDN connection, the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be a PDN connection acceptance (PDN connectivity accept) message. Further, the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be a NAS message transmitted/received on the N11 interface and the N1 interface. The PDU session establishment acceptance message is not limited to this, and may be a message indicating that the establishment of the PDU session has been accepted.
 ここで、SMF_A230は、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに、第11から19の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報を含めてもよいし、これらの識別情報を含めることで、UE_A10の要求が受諾されたことを示してもよい。尚、これらの識別情報の2以上の識別情報は、1以上の識別情報として構成されてもよい。 Here, SMF_A230, the PDU session establishment acceptance message may include one or more pieces of identification information from the 11th to 19th identification information, by including these pieces of identification information, the request of UE_A10 was accepted. May be indicated. Two or more pieces of identification information of these pieces of identification information may be configured as one or more pieces of identification information.
 さらに、SMF_A230は、第11から19の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報をPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含めて送信することで、RQoSをネットワークがサポートすることを示してもよいし、RQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が受諾されたこと示してもよい。 Further, the SMF_A230 may indicate that the network supports RQoS by transmitting one or more pieces of identification information among the 11th to 19th pieces of identification information included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message, and may be used by RQoS. It may indicate that the request to transition to a possible state has been accepted.
 より詳細には、SMF_A230は、第11の識別情報、及び/又は第12の識別情報、及び/又は第17の識別情報、及び/又は第18の識別情報をPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含めて送信することで、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートすることを示してもよいし、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が受諾されたことを示してもよい。この場合において、SMF_A230は、第13の識別情報、及び/又は第19の識別情報をPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含めずに送信することで、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートしないことを示してもよいし、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。 More specifically, the SMF_A230 transmits the 11th identification information, and/or the 12th identification information, and/or the 17th identification information, and/or the 18th identification information in the PDU session establishment acceptance message. By doing so, it may be indicated that the network supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane, or that the request to transition to the state where RQoS controlled via Control Plane can be used is accepted. May be shown. In this case, the SMF_A230 sends the 13th identification information and/or the 19th identification information without including it in the PDU session establishment acceptance message, so that the network does not support RQoS controlled via the User Plane. This may be indicated, or it may be indicated that the request for transitioning to the state in which RQoS controlled via the User Plane can be used is rejected.
 また、SMF_A230は、第11の識別情報、及び/又は第12の識別情報、及び/又は第17の識別情報、及び/又は第18の識別情報をPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含めて送信することで、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートしないことを示してもよいし、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。 Further, SMF_A230, by including the 11th identification information, and/or the 12th identification information, and/or the 17th identification information, and/or the 18th identification information in the PDU session establishment acceptance message. , It may indicate that the network does not support RQoS controlled via Control Plane, or it may indicate that the request to transition to the state where RQoS controlled via Control Plane can be used is rejected. Good.
 さらに、SMF_A230は、第11の識別情報、及び/又は第13の識別情報、及び/又は第17の識別情報、及び/又は第19の識別情報をPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含めて送信することで、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートすること示してもよいし、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が受諾されたことを示してもよい。この場合において、SMF_A230は、第12の識別情報、及び/又は第18の識別情報を登録受諾メッセージに含めずに送信することで、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートしないことを示してもよいし、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。 Further, SMF_A230, by including the 11th identification information, and/or the 13th identification information, and/or the 17th identification information, and/or the 19th identification information in the PDU session establishment acceptance message. , May indicate that the network supports RQoS controlled via User Plane, or may indicate that a request to transition to a state in which RQoS controlled via User Plane can be used has been accepted. .. In this case, the SMF_A230 transmits the 12th identification information and/or the 18th identification information without including it in the registration acceptance message, thereby confirming that the network does not support RQoS controlled via the Control Plane. It may be shown or it may be shown that the request to transit to the state in which RQoS controlled via the Control Plane can be used is rejected.
 また、SMF_A230は、第11の識別情報、及び/又は第13の識別情報、及び/又は第17の識別情報、及び/又は第19の識別情報をPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含めて送信することで、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートしないこと示してもよいし、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。 Further, SMF_A230, by including the 11th identification information, and/or the 13th identification information, and/or the 17th identification information, and/or the 19th identification information in the PDU session establishment acceptance message. , May indicate that the network does not support RQoS controlled via User Plane, or may indicate that the request to transition to the state where RQoS controlled via User Plane can be used is rejected. ..
 さらに、SMF_A230は、第11から13の識別情報、第17から19の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報と第14の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、第14の識別情報で識別されるDNに対して確立されるPDUセッションに対して、RQoSをネットワークがサポートするか否かを示してもよいし、RQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が受諾されたか否かを示してもよい。 Further, the SMF_A230 identifies the 14th identification information by transmitting the 11th to 13th identification information, the 1st or more identification information of the 17th to 19th identification information and the 14th identification information in association with each other. It may indicate whether the network supports RQoS for the PDU session established for the DN to be established, or whether the request to transition to the state where RQoS is available is accepted. Good.
 さらに、SMF_A230は、第11から13の識別情報、第17から19の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報と第15の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、第15の識別情報で識別されるPDUセッションに対して、RQoSをネットワークがサポートするか否かことを示してもよいし、RQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が受諾されたか否かを示してもよい。 Further, the SMF_A230 identifies the 15th identification information by transmitting the 11th to 13th identification information and the 15th identification information by correlating one or more identification information among the 17th to 19th identification information. For the PDU session to be performed, it may be indicated whether or not the network supports RQoS, or it may be indicated whether or not the request to transit to the state in which RQoS is available is accepted.
 さらに、SMF_A230は、第11から19の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報をPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含めて送信することで、UE主導で制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートするか否かを示してもよいし、UE主導で制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が受諾されたか否かを示してもよい。 Further, SMF_A230 indicates whether the network supports UE-controlled RQoS by transmitting one or more pieces of identification information among the 11th to 19th pieces of identification information included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message. Alternatively, it may indicate whether or not the request to make a transition to a state in which RQoS controlled by the UE is enabled is accepted.
 さらに、SMF_A230は、第11から19の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報をPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含めて送信することで、ネットワーク主導で制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートするか否かを示してもよいし、ネットワーク主導で制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が受諾されたか否かを示してもよい。 Further, the SMF_A230 indicates whether or not the network supports RQoS controlled by the network by transmitting one or more pieces of identification information among the 11th to 19th pieces of identification information included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message. Alternatively, it may indicate whether or not a request to transit to a state in which RQoS controlled by the network is enabled is accepted.
 さらに、SMF_A230は、第11から15の識別情報、第17から19の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報と第16の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、ユーザデータ通信に対して適用するRQoSの有効期間を示してもよいし、ユーザデータ通信に対するRQoSを有効化した後にRQoSが有効な期間を示してもよいし、ユーザデータ通信に対するRQoSを有効化した時に開始されるRQoSタイマーが満了するまでの期間を示してもよい。 Further, the SMF_A230 is applied to user data communication by associating and transmitting one or more pieces of identification information among the eleventh to fifteenth identification information and the seventeenth to nineteenth identification information and the sixteenth identification information. The RQoS valid period may be indicated, the RQoS effective period may be indicated after enabling RQoS for user data communication, or the RQoS timer started when RQoS is enabled for user data communication may be indicated. It may indicate the period until expiration.
 また、UE_A10は、第11の識別情報を送信することにより、あるいは、第12の識別情報及び第13の識別情報を送信することにより、あるいは、第17の識別情報を送信することにより、あるいは、第18の識別情報及び第19の識別情報を送信することにより、あるいは、これらの識別情報の2以上の識別情報が1以上の識別情報の識別情報として構成されている場合にはそれらのうちの1以上の識別情報を送信することにより、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートし、かつ、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートすることを示してもよいし、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が受諾され、かつ、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が受諾されたことを示してもよい。 Also, UE_A10, by transmitting the eleventh identification information, or by transmitting the twelfth identification information and thirteenth identification information, or by transmitting the seventeenth identification information, or, By transmitting the eighteenth identification information and the nineteenth identification information, or when two or more identification information items of these identification information items are configured as the identification information items of one or more identification information items, among them. By transmitting one or more pieces of identification information, it may be shown that the network supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane, and that the network supports RQoS controlled via User Plane, Indicates that the request to transition to the state where RQoS controlled via the Control Plane can be used has been accepted, and the request to transition to the state where RQoS controlled to be controlled via the User Plane has been accepted. Good.
 さらに、SMF_A230は、第11から19の識別情報のうち2以上の識別情報を組合せて送信することにより、上述した事柄を組合せた要求を行ってもよい。尚、SMF_A230が各識別情報を送信することで示す事柄はこれらに限らなくてもよい。 Furthermore, the SMF_A230 may make a request that combines the above-mentioned matters by transmitting a combination of two or more pieces of identification information among the 11th to 19th pieces of identification information. It should be noted that the matters indicated by the SMF_A 230 transmitting each piece of identification information are not limited to these.
 尚、SMF_A230は、第11から19の識別情報のうち、どの識別情報をPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに入れるかを、受信した識別情報、及び/又は、ネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー等のポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態に基づいて決定してもよい。 Incidentally, SMF_A230, the identification information received from the 11th to 19th identification information, which identification information to put in the PDU session establishment acceptance message, and/or the capability information of the network, and/or operator policy, etc. It may be determined based on the policy and/or the state of the network.
 例えば、第11の識別情報、及び/又は第17の識別情報は、ネットワークがRQoSをサポートしている場合、及び/又は第1から3の識別情報、及び/又は第6から8の識別情報を受信した場合に送信される情報であってもよい。さらに、第12の識別情報、及び/又は第18の識別情報は、ネットワークがControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートしている場合、及び/又は第1から3の識別情報、及び/又は第6から8の識別情報を受信した場合に送信される情報であってもよい。さらに、第13の識別情報、及び/又は第19の識別情報は、ネットワークがUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートしている場合、及び/又は第1から3の識別情報、及び/又は第6から8の識別情報を受信した場合に送信される情報であってもよい。 For example, the eleventh identification information, and/or the seventeenth identification information, if the network supports RQoS, and/or the first to third identification information, and/or the sixth to eighth identification information. It may be information transmitted when received. Furthermore, the twelfth identification information, and/or the eighteenth identification information, if the network supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane, and/or the first to third identification information, and/or It may be information transmitted when the sixth to eighth identification information is received. Furthermore, the thirteenth identification information, and/or the nineteenth identification information, if the network supports RQoS controlled via User Plane, and/or the first to third identification information, and/or It may be information transmitted when the sixth to eighth identification information is received.
 さらに、第14の識別情報は、第4の識別情報が示すDNNと同じDNNを示す情報であってもよいし、異なるDNNを示す情報であってもよい。さらに、第15の識別情報は、第5の識別情報が示すPDUセッションIDと同じPDUセッションIDを示す情報であってもよいし、異なるPDUセッションIDを示す情報であってもよい。尚、どの識別情報をPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに入れるかのSMF_A230による決定はこれに限らない。 Furthermore, the 14th identification information may be information indicating the same DNN as the DNN indicated by the fourth identification information, or may be information indicating a different DNN. Further, the fifteenth identification information may be information indicating the same PDU session ID as the PDU session ID indicated by the fifth identification information, or may be information indicating a different PDU session ID. Note that the determination by SMF_A230 which identification information is included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message is not limited to this.
 UE_A10は、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージを受信する。UE_A10は、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージを受信することで、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含まれる各種の識別情報の内容を認識する。 UE_A10 receives the PDU session establishment acceptance message. Upon receiving the PDU session establishment acceptance message, UE_A10 recognizes the contents of various identification information included in the PDU session establishment acceptance message.
 UE_A10は、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージの受信に基づいて、さらに、第3の処理を実施する(S1012)。尚、UE_A10は、第3の処理を、PDUセッション確立完了メッセージの送信に基づいて実施してもよいし、本手続きの完了に基づいて実施してもよい。 UE_A10 further executes the third processing based on the reception of the PDU session establishment acceptance message (S1012). Note that the UE_A 10 may perform the third process based on the transmission of the PDU session establishment completion message or may be performed based on the completion of this procedure.
 ここで、第3の処理は、UE_A10が、SMF_A230によって示された事柄を認識する処理であってよい。さらに、第3の処理は、UE_A10が、受信した識別情報をコンテキストとして記憶する処理であってもよいし、受信した識別情報を上位層、及び/又は下位層に転送する処理であってもよい。さらに、第3の処理は、UE_A10が、本手続きの要求が受諾されたことを認識する処理であってもよい。 Here, the third process may be a process in which the UE_A10 recognizes the matter indicated by the SMF_A230. Furthermore, the third process may be a process in which the UE_A10 stores the received identification information as a context, or may be a process of transferring the received identification information to an upper layer and/or a lower layer. .. Furthermore, the third process may be a process in which the UE_A10 recognizes that the request for this procedure has been accepted.
 さらに、UE_A10が第11から19の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報を受信した場合、第3の処理は、UE_A10が、RQoS有効化手続きを任意のタイミングで実行可能な状態に遷移する処理であってもよいし、RQoS有効化手続きを開始する処理であってもよい。 Furthermore, when UE_A10 receives one or more pieces of identification information from among the eleventh to nineteenth pieces of identification information, the third process is a process in which UE_A10 transitions the RQoS enabling procedure to an executable state at any timing. It may be present or it may be the process of starting the RQoS activation procedure.
 より詳細には、UE_A10が第11の識別情報、及び/又は第12の識別情報、及び/又は第17の識別情報、及び/又は第18の識別情報を受信した場合、第3の処理は、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoS有効化手続きを任意のタイミングで実行可能な状態に遷移する処理であってもよい。さらに、UE_A10が第11の識別情報、及び/又は第13の識別情報、及び/又は第17の識別情報、及び/又は第19の識別情報を受信した場合、第3の処理は、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoS有効化手続きを任意のタイミングで実行可能な状態に遷移する処理であってもよい。 More specifically, if the UE_A10 receives the 11th identification information, and/or the 12th identification information, and/or the 17th identification information, and/or the 18th identification information, the third processing is, It may be a process of transitioning the RQoS activation procedure controlled via the Control Plane to a state in which it can be executed at an arbitrary timing. Furthermore, if the UE_A10 receives the 11th identification information, and/or the 13th identification information, and/or the 17th identification information, and/or the 19th identification information, the third processing is the UserPlane. It may be a process of transiting the RQoS enabling procedure controlled via the state to an executable state at an arbitrary timing.
 さらに、UE_A10が第11から19の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報と第16の識別情報とを受信した場合、第3の処理は、UE_A10が、第16の識別情報が示す値をRQoSのタイマー値と設定する処理であってもよい。尚、第3の処理はこれらの処理に限らなくてもよい。 Furthermore, if UE_A10 receives one or more identification information and 16th identification information among the 11th to 19th identification information, the third process is UE_A10, the 16th identification information indicates the value of RQoS. It may be a process of setting a timer value. The third process is not limited to these processes.
 次に、UE_A10は、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージの受信、及び/又は第3の処理の完了に基づいて、AMF_A240を介してSMF_A230にPDUセッション確立完了(PDU session establishment complete)メッセージを送信する(S1014)。さらに、SMF_A230は、PDUセッション確立完了メッセージを受信し、第2の条件判別を実行する。 Next, UE_A10 receives the PDU session establishment acceptance message, and / or based on the completion of the third process, transmits a PDU session establishment completion message to SMF_A230 via AMF_A240 (SDU session establishment complete) message (S1014). .. Further, the SMF_A 230 receives the PDU session establishment completion message and executes the second condition determination.
 具体的には、UE_A10は、N1インタフェースを用いてAMF_A240にPDUセッション確立完了メッセージを送信し、PDUセッション確立完了メッセージを受信したAMF_A240が、N11インタフェースを用いてSMF_A230にPDUセッション確立完了メッセージを送信する。 Specifically, UE_A10 transmits a PDU session establishment completion message to AMF_A240 using the N1 interface, and AMF_A240 that has received the PDU session establishment completion message sends a PDU session establishment completion message to SMF_A230 using the N11 interface. ..
 尚、PDUセッションがPDNコネクションである場合、PDUセッション確立完了メッセージは、PDN接続完了(PDN Connectivity complete)メッセージでもよいし、デフォルトEPSベアラコンテキストアクティブ化受諾(Activate default EPS bearer context accept)メッセージでもよい。さらに、PDUセッション確立完了メッセージは、N1インタフェース、及びN11インタフェース上で送受信されるNASメッセージであってよい。また、PDUセッション確立完了メッセージは、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに対する応答メッセージであればよく、これに限らず、PDUセッション確立手続きが完了することを示すメッセージであればよい。 When the PDU session is a PDN connection, the PDU session establishment complete message may be a PDN connection complete message or a default EPS bearer context activation accept message. Further, the PDU session establishment completion message may be a NAS message transmitted/received on the N1 interface and the N11 interface. Further, the PDU session establishment completion message may be a response message to the PDU session establishment acceptance message, and is not limited to this, and may be a message indicating that the PDU session establishment procedure is completed.
 第2の条件判別は、SMF_A230が、送受信されるN4インタフェース上のメッセージの種類を決定する為ものである。第2の条件判別が真の場合、SMF_A230はUPF_A235にセッション変更要求メッセージ(Session Modification request)を送信し(S1018)、さらに、セッション変更要求メッセージを受信したUPF_A235が送信したセッション変更受諾(Session Modification response)メッセージを受信する(S1020)。また、第2の条件判別が偽の場合、SMF_A230はUPF_A235にセッション確立要求メッセージを送信し(S1018)、さらに、セッション確立要求メッセージを受信したUPF_A235が送信したセッション変更受諾メッセージを受信する(S1020)。 The second condition determination is for SMF_A230 to determine the type of message on the N4 interface that is sent and received. When the second condition determination is true, SMF_A230 sends a session modification request message (SessionModification request) to UPF_A235 (S1018), and further, session modification acceptance (Session Modificationresponse) sent by UPF_A235 that received the session modification request message. ) Receive the message (S1020). If the second condition determination is false, SMF_A230 sends a session establishment request message to UPF_A235 (S1018), and further receives a session change accept message sent by UPF_A235 that received the session establishment request message (S1020). ..
 各装置は、PDUセッション確立完了メッセージの送受信、及び/又はセッション変更応答メッセージの送受信、及び/又はセッション確立応答メッセージの送受信、及び/又はRAの送受信に基づいて、本手続き中の(A)の手続きを完了する。 Each device transmits/receives a PDU session establishment completion message, and/or a session change response message, and/or a session establishment response message, and/or sends/receives an RA based on (A) Complete the procedure.
 次に、第3の条件判別が偽の場合のステップ、すなわち本手続き中の(B)の手続きの各ステップを説明する。SMF_A230は、AMF_A240を介してUE_A10にPDUセッション確立拒絶(PDU session establishment reject)メッセージを送信し(S1022)、本手続き中の(B)の手続きを開始する。 Next, the step when the third condition judgment is false, that is, each step of the procedure (B) in this procedure will be described. The SMF_A230 transmits a PDU session establishment rejection message to the UE_A10 via the AMF_A240 (S1022), and starts the procedure (B) in this procedure.
 具体的には、SMF_A230は、N11インタフェースを用いてAMF_A240にPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージを送信し、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージを受信したAMF_A240が、N1インタフェースを用いてUE_A10にPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージを送信する。 Specifically, the SMF_A230 sends a PDU session establishment rejection message to the AMF_A240 using the N11 interface, and the AMF_A240 that receives the PDU session establishment request message sends a PDU session establishment rejection message to the UE_A10 using the N1 interface. ..
 尚、PDUセッションがPDNコネクションである場合、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージはPDN接続拒絶(PDN connectivity reject)メッセージでよい。さらに、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージは、N11インタフェース、及びN1インタフェース上で送受信されるNASメッセージであってよい。また、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージは、これに限らず、PDUセッションの確立が拒絶されたことを示すメッセージであればよい。 Note that if the PDU session is a PDN connection, the PDU session establishment rejection message may be a PDN connectivity reject message. Further, the PDU session establishment rejection message may be a NAS message transmitted and received on the N11 interface and the N1 interface. Further, the PDU session establishment rejection message is not limited to this, and may be a message indicating that the establishment of the PDU session is rejected.
 ここで、SMF_A230は、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに、第21から29の識別情報、第72の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報を含めてもよいし、これらの識別情報を含めることで、UE_A10の要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。尚、これらの識別情報の2以上の識別情報は、1以上の識別情報として構成されてもよい。 Here, SMF_A230, in the PDU session establishment rejection message, the 21st to 29th identification information, may include one or more identification information of the 72nd identification information, by including these identification information, UE_A10 Request may have been denied. Two or more pieces of identification information of these pieces of identification information may be configured as one or more pieces of identification information.
 さらに、SMF_A230は、第21から29の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報をPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに含めて送信することで、RQoSをネットワークがサポートしないことを示してもよいし、RQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。 Further, the SMF_A230 may indicate that the network does not support RQoS by transmitting one or more pieces of identification information out of the 21st to 29th identification information included in the PDU session establishment rejection message and used by RQoS. It may indicate that the request to transition to a possible state has been rejected.
 より詳細には、SMF_A230は、第21の識別情報、及び/又は第22の識別情報、及び/又は第23の識別情報、及び/又は第27の識別情報、及び/又は第28の識別情報をPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに含めて送信することで、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートしないことを示してもよいし、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。この場合において、SMF_A230は、第24の識別情報、及び/又は第29の識別情報を登録拒絶メッセージに含めずに送信することで、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートすることを示してもよいし、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が受諾されたことを示してもよい。 More specifically, the SMF_A230 is the 21st identification information, and/or the 22nd identification information, and/or the 23rd identification information, and/or the 27th identification information, and/or the 28th identification information. It may be possible to indicate that the network does not support RQoS controlled via Control Plane by including it in the PDU session establishment rejection message, and RQoS controlled via Control Plane can be used. It may indicate that the request to transition is rejected. In this case, the SMF_A230 transmits the 24th identification information and/or the 29th identification information without including it in the registration refusal message, so that the network supports RQoS controlled via the User Plane. It may be shown or it may be shown that the request to transit to the state in which RQoS controlled via the User Plane can be used is accepted.
 さらに、SMF_A230は、第21の識別情報、及び/又は第22の識別情報、及び/又は第24の識別情報、及び/又は第27の識別情報、及び/又は第29の識別情報をPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに含めて送信することで、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートしないこと示してもよいし、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。この場合において、SMF_A230は、第23の識別情報、及び/又は第28の識別情報を含めずに送信することで、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートすることを示してもよいし、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が受諾されたことを示してもよい。 Furthermore, the SMF_A230 establishes the PDU session with the 21st identification information, and/or the 22nd identification information, and/or the 24th identification information, and/or the 27th identification information, and/or the 29th identification information. It may be indicated that the network does not support RQoS controlled via User Plane by including it in the rejection message and a request to transit to a state where RQoS controlled via User Plane can be used. You may indicate that you have been rejected. In this case, the SMF_A 230 may indicate that the network supports RQoS controlled via the Control Plane by transmitting without including the 23rd identification information and/or the 28th identification information. However, it may indicate that the request for transitioning to the state in which RQoS controlled through the Control Plane can be used has been accepted.
 さらに、SMF_A230は、第21の識別情報を送信すること、及び/又は第22から24の識別情報、第27から29の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報と第25の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、SMF_A230が受信した第4の識別情報、及び/又は第25の識別情報で識別されるDNに対して確立されるPDUセッションに対して、RQoSをネットワークがサポートしないことを示してもよいし、RQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。 Further, the SMF_A230 transmits the 21st identification information, and/or the 22nd to 24th identification information, and the 27th to 29th identification information one or more of the identification information and the 25th identification information are associated with each other. The SMF_A230 indicates that the network does not support RQoS for the PDU session established for the DN identified by the fourth identification information and/or the 25th identification information. It may indicate that the request for transitioning to the RQoS enabled state has been rejected.
 さらに、SMF_A230は、第21の識別情報を送信すること、及び/又は第22から24の識別情報、第27から29の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報と第26の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、SMF_A230が受信した第5の識別情報、第26の識別情報で識別されるPDUセッションに対して、RQoSをネットワークがサポートしないことを示してもよいし、RQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。 Further, the SMF_A230 transmits the 21st identification information, and/or the 22nd to 24th identification information, the 27th to 29th identification information, and one or more of the identification information and the 26th identification information are associated with each other. May be transmitted to indicate that the network does not support RQoS for the PDU session identified by the fifth identification information and the 26th identification information received by SMF_A230, or RQoS can be used. It may indicate that the request to transition to the state has been rejected.
 さらに、SMF_A230は、第21から29の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報をPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに含めて送信することで、UE_A10が現在属しているレジストレーションエリア、及び/又は、トラッキングエリアに対して、RQoSをネットワークがサポートしないことを示してもよいし、RQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。 Furthermore, SMF_A230, by including one or more pieces of identification information among the 21st to 29th pieces of identification information in the PDU session establishment rejection message, the registration area to which UE_A10 currently belongs, and/or the tracking area. On the other hand, it may indicate that the network does not support RQoS, or it may indicate that the request for transitioning to the RQoS enabled state has been rejected.
 さらに、SMF_A230は、第21から29の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報をPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに含めて送信することで、UE_A10が現在接続しているアクセスネットワークに対して、RQoSをネットワークがサポートしないことを示してもよいし、RQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。 Further, SMF_A230, by including one or more pieces of identification information in the 21st to 29th pieces of identification information in the PDU session establishment rejection message, and transmitting the RQoS to the access network to which UE_A10 is currently connected. It may indicate that it is not supported, or that the request to transition to the state in which RQoS is available is rejected.
 さらに、SMF_A230は、第21から29の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報をPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに含めて送信することで、UE主導で制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートしないことを示してもよいし、UE主導で制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。さらに、SMF_A230は、第21から29の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報をPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに含めて送信することで、ネットワーク主導で制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートしないことを示してもよいし、ネットワーク主導で制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。 Further, SMF_A230, by including one or more pieces of identification information among the 21st to 29th pieces of identification information in the PDU session establishment rejection message, and indicating that the network does not support UE-controlled RQoS. Alternatively, it may indicate that the request for transitioning to the UE-controlled RQoS enabled state is rejected. Further, the SMF_A230 sends one or more pieces of identification information out of the 21st to 29th pieces of identification information included in the PDU session establishment rejection message to indicate that the network does not support RQoS controlled by the network. It may indicate that the request to transit to the state where network-controlled RQoS is available is rejected.
 また、UE_A10は、第21の識別情報を送信することにより、あるいは、第22の識別情報を送信することにより、あるいは、第23の識別情報及び第24の識別情報を送信することにより、あるいは、第27の識別情報を送信することにより、あるいは、第28の識別情報及び第29の識別情報を送信することにより、あるいは、これらの識別情報の2以上の識別情報が1以上の識別情報の識別情報として構成されている場合にはそれらのうちの1以上の識別情報を送信することにより、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートせず、かつ、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをネットワークがサポートしないことを示してもよいし、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶され、かつ、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoSが使用可能な状態に遷移する要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。 Also, UE_A10, by transmitting the 21st identification information, or, by transmitting the 22nd identification information, or by transmitting the 23rd identification information and the 24th identification information, or, By transmitting the 27th identification information, or by transmitting the 28th identification information and the 29th identification information, or two or more of these identification information identification of one or more identification information When configured as information, the network does not support RQoS controlled via Control Plane by transmitting one or more pieces of identification information among them, and it is controlled via User Plane. It may indicate that the network does not support RQoS, the request to transition to the state where RQoS controlled via Control Plane can be used is rejected, and RQoS controlled via User Plane can be used. It may indicate that the request to transition to a different state has been rejected.
 さらに、SMF_A230は、第72の識別情報、及び/又は第25の識別情報、及び/又は第26の識別情報をPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに含めて送信することで、ネットワークスライスに属したPDUセッションの確立の要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよいし、PDUセッションを属することが許可されていないネットワークスライスを示してもよい。 Furthermore, SMF_A230, by including the 72nd identification information, and / or 25th identification information, and / or 26th identification information included in the PDU session establishment rejection message, of the PDU session belonging to the network slice. It may indicate that the request for establishment has been rejected, or it may indicate a network slice that is not allowed to belong to the PDU session.
 より詳細には、SMF_A230は、第72の識別情報と第25の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、第25の識別情報で識別されるDNに対して確立されるPDUセッションにおいて、ネットワークスライスに属したPDUセッションの確立の要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよいし、PDUセッションを属することが許可されていないネットワークスライスを示してもよい。 More specifically, the SMF_A230 transmits the 72nd identification information and the 25th identification information in association with each other, in the PDU session established for the DN identified by the 25th identification information, in the network. It may indicate that the request to establish the PDU session belonging to the slice has been denied, or it may indicate a network slice that is not allowed to belong to the PDU session.
 さらに、SMF_A230は、第61の識別情報と第26の識別情報とを対応づけて送信することで、第26の識別情報で識別されるPDUセッションにおいて、ネットワークスライスに属したPDUセッションの確立の要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよいし、PDUセッションを属することが許可されていないネットワークスライスを示してもよい。 Further, the SMF_A230 transmits the 61st identification information and the 26th identification information in association with each other to request the establishment of the PDU session belonging to the network slice in the PDU session identified by the 26th identification information. May be rejected, or it may indicate a network slice that is not allowed to belong to the PDU session.
 さらに、SMF_A230は、第72の識別情報をPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに含めて送信することで、UE_A10が現在属しているレジストレーションエリア、及び/又は、トラッキングエリアにおいて、ネットワークスライスに属したPDUセッションの確立の要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよいし、PDUセッションを属することが許可されていないネットワークスライスを示してもよい。 Further, SMF_A230, by including the 72nd identification information included in the PDU session establishment rejection message, the registration area UE_A10 currently belongs to, and / or in the tracking area, in the PDU session belonging to the network slice. It may indicate that the request for establishment has been rejected, or it may indicate a network slice that is not allowed to belong to the PDU session.
 さらに、SMF_A230は、第72の識別情報をPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに含めて送信することで、UE_A10が現在接続しているアクセスネットワークにおいて、ネットワークスライスに属したPDUセッションの確立の要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよいし、PDUセッションを属することが許可されていないネットワークスライスを示してもよい。 Further, SMF_A230, by including the 72nd identification information in the PDU session establishment rejection message, in the access network to which UE_A10 is currently connected, the request to establish the PDU session belonging to the network slice is rejected. May be indicated, or a network slice not permitted to belong to the PDU session may be indicated.
 さらに、SMF_A230は、第72の識別情報をPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに含めて送信することで、第1のタイマーの値を示してもよいし、本手続きの完了後に、本手続きと同じ手続きを再び実施すべきか否かを示してもよい。 Furthermore, the SMF_A230 may indicate the value of the first timer by including the 72nd identification information in the PDU session establishment refusal message and transmitting it, and after the completion of this procedure, the same procedure as this procedure may be performed again. It may indicate whether or not to implement.
 さらに、SMF_A230は、第21から29の識別情報、及び/又は第72の識別情報のうち2以上の識別情報を組合せて送信することにより、上述した事柄を組合せた要求を行ってもよい。尚、SMF_A230が各識別情報を送信することで示す事柄はこれらに限らなくてもよい。 Furthermore, the SMF_A230 may make a request that combines the above-mentioned matters by transmitting a combination of two or more pieces of identification information of the 21st to 29th identification information and/or the 72nd identification information. It should be noted that the matters indicated by the SMF_A 230 transmitting each piece of identification information are not limited to these.
 尚、SMF_A230は、第21から29の識別情報、第72の識別情報のうち、どの識別情報をPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに入れるかを、受信した識別情報、及び/又は、ネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー等のポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態に基づいて決定してもよい。 Note that SMF_A230 is the identification information received from the 21st to 29th identification information and the 72nd identification information, which identification information is to be included in the PDU session establishment rejection message, and/or network capability information, and It may be determined based on a policy such as an operator policy and/or a network state.
 例えば、第21の識別情報は、ネットワークRQoSをサポートしていない場合、及び/又は第1から8の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報を受信した場合に送信される情報であってもよい。さらに、第22の識別情報、及び/又は第27の識別情報は、ネットワークがRQoSをサポートしていない場合、及び/又は第1から3の識別情報、及び/又は第6から8の識別情報を受信した場合に送信される情報であってもよい。さらに、第23の識別情報、及び/又は第28の識別情報は、ネットワークがControl Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートしている場合、及び/又は第1から3の識別情報、及び/又は第6から8の識別情報を受信した場合に送信される情報であってもよい。さらに、第24の識別情報、及び/又は第29の識別情報は、ネットワークがUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoSをサポートしている場合、及び/又は第1から3の識別情報、及び/又は第6から8の識別情報を受信した場合に送信される情報であってもよい。 For example, the 21st identification information may be information transmitted when the network RQoS is not supported and/or when one or more identification information items among the identification information items 1 to 8 are received. Furthermore, the 22nd identification information, and / or 27th identification information, if the network does not support RQoS, and / or 1 to 3 identification information, and / or 6 to 8 identification information It may be information transmitted when received. Furthermore, the 23rd identification information, and / or 28th identification information, if the network supports RQoS controlled via Control Plane, and / or 1 to 3 identification information, and / or It may be information transmitted when the sixth to eighth identification information is received. Furthermore, the 24th identification information, and/or the 29th identification information, when the network supports RQoS controlled via User Plane, and/or the first to third identification information, and/or It may be information transmitted when the sixth to eighth identification information is received.
 さらに、第25の識別情報は、第4の識別情報が示すDNNと同じDNNを示す情報であってよい。さらに、第26の識別情報は、第5の識別情報が示すPDUセッションIDと同じPDUセッションIDを示す情報であってよい。さらに、第72の識別情報は、第71の識別情報を受信した場合、及び/又は第71の識別情報が示すネットワークスライスがネットワークによって許可されていない場合に送信される情報であってよい。尚、どの識別情報をPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに入れるかのSMF_A230による決定はこれに限らない。 Furthermore, the 25th identification information may be information indicating the same DNN as the DNN indicated by the fourth identification information. Furthermore, the 26th identification information may be information indicating the same PDU session ID as the PDU session ID indicated by the fifth identification information. Further, the 72nd identification information may be information transmitted when the 71st identification information is received and/or when the network slice indicated by the 71st identification information is not permitted by the network. The determination by SMF_A230 which identification information should be included in the PDU session establishment rejection message is not limited to this.
 UE_A10は、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージを受信する。UE_A10は、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージの受信に基づいて、第4の処理を実施する(S1024)。また、UE_A10は、第4の処理を本手続きの完了に基づいて実施してもよい。 UE_A10 receives the PDU session establishment rejection message. UE_A10 performs the fourth process based on the reception of the PDU session establishment rejection message (S1024). Also, the UE_A 10 may perform the fourth process based on the completion of this procedure.
 ここで、第4の処理は、UE_A10が、SMF_A230によって示された事柄を認識する処理であってよい。さらに、第4の処理は、UE_A10が、受信した識別情報をコンテキストとして記憶する処理であってもよいし、受信した識別情報を上位層、及び/又は下位層に転送する処理であってもよい。さらに、第4の処理は、UE_A10が、本手続きの要求が拒絶されたことを認識する処理であってもよい。 Here, the fourth process may be a process in which UE_A10 recognizes the matter indicated by SMF_A230. Furthermore, the fourth process may be a process in which the UE_A10 stores the received identification information as a context, or may be a process of transferring the received identification information to an upper layer and/or a lower layer. .. Furthermore, the fourth process may be a process in which the UE_A10 recognizes that the request for this procedure is rejected.
 さらに、UE_A10が第21から29の識別情報のうち1以上の識別情報を受信した場合、第4の処理は、UE_A10が、RQoS有効化手続きが実行可能ではない状態に遷移する処理、又はRQoSを適用しない状態を維持することであってもよい。 Furthermore, when UE_A10 receives one or more pieces of identification information from the 21st to 29th pieces of identification information, the fourth processing is UE_A10, a processing for transitioning to a state in which the RQoS enabling procedure is not executable, or RQoS. It may be to maintain the non-application state.
 より詳細には、UE_A10が第22の識別情報、及び/又は第23の識別情報、及び/又は第27の識別情報、及び/又は第28の識別情報を受信した場合、第4の処理は、Control Planeを介して制御されるRQoS有効化手続きが実行可能ではない状態に遷移する処理であってもよい。さらに、UE_A10が第22の識別情報、及び/又は第24の識別情報、及び/又は第27の識別情報、及び/又は第29の識別情報を受信した場合、第4の処理は、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoS有効化手続きが実行可能ではない状態に遷移する処理であってもよい。 More specifically, if the UE_A10 receives the 22nd identification information, and/or the 23rd identification information, and/or the 27th identification information, and/or the 28th identification information, the fourth process is, It may be a process of transiting to a state in which the RQoS activation procedure controlled via the Control Plane is not executable. Furthermore, if the UE_A10 receives the 22nd identification information, and/or the 24th identification information, and/or the 27th identification information, and/or the 29th identification information, the fourth processing is the UserPlane. The processing may be a process of transiting to a state in which the RQoS enabling procedure controlled via the non-executable state.
 さらに、UE_A10が第72の識別情報を受信した場合、第4の処理は、UE_A10が、第72の識別情報が示す値を第1のタイマー値と設定する処理であってもよいし、タイマー値を設定した第1のタイマーを開始する処理であってもよい。さらに、UE_A10が第72の識別情報を受信した場合、第4の処理は、第1から11の挙動うち1以上の挙動を実行する処理であってもよい。 Furthermore, if the UE_A10 receives the 72nd identification information, the fourth process, UE_A10 may be a process of setting the value indicated by the 72nd identification information as the first timer value, or the timer value. It may be a process of starting the first timer having set. Furthermore, when the UE_A10 receives the 72nd identification information, the fourth process may be a process of executing one or more of the first to eleventh behaviors.
 さらに、第4の処理は、UE_A10が、一定期間後に再び本手続きを開始する処理であってもよいUE_A10の要求が限定された状態へ遷移する処理であってもよい。 Further, the fourth process may be a process in which the UE_A10 may restart this procedure after a certain period of time, or a process in which the request of the UE_A10 transits to a limited state.
 さらに、第21の識別情報がUser authentication or authorization failedを示す場合、第4の処理は、第21の識別情報が示す拒絶理由で拒絶されたPDUセッション確立手続きで用いたDNN及び/又はS-NSSAI及び/又はユーザ識別子と同じ情報を用いてPDUセッションの再接続を実施する処理を抑止する処理であってよい。 Furthermore, if the 21st identification information indicates User authentication or authorization authorization failed, the 4th processing is the DNN and/or S-NSSAI used in the PDU session establishment procedure rejected for the rejection reason indicated by the 21st identification information. And/or a process of suppressing the process of reconnecting the PDU session using the same information as the user identifier.
 例えば、UE_10は、第4の処理例として、以下に示す第1の手続き例を実施しても良い。UE_A10が、DNN#A及び/又はS-NSSAI#A及び/又はmapped configured S-NSSAI#A from the configured NSSAI for the HPLMNに対して、第61の識別情報が示すユーザ識別子#Aを用いて第1のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージ(S1000)を送信し、ネットワークから受信したPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージ(S1002)がUser authentication or authorization failedを示す第21の識別情報を含んでおり、かつ第121の識別情報を含まない場合、UE_A10は、PDUセッションの確立要求がUser authentication or authorization failedを理由に拒絶されたことを認識してもよい。 For example, UE_10 may implement the following first procedure example as the fourth processing example. UE_A10 is DNN#A and/or S-NSSAI#A and/or mapped configured S-NSSAI#A from the configured NSSAI for the HPLMN, using the user identifier #A indicated by the 61st identification information 1 PDU session establishment request message (S1000) is sent, the PDU session establishment rejection message (S1002) received from the network contains the 21st identification information indicating User authentication authentication or authorization failed, and the 121st identification information When not including, the UE_A10 may recognize that the PDU session establishment request is rejected because of User authentication authentication or authorization failed.
 尚、SMF_A230が、User authentication or authorization failedで拒絶する条件判別は、第3の条件判別に基づいて判別してもよい。 Note that the condition determination that SMF_A230 rejects due to User authentication or authorization failed may be determined based on the third condition determination.
 この時、UE_A10は、DNN#A及び/又はS-NSSAI#A及び/又はmapped configured S-NSSAI#A from the configured NSSAI for the HPLMNに対して、ユーザ識別子#Aを示す第61の識別情報を用いた第2のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信を規制されるように設定されてよい。 At this time, UE_A10, the DNN#A and/or S-NSSAI#A and/or mapped configured S-NSSAI#A from the configured NSSAI for the HPLMN, the 61st identification information indicating the user identifier #A, The transmission of the used second PDU session establishment request message may be set to be restricted.
 さらに、UE_A10は、第1のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージ(1000)で用いた第61の識別情報が示すユーザ識別子を変更する及び/又は、端末電源オン/オフ及び/又は、USIM(Universal Subscriber Identity Module)の抜き差しまで、第1のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージ(1000)で送信したDNN#A及び/又はS-NSSAI#A及び/又はmapped configured S-NSSAI#A from the configured NSSAI for the HPLMNを対象にした別のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを用いた再接続を自動的に実施しない手続きであってよい。 Further, UE_A10 changes the user identifier indicated by the 61st identification information used in the first PDU session establishment request message (1000) and/or turns the terminal power on/off and/or USIM (Universal SubscriberIdentity Module). ) Is inserted/removed, targeting DNN#A and/or S-NSSAI#A and/or mapped configured S-NSSAI#A from the configured NSSAI for the HPLMN sent in the first PDU session establishment request message (1000). The procedure may be such that reconnection using another PDU session establishment request message is not automatically performed.
 また、UE_A10による再接続の条件はこれらに限らなくても良い。 Also, the conditions for reconnection by UE_A10 are not limited to these.
 例えば、UE_10は、第4の処理例として、以下に示す第2の手続き例を実施しても良い。UE_A10が、DNN#A及び/又はS-NSSAI#A及び/又はmapped configured S-NSSAI#A from the configured NSSAI for the HPLMNに対して、第61の識別情報が示すユーザ識別子#Aを用いて第1のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージ(S1000)を送信し、ネットワークから受信したPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージ(S1002)がUser authentication or authorization failedを示す第21の識別情報を含んでおり、かつEAP-failureを示す第121の識別情報を含まない場合、ユーザ識別子#Aを示す第61の識別情報を用いた第2のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信を規制し、第2のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信を規制している際に、ユーザ識別子#Aとは異なるユーザ識別子に変更した場合、第1のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージ(1000)で送信したDNN#A及び/又はS-NSSAI#A及び/又はmapped configured S-NSSAI#A from the configured NSSAI for the HPLMNを対象にしたユーザ識別子#Aとは異なるユーザ識別子を示す第61の識別情報を用いた別のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信を許容するように設定されてよい。 For example, UE_10 may implement the following second procedure example as the fourth processing example. UE_A10 is DNN#A and/or S-NSSAI#A and/or mapped configured S-NSSAI#A from the configured NSSAI for the HPLMN, using the user identifier #A indicated by the 61st identification information 1 PDU session establishment request message (S1000) is sent, and the PDU session establishment rejection message (S1002) received from the network contains the 21st identification information indicating User authentication authentication or authorization failed, and indicates EAP-failure. When the 121st identification information is not included, the transmission of the second PDU session establishment request message using the 61st identification information indicating the user identifier #A is restricted, and the transmission of the second PDU session establishment request message is restricted. When changing to a different user identifier from the user identifier #A during the operation, DNN#A and/or S-NSSAI#A and/or mapped configured sent in the first PDU session establishment request message (1000) S-NSSAI#A from the configured NSSAI for the Set to allow the transmission of another PDU session establishment request message using the 61st identification information indicating a user identifier different from the user identifier #A for HPLMN May be done.
 また、UE_10は、第4の処理例として、以下に示す第3の手続き例を実施しても良い。UE_A10が、DNN#A及び/又はS-NSSAI#A及び/又はmapped configured S-NSSAI#A from the configured NSSAI for the HPLMNに対して、第61の識別情報が示すユーザ識別子#Aを用いて第1のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージ(S1000)を送信し、ネットワークから受信したPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージ(S1002)がUser authentication or authorization failedを示す第21の識別情報を含んでおり、かつEAP-failureを示す第121の識別情報を含まない場合、ユーザ識別子#Aを示す第61の識別情報を用いた第2のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信を規制し、第2のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信を規制している際に、端末電源オン/オフを行った場合、第1のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージ(1000)で送信したDNN#A及び/又はS-NSSAI#A及び/又はmapped configured S-NSSAI#A from the configured NSSAI for the HPLMNを対象にした第61の識別情報を用いた別のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信を許容するように設定されてよい。この時、第61の識別情報が示すユーザ識別子は、ユーザ識別子#Aでもよいし、ユーザ識別子#Aとは異なるユーザ識別子でもよい。 UE_10 may also implement the following third procedure example as the fourth processing example. UE_A10 is DNN#A and/or S-NSSAI#A and/or mapped configured S-NSSAI#A from the configured NSSAI for the HPLMN, using the user identifier #A indicated by the 61st identification information 1 PDU session establishment request message (S1000) is sent, and the PDU session establishment rejection message (S1002) received from the network contains the 21st identification information indicating User authentication authentication or authorization failed, and indicates EAP-failure. When the 121st identification information is not included, the transmission of the second PDU session establishment request message using the 61st identification information indicating the user identifier #A is restricted, and the transmission of the second PDU session establishment request message is restricted. If the terminal power is turned on/off during the operation, the DNN#A and/or S-NSSAI#A and/or mapped configured S-NSSAI# sent in the first PDU session establishment request message (1000) are sent. It may be set to allow the transmission of another PDU session establishment request message using the 61st identification information for A from the configured NSSAI for the HPLMN. At this time, the user identifier indicated by the 61st identification information may be user identifier #A or a user identifier different from user identifier #A.
 また、UE_10は、第4の処理例として、以下に示す第4の手続き例を実施しても良い。UE_A10が、DNN#A及び/又はS-NSSAI#A及び/又はmapped configured S-NSSAI#A from the configured NSSAI for the HPLMNに対して、第61の識別情報が示すユーザ識別子#Aを用いて第1のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージ(S1000)を送信し、ネットワークから受信したPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージ(S1002)がUser authentication or authorization failedを示す第21の識別情報を含んでおり、かつEAP-failureを示す第121の識別情報を含まない場合、ユーザ識別子#Aを示す第61の識別情報を用いた第2のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信を規制し、第2のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信を規制している際に、USIM(Universal Subscriber Identity Module)の抜き差しを行った場合、第1のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージ(1000)で送信したDNN#A及び/又はS-NSSAI#A及び/又はmapped configured S-NSSAI#A from the configured NSSAI for the HPLMNを対象にした第61の識別情報を用いた別のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信を許容するように設定されてよい。この時、第61の識別情報が示すユーザ識別子は、ユーザ識別子#Aでもよいし、ユーザ識別子#Aとは異なるユーザ識別子でもよい。また、上述した第4の処理例の第1から第4の手続き例は、UE_A10が、DNN#A及び/又はS-NSSAI#A及び/又はmapped configured S-NSSAI#A from the configured NSSAI for the HPLMNに対して、第61の識別情報が示すユーザ識別子#Aを用いて第1のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージ(S1000)を送信し、ネットワークから受信したPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージ(S1002)がUser authentication or authorization failedを示す第21の識別情報及びEAP-failureを示す第121の識別情報を含む場合でも適用されてよい。 尚、上述のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを用いた再接続に含まれる、第61の識別情報が示すユーザ識別子は、第1のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージ(1000)で用いた第61の識別情報が示すユーザ識別子に限らない。例えば、第61の識別情報においてユーザ識別子#Aとは異なるユーザ識別子#Bを用いたとしてもPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを用いた再接続は規制されるように設定されてよい。 UE_10 may also implement the following fourth procedure example as the fourth processing example. UE_A10 is DNN#A and/or S-NSSAI#A and/or mapped configured S-NSSAI#A from the configured NSSAI for the HPLMN, using the user identifier #A indicated by the 61st identification information 1 PDU session establishment request message (S1000) is sent, and the PDU session establishment rejection message (S1002) received from the network contains the 21st identification information indicating User authentication authentication or authorization failed, and indicates EAP-failure. When the 121st identification information is not included, the transmission of the second PDU session establishment request message using the 61st identification information indicating the user identifier #A is restricted, and the transmission of the second PDU session establishment request message is restricted. If the USIM (Universal Subscriber Identity Module) is removed and inserted during the operation, DNN#A and/or S-NSSAI#A and/or mapped configured sent in the first PDU session establishment request message (1000). It may be set to allow the transmission of another PDU session establishment request message using the 61st identification information for S-NSSAI#A from the configured NSSAI for the HPLMN. At this time, the user identifier indicated by the 61st identification information may be user identifier #A or a user identifier different from user identifier #A. Further, the first to fourth procedure examples of the fourth processing example described above, UE_A10 is DNN#A and/or S-NSSAI#A and/or mapped configured S-NSSAI#A from the configured NSSAI for the To the HPLMN, the first PDU session establishment request message (S1000) is transmitted using the user identifier #A indicated by the 61st identification information, and the PDU session establishment rejection message (S1002) received from the network is User It may be applied even when including the 21st identification information indicating authorization and the 121st identification information indicating EAP-failure. The user identifier indicated by the 61st identification information included in the reconnection using the above PDU session establishment request message is indicated by the 61st identification information used in the first PDU session establishment request message (1000). It is not limited to the user identifier. For example, even if the user identifier #B different from the user identifier #A is used in the 61st identification information, the reconnection using the PDU session establishment request message may be set to be restricted.
 尚、第4の処理はこれらの処理に限らなくてもよい。 Note that the fourth process is not limited to these processes.
 さらに、UE_A10は、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージを受信することにより、あるいは、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージを受信しないことにより、UE_A10の要求が拒絶されたことを認識してもよい。各装置は、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージの送受信に基づき、本手続き中の(B)の手続きを完了する。 Further, UE_A10 may recognize that the request of UE_A10 is rejected by receiving the PDU session establishment reject message or by not receiving the PDU session establishment accept message. Each device completes the procedure (B) in this procedure based on the transmission and reception of the PDU session establishment rejection message.
 各装置は、本手続き中の(A)又は(B)の手続きの完了に基づいて、本手続きを完了する。尚、各装置は、本手続き中の(A)の手続きの完了に基づいて、PDUセッションが確立された状態に遷移してもよいし、本手続き中の(B)の手続きの完了に基づいて、本手続きが拒絶されたことを認識してもよいし、PDUセッションが確立されていない状態に遷移してもよい。 Each device completes this procedure based on the completion of procedure (A) or (B) in this procedure. It should be noted that each device may transition to a state where the PDU session is established based on the completion of the procedure (A) in this procedure, or based on the completion of the procedure (B) in the procedure. , It may be recognized that this procedure has been rejected, or it may transit to a state in which a PDU session is not established.
 さらに、各装置は、本手続きの完了に基づいて、本手続きで送受信した識別情報に基づいた処理を実施してもよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、本手続きの完了に基づいて、第3の処理を実施してもよいし、第4の処理を実施してもよい。 Furthermore, each device may perform processing based on the identification information transmitted and received in this procedure based on the completion of this procedure. In other words, the UE_A 10 may perform the third processing or the fourth processing based on the completion of this procedure.
 また、第3の条件判別は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含まれる識別情報、及び/又は加入者情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシーに基づいて実行されてもよい。例えば、第3の条件判別は、DN_A5による認証、及び/又は承認を本手続き中で実施することをネットワークが許可する場合、真でよい。また、第3の条件判別は、DN_A5による認証、及び/又は承認を本手続き中で実施することをネットワークが許可しない場合、偽でよい。さらに、第3の条件判別は、UE_A10の接続先のネットワーク、及び/又はネットワーク内の装置が、DN_A5による認証、及び/又は承認を本手続き中で実施することを、サポートしている場合は真でよく、サポートしていない場合は偽でよい。さらに、第3の条件判別は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージに第61の識別情報を含むSM PDU DN Request Containerが含まれ、その第61の識別情報がローカルポリシー及び/又はユーザ加入者情報に準拠している場合は、真であってよい。また、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージにSM PDU DN Request Containerが含まれない場合も、真であってよい。一方で、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージに第61の識別情報を含むSM PDU DN Request Containerが含まれ第61の識別情報がローカルポリシー及び/又はユーザ加入者情報に準拠していない場合は、偽であってよい。尚、第3の条件判別の真偽が決まる条件は前述した条件に限らなくてもよい。尚、第3の条件判別の真偽が決まる条件は前述した条件に限らなくてもよい。 Also, the third condition determination may be executed based on the identification information and/or the subscriber information and/or the operator policy included in the PDU session establishment request message. For example, the third condition determination may be true when the network permits the authentication and/or the authorization by DN_A5 to be performed in this procedure. The third condition determination may be false if the network does not permit the DN_A5 to perform authentication and/or authorization in this procedure. Furthermore, the third condition determination is true when the network to which UE_A10 is connected and/or the device in the network supports performing authentication and/or authorization by DN_A5 in this procedure. If you don't support it, you can fake it. Furthermore, the third condition determination is that the PDU session establishment request message includes the SMPDUNDNRequestContainer that includes the 61st identification information, and the 61st identification information conforms to the local policy and/or user subscriber information. Can be true. It may also be true when the SMPDUN RequestContainer is not included in the PDU session establishment request message. On the other hand, if the PDU session establishment request message includes the SM PDU DN Request Container that includes the 61st identification information and the 61st identification information does not comply with the local policy and/or user subscriber information, it is false. You can The condition that determines whether the third condition determination is true or false is not limited to the condition described above. The condition that determines whether the third condition determination is true or false is not limited to the condition described above.
 また、第2の条件判別は、PDUセッションのためのN4インタフェース上のセッションが確立されているか否かに基づいて実行されてもよい。例えば、第2の条件判別は、PDUセッションのためのN4インタフェース上のセッションが、確立されている場合は真であってよく、確立されていない場合は偽であってよい。尚、第2の条件判別の真偽が決まる条件は前述した条件に限らなくてもよい。 Also, the second condition determination may be performed based on whether or not a session on the N4 interface for the PDU session is established. For example, the second condition determination may be true if the session on the N4 interface for the PDU session has been established, and false if not. The condition that determines the authenticity of the second condition determination is not limited to the above-mentioned condition.
 [1.3.3.PDUセッション確立認証承認手続きの概要]
 次に、DN_A5がPDUセッションに対して認証、及び/又は承認を実施するために行うPDUセッション確立認証承認手続きの概要について説明する。以下、PDUセッション確立認証承認手続きは、本手続きとも称する。本手続きは、DN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置がPDUセッションに対して認証、及び/又は承認をする為の手続きである。尚、各装置は、本手続きを、PDUセッションを確立した状態で実行してもよいし、PDUセッション確立手続きの中で実行してもよい。例えば、SMF_A230は、登録手続き、及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、少なくとも、第61の識別情報を含むPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを受信した場合に本手続きを開始してもよい。SMF_A230は、登録手続き、及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、第21の条件判別が真の場合に本手続きを開始してもよい。
[1.3.3. Outline of PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure]
Next, an outline of a PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure performed by the DN_A5 to perform authentication and/or approval for a PDU session will be described. Hereinafter, the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure is also referred to as this procedure. This procedure is a procedure for the DN_A5 and/or the device in the DN_A5 to authenticate and/or approve the PDU session. Each device may execute this procedure in a state where a PDU session is established, or may be executed in the PDU session establishment procedure. For example, the SMF_A 230 may start this procedure when receiving a PDU session establishment request message including at least the 61st identification information in the registration procedure and/or the PDU session establishment procedure. The SMF_A 230 may start this procedure when the 21st condition determination is true in the registration procedure and/or the PDU session establishment procedure.
 また、各装置は、PDUセッション確立手続きが完了した状態で本手続きを開始してもよいし、PDUセッション確立手続き後の任意のタイミングで本手続きを開始してもよい。また、各装置は、PDUセッション確立認証承認手続きの完了に基づいて、PDUセッションがDN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置によって認証、及び/又は承認された状態に遷移してもよい。 Also, each device may start this procedure when the PDU session establishment procedure is completed, or may start this procedure at any timing after the PDU session establishment procedure. Further, each device may transit to a state where the PDU session is authenticated and/or approved by the device in the DN_A5 and/or the device in the DN_A5 based on the completion of the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure.
 [1.3.3.1.PDUセッション確立認証承認手続き例]
 図11を用いて、PDUセッション確立認証承認手続きを実行する手順の例を説明する。以下、本手続きの各ステップについて説明する。まず、SMF_A230は、UPF_A235を介してDN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置に、認証/承認要求(Authentication/Authorization Request)メッセージを送信することにより(S1100)、PDUセッション確立認証承認手続きを開始する。
[1.3.3.1. PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure example]
An example of the procedure for executing the PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure will be described with reference to FIG. Each step of this procedure will be described below. First, the SMF_A230 starts a PDU session establishment authentication approval procedure by transmitting an Authentication/Authorization Request message to the DN_A5 and/or a device in the DN_A5 via the UPF_A235 (S1100).
 具体的には、SMF_A230は、UPF_A235、及び/又はDN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置を選択し、N4インタフェースを用いて選択したUPF_A235に、認証/承認要求メッセージを送信する。UPF_A235は、認証/承認要求メッセージを受信すると、N6インタフェースを用いて、DN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置に、認証/承認要求メッセージを送信又は転送する。ここで、SMF_A230は、UE_A10、及び/又はコアネットワーク内の装置から受信した情報、及び/又はSMF_A230が保持する情報に基づき、UPF_A235、及び/又はDN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置を選択してもよい。より詳細には、SMF_A230は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージの受信に基づいて取得した各識別情報、コアネットワーク内の装置への問合せで得た情報、及び/又は加入者情報、及び/又はネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態、及び/又はAMF_A240が既に保持しているコンテキストに基づいて、DN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5を選択してもよい。 Specifically, the SMF_A230 selects UPF_A235 and/or DN_A5 and/or a device within DN_A5, and sends an authentication/authorization request message to the selected UPF_A235 using the N4 interface. Upon receiving the authentication/authorization request message, the UPF_A235 transmits or transfers the authentication/authorization request message to the DN_A5 and/or the device within the DN_A5 using the N6 interface. Here, SMF_A230, UE_A10, and / or information received from the device in the core network, and / or based on the information held by SMF_A230, UPF_A235, and / or DN_A5, and / or selects the device in DN_A5. Good. More specifically, the SMF_A230 is each identification information obtained based on the reception of the PDU session establishment request message, information obtained by inquiring the device in the core network, and/or subscriber information, and/or network capability. DN_A5 and/or DN_A5 may be selected based on information and/or operator policy, and/or network status, and/or context already held by AMF_A240.
 尚、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージは、NASメッセージであってよい。また、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージは、PDUセッションの確立を要求するメッセージであればよく、これに限らない。 Note that the PDU session establishment request message may be a NAS message. Further, the PDU session establishment request message may be any message as long as it is a message requesting establishment of a PDU session, and is not limited to this.
 さらに、認証/承認要求メッセージ交換を含むDN_A5に対する認証/承認のリソース公開は、オペレータがDN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5上でサービスを提供するサービス事業者に提供するAPI(Application Programming Interface)であってもよい。尚、認証/承認要求メッセージは、SMF_A230、及び/又はUPF_A235とDN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5に含まれる装置との間で送受信され、DN_A5による認証、及び/又は承認を要求するメッセージであればよく、これに限らない。 Furthermore, the resource publication of authentication/authorization for DN_A5 including the authentication/authorization request message exchange is performed even if the operator provides the API (Application Programming Interface) to DN_A5 and/or the service provider who provides the service on DN_A5. Good. The authentication/approval request message is transmitted/received between SMF_A230, and/or UPF_A235 and DN_A5, and/or a device included in DN_A5, and may be a message requesting authentication by DN_A5 and/or approval. It is not limited to this.
 ここで、SMF_A230は、UE_A10、及び/又はコアネットワーク内の装置から受信した情報、及び/又はSMF_A230が保持する情報を認証/承認要求メッセージに含めて送信してもよいし、これらの識別情報を含めることで、UE_A10、及び/又はSMF_A230の要求を示してもよい。 Here, SMF_A230, UE_A10, and / or information received from the device in the core network, and / or SMF_A230 may hold the information held in the authentication / authorization request message may be transmitted, or these identification information. The inclusion may indicate the request of UE_A10 and/or SMF_A230.
 DN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置は、認証/承認要求メッセージを受信する。DN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置は、認証/承認要求メッセージの受信に基づいて、第21の条件判別を実行してもよい。第21の条件判別は、DN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置がDN_A5によるPDUセッションの認証、及び/又は承認の手続きを実行するか否かを判断する為のものである。第21の条件判別において、DN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置は第21の条件判別が真であるか偽であるかを判定する。DN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置は、第21の条件判別が真の場合は本手続きを継続してもよいし、第21の条件判別が偽の場合は本手続きを継続せず、拒絶を示すメッセージを、UPF_A235を介してSMF_A230に送信してもよい。 -DN_A5 and/or the device in DN_A5 receives the authentication/authorization request message. The DN_A5 and/or the device within the DN_A5 may perform the twenty-first condition determination based on the reception of the authentication/authorization request message. The twenty-first condition determination is for determining whether or not the DN_A5 and/or the device within the DN_A5 executes the PDU session authentication and/or authorization procedure by the DN_A5. In the 21st condition determination, the DN_A5 and/or the device within the DN_A5 determines whether the 21st condition determination is true or false. DN_A5 and/or the device in DN_A5 may continue this procedure if the 21st condition determination is true, or do not continue this procedure if the 21st condition determination is false and reject the request. The indicated message may be sent to SMF_A230 via UPF_A235.
 次に、DN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置は、認証/承認要求メッセージの受信、及び/又は第21の条件判別に基づいて、UPF_A235を介してSMF_A230に認証/承認要求(authentication/authorization Request)メッセージを送信する(S1102)。 Next, the device in DN_A5 and/or DN_A5 receives an authentication/authorization request message, and/or based on the 21st condition determination, based on the 21st condition determination, authentication/authorization request (authentication/authorizationRequest) to SMF_A230 via UPF_A235. Send the message (S1102).
 具体的には、DN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置は、N6インタフェースを用いてUPF_A235に、認証/承認要求メッセージを送信する。UPF_A235は、認証/承認要求メッセージを受信すると、N4インタフェースを用いて、SMF_A230に、認証/承認要求メッセージを送信又は転送する。 Specifically, DN_A5 and/or the device in DN_A5 sends an authentication/authorization request message to UPF_A235 using the N6 interface. Upon receiving the authentication/authorization request message, UPF_A235 transmits or transfers the authentication/authorization request message to SMF_A230 using the N4 interface.
 SMF_A230は、認証/承認要求メッセージの受信に基づいて、AMF_A240を介してUE_A10にPDUセッション認証要求(PDU session authentication request)メッセージを送信する(S1104)。 Based on the reception of the authentication/authorization request message, SMF_A230 sends a PDU session authentication request message to UE_A10 via AMF_A240 (S1104).
 具体的には、SMF_A230は、N11インタフェースを用いてAMF_A240にPDUセッション認証要求メッセージを送信し、PDUセッション認証要求メッセージを受信したAMF_A240が、N1インタフェースを用いてUE_A10にPDUセッション認証要求メッセージを送信する。 Specifically, the SMF_A230 sends a PDU session authentication request message to the AMF_A240 using the N11 interface, and the AMF_A240 receiving the PDU session authentication request message sends a PDU session authentication request message to the UE_A10 using the N1 interface. ..
 尚、PDUセッション認証要求メッセージは、これに限らず、DN_A5によるPDUセッションの認証/承認を要求することを示すメッセージであればよい。 Note that the PDU session authentication request message is not limited to this, and may be a message indicating that PDU session authentication/authorization by DN_A5 is requested.
 ここで、SMF_A230は、PDUセッション認証要求メッセージに、第62の識別情報を含めてもよいし、これらの識別情報を含めることで、DN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置の要求を示してもよい。 Here, the SMF_A230 may include the 62nd identification information in the PDU session authentication request message, or may include the identification information to indicate the request of the DN_A5 and/or the device in the DN_A5. ..
 さらに、SMF_A230は、第62の識別情報をPDUセッション認証要求メッセージに含めて送信することで、DN_A5が、PDUセッション、及び/又はUE_A10、及び/又はアプリケーションに対する認証、及び/又は承認を実施することを示してもよいし、UE_A10、及び/又はアプリケーション、及び/又はユーザによるDN_A5の認証/承認情報の確認、及び/又は選択を必要としていることを示してもよい。 Furthermore, SMF_A230, by including the 62nd identification information in the PDU session authentication request message and transmitting, DN_A5 performs authentication and/or authorization for the PDU session and/or UE_A10 and/or application. May be indicated, or UE_A10 and/or application and/or user may indicate that the authentication/authorization information of DN_A5 needs to be confirmed and/or selected.
 尚、SMF_A230は、第62の識別情報をPDUセッション認証要求メッセージに入れるかを、受信した識別情報、及び/又は、ネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー等のポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態に基づいて決定してもよい。 Note that the SMF_A230 determines whether to include the 62nd identification information in the PDU session authentication request message, the received identification information and/or network capability information, and/or a policy such as an operator policy, and/or a network state. May be determined based on.
 例えば、SMF_A230は、登録手続き、及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、第61の識別情報を含むPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを受信した場合に、第62の識別情報をPDUセッション認証要求メッセージに含めて送信してもよい。尚、どの識別情報をPDUセッション認証要求メッセージに入れるかのSMF_A230による決定はこれに限らない。 For example, when the SMF_A230 receives the PDU session establishment request message including the 61st identification information in the registration procedure and/or the PDU session establishment procedure, the SMF_A230 sends the PDU session authentication request message including the 62nd identification information. You may. The determination by SMF_A230 which identification information should be included in the PDU session authentication request message is not limited to this.
 UE_A10は、PDUセッション認証要求メッセージを受信する。UE_A10は、PDUセッション認証要求メッセージを受信することで、PDUセッション認証要求メッセージに含まれる各種の識別情報の内容を認識する。 UE_A10 receives the PDU session authentication request message. By receiving the PDU session authentication request message, the UE_A10 recognizes the contents of various identification information included in the PDU session authentication request message.
 UE_A10は、PDUセッション認証要求メッセージの受信に基づいて、さらに、第5の処理を実施する(S1106)。尚、UE_A10は、第5の処理を、PDUセッション認証受諾メッセージの送信に基づいて実施してもよいし、PDUセッション認証拒絶メッセージの送信に基づいて実施してもよいし、本手続きの完了に基づいて実施してもよい。 UE_A10 further executes the fifth process based on the reception of the PDU session authentication request message (S1106). Note that the UE_A10 may perform the fifth process based on the transmission of the PDU session authentication acceptance message or the PDU session authentication rejection message, or upon completion of this procedure. You may implement based on.
 ここで、第5の処理は、UE_A10が、SMF_A230によって示された事柄を認識する処理であってよい。さらに、第5の処理は、UE_A10が、受信した識別情報をコンテキストとして記憶する処理であってもよいし、受信した識別情報を上位層、及び/又は下位層に転送する処理であってもよい。 Here, the fifth process may be a process in which the UE_A10 recognizes the matter indicated by the SMF_A230. Further, the fifth process, UE_A10 may be a process of storing the received identification information as a context, or may be a process of transferring the received identification information to an upper layer, and/or a lower layer. ..
 さらに、第5の処理は、UE_A10が、第62の識別情報が示す認証/承認情報が適切であるか否かを判断する処理であってもよいし、受信した第62の識別情報が示す認証/承認情報が適切であるか否かを示す情報を第63の識別情報に入れる処理であってもよい。 Further, the fifth process, UE_A10 may be a process of determining whether the authentication/approval information indicated by the 62nd identification information is appropriate, or the authentication indicated by the received 62nd identification information. /It may be a process of inserting information indicating whether or not the approval information is appropriate in the 63rd identification information.
 さらに、第5の処理は、UE_A10が、第62の識別情報が示す認証/承認情報がDNの認証/許可情報であると認識する処理であってもよいし、受信した第62の識別情報に対する応答を示す情報を第63の識別情報に入れる処理であってもよいし、受信した第62の識別情報と同じ認証/承認情報を第63の識別情報に入れる処理であってもよい。 Further, the fifth process, UE_A10 may be a process of recognizing that the authentication/approval information indicated by the 62nd identification information is DN authentication/permission information, or the received 62nd identification information. It may be a process of inserting information indicating a response into the 63rd identification information, or a process of inserting the same authentication/authorization information as the received 62nd identification information into the 63rd identification information.
 さらに、第5の処理は、UE_A10が、第62の識別情報が示す認証/承認情報の中から適切な認証/承認情報を選択する処理であってもよいし、第62の識別情報を基に選択した認証/承認情報を第63の識別情報に入れる処理であってもよい。 Furthermore, the fifth process, UE_A10 may be a process of selecting appropriate authentication / authorization information from the authentication / authorization information indicated by the 62nd identification information, based on the 62nd identification information. It may be a process of inserting the selected authentication/authorization information into the 63rd identification information.
 さらに、第5の処理は、UE_A10が上位層、及び/又はユーザに第62の識別情報を通知する処理であってもよいし、第62の識別情報が通知された上位層、及び/又はユーザが第62の識別情報が示す認証/承認情報の中から適切な認証/承認情報を選択する処理であってもよい。 Further, the fifth process may be a process in which UE_A10 notifies the upper layer, and/or the user of the 62nd identification information, or the upper layer notified of the 62nd identification information, and/or the user. May be a process of selecting appropriate authentication/approval information from the authentication/approval information indicated by the 62nd identification information.
 さらに、第5の処理は、UE_A10が、通知された第62の情報を基に選択された認証/承認情報を上位層、及び/又はユーザから取得する処理であってもよいし、上位層、及び/又はユーザから取得した認証/承認情報を第63の識別情報に入れる処理であってもよい。 Further, the fifth process, UE_A10 may be a process of acquiring authentication/authorization information selected based on the notified 62nd information from the upper layer, and/or the user, or an upper layer, And/or the authentication/authorization information acquired from the user may be included in the 63rd identification information.
 さらに、第5の処理は、UE_A10が、第22の条件判別を実行する処理であってもよい。尚、第5の処理はこれらの処理に限らなくてもよい。 Furthermore, the fifth process may be a process in which the UE_A10 executes the 22nd condition determination. The fifth process is not limited to these processes.
 UE_A10は、PDUセッション認証/承認要求メッセージの受信、及び/又は第5の処理の完了に基づいて、第22の条件判別を実行する。第22の条件判別は、UE_A10がDN_A5によるPDUセッションの認証、及び/又は承認の手続きを受諾するか否かを判断する為のものである。第22の条件判別において、UE_A10は第22の条件判別が真であるか偽であるかを判定する。UE_A10は、第22の条件判別が真の場合は本手続き中の(A)の手続きを開始し、第22の条件判別が偽の場合は本手続き中の(B)の手続きを開始する。尚、第22の条件判別が偽の場合のステップは後述する。 UE_A10 executes the 22nd condition determination based on the reception of the PDU session authentication/authorization request message and/or the completion of the 5th process. The 22nd condition determination is for determining whether or not the UE_A10 accepts the procedure of authenticating and/or approving the PDU session by the DN_A5. In the 22nd condition determination, the UE_A 10 determines whether the 22nd condition determination is true or false. UE_A10 starts the procedure (A) in this procedure when the 22nd condition determination is true, and starts the procedure (B) in this procedure when the 22nd condition determination is false. The steps in the case where the 22nd condition determination is false will be described later.
 以下、第22の条件判別が真の場合のステップ、すなわち本手続き中の(A)の手続きの各ステップを説明する。UE_A10は、PDUセッション認証/承認要求メッセージの受信、及び/又は第5の処理の完了、及び/又は第22の条件判別に基づいて、AMF_A240を介してSMF_A230にPDUセッション認証受諾(PDU session authentication accept)メッセージを送信する(S1108)。 The following describes the steps when the 22nd condition judgment is true, that is, each step of the procedure (A) in this procedure. UE_A10 receives the PDU session authentication/authorization request message, and/or completes the fifth process, and/or based on the twenty-second condition determination, based on AMF_A240 to SMF_A230, PDU session authentication acceptance (PDU session authentication accept) ) Send the message (S1108).
 具体的には、UE_A10は、N1インタフェースを用いてAMF_A240にPDUセッション認証受諾メッセージを送信し、PDUセッション認証受諾メッセージを受信したAMF_A240が、N11インタフェースを用いてSMF_A230にPDUセッション認証受諾メッセージを送信する。 Specifically, UE_A10 transmits a PDU session authentication acceptance message to AMF_A240 using the N1 interface, and AMF_A240 that receives the PDU session authentication acceptance message transmits a PDU session authentication acceptance message to SMF_A230 using the N11 interface. ..
 尚、PDUセッション認証受諾メッセージは、N1インタフェース、及びN11インタフェース上で送受信されるNASメッセージであってよい。また、PDUセッション認証受諾メッセージは、PDUセッション認証要求メッセージに対する応答メッセージであればよく、これに限らず、PDUセッション確立認証/承認手続きが受諾されたことを示すメッセージであればよい。 Note that the PDU session authentication acceptance message may be a NAS message transmitted/received on the N1 interface and the N11 interface. Further, the PDU session authentication acceptance message may be a response message to the PDU session authentication request message, and is not limited to this, and may be a message indicating that the PDU session establishment authentication/approval procedure has been accepted.
 ここで、UE_A10は、PDUセッション認証受諾メッセージに、第63の識別情報を含めてもよいし、これらの識別情報を含めることで、ネットワークの要求が受諾されたことを示してもよい。 Here, UE_A10 may include the 63rd identification information in the PDU session authentication acceptance message, or may include the identification information to indicate that the network request has been accepted.
 さらに、UE_A10は、第63の識別情報をPDUセッション認証受諾メッセージに含めて送信することで、UE_A10、及び/又はアプリケーション、及び/又はユーザが、DN_A5の認証/承認情報を、確認したことを示してもよいし、受諾したことを示してもよいし、選択したことを示してもよい。 Further, UE_A10, by including the 63rd identification information included in the PDU session authentication acceptance message, UE_A10, and / or application, and / or user, authentication / authorization information of DN_A5, indicates that. May be shown, the acceptance may be shown, or the selection may be shown.
 尚、UE_A10は、第63の識別情報をPDUセッション認証受諾メッセージに入れるかを、受信した識別情報、及び/又は、UE_A10の能力情報、及び/又はUE_A10のポリシー、及び/又はUE_A10の状態に基づいて決定してもよい。 Incidentally, UE_A10, whether to put the 63rd identification information in the PDU session authentication acceptance message, received identification information, and / or, UE_A10 capability information, and / or UE_A10 policy, and / or based on the state of UE_A10 You may decide.
 例えば、UE_A10は、第62の識別情報を受信した場合、及び/又は受信した第62の識別情報を受諾することができる場合、第63の識別情報をPDUセッション認証受諾メッセージに含めて送信してもよい。尚、どの識別情報をPDUセッション認証受諾メッセージに入れるかのUE_A10による決定はこれに限らない。 For example, UE_A10, if the 62nd identification information is received, and/or if the received 62nd identification information can be accepted, the 63rd identification information is included in the PDU session authentication acceptance message and transmitted. Good. Note that the determination by the UE_A 10 which identification information should be included in the PDU session authentication acceptance message is not limited to this.
 SMF_A230は、PDUセッション認証受諾メッセージを受信する。さらに、各装置は、PDUセッション認証受諾メッセージの送受信に基づいて、本手続き中の(A)の手続きを完了する。 ㆍSMF_A230 receives the PDU session authentication acceptance message. Furthermore, each device completes the procedure (A) in this procedure based on the transmission and reception of the PDU session authentication acceptance message.
 次に、第22の条件判別が偽の場合のステップ、すなわち本手続き中の(B)の手続きの各ステップを説明する。UE_A10は、PDUセッション認証/承認要求メッセージの受信、及び/又は第5の処理の完了、及び/又は第22の条件判別に基づいて、AMF_A240を介してSMF_A230にPDUセッション認証拒絶 (PDU session authentication reject)メッセージを送信する(S1110)。 Next, the steps when the 22nd condition judgment is false, that is, each step of the procedure (B) in this procedure will be described. The UE_A10 receives the PDU session authentication/authorization request message, and/or completes the fifth process, and/or based on the twenty-second condition determination, based on the AMF_A240 to the SMF_A230, the PDU session authentication rejection (PDU session authenticationreject). ) Send the message (S1110).
 具体的には、UE_A10は、N1インタフェースを用いてAMF_A240にPDUセッション認証拒絶メッセージを送信し、PDUセッション認証拒絶メッセージを受信したAMF_A240が、N11インタフェースを用いてSMF_A230にPDUセッション認証拒絶メッセージを送信する。 Specifically, UE_A10 sends a PDU session authentication reject message to AMF_A240 using the N1 interface, and AMF_A240 that receives the PDU session authentication reject message sends a PDU session authentication reject message to SMF_A230 using the N11 interface. ..
 尚、PDUセッション認証拒絶メッセージは、N1インタフェース、及びN11インタフェース上で送受信されるNASメッセージであってよい。また、PDUセッション認証拒絶メッセージは、PDUセッション認証要求メッセージに対する応答メッセージであればよく、これに限らず、PDUセッション確立認証/承認手続きが拒絶されたことを示すメッセージであればよい。 Note that the PDU session authentication rejection message may be a NAS message transmitted/received on the N1 interface and the N11 interface. Further, the PDU session authentication rejection message may be a response message to the PDU session authentication request message, and is not limited to this, and may be a message indicating that the PDU session establishment authentication/authorization procedure is rejected.
 ここで、UE_A10は、PDUセッション認証拒絶メッセージに、PDUセッション認証要求メッセージが拒絶された理由を示す情報を含めてもよいし、これらの識別情報を含めることで、ネットワークの要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。 Here, UE_A10 may include information indicating the reason why the PDU session authentication request message is rejected in the PDU session authentication rejection message, or by including these identification information, the network request is rejected. May be indicated.
 さらに、UE_A10は、PDUセッション認証要求メッセージが拒絶された理由を示す情報をPDUセッション認証受諾メッセージに含めて送信することで、UE_A10、及び/又はアプリケーション、及び/又はユーザが、DN_A5の認証/承認情報を、受諾できないことを示してもよいし、選択できないことを示してもよい。 Further, UE_A10, by including the information indicating the reason why the PDU session authentication request message is rejected in the PDU session authentication acceptance message, UE_A10, and / or application, and / or user, DN / A5 authentication / authorization. The information may indicate unacceptable or unselectable.
 尚、UE_A10は、PDUセッション認証要求メッセージが拒絶された理由のうち、どの識別情報をPDUセッション認証拒絶メッセージに入れるかを、受信した識別情報、及び/又は、UE_A10の能力情報、及び/又はUE_A10のポリシー、及び/又はUE_A10の状態に基づいて決定してもよい。尚、どの識別情報をPDUセッション認証拒絶メッセージに入れるかのUE_A10による決定はこれに限らない。 Incidentally, UE_A10 is, among the reasons that the PDU session authentication request message is rejected, which identification information to put in the PDU session authentication rejection message, the received identification information, and/or capability information of UE_A10, and/or UE_A10. Policy and/or the state of UE_A10. Note that the determination by the UE_A 10 which identification information is included in the PDU session authentication rejection message is not limited to this.
 SMF_A230は、PDUセッション認証拒絶メッセージを受信する。さらに、各装置は、PDUセッション認証拒絶メッセージの送受信に基づいて、本手続き中の(B)の手続きを完了する。 ㆍSMF_A230 receives the PDU session authentication rejection message. Further, each device completes the procedure (B) in this procedure based on the transmission and reception of the PDU session authentication rejection message.
 SMF_A230は、本手続き中の(A)の手続きの完了、及び/又は本手続き中の(B)の手続きの完了に基づいて、認証/承認応答(Authentication/Authorization Response)メッセージを、UPF_A235を介してDN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置に送信する(S1112)。言い換えると、SMF_A230は、PDUセッション認証受諾メッセージの受信、及び/又はPDUセッション認証拒絶メッセージの受信に基づいて、認証/承認応答メッセージを、UPF_A235を介してDN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置に送信する。 SMF_A230 sends an Authentication/Authorization Response message via UPF_A235 based on the completion of the procedure (A) in this procedure and/or the completion of the procedure (B) in this procedure. It transmits to DN_A5 and/or the device in DN_A5 (S1112). In other words, SMF_A230 sends an authentication/authorization response message via UPF_A235 to the devices in DN_A5 and/or DN_A5 based on receiving the PDU session authentication accept message and/or receiving the PDU session authentication reject message. To do.
 具体的には、SMF_A230は、N4インタフェースを用いてUPF_A235に、認証/承認応答メッセージを送信する。UPF_A235は、認証/承認応答メッセージを受信すると、N6インタフェースを用いて、DN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置に、認証/承認応答メッセージを送信又は転送する。 Specifically, SMF_A230 sends an authentication/authorization response message to UPF_A235 using the N4 interface. Upon receiving the authentication/authorization response message, the UPF_A235 transmits or transfers the authentication/authorization response message to the DN_A5 and/or the device within the DN_A5 using the N6 interface.
 尚、認証/承認応答メッセージ交換を含むDN_A5に対する認証/承認のリソース公開は、オペレータがDN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5上でサービスを提供するサービス事業者に提供するAPI(Application Programming Interface)であってもよい。また、認証/承認応答メッセージは、SMF_A230、及び/又はUPF_A235とDN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5に含まれる装置との間で送受信され、認証/承認要求メッセージに対する応答メッセージであればよく、これに限らない。 Even if the API (Application Programming Interface) provided by the operator to the service provider providing the service on DN_A5 and/or DN_A5, the resource disclosure of the authentication/authorization to DN_A5 including the authentication/authorization response message exchange is performed. Good. Further, the authentication/approval response message is transmitted/received between the SMF_A230 and/or UPF_A235 and the device included in DN_A5, and/or DN_A5, and may be any response message to the authentication/authorization request message, but is not limited to this. ..
 ここで、SMF_A230は、UE_A10、及び/又はコアネットワーク内の装置から受信した情報、及び/又はSMF_A230が保持する情報を認証/承認応答メッセージに含めて送信してもよいし、これらの識別情報を含めることで、UE_A10、及び/又はSMF_A230の要求を示してもよい。 Here, SMF_A230, UE_A10, and / or information received from the device in the core network, and / or SMF_A230 may be transmitted by including the information held in the authentication / authorization response message, the identification information of these. The inclusion may indicate the request of UE_A10 and/or SMF_A230.
 ここで、SMF_A230は、第63の識別情報を受信した場合、認証/承認応答メッセージに、第63の識別情報を含めてもよいし、これらの識別情報を含めることで、DN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置の要求が受諾されたことを示してもよい。また、PDUセッション認証要求メッセージが拒絶された理由を受信した場合、認証/承認応答メッセージに、PDUセッション認証要求メッセージが拒絶された理由を含めてもよいし、これらの識別情報を含めることで、DN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置の要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。 Here, when the SMF_A230 receives the 63rd identification information, the authentication/approval response message may include the 63rd identification information, or by including these identification information, DN_A5 and/or DN_A5. It may indicate that the request of the device within has been accepted. When the reason why the PDU session authentication request message is rejected is received, the authentication/authorization response message may include the reason why the PDU session authentication request message was rejected, or by including these identification information, It may indicate that the request for DN_A5 and/or the devices in DN_A5 has been denied.
 尚、SMF_A230は、どの識別情報を認証/承認応答メッセージに入れるかをPDUセッション認証受諾メッセージ、及び/又はPDUセッション認証拒絶メッセージの受信に基づいて取得した各識別情報に基づいて決定してもよい。尚、どの識別情報を認証/承認応答メッセージに入れるかのSMF_A230による決定はこれに限らない。 Note that the SMF_A230 may determine which identification information should be included in the authentication/authorization response message based on each identification information acquired based on the reception of the PDU session authentication acceptance message and/or the PDU session authentication rejection message. .. The determination by SMF_A230 which identification information should be included in the authentication/approval response message is not limited to this.
 DN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置は、認証/承認応答メッセージを受信する。さらに、各装置は、PDUセッション認証受諾メッセージの送受信、及び/又はPDUセッション認証拒絶メッセージの送受信、及び/又は認証/承認応答メッセージの送受信に基づいて、本手続きを完了する。尚、各装置は、本手続き中の(A)の手続きの完了に基づいて、PDUセッションがDN_A5によって認証、及び/又は承認された状態に遷移してもよいし、本手続き中の(B)の手続きの完了に基づいて、本手続きが拒絶されたことを認識してもよいし、PDUセッションがDN_A5によって認証、及び/又は承認されていない状態に遷移してもよい。 -DN_A5 and/or the device in DN_A5 receives the authentication/authorization response message. Furthermore, each device completes this procedure based on the transmission/reception of the PDU session authentication acceptance message and/or the transmission/reception of the PDU session authentication rejection message and/or the transmission/reception of the authentication/approval response message. It should be noted that each device may transit to a state in which the PDU session is authenticated and/or approved by DN_A5 based on the completion of the procedure (A) in this procedure, or (B) in this procedure. Based on the completion of the procedure of 1., it may be recognized that the procedure is rejected, and the PDU session may transit to a state in which it has not been authenticated and/or approved by DN_A5.
 さらに、各装置は、本手続きの完了に基づいて、本手続きで送受信した識別情報に基づいた処理を実施してもよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、本手続きの完了に基づいて、取得、及び/又は選択したDN_A5発行の認証/承認情報を適応してもよい。 Furthermore, each device may perform processing based on the identification information transmitted and received in this procedure based on the completion of this procedure. In other words, the UE_A10 may adapt the acquired and/or selected DN_A5 issued authentication/authorization information based on the completion of this procedure.
 また、第21の条件判別は、認証/承認要求メッセージに含まれる識別情報、及び/又は加入者情報、及び/又はDN_A5のポリシーに基づいて実行されてもよい。例えば、第21の条件判別は、UE_A10の要求をDN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置が許可する場合、真でよい。また、第21の条件判別は、UE_A10の要求をDN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置が許可しない場合、偽でよい。さらに、第21の条件判別は、UE_A10の接続先のDN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置が、DN_A5によるPDUセッションの認証、及び/又は承認のための機能を、サポートしている場合は真でよく、サポートしていない場合は偽でよい。尚、第21の条件判別の真偽が決まる条件は前述した条件に限らなくてもよい。 The 21st condition determination may be performed based on the identification information and/or subscriber information included in the authentication/authorization request message and/or the DN_A5 policy. For example, the 21st condition determination may be true when the request of UE_A10 is granted by DN_A5 and/or the device in DN_A5. The twenty-first condition determination may be false if the request of UE_A10 is not permitted by DN_A5 and/or the device within DN_A5. Furthermore, the 21st condition determination is true if the device in the DN_A5 to which the UE_A10 is connected, and/or the device in the DN_A5 supports the function for authenticating and/or authorizing the PDU session by the DN_A5. Well, false if not supported. The condition that determines the truth of the 21st condition determination is not limited to the above-described condition.
 また、第22の条件判別は、PDUセッション認証要求メッセージに含まれる識別情報、及び/又はUE_A10の能力情報、及び/又はUE_A10のポリシー、及び/又はUE_A10の状態に基づいて実行されてもよい。例えば、第22の条件判別は、DN_A5によるPDUセッションの認証、及び/又は承認の要求をUE_A10が許可する場合、真でよい。また、第22の条件判別は、DN_A5によるPDUセッションの認証、及び/又は承認の要求をUE_A10が許可しない場合、偽でよい。尚、第22の条件判別の真偽が決まる条件は前述した条件に限らなくてもよい。 The 22nd condition determination may be performed based on the identification information included in the PDU session authentication request message, and/or the capability information of UE_A10, and/or the policy of UE_A10, and/or the state of UE_A10. For example, the 22nd condition determination may be true when UE_A10 permits a request for authentication and/or authorization of a PDU session by DN_A5. The twenty-second condition determination may be false if the UE_A10 does not permit the PDU session authentication and/or authorization request by the DN_A5. The condition that determines the authenticity of the 22nd condition determination is not limited to the above-described condition.
 [1.3.4.RQoS有効化(活性化)手続きの概要]
 次に、ユーザデータ通信に対するRQoSを有効化(活性化)するために行うRQoS有効化(活性化)手続きの概要について説明する。本章では、RQoS有効化手続きは、本手続きとも称する。本手続きは、各装置がユーザデータ通信に対するRQoSを有効化する為の手続きである。本手続きは、UE_A10が主導して開始する、UE主導で制御されるRQoS有効化手続きと、コアネットワーク内の装置が主導して開始するネットワーク主導で制御されるRQoS有効化手続きとがある。
[1.3.4. Overview of RQoS activation (activation) procedure]
Next, an outline of an RQoS activation (activation) procedure performed to activate (activate) RQoS for user data communication will be described. In this chapter, the RQoS activation procedure is also referred to as this procedure. This procedure is a procedure for each device to enable RQoS for user data communication. This procedure includes a UE-controlled RQoS activation procedure initiated by UE_A10 and a network-initiated RQoS activation procedure initiated by a device in the core network.
 尚、各装置は、本手続きを、PDUセッションを確立した状態で実行してもよいし、ユーザデータ通信の中で実行してもよい。また、各装置は、PDUセッション確立手続き後の任意のタイミングで本手続きを開始してもよい。また、各装置は、RQoS有効化手続きの完了に基づいて、ユーザデータ通信に対するRQoSを有効化してもよいし、RQoSを用いたユーザデータ通信を実施してもよい。尚、ユーザデータ通信に対するRQoSを有効化するとは、ユーザデータ通信に対するRQoSをコントロールするということであってもよいし、特定のユーザデータフローに対してRQoSを有効化するということであってもよい。さらに、ユーザデータ通信に対するRQoSを有効化するとは、UE_A10が、受信した下りリンクパケット、及び/又は下りリンクパケットに含まれる識別情報に基づいて、上りリンクトラフィック、及び/又は上りリンクパケットのためのQoSルール(Derived QoS Ruleとも称する)を作成し、作成したQoSルールの使用を開始することであってもよい。 Note that each device may execute this procedure in a state where a PDU session is established, or may be executed during user data communication. Also, each device may start this procedure at any timing after the PDU session establishment procedure. Further, each device may activate RQoS for user data communication based on the completion of the RQoS activation procedure, or may perform user data communication using RQoS. Note that enabling RQoS for user data communication may mean controlling RQoS for user data communication, or may be enabling RQoS for a specific user data flow. .. Further, to enable RQoS for user data communication, UE_A10, the downlink packet received, and / or based on the identification information contained in the downlink packet, for the uplink traffic, and / or for the uplink packet It may be that a QoS rule (also referred to as Derived QoS Rule) is created and the use of the created QoS rule is started.
 ここで、本手続きは、各装置が、ユーザデータ通信に対するRQoSを、User planeを介して有効化する為の手続きであってもよく、User Planeを介して制御されるRQoS有効化手続きと称してもよい。 Here, this procedure may be a procedure for each device to activate RQoS for user data communication via the User plane, and is referred to as an RQoS activation procedure controlled via the User Plane. Good.
 [1.3.4.1.UE主導で制御されるRQoS有効化手続き例]
 図12を用いて、UE主導で制御されるRQoS有効化手続きを実行する手順の例を説明する。本章では、UE主導で制御されるRQoS有効化手続きは、本手続きとも称する。尚、本手続きは、UE主導のUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoS有効化手続きと称してもよい。本手続きの各ステップについて説明する。まず、UE_A10は、NR node_A122を介してUPF_A235に上りリンクパケットを送信することにより(S1200)、UE主導で制御されるRQoS有効化手続きを開始する。
[1.3.4.1. Example of RQoS activation procedure controlled by UE]
An example of the procedure for executing the RQoS activation procedure controlled by the UE will be described with reference to FIG. In this chapter, the UE-controlled RQoS activation procedure is also referred to as this procedure. It should be noted that this procedure may be referred to as an RQoS activation procedure controlled via the UE-initiated User Plane. Each step of this procedure will be described. First, UE_A10 starts the RQoS activation procedure controlled by the UE by transmitting an uplink packet to UPF_A235 via NR node_A122 (S1200).
 具体的には、UE_A10は、無線ベアラ、及び/又はN3インタフェース、及び/又はN9インタフェースを用いてUPF_A235に上りリンクパケットを送信する。ここで、UE_A10は、UE_A10が保持する情報に基づき、ルーティング先のUPF_A235を選択してもよい。より詳細には、UE_A10は、上りリンクパケットのルーティング情報と、UE_A10が保持するルーティングルール、及び/又はQoSルールとを比較することで、上りリンクパケットの送信に用いるQoSフロー、及び/又はUPF_A235を選択してもよい。尚、UE_A10は、上りリンクパケットのルーティング情報に合致するルーティングルール、及び/又はQoSルールがない場合、デフォルトのルーティングルール、及び/又はデフォルトのQoSルール用いて上りリンクパケットの送信に用いるQoSフロー、及び/又はUPF_A235を選択してもよい。尚、デフォルトのQoSルールには、QoSルールID(QoS rule identifier)、QoSフローのQFI、1以上のパケットフィルター、先行値を含んで構成される。ただし、デフォルトのQoSルールは、これらの構成要素のうち、パケットフィルターを含めずに構成される場合もあり、この場合は、先行値を最大の値に設定する。つまり、優先度は最低にする。 Specifically, UE_A10 transmits an uplink packet to UPF_A235 using a radio bearer and/or N3 interface and/or N9 interface. Here, the UE_A10 may select the routing destination UPF_A235 based on the information held by the UE_A10. More specifically, UE_A10, by comparing the routing information of the uplink packet, the routing rule that UE_A10 holds, and / or QoS rule, the QoS flow used to transmit the uplink packet, and / or UPF_A235. You may choose. Incidentally, UE_A10, the routing rule that matches the routing information of the uplink packet, and / or if there is no QoS rule, the default routing rule, and / or QoS flow used to transmit the uplink packet using the default QoS rule, And/or UPF_A235 may be selected. The default QoS rule is configured to include a QoS rule ID (QoS rule identifier), a QFI of a QoS flow, a packet filter of 1 or more, and a preceding value. However, the default QoS rule may be configured without the packet filter among these components, and in this case, the preceding value is set to the maximum value. That is, the priority should be the lowest.
 ここで、上りリンクパケットのルーティング情報は、アプリケーションを識別する情報であってもよいし、5タプルであってもよい。より詳細には、上りリンクパケットのルーティング情報は、送信先のIPアドレス(target IP address)、及び/又は送信元のIPアドレス(source IP address)、及び/又はプロトコル番号(protocol number)、及び/又は送信先のポート番号(target port number)、及び/又は送信元のポート番号(source port number)であってもよいし、これらを組合せた情報であってもよい。尚、上りリンクパケットのルーティング情報は、これらに限らない。 Here, the routing information of the uplink packet may be information for identifying the application or may be a 5-tuple. More specifically, the routing information of the uplink packet is a destination IP address (target IP address), and/or a source IP address (source IP address), and/or a protocol number (protocol number), and/or Alternatively, it may be a destination port number (target port number) and/or a source port number (source port number), or may be information combining these. The routing information of the uplink packet is not limited to this.
 さらに、上りリンクパケットは、ユーザデータ通信において、UE_A10からアクセスネットワーク、及び/又はコアネットワーク、及び/又はDN_A5に対して送信されるメッセージであってもよい。従って、上りリンクパケットに識別情報を含めるということは、上りリンクパケットのヘッダに識別情報を含めるということであってもよいし、上りリンクパケットのメッセージのヘッダに識別情報を含めるということであってもよいし、上りリンクパケットのメッセージに識別情報を含めるということであってもよい。なお、UE_A10は、DN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置に送信すべき上りリンクパケットがない場合、ダミーの上りリンクパケットをUPF_A235に送信してもよい。 Further, the uplink packet may be a message transmitted from the UE_A10 to the access network and/or the core network and/or the DN_A5 in the user data communication. Therefore, including the identification information in the uplink packet may mean including the identification information in the header of the uplink packet, or including the identification information in the header of the message of the uplink packet. Alternatively, the identification information may be included in the message of the uplink packet. Note that the UE_A10 may transmit a dummy uplink packet to the UPF_A235 when there is no uplink packet to be transmitted to the DN_A5 and/or the device in the DN_A5.
 ここで、UE_A10は、上りリンクパケットに、第41の識別情報、及び/又は第42の識別情報を含めてもよいし、これらの識別情報を含めることで、ユーザデータ通信に対するRQoSの有効化を要求することを示してもよい。 Here, UE_A10, the uplink packet, may include the 41st identification information, and / or 42nd identification information, by including these identification information, to enable the RQoS for user data communication. The request may be indicated.
 さらに、UE_A10は、第41の識別情報、及び/又は第42の識別情報を上りリンクパケットに含めて送信することで、UE主導でユーザデータ通信に対するRQoSを有効化することを要求してもよい。 Furthermore, UE_A10 may request to enable RQoS for user data communication by UE, by transmitting by including the 41st identification information and/or the 42nd identification information in the uplink packet. ..
 さらに、UE_A10は、第41の識別情報、及び/又は第42の識別情報を上りリンクパケットに含めて送信することで、上りリンクパケットのルーティング情報で示される上りリンクパケットの送受信で用いられるQoSフローを、第42の識別情報が示すQoSフローに変更することを要求してもよい。 Further, UE_A10, the 41st identification information, and / or by transmitting the 42nd identification information included in the uplink packet, the QoS flow used in the transmission and reception of the uplink packet indicated by the routing information of the uplink packet. May be requested to be changed to the QoS flow indicated by the 42nd identification information.
 尚、UE_A10は、第41の識別情報、第42の識別情報のうち、どの識別情報を上りリンクパケットに入れるかを、UE_A10の能力情報、及び/又はUEポリシー等のポリシー、及び/又はUE_A10のプリファレンスに基づいて決定してもよい。尚、どの識別情報を上りリンクパケットに入れるかのUE_A10による決定はこれに限らない。 Incidentally, UE_A10, the 41st identification information, of the 42nd identification information, which identification information to put in the uplink packet, capability information of UE_A10, and / or policies such as UE policy, and / or UE_A10. You may decide based on a preference. Note that the determination by the UE_A 10 which identification information should be included in the uplink packet is not limited to this.
 UPF_A235は、上りリンクパケットを受信する(S1200)。UPF_A235は、上りリンクパケットの受信に基づいて、DN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5に含まれる装置に受信した上りリンクパケットを転送してもよい。 UPF_A235 receives the uplink packet (S1200). UPF_A235 may transfer the received uplink packet to DN_A5 and/or a device included in DN_A5 based on the reception of the uplink packet.
 次に、UPF_A235は、上りリンクパケットの受信、及び/又は上りリンクパケットの転送に基づいて、SMF_A230に要求通知メッセージを送信する(S1202)。具体的には、UPF_A235は、N4インタフェースを用いてSMF_A230に要求通知メッセージを送信する。さらに、要求通知メッセージは、ユーザデータ通信に対するRQoSの有効化の要求を示すメッセージであれば、これに限らない。 Next, UPF_A235 transmits a request notification message to SMF_A230 based on reception of an uplink packet and/or transfer of an uplink packet (S1202). Specifically, UPF_A235 sends a request notification message to SMF_A230 using the N4 interface. Furthermore, the request notification message is not limited to this as long as it is a message indicating a request to enable RQoS for user data communication.
 ここで、UPF_A235は、要求通知メッセージに、受信した上りリンクパケットに含まれる識別情報を含めてもよい。言い換えると、UPF_A235は、要求通知メッセージに、受信した第41の識別情報、及び/又は第42の識別情報を含めて送信してもよいし、これらの識別情報を送信することで、ユーザデータ通信に対するRQoSの有効化を要求することを示してもよい。 Here, UPF_A235 may include the identification information included in the received uplink packet in the request notification message. In other words, the UPF_A235 may transmit the request notification message by including the received 41st identification information and/or the 42nd identification information, or by transmitting these identification information, user data communication May be indicated to require RQoS activation for.
 SMF_A230は、要求通知メッセージを受信し(S1202)、第31の条件判別を実行する。第31の条件判別は、SMF_A230が、UE_A10の要求を受諾するか否かを判断する為のものである。第31の条件判別において、SMF_A230は第31の条件判別が真であるか偽であるかを判定する。SMF_A230は、第31の条件判別が真の場合(すなわち、UE_A10の要求を受諾する場合)は、本手続き中の(A)の手続きを開始し、第31の条件判別が偽の場合(すなわち、UE_A10の要求を拒絶する場合)は、本手続き中の(B)の手続きを開始する。尚、第31の条件判別が偽の場合のステップは後述する。 SMF_A230 receives the request notification message (S1202) and executes the 31st condition determination. The 31st condition determination is for the SMF_A230 to determine whether to accept the request from the UE_A10. In the 31st condition determination, the SMF_A 230 determines whether the 31st condition determination is true or false. SMF_A230, if the 31st condition determination is true (that is, if accepting the request of UE_A10), start the procedure of (A) in this procedure, if the 31st condition determination is false (that is, If the request from UE_A10 is rejected), the procedure (B) in this procedure is started. The steps in the case where the 31st condition determination is false will be described later.
 以下、第31の条件判別が真の場合のステップ、すなわち本手続き中の(A)の手続きの各ステップを説明する。SMF_A230は、第31の条件判別、及び/又は要求通知メッセージの受信に基づいて、UPF_A235にRQoS有効化通知メッセージを送信し(S1204)、本手続き中の(A)の手続きを開始する。具体的には、SMF_A230は、N4インタフェースを用いてUPF_A235にRQoS有効化通知メッセージを送信する。尚、RQoS有効化通知メッセージは、これに限らず、ユーザデータ通信に対するRQoSの有効化を示すメッセージであればよい。 The following describes the steps when the 31st condition determination is true, that is, each step of the procedure (A) in this procedure. The SMF_A230 transmits the RQoS activation notification message to the UPF_A235 based on the 31st condition determination and/or the reception of the request notification message (S1204), and starts the procedure (A) in this procedure. Specifically, the SMF_A230 sends an RQoS activation notification message to the UPF_A235 using the N4 interface. The RQoS activation notification message is not limited to this, and may be a message indicating the activation of RQoS for user data communication.
 ここで、SMF_A230は、RQoS有効化通知メッセージに、第31の識別情報、及び/又は第32の識別情報を含めてもよいし、これらの識別情報を含めることで、UE_A10の要求が受諾されたことを示してもよい。 Here, SMF_A230, the RQoS activation notification message, may include the 31st identification information, and / or 32nd identification information, by including these identification information, the request of UE_A10 was accepted. May be indicated.
 さらに、SMF_A230は、第31の識別情報、及び/又は第32の識別情報をRQoS有効化通知メッセージに含めて送信することで、RQoSの有効化の要求を受諾したことを示してもよいし、RQoSを有効化することを示してもよい。 Further, SMF_A230, by including the 31st identification information, and / or 32nd identification information included in the RQoS activation notification message, may indicate that the request for RQoS activation is accepted, It may be indicated that RQoS is enabled.
 さらに、SMF_A230は、第31の識別情報、及び/又は第32の識別情報をRQoS有効化通知メッセージに含めて送信することで、特定の下りリンクパケットの送受信で用いられるQoSフローを、第32の識別情報が示すQoSフローに変更することを示してもよい。 Further, SMF_A230, by including the 31st identification information, and / or 32nd identification information included in the RQoS activation notification message, the QoS flow used in the transmission and reception of a specific downlink packet, the 32nd It may indicate to change to the QoS flow indicated by the identification information.
 尚、SMF_A230は、第31の識別情報、第32の識別情報のうち、どの識別情報をRQoS有効化通知メッセージに入れるかを、受信した識別情報、及び/又は、ネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー等のポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態に基づいて決定してもよい。 Incidentally, the SMF_A230, the 31st identification information, of the 32nd identification information, which identification information to put in the RQoS activation notification message, the received identification information, and/or network capability information, and/or It may be determined based on a policy such as an operator policy and/or the state of the network.
 例えば、SMF_A230は、第41の識別情報、及び/又は第42の識別情報を受信した場合、及び/又は受信した第41の識別情報、及び/又は第42の識別情報が示す要求を受諾する場合、第31の識別情報、及び/又は第32の識別情報をRQoS有効化通知メッセージに含めて送信してもよい。 For example, the SMF_A230, when receiving the 41st identification information, and/or the 42nd identification information, and/or accepting the request indicated by the received 41st identification information and/or the 42nd identification information , The 31st identification information, and/or the 32nd identification information may be included in the RQoS activation notification message and transmitted.
 尚、第32の識別情報は、第42の識別情報に基づいて決定されてもよい。言い換えると、第32の識別情報は、第42の識別情報が示すQoSフローと同じQoSフローを識別する情報であってもよいし、第42の識別情報が示すQoSフローとは異なるQoSフローを識別する情報であってもよい。尚、どの識別情報をRQoS有効化通知メッセージに入れるかのSMF_A230による決定はこれに限らない。 Note that the 32nd identification information may be determined based on the 42nd identification information. In other words, the 32nd identification information may be information identifying the same QoS flow as the QoS flow indicated by the 42nd identification information, or may identify a QoS flow different from the QoS flow indicated by the 42nd identification information. It may be information to be provided. The determination by SMF_A230 as to which identification information is included in the RQoS activation notification message is not limited to this.
 ここで、SMF_A230は、要求通知メッセージの受信に基づいて取得した各識別情報、及び/又はネットワークの能力情報、及び/又は加入者情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態、及び/又はSMF_A230が既に保持しているコンテキストに基づいて、RQoSのためのコンテキストを作成してもよい。 Here, SMF_A230, each identification information acquired based on the reception of the request notification message, and / or network capability information, and / or subscriber information, and / or operator policy, and / or network state, and / Alternatively, the context for RQoS may be created based on the context already held by SMF_A230.
 UPF_A235は、RQoS有効化通知メッセージを受信する(S1204)。UPF_A235は、RQoS有効化通知メッセージを受信することで、RQoS有効化通知メッセージに含まれる各種の識別情報の内容を認識する。UPF_A235は、RQoS有効化通知メッセージの受信で取得した各識別情報に基づいて、RQoSのためのQoSルール、及び/又はコンテキストを作成してもよい。 UPF_A235 receives the RQoS activation notification message (S1204). The UPF_A 235 recognizes the contents of various identification information included in the RQoS validation notification message by receiving the RQoS validation notification message. The UPF_A 235 may create a QoS rule and/or context for RQoS based on each piece of identification information acquired by receiving the RQoS activation notification message.
 さらに、UPF_A235は、DN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置が送信した下りリンクパケットを受信してもよい(S1206)。UPF_A235は、RQoS有効化通知メッセージの受信、及び/又はDN_A5からの下りリンクパケットの受信に基づいて、UE_A10に下りリンクパケットを送信する(S1206)。 Further, UPF_A235 may receive the downlink packet transmitted by DN_A5 and/or the device in DN_A5 (S1206). UPF_A235 transmits a downlink packet to UE_A10 based on the reception of the RQoS activation notification message and/or the reception of the downlink packet from DN_A5 (S1206).
 具体的には、UPF_A235は、N9インタフェース、及び/又はN3インタフェース、及び/又は無線ベアラを用いてUE_A10に下りリンクパケットを送信する。ここで、UPF_A235は、UPF_A235が保持する情報に基づき、ルーティング先のUE_A10を選択してもよい。より詳細には、UPF_A235は、下りリンクパケットのルーティング情報と、UPF_A235が保持するルーティングルール、及び/又はQoSルールとを比較することで、下りリンクパケットの送信に用いるQoSフロー、及び/又はUE_A10を選択してもよい。尚、UE_A10は、下りリンクパケットのルーティング情報に合致するルーティングルール、及び/又はQoSルールがない場合、デフォルトのルーティングルール、及び/又はデフォルトのQoSルールを用いて下りリンクパケットの送信に用いるQoSフロー、及び/又はUPF_A235を選択してもよい。 Specifically, UPF_A235 transmits downlink packets to UE_A10 using N9 interface and/or N3 interface and/or radio bearer. Here, the UPF_A 235 may select the UE_A 10 of the routing destination based on the information held by the UPF_A 235. More specifically, UPF_A235, by comparing the routing information of the downlink packet, the routing rule held by UPF_A235, and / or QoS rule, the QoS flow used for the transmission of the downlink packet, and / or UE_A10 You may choose. In addition, UE_A10, if there is no routing rule that matches the routing information of the downlink packet, and / or QoS rule, the default routing rule, and / or QoS flow used to transmit the downlink packet using the default QoS rule , And/or UPF_A235 may be selected.
 ここで、下りリンクパケットのルーティング情報は、アプリケーションを識別する情報であってもよいし、5タプルであってもよい。より詳細には、下りリンクパケットのルーティング情報は、送信先のIPアドレス、及び/又は送信元のIPアドレス、及び/又はプロトコル番号、送信先のポート番号、及び/又は送信元のポート番号であってもよいし、これらを組合せた情報であってもよい。尚、下りリンクパケットのルーティング情報は、これらに限らない。 Here, the routing information of the downlink packet may be information for identifying an application or may be a 5-tuple. More specifically, the routing information of the downlink packet is a destination IP address and/or a source IP address and/or a protocol number, a destination port number, and/or a source port number. Alternatively, the information may be a combination of these. The routing information of the downlink packet is not limited to this.
 さらに、下りリンクパケットは、ユーザデータ通信において、DN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置からUE_A10に対して送信されるメッセージであってもよく、コアネットワーク内の装置からUE_A10に対して送信されるメッセージであってもよく、これらのユーザデータ通信のメッセージを転送するメッセージであってもよい。従って、下りリンクパケットに識別情報を含めるということは、下りリンクパケットのヘッダに識別情報を含めるということであってもよいし、転送に用いるメッセージを含まない下りリンクパケットのヘッダに識別情報を含めるということであってもよいし、下りリンクパケットの転送に用いるメッセージのヘッダに識別情報を含めるということであってもよいし、下りリンクパケットの転送に用いるメッセージに識別情報を含めるということであってもよい。なお、UPF_A235は、DN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置から受信した下りリンクパケットがない場合、ダミーの下りリンクパケットをUE_A10に送信してもよい。 Further, the downlink packet, in the user data communication, may be a message transmitted to the UE_A10 from the device in the DN_A5, and / or DN_A5, the message transmitted from the device in the core network to UE_A10 Or a message for transferring these user data communication messages. Therefore, including the identification information in the downlink packet may mean including the identification information in the header of the downlink packet, or including the identification information in the header of the downlink packet that does not include the message used for transfer. It may be that the identification information is included in the header of the message used for forwarding the downlink packet, or that the identification information is included in the message used for forwarding the downlink packet. May be. Note that UPF_A235 may transmit a dummy downlink packet to UE_A10 when there is no downlink packet received from DN_A5 and/or a device in DN_A5.
 ここで、UPF_A235は、下りリンクパケットに、第31の識別情報、及び/又は第32の識別情報を含めてもよいし、これらの識別情報を含めることで、ユーザデータ通信に対するRQoSを有効化することを示してもよいし、UE_A10の要求が受諾されたことを示してもよい。 Here, the UPF_A 235 may include the 31st identification information and/or the 32nd identification information in the downlink packet, and by including these identification information, the RQoS for user data communication is enabled. It may indicate that the request of UE_A10 is accepted.
 さらに、UPF_A235は、第31の識別情報、及び/又は第32の識別情報を下りリンクパケットに含めて送信することで、RQoSの有効化の要求が受諾されたことを示してもよいし、RQoSを有効化することを示してもよい。 Furthermore, UPF_A235 may indicate that the request for enabling RQoS has been accepted by transmitting by including the 31st identification information and/or the 32nd identification information in the downlink packet, or RQoS. May be enabled.
 さらに、UPF_A235は、第31の識別情報、及び/又は第32の識別情報を下りリンクパケットに含めて送信することで、特定の下りリンクパケットの送受信で用いられるQoSフローを、第32の識別情報が示すQoSフローに変更することを示してもよい。 Furthermore, UPF_A235, by including the 31st identification information, and / or the 32nd identification information in the downlink packet to transmit, the QoS flow used in the transmission and reception of a specific downlink packet, the 32nd identification information. May be changed to the QoS flow indicated by.
 尚、UPF_A235は、第31の識別情報、第32の識別情報のうち、どの識別情報を下りリンクパケットに入れるかを、受信した識別情報、及び/又は、ネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー等のポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態に基づいて決定してもよい。 Incidentally, UPF_A235, the 31st identification information, of the 32nd identification information, which identification information to put in the downlink packet, received identification information, and/or network capability information, and/or operator policy Etc., and/or may be determined based on the state of the network.
 例えば、UPF_A235は、第31の識別情報、及び/又は第32の識別情報を受信した場合、及び/又は、第41の識別情報、及び/又は第42の識別情報を受信した場合、及び/又は受信した第41の識別情報、及び/又は第42の識別情報が示す要求が受諾できるとSMF_A230が判断した場合、第31の識別情報、及び/又は第32の識別情報を下りリンクパケットに含めて送信してもよい。 For example, UPF_A235, if the 31st identification information, and/or the 32nd identification information is received, and/or the 41st identification information, and/or the 42nd identification information is received, and/or If the SMF_A230 determines that the received request indicated by the 41st identification information and/or the 42nd identification information can be accepted, the 31st identification information and/or the 32nd identification information is included in the downlink packet. You may send it.
 尚、第32の識別情報は、第42の識別情報に基づいて決定されてもよい。言い換えると、第32の識別情報は、第42の識別情報が示すQoSフローと同じQoSフローを識別する情報であってもよいし、第42の識別情報が示すQoSフローとは異なるQoSフローを識別する情報であってもよい。尚、どの識別情報を下りリンクパケットに入れるかのUPF_A235による決定はこれに限らない。 Note that the 32nd identification information may be determined based on the 42nd identification information. In other words, the 32nd identification information may be information identifying the same QoS flow as the QoS flow indicated by the 42nd identification information, or may identify a QoS flow different from the QoS flow indicated by the 42nd identification information. It may be information to be provided. Note that the determination by the UPF_A 235 which identification information should be included in the downlink packet is not limited to this.
 UE_A10は、下りリンクパケットを受信する(S1206)。UE_A10は、下りリンクパケットを受信することで、下りリンクパケットに含まれる各種の識別情報の内容を認識する。 UE_A10 receives the downlink packet (S1206). By receiving the downlink packet, UE_A10 recognizes the contents of various identification information included in the downlink packet.
 UE_A10は、下りリンクパケットの受信に基づいて、さらに、第6の処理を実施する(S1208)。 UE_A10 further executes the sixth processing based on the reception of the downlink packet (S1208).
 ここで、第6の処理は、UE_A10が、UPF_A235によって示された事柄を認識する処理であってよい。さらに、第6の処理は、UE_A10が、受信した識別情報をコンテキストとして記憶する処理であってもよいし、受信した識別情報、及び/又はユーザデータを上位層、及び/又は下位層に転送する処理であってもよい。 Here, the sixth process may be a process in which the UE_A10 recognizes the matter indicated by the UPF_A235. Furthermore, the sixth process may be a process in which the UE_A10 stores the received identification information as a context, and transfers the received identification information and/or user data to an upper layer and/or a lower layer. It may be processing.
 さらに、第6の処理は、UE_A10が、ユーザデータ通信に対するRQoSを有効化する処理であってよい。言い換えると、第6の処理は、UE_A10が、受信した下りリンクパケットを基に、上りリンクパケットのためのQoSルール(Derived QoS Rule)、及び/又はルーティングルールを作成する処理であってもよいし、作成したQoSルール、及び/又はルーティングルールを有効化する処理であってもよい。 Furthermore, the sixth process may be a process in which UE_A10 activates RQoS for user data communication. In other words, the sixth process, UE_A10, based on the received downlink packet, QoS rule for the uplink packet (Derived QoS QoS Rule), and / or may be a process of creating a routing rule. , The created QoS rule and/or the routing rule may be validated.
 より詳細には、第6の処理は、UE_A10が、受信した下りリンクパケットのルーティング情報と対になる上りリンクパケットのルーティング情報に対応づけられたQoSルール、及び/又はルーティングルールを作成してもよいし、作成したQoSルール、及び/又はルーティングルールを有効化してもよい。なお、作成されたQoSルール、及び/又はルーティングルールが示す上りリンクパケットの転送に用いられるQoSフローは、第32の識別情報が示すQoSフローであってもよい。 More specifically, the sixth process, UE_A10, even if the QoS rule associated with the routing information of the uplink packet paired with the routing information of the received downlink packet, and / or create a routing rule The created QoS rule and/or the routing rule may be validated. The QoS flow used for transferring the uplink packet indicated by the created QoS rule and/or the routing rule may be the QoS flow indicated by the 32nd identification information.
 さらに、第6の処理は、UE_A10が、受信した下りリンクパケットのルーティング情報に対応づけられたQoSフロー、及び/又はQoSルール、及び/又はルーティングルールを認識する処理であってもよい。より詳細には、第6の処理は、UE_A10が、受信した下りリンクパケットのルーティング情報が示す下りリンクパケットの転送に用いられるQoSフローは、第32の識別情報が示すQoSフローであることを認識してもよい。 Further, the sixth process may be a process in which the UE_A10 recognizes the QoS flow and/or the QoS rule and/or the routing rule associated with the routing information of the received downlink packet. More specifically, in the sixth process, the UE_A10 recognizes that the QoS flow used to transfer the downlink packet indicated by the routing information of the received downlink packet is the QoS flow indicated by the 32nd identification information. You may.
 さらに、第6の処理は、UE_A10が、RQoSタイマー(Reflective QoS Timer: RQタイマーとも称する)を開始する処理であってもよい。より詳細には、第6の処理は、UE_A10が、ネットワークから受信したタイマー値、及び/又はUE_A10が保持しているタイマー値を設定したRQoSタイマーを開始する処理であってもよい。 Further, the sixth process may be a process in which the UE_A10 starts an RQoS timer (also referred to as a Reflective QoS Timer:RQ timer). More specifically, the sixth process may be a process in which the UE_A10 starts the RQoS timer in which the timer value received from the network and/or the timer value held by the UE_A10 is set.
 尚、RQoSタイマーの開始は、QoSルール、及び/又はルーティングルールの作成、及び/又は有効化に基づいて、行われてもよい。また、受信した下りリンクパケットのルーティング情報と対になる上りリンクパケットのルーティング情報に対応づけられたQoSルール、及び/又はルーティングルールが既に存在する場合、UE_A10は、実行しているRQoSタイマーをリスタートしてもよい。 Note that the RQoS timer may be started based on the creation and/or activation of the QoS rule and/or the routing rule. In addition, if the QoS rule associated with the routing information of the uplink packet paired with the routing information of the received downlink packet and/or the routing rule already exists, UE_A10 resets the running RQoS timer. You may start.
 尚、ネットワークから受信したタイマー値は、登録手続き、及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続きでコアネットワーク内の装置から受信したタイマー値であってよく、例えば、登録手続き、及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続きで受信した第16の識別情報が示すタイマー値であってもよい。尚、ネットワークから受信したタイマー値は、UE_A10が第6の処理の前にネットワークから受信したタイマー値であってよいが、これに限らない。 The timer value received from the network may be the timer value received from the device in the core network in the registration procedure and/or the PDU session establishment procedure, for example, in the registration procedure and/or the PDU session establishment procedure. It may be the timer value indicated by the 16th identification information. The timer value received from the network may be the timer value received by the UE_A10 from the network before the sixth process, but is not limited to this.
 また、UE_A10が保持しているタイマー値は、出荷時に予めUE_A10に設定されたタイマー値であってもよい。尚、UE_A10が保持しているタイマー値は、UE_A10に設定されたタイマー値であってよいが、これに限らない。 Also, the timer value held by UE_A10 may be the timer value preset in UE_A10 at the time of shipment. The timer value held by the UE_A10 may be the timer value set in the UE_A10, but is not limited to this.
 さらに、UE_A10が第41の識別情報、及び/又は第42の識別情報を含む上りリンクパケットを以前に送信していた場合、第6の処理は、UE_A10が、UE主導で制御されるRQoS有効化手続きがネットワークによって受諾されたことを認識する処理であってもよい。尚、第6の処理はこれらの処理に限らなくてもよい。 Furthermore, if UE_A10 has previously transmitted an uplink packet containing the 41st identification information, and/or the 42nd identification information, the sixth process is UE_A10, UE-controlled RQoS activation controlled. It may be a process of recognizing that the procedure has been accepted by the network. The sixth process is not limited to these processes.
 次に、UE_A10は、下りリンクパケットの受信、及び/又は第6の処理の完了に基づいて、UPF_A235に上りリンクパケットを送信してもよい(S1210)。さらに、UPF_A235は、上りリンクパケットを受信すると、DN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置に、受信した上りリンクパケットを転送してもよい(S1210)。この場合、DN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置は、上りリンクパケットを受信する。 Next, the UE_A10 may transmit the uplink packet to the UPF_A235 based on the reception of the downlink packet and/or the completion of the sixth processing (S1210). Further, upon receiving the uplink packet, the UPF_A 235 may transfer the received uplink packet to the DN_A5 and/or the device within the DN_A5 (S1210). In this case, the DN_A5 and/or the device within the DN_A5 receives the uplink packet.
 尚、UE_A10は、上りリンクパケットの送信に、第6の処理で生成したQoSルール、及び/又はルーティングを用いてもよい。さらに、上りリンクパケットは、以前に送信した上りリンクパケット(S1200)と同じメッセージであってもよいし、異なるメッセージであってもよい。 UE_A10 may use the QoS rule generated in the sixth process and/or the routing for transmitting the uplink packet. Furthermore, the uplink packet may be the same message as the previously transmitted uplink packet (S1200) or may be a different message.
 各装置は、下りリンクパケットの送受信(S1206)、及び/又は第6の処理の完了(S1208)、及び/又は上りリンクパケットの送受信(S1210)に基づいて、本手続き中の(A)の手続きを完了する。 Each device, based on the transmission and reception of downlink packets (S1206), and / or completion of the sixth process (S1208), and / or transmission and reception of uplink packets (S1210), the procedure of (A) in this procedure To complete.
 次に、第31の条件判別が偽の場合のステップ、すなわち本手続き中の(B)の手続きの各ステップを説明する。SMF_A230は、第31の条件判別、及び/又は要求通知メッセージの受信に基づいて、UPF_A235にRQoS有効化拒絶メッセージを送信し(S1212)、本手続き中の(B)の手続きを開始する。具体的には、SMF_A230は、N4インタフェースを用いてUPF_A235にRQoS有効化拒絶メッセージを送信する。尚、RQoS有効化拒絶メッセージは、これに限らず、ユーザデータ通信に対するRQoSの有効化の要求が拒絶されたことを示すメッセージであればよい。 Next, the steps when the 31st condition determination is false, that is, each step of the procedure (B) in this procedure will be described. The SMF_A230 transmits the RQoS validation rejection message to the UPF_A235 based on the thirty-first condition determination and/or the reception of the request notification message (S1212), and starts the procedure (B) in this procedure. Specifically, SMF_A230 sends an RQoS validation rejection message to UPF_A235 using the N4 interface. Note that the RQoS activation rejection message is not limited to this, and may be a message indicating that the request to activate RQoS for user data communication has been rejected.
 ここで、SMF_A230は、RQoS有効化拒絶メッセージに、第51の識別情報を含めてもよいし、この識別情報を含めることで、UE_A10の要求を拒絶したことを示してもよい。 Here, the SMF_A230 may include the 51st identification information in the RQoS activation refusal message, or may include the identification information to indicate that the request of the UE_A10 is rejected.
 さらに、SMF_A230は、第51の識別情報をRQoS有効化通知メッセージに含めて送信することで、RQoSの有効化の要求を拒絶したことを示してもよいし、RQoSの有効化の要求を拒絶した理由を示してもよいし、RQoSを有効化することができないことを示してもよい。 Furthermore, the SMF_A230 may indicate that the request for enabling RQoS has been rejected by transmitting the 51st identification information included in the RQoS enabling notification message, or may have rejected the request for enabling RQoS. It may indicate the reason or may indicate that RQoS cannot be activated.
 尚、SMF_A230は、第51の識別情報をRQoS有効化拒絶メッセージに入れるかを、受信した識別情報、及び/又は、ネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー等のポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態に基づいて決定してもよい。 Note that the SMF_A230 determines whether to include the 51st identification information in the RQoS activation rejection message, the received identification information, and/or the network capability information, and/or a policy such as an operator policy, and/or the network status. May be determined based on.
 例えば、SMF_A230は、第41の識別情報、及び/又は第42の識別情報を受信した場合、及び/又は受信した第41の識別情報、及び/又は第42の識別情報が示す要求を受諾できない場合、第51の識別情報をRQoS有効化通知メッセージに含めて送信してもよい。尚、どの識別情報をRQoS有効化拒絶メッセージに入れるかのSMF_A230による決定はこれに限らない。 For example, SMF_A230, when receiving the 41st identification information, and/or the 42nd identification information, and/or when the 41st identification information and/or the received request indicated by the 42nd identification information cannot be accepted. The 51st identification information may be included in the RQoS activation notification message and transmitted. The determination by SMF_A230 which identification information should be included in the RQoS validation rejection message is not limited to this.
 UPF_A235は、RQoS有効化拒絶メッセージを受信する(S1212)。UPF_A235は、RQoS有効化拒絶メッセージを受信することで、RQoS有効化拒絶メッセージに含まれる各種の識別情報の内容を認識する。 UPF_A235 receives the RQoS activation rejection message (S1212). UPF_A235 recognizes the content of various identification information contained in the RQoS validation rejection message by receiving the RQoS validation rejection message.
 さらに、UPF_A235は、DN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置が送信した下りリンクパケットを受信してもよい(S1214)。UPF_A235は、RQoS有効化拒絶メッセージの受信、及び/又はDN_A5からの下りリンクパケットの受信に基づいて、UE_A10に下りリンクパケットを送信する(S1214)。 Further, UPF_A235 may receive the downlink packet transmitted from DN_A5 and/or the device in DN_A5 (S1214). UPF_A235 transmits the downlink packet to UE_A10 based on the reception of the RQoS activation rejection message and/or the reception of the downlink packet from DN_A5 (S1214).
 具体的には、UPF_A235は、N9インタフェース、及び/又はN3インタフェース、及び/又は無線ベアラを用いてUE_A10に下りリンクパケットを送信する。ここで、UPF_A235は、UPF_A235が保持する情報に基づき、ルーティング先のUE_A10を選択してもよい。より詳細には、UPF_A235は、下りリンクパケットのルーティング情報と、UPF_A235が保持するルーティングルール、及び/又はQoSルールとを比較することで、下りリンクパケットの送信に用いるQoSフロー、及び/又はUE_A10を選択してもよい。尚、UE_A10は、下りリンクパケットのルーティング情報に合致するルーティングルール、及び/又はQoSルールがない場合、デフォルトのルーティングルール、及び/又はデフォルトのQoSルールを用いて下りリンクパケットの送信に用いるQoSフロー、及び/又はUPF_A235を選択してもよい。 Specifically, UPF_A235 transmits downlink packets to UE_A10 using N9 interface and/or N3 interface and/or radio bearer. Here, the UPF_A 235 may select the UE_A 10 of the routing destination based on the information held by the UPF_A 235. More specifically, UPF_A235, by comparing the routing information of the downlink packet, the routing rule held by UPF_A235, and / or QoS rule, the QoS flow used for the transmission of the downlink packet, and / or UE_A10 You may choose. In addition, UE_A10, if there is no routing rule that matches the routing information of the downlink packet, and / or QoS rule, the default routing rule, and / or QoS flow used to transmit the downlink packet using the default QoS rule , And/or UPF_A235 may be selected.
 ここで、下りリンクパケットのルーティング情報は、アプリケーションを識別する情報であってもよいし、5タプルであってもよい。より詳細には、下りリンクパケットのルーティング情報は、送信先のIPアドレス、及び/又は送信元のIPアドレス、及び/又はプロトコル番号、送信先のポート番号、及び/又は送信元のポート番号であってもよいし、これらを組合せた情報であってもよい。尚、下りリンクパケットのルーティング情報は、これらに限らない。 Here, the routing information of the downlink packet may be information for identifying an application or may be a 5-tuple. More specifically, the routing information of the downlink packet is a destination IP address and/or a source IP address and/or a protocol number, a destination port number, and/or a source port number. Alternatively, the information may be a combination of these. The routing information of the downlink packet is not limited to this.
 さらに、下りリンクパケットは、ユーザデータ通信において、DN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置からUE_A10に対して送信されるメッセージであってもよく、コアネットワーク内の装置からUE_A10に対して送信されるメッセージであってもよく、これらのユーザデータ通信のメッセージを転送するメッセージであってもよい。従って、下りリンクパケットに識別情報を含めるということは、下りリンクパケットのヘッダに識別情報を含めるということであってもよいし、転送に用いるメッセージを含まない下りリンクパケットのヘッダに識別情報を含めるということであってもよいし、下りリンクパケットの転送に用いるメッセージのヘッダに識別情報を含めるということであってもよいし、下りリンクパケットの転送に用いるメッセージに識別情報を含めるということであってもよい。なお、UPF_A235は、DN_A5、及び/又はDN_A5内の装置から受信した下りリンクパケットがない場合、ダミーの下りリンクパケットをUE_A10に送信してもよい。 Further, the downlink packet, in the user data communication, may be a message transmitted to the UE_A10 from the device in the DN_A5, and / or DN_A5, the message transmitted from the device in the core network to UE_A10 Or a message for transferring these user data communication messages. Therefore, including the identification information in the downlink packet may mean including the identification information in the header of the downlink packet, or including the identification information in the header of the downlink packet that does not include the message used for transfer. It may be that the identification information is included in the header of the message used for forwarding the downlink packet, or that the identification information is included in the message used for forwarding the downlink packet. May be. Note that UPF_A235 may transmit a dummy downlink packet to UE_A10 when there is no downlink packet received from DN_A5 and/or a device in DN_A5.
 ここで、UPF_A235は、下りリンクパケットに、第51の識別情報を含めてもよいし、この識別情報を含めることで、ユーザデータ通信に対するRQoSが有効化されなかったことを示してもよいし、UE_A10の要求が受諾されなかったことを示してもよい。 Here, UPF_A235, the downlink packet may include the 51st identification information, by including this identification information, may indicate that RQoS for user data communication was not enabled, It may indicate that the UE_A10 request was not accepted.
 さらに、UPF_A235は、第51の識別情報をRQoS有効化通知メッセージに含めて送信することで、RQoSの有効化の要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよいし、RQoSの有効化の要求が拒絶された理由を示してもよいし、RQoSを有効化することができないことを示してもよい。 Furthermore, the UPF_A235 may indicate that the request for enabling RQoS has been rejected by including the 51st identification information in the RQoS enabling notification message and transmitting it, or the request for enabling RQoS may be rejected. It may indicate the reason why it was done or indicate that RQoS cannot be activated.
 尚、UPF_A235は、第51の識別情報を下りリンクパケットに入れるかを、受信した識別情報、及び/又は、ネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー等のポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態に基づいて決定してもよい。 The UPF_A235 determines whether to put the 51st identification information in the downlink packet, based on the received identification information and/or network capability information, and/or a policy such as an operator policy, and/or a network state. You may decide.
 例えば、UPF_A235は、第51の識別情報を受信した場合、及び/又は第41の識別情報、及び/又は第42の識別情報を受信した場合、及び/又は受信した第41の識別情報、及び/又は第42の識別情報が示す要求が受諾できないとSMF_A230が判断した場合、第51の識別情報をRQoS有効化通知メッセージに含めて送信してもよい。尚、どの識別情報を下りリンクパケットに入れるかのUPF_A235による決定はこれに限らない。 For example, UPF_A235, if the 51st identification information is received, and/or the 41st identification information, and/or if the 42nd identification information is received, and/or the received 41st identification information, and/or Alternatively, if the SMF_A 230 determines that the request indicated by the 42nd identification information cannot be accepted, the 51st identification information may be included in the RQoS activation notification message and transmitted. Note that the determination by the UPF_A 235 which identification information should be included in the downlink packet is not limited to this.
 UE_A10は、下りリンクパケットを受信する(S1214)。UE_A10は、下りリンクパケットを受信することで、下りリンクパケットに含まれる各種の識別情報の内容を認識する。 UE_A10 receives the downlink packet (S1214). By receiving the downlink packet, UE_A10 recognizes the contents of various identification information included in the downlink packet.
 UE_A10は、下りリンクパケットの受信に基づいて、さらに、第7の処理を実施する(S1216)。 UE_A10 further executes the seventh process based on the reception of the downlink packet (S1216).
 ここで、UE_A10が第41の識別情報、及び/又は第42の識別情報を含む上りリンクパケットを以前に送信した場合、第7の処理は、UE_A10が、UE主導で制御されるRQoS有効化手続きがネットワークによって拒絶されたことを認識する処理であってもよいし、拒絶された理由を認識する処理であってもよい。 Here, UE_A10 is the 41st identification information, and / or if previously transmitted an uplink packet containing the 42nd identification information, the seventh process, UE_A10, UE-controlled RQoS activation procedure controlled May be the process of recognizing that it was rejected by the network, or the process of recognizing the reason why it was rejected.
 言い換えると、第7の処理は、UE_A10が、受信した第51の識別情報に基づいて、UE主導で制御されるRQoS有効化手続きが許可されないことを認識する処理であってもよいし、許可されない理由を認識する処理であってもよい。 In other words, the seventh process, UE_A10 may be a process of recognizing that the UE-led RQoS activation procedure controlled by the UE based on the received 51st identification information is not permitted, and is not permitted. It may be a process of recognizing the reason.
 さらに、第7の処理は、UE_A10が、UE主導で制御されるRQoS有効化手続きの開始を一定期間禁止するためのバックオフタイマーを開始する処理であってもよい。尚、UE主導で制御されるRQoS有効化手続きの開始を一定期間禁止するためのバックオフタイマーの値は、UE_A10に予め設定された値であってもよいし、ネットワークから受信したタイマー値であってもよい。 Further, the seventh process may be a process in which the UE_A10 starts a backoff timer for prohibiting the start of the RQoS activation procedure controlled by the UE for a certain period. The value of the back-off timer for prohibiting the start of the RQoS activation procedure controlled by the UE for a certain period may be a value preset in UE_A10 or a timer value received from the network. May be.
 さらに、第7の処理は、UE_A10が、一定期間後に再び本手続きを開始する処理であってもよいし、確立しているPDUセッションを変更、及び/又は切断するための手続きを開始する処理であってもよいし、UE_A10の要求が限定された状態へ遷移する処理であってもよい。尚、第7の処理はこれらの処理に限らなくてもよい。 Further, the seventh process, UE_A10 may be a process of starting this procedure again after a certain period of time, is a process of starting a procedure for changing and/or disconnecting the established PDU session. It may be present, or may be a process of transitioning to a limited state of the request of UE_A10. The seventh process is not limited to these processes.
 各装置は、下りリンクパケットの送受信(S1214)、及び/又は第7の処理の完了(S1216)に基づいて、本手続き中の(B)の手続きを完了する。 Each device completes the procedure (B) in this procedure based on transmission/reception of downlink packets (S1214) and/or completion of the seventh processing (S1216).
 各装置は、本手続き中の(A)又は(B)の手続きの完了に基づいて、本手続きを完了する。尚、各装置は、本手続き中の(A)の手続きの完了に基づいて、ユーザデータ通信に対するRQoSが有効化された状態に遷移してもよいし、本手続き中の(B)の手続きの完了に基づいて、本手続きが拒絶されたことを認識してもよいし、ユーザデータ通信に対するRQoSが有効化されていない状態に遷移してもよいし、ユーザデータ通信に対するRQoSを適用しない状態を維持してもよい。 Each device completes this procedure based on the completion of procedure (A) or (B) in this procedure. It should be noted that each device may transition to a state in which RQoS for user data communication is enabled based on the completion of the procedure (A) in this procedure, or the procedure in (B) in this procedure. Based on the completion, it may be possible to recognize that this procedure has been rejected, transition to a state in which RQoS for user data communication is not enabled, or a state in which RQoS for user data communication is not applied. May be maintained.
 さらに、各装置は、本手続きの完了に基づいて、本手続きで送受信した識別情報に基づいた処理を実施してもよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、本手続きの完了に基づいて、第6の処理を実施してもよいし、第7の処理を実施してもよい。 Furthermore, each device may perform processing based on the identification information transmitted and received in this procedure based on the completion of this procedure. In other words, UE_A10 may perform the sixth process or the seventh process based on the completion of this procedure.
 さらに、各装置は、本手続きの完了後に、本手続きで有効化した、QoSルール、及び/又はルーティングルールを用いたユーザデータ通信を実施してもよい。さらに、各装置は、本手続きの完了後に、RQoS非活性化手続きを開始してもよい。 Furthermore, after completing this procedure, each device may perform user data communication using the QoS rule and/or the routing rule validated in this procedure. Furthermore, each device may start the RQoS deactivation procedure after completion of this procedure.
 また、第31の条件判別は、上りリンクパケット、及び/又は要求通知メッセージに含まれる識別情報、及び/又は加入者情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシーに基づいて実行されてもよい。例えば、第31の条件判別は、UE_A10の要求をネットワークが許可する場合、真でよい。また、第31の条件判別は、UE_A10の要求をネットワークが許可しない場合、偽でよい。さらに、第31の条件判別は、UE_A10の登録先のネットワーク、及び/又はネットワーク内の装置が、UE_A10が要求する機能を、サポートしている場合は真でよく、サポートしていない場合は偽でよい。尚、第31の条件判別の真偽が決まる条件は前述した条件に限らなくてもよい。 The 31st condition determination may be performed based on the uplink packet and/or the identification information and/or the subscriber information included in the request notification message, and/or the operator policy. For example, the thirty-first condition determination may be true when the network permits the request of UE_A10. The thirty-first condition determination may be false if the network does not permit the request from UE_A10. Further, the 31st condition determination, the network of the UE_A10 registration destination, and / or devices in the network, the function requested by UE_A10 may be true if it supports, false if it does not support. Good. The condition that determines the truth of the 31st condition determination is not limited to the above-described condition.
 [1.3.4.2.ネットワーク主導で制御されるRQoS有効化手続き例]
 図12を用いて、ネットワーク主導で制御されるRQoS有効化手続きを実行する手順の例を説明する。本章では、ネットワーク主導で制御されるRQoS有効化手続きは、本手続きとも称する。尚、本手続きは、ネットワーク主導のUser Planeを介して制御されるRQoS有効化手続きと称してもよい。さらに、ネットワーク主導で制御されるRQoS有効化手続きは、UE主導で制御されるRQoS有効化手続き中の(A)の手続きと同様であるため、ここでは差異がある部分についてのみ説明を行う。
[1.3.4.2. Example of RQoS activation procedure controlled by network initiative]
An example of a procedure for executing the RQoS activation procedure controlled by the initiative of the network will be described with reference to FIG. In this chapter, the network-controlled RQoS activation procedure is also referred to as this procedure. It should be noted that this procedure may be referred to as an RQoS activation procedure controlled via a network-driven User Plane. Further, since the RQoS activation procedure controlled by the network is similar to the procedure (A) in the RQoS activation procedure controlled by the UE, only differences will be described here.
 UE_A10は、下りリンクパケットの受信(S1206)に基づいて、上述の第6の処理(S1208)を実施する。第6の処理において、UE_A10は、さらに、RQoSの適用を拒絶することができる。この場合、UE_A10は、RQoSの適用を拒絶することを示す情報を含む上りリンクパケットをUPF_A235に送信する(S1210)。 UE_A10 performs the above-described sixth process (S1208) based on the reception of the downlink packet (S1206). In the sixth process, the UE_A 10 can further reject the application of RQoS. In this case, UE_A10 transmits an uplink packet including information indicating that application of RQoS is rejected to UPF_A235 (S1210).
 [1.3.5.RQoS非活性化手続きの概要]
 次に、活性化(有効化とも称する)したReflective QoS(RQoS)を非活性化(無効化とも称する)する手順について説明する。RQoSを非活性化する手順としては、UE主導で開始される第1の非活性化手順、ネットワーク主導で開始される第2の非活性化手順がある。これらの手順は、UP(User Plane)を介して制御されるRQoSが有効である間に開始される。言い換えれば、これらの手順は、RQoSタイマーの値が消滅していない間に開始される。
[1.3.5. Overview of RQoS deactivation procedure]
Next, a procedure for deactivating (also referred to as invalidating) activated Reflective QoS (RQoS) will be described. The procedures for deactivating RQoS include a first deactivation procedure initiated by the UE and a second deactivation procedure initiated by the network. These procedures are started while RQoS controlled via UP (User Plane) is valid. In other words, these procedures are started while the value of the RQoS timer has not expired.
 尚、これらの手順は、ネットワーク主導で有効化されたUPを介して制御されるRQoSを無効化するためにも使用可能であるし、UE主導で有効化されたUPを介して制御されるRQoSを無効化するためにも使用可能である。 Note that these procedures can also be used to disable RQoS controlled via UP initiated by the network initiative, and RQoS controlled via UP initiated by the UE initiative. It can also be used to disable.
 [1.3.5.1.第1のRQoS非活性化手続きの概要]
 まず、第1の非活性化手順の場合について、説明する。UE_A10は、コアネットワーク内の装置に対して、送信する上りリンクパケットのヘッダの中に、非活性化したいQoSフローを識別するためのQFI(QoS Flow ID)と、非活性化の要求(deactivation request)を示すRQI(Reflective QoS Indication)を含めて送信する。RQIが1ビットで構成される場合は、0に設定することが好ましいが、1に設定しても良い。また、RQIが複数ビットで構成される場合は、オール0に設定することが好ましいが、これに限らず、例えばオール1に設定しても良い。また、UE_A10は、送信する上りリンクパケットのヘッダの中に、RQIの代わりに、非活性化の要求を示す情報を含めて送信しても良い。尚、複数のQoSフローについて非活性化を要求する場合には、上りリンクパケットのヘッダの中に、QFIとRQIのセット、または、QFIと非活性化の要求を示す情報のセットを、複数個含めて送信することができる。また、全てのQoSフローに対する非活性化を要求する場合には、QFIを含めなくても良い。尚、UE_A10が上りリンクパケットのヘッダの中にQFIやRQI等の情報を入れるということは、UE_A10が上りリンクパケットにQFIやRQI等の情報を含めるということであってもよい。
[1.3.5.1. Outline of the first RQoS deactivation procedure]
First, the case of the first deactivation procedure will be described. UE_A10 is a device in the core network, in the header of the uplink packet to be transmitted, QFI (QoS Flow ID) for identifying the QoS flow to be deactivated, and a deactivation request (deactivation request). ) Indicating RQI (Reflective QoS Indication). When the RQI is composed of 1 bit, it is preferably set to 0, but it may be set to 1. Further, when the RQI is composed of a plurality of bits, it is preferable to set all 0s, but not limited to this, it may be set to all 1, for example. Further, the UE_A10 may include information indicating a deactivation request in the header of the uplink packet to be transmitted, instead of the RQI, and transmit the header. When requesting deactivation for multiple QoS flows, a set of QFI and RQI or a set of information indicating QFI and deactivation request is set in the header of the uplink packet. It can be included and sent. When requesting deactivation for all QoS flows, QFI may not be included. In addition, that UE_A10 includes information such as QFI and RQI in the header of the uplink packet may mean that UE_A10 includes information such as QFI and RQI in the uplink packet.
 コアネットワーク内の装置は、UE_A10から、QFIとRQIの1以上のセット、または、QFIと非活性化の要求を示す情報の1以上のセットを含む上りリンクパケットのヘッダを受信する。ここで、コアネットワーク内の装置は、UE_A10から複数のQoSフローについて非活性化を要求された場合には、全てのQoSフローに対する非活性化の要求を受諾してもよいし、全てのQoSフローに対する非活性化の要求を拒絶してもよいし、一部のQoSフローに対する非活性化の要求を受諾し、残りのQoSフローに対する非活性化の要求を拒絶してもよい。コアネットワーク内の装置は、あるQoSフローに対する非活性化の要求を受諾する場合は、そのQoSフローに対応するQFIと、非活性化の要求を受諾することを示す情報を、下りリンクパケットのヘッダに含めて、UE_A10に対して送信する。また、コアネットワーク内の装置は、あるQoSフローに対する非活性化の要求を拒絶する場合は、そのQoSフローに対応するQFIと、非活性化の要求を拒絶することを示す情報を、下りリンクパケットのヘッダに含めて、UE_A10に対して送信する。尚、これらの情報は、1つの下りリンクパケットのヘッダに含めて送信しても良いし、それぞれ別々の下りリンクパケットのヘッダに含めて送信しても良い。コアネットワーク内の装置は、全てのQoSフローに対する非活性化の要求を受諾または拒絶する場合には、QFIを含めなくても良い。尚、コアネットワーク内の装置が下りリンクパケットのヘッダの中にQFIやRQI等の情報を入れるということは、コアネットワーク内の装置が下りリンクパケットにQFIやRQI等の情報を含めるということであってもよい。 The device in the core network receives, from UE_A10, a header of an uplink packet including one or more sets of QFI and RQI, or one or more sets of QFI and information indicating a deactivation request. Here, the device in the core network may accept the request for deactivation for all the QoS flows when the deactivation is requested from the UE_A10 for the plurality of QoS flows, or all the QoS flows may be accepted. Request may be rejected, or a request for deactivation for some QoS flows may be accepted and a request for deactivation for the remaining QoS flows may be rejected. When the device in the core network accepts the deactivation request for a certain QoS flow, the QFI corresponding to the QoS flow and information indicating that the deactivation request is accepted are included in the downlink packet header. And send to UE_A10. Further, when rejecting a deactivation request for a certain QoS flow, the device in the core network sends the QFI corresponding to the QoS flow and information indicating that the deactivation request is rejected to the downlink packet. Include in the header of and send to UE_A10. Note that these pieces of information may be included in the header of one downlink packet and transmitted, or may be included in the headers of different downlink packets and transmitted. A device in the core network may not include a QFI if it accepts or rejects deactivation requests for all QoS flows. It should be noted that the fact that the device in the core network puts information such as QFI and RQI in the header of the downlink packet means that the device in the core network includes information such as QFI and RQI in the downlink packet. May be.
 UE_A10は、QFIと、非活性化の要求を受諾することを示す情報を含む下りリンクパケットのヘッダを受信すると、RQoSタイマーの値が消滅していなくても、QFIで識別されるQoSフローに対応するRQoSに関する設定を削除する。言い換えると、UE_A10は、QFIと、非活性化の要求を受諾することを示す情報を含む下りリンクパケットのヘッダを受信すると、RQoSタイマーの実行が満了していなくても、QFIで識別されるQoSフローに対応するRQoSに関する設定を削除する。このとき、UE_A10は、そのQoSフローについて、デフォルトQoSを適用する。逆に、UE_A10は、QFIと、非活性化の要求を拒絶することを示す情報を含む下りリンクパケットのヘッダを受信した場合は、UE_A10は、QFIで識別されるQoSフローに対応するRQoSに関する設定を維持する。 When UE_A10 receives the QFI and the header of the downlink packet containing the information indicating acceptance of the deactivation request, UE_A10 supports the QoS flow identified by the QFI even if the value of the RQoS timer has not disappeared. Delete the settings related to RQoS. In other words, UE_A10 receives the QFI and the header of the downlink packet containing the information indicating acceptance of the deactivation request, even if the execution of the RQoS timer has not expired, QoS identified by QFI. Delete the settings related to RQoS corresponding to the flow. At this time, UE_A10 applies default QoS to the QoS flow. On the contrary, UE_A10, QFI, when receiving the header of the downlink packet including information indicating that the request for deactivation is rejected, UE_A10, the setting related to RQoS corresponding to the QoS flow identified by QFI To maintain.
 尚、第1の非活性化手順に対する説明では、各種の情報を全て、ヘッダに含めて送信することを記載したが、これに限らない。例えば、UE_A10は、送信するべき上りリンクのデータがある場合には、上りリンクパケットのヘッダに含めて送信していた各種の情報の少なくとも一部について、上りリンクのデータに含めて送信してもよい。このとき、ネットワーク側は、上りリンクのデータに含められた各種の情報の意味を認識することができる。また、ネットワークは、送信するべき下りリンクのデータがある場合には、下りリンクパケットのヘッダに含めて送信していた各種の情報の少なくとも一部について、下りリンクのデータに含めて送信してもよい。このとき、UE_A10側は、下りリンクのデータに含められた各種の情報の意味を認識することができる。 In addition, in the explanation for the first deactivation procedure, it was described that all the various information is included in the header and transmitted, but it is not limited to this. For example, UE_A10, when there is uplink data to be transmitted, at least part of various information that was included in the header of the uplink packet and transmitted, even if included in the uplink data and transmitted. Good. At this time, the network side can recognize the meaning of various information included in the uplink data. Further, when there is downlink data to be transmitted, the network may include at least a part of various information included in the header of the downlink packet for transmission in the downlink data. Good. At this time, the UE_A10 side can recognize the meaning of various types of information included in the downlink data.
 [1.3.5.2.第2のRQoS非活性化手続きの概要]
 次に、第2の非活性化手順の場合について、説明する。コアネットワーク内の装置は、1以上の全てのQoSフローに対して非活性化してもよいし、一部のQoSフローに対して非活性化してもよいし、一部のQoSフローに対する非活性化して非活性化してもよい。コアネットワーク内の装置は、あるQoSフローに対して非活性化する場合は、そのQoSフローに対応するQFIと、非活性化することを示す情報を、下りリンクパケットのヘッダに含めて、UE_A10に対して送信する。あるQoSフローに対して非活性化する場合は、これらの情報を、1つの下りリンクパケットのヘッダに含めて送信しても良いし、それぞれ別々の下りリンクパケットのヘッダに含めて送信しても良い。コアネットワーク内の装置は、全てのQoSフローに対して非活性化する場合には、QFIを含めなくても良い。尚、コアネットワーク内の装置は、あるQoSフローに対して非活性化しない場合は、何も送信しない。
[1.3.5.2. Overview of the second RQoS deactivation procedure]
Next, the case of the second deactivation procedure will be described. The device in the core network may be inactivated for all one or more QoS flows, may be inactivated for some QoS flows, or may be inactivated for some QoS flows. May be deactivated by When deactivating a certain QoS flow, the device in the core network includes a QFI corresponding to the QoS flow and information indicating deactivation, in the header of the downlink packet, and in UE_A10. To send. When deactivating a certain QoS flow, these pieces of information may be included in the header of one downlink packet and transmitted, or may be included in the headers of different downlink packets and transmitted. good. The device in the core network may not include the QFI when deactivating all the QoS flows. Note that the device in the core network does not transmit anything unless it is deactivated for a certain QoS flow.
 UE_A10は、QFIと、非活性化することを示す情報を含む下りリンクパケットのヘッダを受信すると、RQoSタイマーの値が消滅していなくても、QFIで識別されるQoSフローに対応するRQoSに関する設定を削除する。言い換えると、UE_A10は、QFIと、非活性化することを示す情報を含む下りリンクパケットのヘッダを受信すると、RQoSタイマーの実行が満了していなくても、QFIで識別されるQoSフローに対応するRQoSに関する設定を削除する。このとき、UE_A10は、そのQoSフローについて、デフォルトQoSを適用する。逆に、UE_A10は、QFIと、非活性化することを示す情報を含む下りリンクパケットのヘッダを受信しない場合は、UE_A10は、QFIで識別されるQoSフローに対応するRQoSに関する設定を維持する。 When the UE_A10 receives the QFI and the header of the downlink packet including the information indicating that it is deactivated, the RQoS-related settings corresponding to the QoS flow identified by the QFI even if the value of the RQoS timer has not disappeared. To delete. In other words, UE_A10, when receiving the QFI and the header of the downlink packet containing information indicating deactivation, corresponds to the QoS flow identified by the QFI even if the execution of the RQoS timer has not expired. Delete the settings related to RQoS. At this time, UE_A10 applies default QoS to the QoS flow. On the contrary, when UE_A10 does not receive the QFI and the header of the downlink packet including the information indicating the deactivation, UE_A10 maintains the setting related to the RQoS corresponding to the QoS flow identified by the QFI.
 尚、第2の非活性化手順に対する説明では、各種の情報を全て、ヘッダに含めて送信することを記載したが、これに限らない。例えば、ネットワークは、送信するべき下りリンクのデータがある場合には、下りリンクパケットのヘッダに含めて送信していた各種の情報の少なくとも一部について、下りリンクのデータに含めて送信してもよい。このとき、UE_A10側は、下りリンクのデータに含められた各種の情報の意味を認識することができる。 Note that, in the explanation for the second deactivation procedure, it has been stated that all the various information is included in the header and transmitted, but it is not limited to this. For example, if there is downlink data to be transmitted, the network may include at least a part of various information included in the header of the downlink packet for transmission in the downlink data. Good. At this time, the UE_A10 side can recognize the meaning of various types of information included in the downlink data.
 [2.変形例]
 本発明に関わる装置で動作するプログラムは、本発明に関わる実施形態の機能を実現するように、Central Processing Unit(CPU)等を制御してコンピュータを機能させるプログラムであっても良い。プログラムあるいはプログラムによって取り扱われる情報は、一時的にRandom Access Memory(RAM)等の揮発性メモリあるいはフラッシュメモリ等の不揮発性メモリやHard Disk Drive(HDD)、あるいはその他の記憶装置システムに格納される。
[2. Modified example]
The program that operates in the device related to the present invention may be a program that controls a Central Processing Unit (CPU) or the like to cause a computer to function so as to realize the functions of the embodiments related to the present invention. The program or information handled by the program is temporarily stored in a volatile memory such as a Random Access Memory (RAM) or a non-volatile memory such as a flash memory, a Hard Disk Drive (HDD), or another storage device system.
 尚、本発明に関わる実施形態の機能を実現する為のプログラムをコンピュータが読み取り可能な記録媒体に記録しても良い。この記録媒体に記録されたプログラムをコンピュータシステムに読み込ませ、実行することによって実現しても良い。ここでいう「コンピュータシステム」とは、装置に内蔵されたコンピュータシステムであって、オペレーティングシステムや周辺機器等のハードウェアを含むものとする。また、「コンピュータが読み取り可能な記録媒体」とは、半導体記録媒体、光記録媒体、磁気記録媒体、短時間動的にプログラムを保持する媒体、あるいはコンピュータが読み取り可能なその他の記録媒体であっても良い。 The program for realizing the functions of the embodiments according to the present invention may be recorded in a computer-readable recording medium. It may be realized by causing a computer system to read and execute the program recorded in this recording medium. The “computer system” here is a computer system built in the apparatus and includes an operating system and hardware such as peripheral devices. Further, the “computer-readable recording medium” is a semiconductor recording medium, an optical recording medium, a magnetic recording medium, a medium that dynamically holds a program for a short time, or another computer-readable recording medium. Is also good.
 また、上述した実施形態に用いた装置の各機能ブロック、または諸特徴は、電気回路、たとえば、集積回路あるいは複数の集積回路で実装または実行され得る。本明細書で述べられた機能を実行するように設計された電気回路は、汎用用途プロセッサ、デジタルシグナルプロセッサ(DSP)、特定用途向け集積回路(ASIC)、フィールドプログラマブルゲートアレイ(FPGA)、またはその他のプログラマブル論理デバイス、ディスクリートゲートまたはトランジスタロジック、ディスクリートハードウェア部品、またはこれらを組み合わせたものを含んでよい。汎用用途プロセッサは、マイクロプロセッサでもよいし、従来型のプロセッサ、コントローラ、マイクロコントローラ、またはステートマシンであっても良い。前述した電気回路は、デジタル回路で構成されていてもよいし、アナログ回路で構成されていてもよい。また、半導体技術の進歩により現在の集積回路に代替する集積回路化の技術が出現した場合、本発明の一以上の態様は当該技術による新たな集積回路を用いることも可能である。 Also, each functional block or various features of the device used in the above-described embodiments may be implemented or executed by an electric circuit, for example, an integrated circuit or a plurality of integrated circuits. An electrical circuit designed to perform the functions described herein may be a general purpose processor, digital signal processor (DSP), application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), field programmable gate array (FPGA), or other. Programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or combinations thereof. A general purpose processor may be a microprocessor, conventional processor, controller, microcontroller, or state machine. The electric circuit described above may be formed of a digital circuit or an analog circuit. Further, in the case where an integrated circuit technology that replaces the current integrated circuit has emerged due to the progress of semiconductor technology, one or more aspects of the present invention can use a new integrated circuit according to the technology.
 尚、本願発明は上述の実施形態に限定されるものではない。実施形態では、装置の1例を記載したが、本願発明は、これに限定されるものではなく、屋内外に設置される据え置き型、または非可動型の電子機器、たとえば、AV機器、キッチン機器、掃除・洗濯機器、空調機器、オフィス機器、自動販売機、その他生活機器等の端末装置もしくは通信装置に適用出来る。 Note that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment. Although one example of the device is described in the embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and a stationary or non-movable electronic device installed indoors or outdoors, such as an AV device or a kitchen device. It can be applied to terminal devices or communication devices such as cleaning/laundry equipment, air conditioning equipment, office equipment, vending machines, and other household appliances.
 以上、この発明の実施形態に関して図面を参照して詳述してきたが、具体的な構成はこの実施形態に限られるものではなく、この発明の要旨を逸脱しない範囲の設計変更等も含まれる。また、本発明は、請求項に示した範囲で種々の変更が可能であり、異なる実施形態にそれぞれ開示された技術的手段を適宜組み合わせて得られる実施形態についても本発明の技術的範囲に含まれる。また、上記各実施形態に記載された要素であり、同様の効果を奏する要素同士を置換した構成も含まれる。 The embodiment of the present invention has been described in detail above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to this embodiment, and includes design changes and the like within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention. The present invention can be modified in various ways within the scope of the claims, and embodiments obtained by appropriately combining the technical means disclosed in different embodiments are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Be done. Further, a configuration in which the elements described in each of the above-described embodiments and having the same effect are replaced with each other is also included.

Claims (5)

  1.  UE(User Equipment;端末装置)であって、
     送信部を備え、
     第1のPDU(Protocol Data Unit又はPacket Data Unit)セッション確立要求メッセージは、第1のユーザ識別子及び第1のDNN(Data Network Name)を用いたPDUセッション確立要求メッセージであり、
     前記送信部は、第1のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージに対して、user authentication or authorization failedを示す拒絶理由値を含みEAP(Extensible Authentication Protocol)-failureを示す拒絶理由情報を含まないPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージを受信した場合、第1のユーザ識別子とは異なるユーザ識別子に変更するまで、または端末電源オン/オフ、またはUSIM(Universal Subscriber Identity Module)の抜き差しまで、第1のDNNに対してのユーザ識別子を用いた第2のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信を規制する、
     ことを特徴とするUE。
    UE (User Equipment; terminal device),
    Equipped with a transmitter,
    The first PDU (Protocol Data Unit or Packet Data Unit) session establishment request message is a PDU session establishment request message using the first user identifier and the first DNN (Data Network Name),
    The transmission unit, in response to the first PDU session establishment request message, including a rejection reason value indicating user authentication or authorization failed, EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol)-PDU session establishment rejection message that does not include rejection reason information indicating failure. If the user ID is received, the user ID for the first DNN is changed until the user ID is changed to a user ID different from the first user ID, or the terminal power is turned on/off or the USIM (Universal Subscriber Identity Module) is removed/inserted. Regulate the transmission of the second PDU session establishment request message used,
    UE characterized by that.
  2.  UE(User Equipment;端末装置)であって、
     送信部を備え、
     第1のPDU(Protocol Data Unit又はPacket Data Unit)セッション確立要求メッセージは、第1のユーザ識別子及び第1のDNN(Data Network Name)を用いたPDUセッション確立要求メッセージであり、
     前記送信部は、第1のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージに対して、user authentication or authorization failedを示す拒絶理由値を含みEAP(Extensible Authentication Protocol)-failureを示す拒絶理由情報を含まないPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージを受信した場合、第1のDNNに対してのユーザ識別子を用いた第2のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを規制し、
     前記第2のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを規制している際に、第1のユーザ識別子とは異なるユーザ識別子に変更した場合、第1のDNNに対して、ユーザ識別子を用いた第2のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信を許容する、
     ことを特徴とするUE。
    UE (User Equipment; terminal device),
    Equipped with a transmitter,
    The first PDU (Protocol Data Unit or Packet Data Unit) session establishment request message is a PDU session establishment request message using the first user identifier and the first DNN (Data Network Name),
    The transmission unit, in response to the first PDU session establishment request message, including a rejection reason value indicating user authentication or authorization failed, EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol)-PDU session establishment rejection message that does not include rejection reason information indicating failure. When receiving the, regulates the second PDU session establishment request message using the user identifier for the first DNN,
    When regulating the second PDU session establishment request message, if changed to a user identifier different from the first user identifier, to the first DNN, the second PDU session using the user identifier Allow sending an establishment request message,
    UE characterized by that.
  3.  UE(User Equipment;端末装置)であって、
     送信部を備え、
     第1のPDU(Protocol Data Unit又はPacket Data Unit)セッション確立要求は、第1のユーザ識別子及び第1のDNN(Data Network Name)及び第1のS-NSSAI(Single Network Slice Selection Assistance information)を用いたPDUセッション確立要求であり、
     前記送信部は、第1のPDUセッション確立要求に対して、user authentication or authorization failedを示す拒絶理由値を含みEAP(Extensible Authentication Protocol)-failureを示す拒絶理由情報を含まないPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージを受信した場合、第1のユーザ識別子とは異なるユーザ識別子に変更するまで、または端末電源オン/オフ、またはUSIM(Universal Subscriber Identity Module)の抜き差しまで、第1のDNN及び第1のS-NSSAIに対してのユーザ識別子を用いた第2のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信を規制する、
     ことを特徴とするUE。
    UE (User Equipment),
    Equipped with a transmitter,
    The first PDU (Protocol Data Unit or Packet Data Unit) session establishment request uses the first user identifier and the first DNN (Data Network Name) and the first S-NSSAI (Single Network Slice Selection Assistance information). PDU session establishment request
    The transmission unit, in response to the first PDU session establishment request, a PDU session establishment rejection message that does not include rejection reason information indicating EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol)-failure including a rejection reason value indicating user authentication or authorization failed. If received, until changing to a user identifier different from the first user identifier, or until the terminal power on / off, or the removal and insertion of the USIM (Universal Subscriber Identity Module), to the first DNN and the first S-NSSAI Restricting the transmission of the second PDU session establishment request message using the user identifier for the
    UE characterized by that.
  4.  UE(User Equipment;端末装置)であって、
     送信部を備え、
     第1のPDU(Protocol Data Unit又はPacket Data Unit)セッション確立要求メッセージは、第1のユーザ識別子及び第1のDNN(Data Network Name)及び第1のS-NSSAI(Single Network Slice Selection Assistance information)を用いたPDUセッション確立要求メッセージであり、
     前記送信部は、第1のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージに対して、user authentication or authorization failedを含みEAP(Extensible Authentication Protocol)-failureを示す拒絶理由情報を含まないPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージを示す拒絶理由値を受信した場合、 第1のDNN及び第1のS-NSSAIに対してのユーザ識別子を用いた第2のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを規制し、
     前記第2のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを規制している際に、第1のユーザ識別子とは異なるユーザ識別子に変更した場合、第1のDNN及び第1のS-NSSAIに対してのユーザ識別子を用いた第2のPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信を許容する、
     ことを特徴とするUE。
    UE (User Equipment; terminal device),
    Equipped with a transmitter,
    The first PDU (Protocol Data Unit or Packet Data Unit) session establishment request message, the first user identifier and the first DNN (Data Network Name) and the first S-NSSAI (Single Network Slice Selection Assistance information). The PDU session establishment request message used,
    The transmission unit, with respect to the first PDU session establishment request message, a rejection reason value indicating a PDU session establishment rejection message that does not include rejection reason information indicating user authentication or authorization failed and indicating EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol)-failure. When receiving the, regulates the second PDU session establishment request message using the user identifier for the first DNN and the first S-NSSAI,
    When regulating the second PDU session establishment request message, if changed to a user identifier different from the first user identifier, the user identifier for the first DNN and the first S-NSSAI. Allows the transmission of the second PDU session establishment request message used,
    UE characterized by that.
  5.  SMF(Session Management Function)であって、
     PDU(Protocol Data Unit又はPacket Data Unit)セッション確立要求に含まれるユーザ識別子がローカルポリシーに準拠していない場合、EAP(Extensible Authentication Protocol)を用いたPDUセッション確立認証承認手続きを実行せず、user authentication or authorization failedを示す拒絶の理由値を含めてPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージをUE(User Equipment;端末装置)に送信する送信部を有することを特徴とするSMF。
    SMF (Session Management Function)
    If the user identifier included in the PDU (Protocol Data Unit or Packet Data Unit) session establishment request does not comply with the local policy, the PDU session establishment authentication authorization procedure using EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) is not executed and user authentication is performed. An SMF having a transmission unit for transmitting a PDU session establishment refusal message to a UE (User Equipment; terminal device) including a rejection reason value indicating or authorization failed.
PCT/JP2020/000312 2019-01-10 2020-01-08 Ue and smf WO2020145305A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2019-002868 2019-01-10
JP2019002868A JP2020113883A (en) 2019-01-10 2019-01-10 Terminal device, device in core network, device in data network, and communication control method

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020145305A1 true WO2020145305A1 (en) 2020-07-16

Family

ID=71520532

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2020/000312 WO2020145305A1 (en) 2019-01-10 2020-01-08 Ue and smf

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JP2020113883A (en)
WO (1) WO2020145305A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114430332A (en) * 2020-10-29 2022-05-03 瞻博网络公司 Customer premises equipment
WO2023174150A1 (en) * 2022-03-17 2023-09-21 华为技术有限公司 Access control method and apparatus

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2014027550A (en) * 2012-07-27 2014-02-06 Ntt Docomo Inc Mobile communication system, mobile station, network device, and mobile communication method

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2014027550A (en) * 2012-07-27 2014-02-06 Ntt Docomo Inc Mobile communication system, mobile station, network device, and mobile communication method

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
ANONYMOUS: "3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Core Network and Terminals; Non-Access-Stratum (NAS) protocol for 5G System (5GS); Stage 3 (Release 15)", 3GPP STANDARD; TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION; 3GPP TS 24.501, 31 January 2019 (2019-01-31), pages 1 - 455, XP051591608 *

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114430332A (en) * 2020-10-29 2022-05-03 瞻博网络公司 Customer premises equipment
WO2023174150A1 (en) * 2022-03-17 2023-09-21 华为技术有限公司 Access control method and apparatus

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2020113883A (en) 2020-07-27

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6854712B2 (en) UE and UE communication control method
JP6698587B2 (en) UE and UE communication control method
JP7045808B2 (en) UE and UE communication control method
WO2018207837A1 (en) User device
RU2770651C2 (en) User equipment, method for controlling communication for user equipment, core network device, method for controlling communication for core network device, smf, method for controlling communication for smf, upf, and method for controlling communication for upf
WO2019098392A1 (en) Ue and communication control method for ue
JP6884731B2 (en) UE communication control method
JP2020061609A (en) Ue, control arrangement, and communication control method
JP7402004B2 (en) UE and core network equipment
WO2020145305A1 (en) Ue and smf
WO2020100637A1 (en) Ue and smf
JP6884730B2 (en) UE communication control method
JP6698618B2 (en) UE and UE communication control method
JP2023002850A (en) User device and communication control method
WO2021029381A1 (en) Ue and communication control method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20738549

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20738549

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1